Add files from ibiblio as of 2025-03-07 21:39:04HEADmain

1 files changed, 18642 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/42841-0.txt b/42841-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..49381ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/42841-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18642 @@
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 42841 ***
+
+  ORIGINAL NARRATIVES
+  OF EARLY AMERICAN HISTORY
+
+  REPRODUCED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF THE
+  AMERICAN HISTORICAL ASSOCIATION
+
+  GENERAL EDITOR, J. FRANKLIN JAMESON, PH.D., LL.D., LITT.D.
+
+  DIRECTOR OF THE DEPARTMENT OF HISTORICAL RESEARCH IN THE
+  CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
+
+  NARRATIVES OF EARLY VIRGINIA
+  BRADFORD'S HISTORY OF PLYMOUTH PLANTATION
+  WINTHROP'S JOURNAL "HISTORY OF NEW ENGLAND" (2 vols.)
+  NARRATIVES OF EARLY CAROLINA
+  NARRATIVES OF EARLY MARYLAND
+  NARRATIVES OF EARLY PENNSYLVANIA, WEST NEW JERSEY, AND DELAWARE
+  NARRATIVES OF NEW NETHERLAND
+  EARLY ENGLISH AND FRENCH VOYAGES
+  VOYAGES OF SAMUEL DE CHAMPLAIN
+  SPANISH EXPLORERS IN THE SOUTHERN UNITED STATES
+  SPANISH EXPLORATION IN THE SOUTHWEST
+  NARRATIVES OF THE INSURRECTIONS
+  NARRATIVES OF THE INDIAN WARS
+  JOHNSON'S WONDER-WORKING PROVIDENCE
+  THE JOURNAL OF JASPAR DANCKAERTS
+  NARRATIVES OF THE NORTHWEST
+  NARRATIVES OF THE WITCHCRAFT CASES
+  THE NORTHMEN, COLUMBUS, AND CABOT
+
+
+
+
+  _ORIGINAL NARRATIVES
+  OF EARLY AMERICAN HISTORY_
+
+  SPANISH EXPLORERS
+  IN THE
+  SOUTHERN UNITED STATES
+  1528-1543
+
+  THE NARRATIVE OF ALVAR NUÑEZ
+  CABEÇA DE VACA
+
+  EDITED BY
+  FREDERICK W. HODGE
+  OF THE BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
+
+  THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF
+  HERNANDO DE SOTO
+  BY THE GENTLEMAN OF ELVAS
+
+  EDITED BY
+  THEODORE H. LEWIS
+  HONORARY MEMBER OF THE MISSISSIPPI HISTORICAL SOCIETY
+
+  THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF
+  CORONADO, BY PEDRO DE CASTAÑEDA
+
+  EDITED BY
+  FREDERICK W. HODGE
+
+  _New York_
+  BARNES & NOBLE, INC.
+
+
+  COPYRIGHT, 1907
+  BY CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS
+  ALL RIGHTS ASSIGNED TO BARNES & NOBLE, INC., 1946
+
+  _All rights reserved_
+
+  REPRINTED, 1965
+
+  PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
+
+
+
+
+NOTE
+
+
+Although, in the narrative of the Gentleman of Elvas, the translation
+by Buckingham Smith has been followed, some corrections have been
+made in the text, and pains have been taken to set right, in
+accordance with the Portuguese original at the Lenox Library, the
+native proper names, on whose interpretation in the Indian languages
+the identification of localities in many cases depends. If variations
+from page to page in the spelling of some such names are observed by
+the reader, they may be assumed to exist in the original.
+
+The three narratives printed in this book are but a small selection
+from among many scores; for the narratives of Spanish explorers in
+the southern United States constitute an extensive literature. But if
+interest and historical importance are both taken into account, it is
+believed that these three hold an undisputed preëminence among such
+"relations."
+
+  J. F. J.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+THE NARRATIVE OF ALVAR NUÑEZ CABEÇA DE VACA
+
+EDITED BY FREDERICK W. HODGE
+
+
+                                                                  PAGE
+
+  THE NARRATIVE OF ALVAR NUÑEZ CABEÇA DE VACA                        1
+
+  INTRODUCTION                                                       3
+
+  Proem                                                             12
+
+  Chapter 1. In which is told when the Armada sailed, and of the
+               Officers and Persons who went in it                  14
+
+  Chapter 2. The Coming of the Governor to the Port of Xagua and
+               with a Pilot                                         18
+
+  Chapter 3. Our Arrival in Florida                                 19
+
+  Chapter 4. Our Entrance into the Country                          20
+
+  Chapter 5. The Governor leaves the Ships                          24
+
+  Chapter 6. Our Arrival at Apalache                                28
+
+  Chapter 7. The Character of the Country                           29
+
+  Chapter 8. We go from Aute                                        33
+
+  Chapter 9. We leave the Bay of Horses                             37
+
+  Chapter 10. The Assault from the Indians                          40
+
+  Chapter 11. Of what befell Lope de Oviedo with the Indians        44
+
+  Chapter 12. The Indians bring us Food                             45
+
+  Chapter 13. We hear of other Christians                           48
+
+  Chapter 14. The Departure of four Christians                      49
+
+  Chapter 15. What befell us among the People of Malhado            52
+
+  Chapter 16. The Christians leave the Island of Malhado            55
+
+  Chapter 17. The Coming of Indians with André's Dorantes,
+                Castillo, and Estevanico                            59
+
+  Chapter 18. The Story Figueroa recounted from Esquivel            63
+
+  Extract from the Letter of the Survivors                          68
+
+  Chapter 19. Our Separation by the Indians                         70
+
+  Chapter 20. Of our Escape                                         72
+
+  Chapter 21. Our Cure of some of the Afflicted                     74
+
+  Chapter 22. The Coming of other Sick to us the next Day           76
+
+  Chapter 23. Of our Departure after having eaten the Dogs          82
+
+  Chapter 24. Customs of the Indians of that Country                83
+
+  Chapter 25. Vigilance of the Indians in War                       85
+
+  Chapter 26. Of the Nations and Tongues                            86
+
+  Chapter 27. We moved away and were well received                  88
+
+  Chapter 28. Of another strange Custom                             91
+
+  Chapter 29. The Indians plunder each other                        94
+
+  Chapter 30. The Fashion of receiving us changes                   99
+
+  Chapter 31. Of our taking the Way to the Maize                   105
+
+  Chapter 32. The Indians give us the Hearts of Deer               108
+
+  Chapter 33. We see Traces of Christians                          112
+
+  Chapter 34. Of sending for the Christians                        113
+
+  Chapter 35. The Chief Alcalde receives us kindly the Night we
+                arrive                                             116
+
+  Chapter 36. Of building Churches in that Land                    119
+
+  Chapter 37. Of what occurred when I wished to return             121
+
+  Chapter 38. Of what became of the Others who went to Indias      123
+
+
+           THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF HERNANDO
+                DE SOTO, BY THE GENTLEMAN OF ELVAS
+
+                  EDITED BY THEODORE H. LEWIS
+
+  THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF HERNANDO DE SOTO, BY
+  THE GENTLEMAN OF ELVAS                                           127
+
+  INTRODUCTION                                                     129
+
+  Epigram of Silveira                                              133
+
+  Prefatory Note by the Printer                                    134
+
+  Chapter 1. Who Soto was, and how he came to get the Government
+               of Florida                                          135
+
+  Chapter 2. How Cabeça de Vaca arrived at Court, and gave
+               Account of the Country of Florida; and of the
+               Persons who assembled at Seville to accompany
+               Don Hernando de Soto                                136
+
+  Chapter 3. How the Portuguese went to Seville, and thence to
+               Sanlúcar; and how the Captains were appointed
+               over the Ships, and the People distributed among
+               them                                                138
+
+  Chapter 4. How the Adelantado with his People left Spain
+               going to the Canary Islands, and afterward
+               arrived in the Antillas                             139
+
+  Chapter 5. Of the Inhabitants there are in the City of
+               Santiago and other Towns of the Island, the
+               Character of the Soil, and of the Fruit             140
+
+  Chapter 6. How the Governor sent Doña Ysabel with the Ships
+               from Santiago to Havana, while he with some of
+               the Men went thither by land                        142
+
+  Chapter 7. How we left Havana and came to Florida, and what
+               other Matters took place                            145
+
+  Chapter 8. Of some Inroads that were made, and how a Christian
+               was found who had been a long time in the
+               possession of a Cacique                             148
+
+  Chapter 9. How the Christian came to the Land of Florida, who
+               he was, and of what passed at his Interview with
+               the Governor                                        149
+
+  Chapter 10. How the Governor, having sent the Ships to Cuba,
+                marched Inland, leaving one hundred Men at the
+                Port                                               153
+
+  Chapter 11. How the Governor arrived at Caliquen, and thence,
+                taking the Cacique with him, came to Napetaca,
+                where the Indians, attempting to rescue him,
+                had many of their Number killed and captured       156
+
+  Chapter 12. How the Governor arrived at Palache, and was
+                informed that there was much Gold inland           160
+
+  Chapter 13. How the Governor went from Apalache in quest of
+                Yupaha, and what befell him                        164
+
+  Chapter 14. How the Governor left the Province of Patofa,
+                marching into a Desert Country, where he, with
+                his People, became exposed to great Peril, and
+                underwent severe Privation                         169
+
+  Chapter 15. How the Governor went from Cutifachiqui in quest
+                of Coça, and what occurred to him on the Journey   175
+
+  Chapter 16. How the Governor left Chiaha, and, having run a
+                Hazard of falling by the Hands of the Indians
+                at Acoste, escaped by his Address: what occurred
+                to him on the Route, and how he came to Coça       181
+
+  Chapter 17. Of how the Governor went from Coça to Tascaluça      185
+
+  Chapter 18. How the Indians rose upon the Governor, and what
+                followed upon that Rising                          190
+
+  Chapter 19. How the Governor set his Men in order of Battle, and
+                entered the town of Mauilla                        192
+
+  Chapter 20. How the Governor set out from Mauilla to go to
+                Chicaça, and what befell him                       194
+
+  Chapter 21. How the Indians returned to attack the Christians,
+                and how the Governor went to Alimamu, and they
+                tarried to give him Battle in the Way              199
+
+  Chapter 22. How the Governor went from Quizquiz, and thence to
+                the River Grande                                   201
+
+  Chapter 23. How the Governor went from Aquixo to Casqui, and
+                thence to Pacaha; and how this Country differs
+                from the other                                     205
+
+  Chapter 24. How the Cacique of Pacaha came in Peace, and he of
+                Casqui, having absented himself, returned to
+                excuse his Conduct; and how the Governor made
+                Friendship between the Chiefs                      209
+
+  Chapter 25. How the Governor went from Pacaha to Aquiguate and
+                to Coligoa, and came to Cayas                      213
+
+  Chapter 26. How the Governor went to visit the Province of
+                Tulla, and what happened to him                    217
+
+  Chapter 27. How the Governor went from Tulla to Autiamque,
+                where he passed the Winter                         221
+
+  Chapter 28. How the Governor went from Autiamque to Nilco, and
+                thence to Guachoya                                 224
+
+  Chapter 29. The Message sent to Quigaltam, and the Answer
+                brought back to the Governor, and what occurred
+                the while                                          228
+
+  Chapter 30. The Death of the Adelantado, Don Hernando de Soto,
+                and how Luys Moscoso de Alvarado was chosen
+                Governor                                           232
+
+  Chapter 31. How the Governor Luys de Moscoso left Guachoya and
+                went to Chaguete, and thence to Aguacay            235
+
+  Chapter 32. How the Governor went from Aguacay to Naguatex,
+                and what happened to him                           238
+
+  Chapter 33. How the Cacique of Naguatex came to visit the
+                Governor, and how the Governor went thence, and
+                arrived at Nondacao                                240
+
+  Chapter 34. How the Governor marched from Nondacao to
+                Soacatino and Guasco, passing through a
+                Wilderness, whence, for want of a Guide and
+                Interpreter, he retired to Nilco                   243
+
+  Chapter 35. How the Christians returned to Nilco, and thence
+                went to Minoya, where they prepared to build
+                Vessels in which to leave Florida                  246
+
+  Chapter 36. How Seven Brigantines were built, and the
+                Christians took their Departure from Aminoya       250
+
+  Chapter 37. How the Christians, on their Voyage, were attacked
+                in the River, by the Indians of Quigualtam, and
+                what happened                                      254
+
+  Chapter 38. How the Christians were Pursued by the Indians       257
+
+  Chapter 39. How the Christians came to the Sea, what occurred
+                then, and what befell them on the Voyage           259
+
+  Chapter 40. How the Brigantines lost Sight of each other in a
+                Storm, and afterwards came together at a Kay       262
+
+  Chapter 41. How the Christians arrived at the River Panico       264
+
+  Chapter 42. How the Christians came to Panico, and of their
+                Reception by the Inhabitants                       266
+
+  Chapter 43. The Favor the People found in the Viceroy and
+                Residents of Mexico                                268
+
+  Chapter 44. Which sets forth some of the Diversities and
+                Peculiarities of Florida; and the Fruit, Birds,
+                and Beasts of the Country                          270
+
+
+            THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF CORONADO,
+                      BY PEDRO DE CASTAÑEDA
+
+                    EDITED BY FREDERICK W. HODGE
+
+  THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF CORONADO, BY PEDRO DE
+  CASTAÑEDA                                                        273
+
+  INTRODUCTION                                                     275
+
+  Preface                                                          281
+
+                             FIRST PART
+
+  Chapter 1. Which treats of the Way we first came to know about
+               the Seven Cities, and of how Nuño de Guzman made
+               an Expedition to discover them                      285
+
+  Chapter 2. Of how Francisco Vazquez Coronado came to be
+               Governor, and the second Account which Cabeza
+               de Vaca gave                                        287
+
+  Chapter 3. Of how they killed the Negro Estevan at Cibola, and
+               Friar Marcos returned in Flight                     289
+
+  Chapter 4. Of how the noble Don Antonio de Mendoza made an
+               Expedition to discover Cibola                       290
+
+  Chapter 5. Concerning the Captains who went to Cibola            292
+
+  Chapter 6. Of how all the Companies collected in Compostela and
+               set off on the Journey in good Order                293
+
+  Chapter 7. Of how the Army reached Chiametla, and the Killing
+               of the Army-Master, and the other things that
+               happened up to the Arrival at Culiacan              295
+
+  Chapter 8. Of how the Army entered the Town of Culiacan and
+               the Reception it received, and other things
+               which happened before the Departure                 297
+
+  Chapter 9. Of how the Army started from Culiacan and the
+               Arrival of the General at Cibola, and of the
+               Army at Señora and of other things that happened    298
+
+  Chapter 10. Of how the Army started from the Town of Señora,
+                leaving it inhabited, and how it reached Cibola,
+                and of what happened to Captain Melchior Diaz on
+                his Expedition in Search of the Ships and how he
+                discovered the Tison (Firebrand) River             302
+
+  Chapter 11. Of how Don Pedro de Tovar discovered Tusayan or
+                Tutahaco and Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas saw
+                the Firebrand River, and the other things that
+                had happened                                       306
+
+  Chapter 12. Of how people came from Cicuye to Cibola to see
+                the Christians, and how Hernando de Alvarado went
+                to see the Cows                                    310
+
+  Chapter 13. Of how the General went toward Tutahaco with a few
+                Men and left the Army with Don Tristan, who took
+                it to Tiguex                                       313
+
+  Chapter 14. Of how the Army went from Cibola to Tiguex and
+                what happened to them on the way, on account of
+                the Snow                                           315
+
+  Chapter 15. Of why Tiguex revolted, and how they were
+                punished, without being to Blame for it            317
+
+  Chapter 16. Of how they besieged Tiguex and took it and of
+                what happened during the Siege                     320
+
+  Chapter 17. Of how Messengers reached the Army from the Valley
+                of Señora, and how Captain Melchior Diaz died on
+                the Expedition to the Firebrand River              324
+
+  Chapter 18. Of how the General managed to leave the Country in
+                Peace so as to go in Search of Quivira, where the
+                Turk said there was the most Wealth                327
+
+  Chapter 19. Of how they started in Search of Quivira and of
+                what happened on the Way                           329
+
+  Chapter 20. Of how great Stones fell in the Camp, and how they
+                discovered another Ravine, where the Army was
+                divided into two Parts                             333
+
+  Chapter 21. Of how the Army returned to Tiguex and the General
+                reached Quivira                                    335
+
+  Chapter 22. Of how the General returned from Quivira and of
+                other Expeditions toward the North                 339
+
+                              SECOND PART
+
+        WHICH TREATS OF THE HIGH VILLAGES AND PROVINCES AND OF
+          THEIR HABITS AND CUSTOMS, AS COLLECTED BY PEDRO DE
+          CASTAÑEDA, NATIVE OF THE CITY OF NAJARA
+
+  Chapter 1. Of the Province of Culiacan and of its Habits and
+               Customs                                             344
+
+  Chapter 2. Of the Province of Petlatlan and all the Inhabited
+               Country as far as Chichilticalli                    346
+
+  Chapter 3. Of Chichilticalli and the Desert, of Cibola, its
+               Customs and Habits, and of other things             349
+
+  Chapter 4. Of how they live at Tiguex, and of the Province of
+               Tiguex and its Neighborhood                         352
+
+  Chapter 5. Of Cicuye and the Villages in its Neighborhood, and
+               of how some People came to conquer this Country     355
+
+  Chapter 6. Which gives the Number of Villages which were seen
+               in the Country of the Terraced Houses, and their
+               Population                                          358
+
+  Chapter 7. Which treats of the Plains that were crossed, of
+               the Cows, and of the People who inhabit them        361
+
+  Chapter 8. Of Quivira, of where it is and some Information
+               about it                                            364
+
+                          THIRD PART
+
+  WHICH DESCRIBES WHAT HAPPENED TO FRANCISCO VAZQUEZ
+    CORONADO DURING THE WINTER, AND HOW HE GAVE UP THE
+    EXPEDITION AND RETURNED TO NEW SPAIN
+
+
+  Chapter 1. Of how Don Pedro de Tovar came from Señora with
+               some Men, and Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas
+               started back to New Spain                           366
+
+  Chapter 2. Of the General's Fall, and of how the Return to
+               New Spain was ordered                               368
+
+  Chapter 3. Of the Rebellion at Suya and the Reasons the
+               Settlers gave for it                                370
+
+  Chapter 4. Of how Friar Juan de Padilla and Friar Luis
+               remained in the Country and the Army prepared
+               to return to Mexico                                 372
+
+  Chapter 5. Of how the Army left the Settlements and marched
+               to Culiacan, and of what happened on the Way        375
+
+  Chapter 6. Of how the General started from Culiacan to give the
+               Viceroy an Account of the Army with which he had
+               been intrusted                                      377
+
+  Chapter 7. Of the Adventures of Captain Juan Gallego while he
+               was bringing Reënforcements through the Revolted
+               Country                                             379
+
+  Chapter 8. Which describes some remarkable things that were
+               seen on the Plains, with a Description of the
+               Bulls                                               381
+
+  Chapter 9. Which treats of the Direction which the Army took,
+               and of how another more direct Way might be found,
+               if anyone was to return to that Country             384
+
+
+
+
+SPANISH EXPLORERS IN THE SOUTHERN UNITED STATES
+
+
+
+
+THE NARRATIVE OF ALVAR NUÑEZ CABEZA DE VACA
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+
+In some respects the journey of Alvar Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca and his
+three companions overland from coast to coast during the eight years
+from 1528 to 1536 is the most remarkable in the record of American
+exploration, and as a narrative of suffering and privation the
+relation here presented perhaps has no equal in the annals of the
+northern continent.
+
+The author of the narrative was a native of Jeréz de la Frontera,
+in the province of Cadiz, in southern Spain, but the date of his
+birth is not known. His father was Francisco de Vera, son of Pedro
+de Vera, conqueror of the Grand Canary in 1483; his mother, Teresa
+Cabeza de Vaca, who also was born in Jeréz. Why Alvar Nuñez assumed
+the matronymic is not known, unless it was with a sense of pride that
+he desired to perpetuate the name that had been bestowed by the King
+of Navarre on his maternal ancestor, a shepherd named Martin Alhaja,
+for guiding the army through a pass that he marked with the skull
+of a cow (_cabeza de vaca_, literally "cow's head"), thus leading
+the Spanish army to success in the battle of Las Navas de Tolosa, in
+July, 1212, which led up to the final conquest of the Moors in Spain.
+
+Having returned to Spain after many years of service in the New World
+for the Crown, Pámfilo de Narvaez petitioned for a grant; and in
+consequence the right to conquer and colonize the country between the
+Rio de las Palmas, in eastern Mexico, and Florida was accorded him.
+The expedition, consisting of six hundred colonists and soldiers,
+set sail in five vessels from San Lucar de Barrameda, June 17, 1527,
+and after various vicissitudes, including the wreck of two ships and
+the loss of sixty men in a hurricane on the southern coast of Cuba,
+was finally driven northward by storm, and landed, in April, 1528,
+at St. Clements Point, near the entrance to Tampa Bay, on the west
+coast of Florida. Despite the protest of Cabeza de Vaca, who had been
+appointed treasurer of Rio de las Palmas by the King, Narvaez ordered
+his ships to skirt the coast in an endeavor to find Pánuco, while
+the expedition, now reduced to three hundred men by desertions in
+Santo Domingo, death in the Cuban storm, and the return of those in
+charge of the ships, started inland in a generally northern course.
+The fleet searched for the expedition for a year and then sailed to
+Mexico.
+
+Among the members of the force, in addition to Alvar Nuñez Cabeza de
+Vaca, were Andrés Dorantes de Carrança, son of Pablo, a native of
+Béjar del Castañar, in Estremadura, who had received a commission as
+captain of infantry on the recommendation of Don Alvaro de Zúñiga,
+Duke of Béjar; Captain Alonzo del Castillo Maldonado, of Salamanca,
+the son of Doctor Castillo and Aldonza Maldonado; and Estévan, or
+Estévanico, a blackamoor of Asemmur, or Azamor, on the west coast
+of Morocco, the slave of Dorantes. With the exception of those who
+returned with the ships, these four men were the only ones of the
+entire expedition who ever again entered a civilized community.
+
+Pursuing a generally northerly course, harassed by Indians, and beset
+with hunger, illness, and treachery in their ranks, Narvaez's party
+finally reached the head of Appalachee Bay, in the country of the
+Indians after whom this arm of the Gulf of Mexico takes its name.
+Looking now to the sea as his only means of escape; Narvaez the
+incompetent, with neither the proper materials nor the mechanics,
+set about to build boats to conduct his men out of their trap--craft
+that were expected to weather such tropical storms as they had
+already so poorly buffeted with their stouter ships. Every object
+of metal that the expedition afforded, even to stirrups and spurs,
+was requisitioned for the manufacture of nails and necessary tools;
+a rude forge was constructed, with bellows of wood and deer-skins;
+the native palm supplied tow and covering; the horses were killed
+and their hides used for water-bottles, while their flesh served the
+Spaniards for food as the work went on; even the shirts from the very
+backs of the men were fashioned into sails. Picturing the character
+of the five boats, laden almost to the gunwales with nearly fifty men
+each, besides such provisions as could be stowed away, and the untold
+hardship from thirst after the decay of the horse-hide canteens, the
+chief wonder is that the motley fleet survived long enough to reach
+Pensacola Bay. As it passed the mouth of the Mississippi, the current
+was so swift that fresh water was dipped from the gulf, and the wind
+so strong that the boats were carried beyond sight of land for three
+days, and for a time lost sight of each other. For four days more,
+two of the boats, including that in which was Cabeza de Vaca, drifted
+within view of each other; but another storm arose, again they were
+lost to sight, and one by one the occupants succumbed to exhaustion
+and cast themselves into the bottom of the boat, until Cabeza de Vaca
+alone was left to steer the flimsy craft in its unknown course. Night
+came on and the author of our narrative lay down to rest. The next
+morning, November 6, 1528, the boat was cast ashore on a long narrow
+island, inhabited by savages, on the Texas coast.
+
+On this "Island of Misfortune" Cabeza de Vaca's party was soon
+joined by that of one of the other boats, including Dorantes, so
+that altogether the island harbored about eighty Spaniards. Four men
+later attempted to reach Pánuco, but all perished but one. During
+the following winter disease raged among the little colony, reducing
+it to fifteen. Then the Spaniards became separated, Dorantes and his
+slave Estévan, now both the slaves of the Indians, were taken to
+the mainland, whither Cabeza de Vaca, weary of root-digging on the
+island shore, also escaped, becoming a trader among the Indians,
+journeying far inland and along the coast from tribe to tribe, for
+forty or fifty leagues. Every year during the five years that he
+plied his trade as a dealer in shells, sea-beads, medicine-beans,
+skins, ochre, and the like, he returned to Malhado, where Lope de
+Oviedo, and Alvarez, a sick companion, still remained. Finally the
+latter died, and Cabeza de Vaca and Oviedo again sought the main in
+the hope of reaching Christian people. Journeying southward along the
+coast, they crossed the Brazos and other rivers, and finally reached
+San Antonio Bay. Here Oviedo, owing to ill-treatment by the Indians,
+deserted Cabeza de Vaca, who shortly after also stole away from the
+savages and joined Dorantes, Castillo Maldonado, and the Moor (the
+sole survivors of the party of twelve who had left Malhado years
+before), whose Indian masters had come down the river, evidently the
+San Antonio, to gather walnuts.
+
+Once more together, the Christians planned to escape six months
+hence, when all the Indians from the surrounding country gathered on
+the southern Texas plains to eat prickly pears. But again were they
+doomed to disappointment, for although the savages assembled in the
+tuna fields, a quarrel arose among them (there was "a woman in the
+case"), which caused the Spaniards to be separated for another year.
+Their escape was finally accomplished in the manner they had planned;
+but their departure for the Christian land was not at once effected,
+by reason of the inhospitable character of the country, which
+compelled them to sojourn among other Indians until the beginning of
+another prickly-pear season.
+
+While among the Avavares, with whom the Spaniards lived for eight
+months, they resumed the treatment of the sick, a practice that had
+first been forced on them, by the natives of Malhado Island, under
+threat of starvation. With such success did the Spaniards, and
+especially Cabeza de Vaca, meet, that their reputation as healers
+was sounded far and wide among the tribes, thousands of the natives
+following them from place to place and showering gifts upon them.
+
+There are few Spanish narratives that are more unsatisfactory to
+deal with by reason of the lack of directions, distances, and other
+details, than that of Cabeza de Vaca; consequently there are scarcely
+two students of the route who agree. His line of travel through
+Texas was twice crossed by later explorers,--in 1541 by the army of
+Francisco Vazquez Coronado, on the eastern edge of the Stake Plains,
+and again in 1582 by Antonio de Espejo, on the Rio Grande below the
+present El Paso. These data, with the clews afforded by the narrative
+itself, point strongly to a course from the tuna fields, about
+thirty leagues inland from San Antonio Bay, to the Rio Colorado and
+perhaps to the Rio Llano, westward across the lower Pecos to the Rio
+Grande above the junction of the Conchos, thence in an approximately
+straight line across Chihuahua and Sonora to the Rio Sonora, where
+we find Cabeza de Vaca's Village of the Hearts, which Coronado also
+visited in 1540, at or in the vicinity of the present Ures. Soon
+after he reached this point traces of the first Christians were seen,
+and shortly after the Spaniards themselves, in the form of a military
+body of slave-hunters.
+
+As to the character of our chronicler, he seems to have been an
+honest, modest, and humane man, who underestimated rather than
+exaggerated the many strange things that came under his notice, if we
+except the account of his marvellous healings, even to the revival
+of the dead. The expedition of Narvaez was in itself a disastrous
+and dismal failure, reaching "an end alike forlorn and fatal"; but
+viewed from the standpoint of present-day civilization, the commander
+deserved his fate. On the other hand, while one might well hesitate
+to say that the accomplishment of Cabeza de Vaca and his three
+companions compensated their untold sufferings, the world eventually
+became the wiser in more ways than one. The northern continent had
+been penetrated from shore to shore; the waters of the Mississippi
+and the bison of the plains were now first seen by white men; and
+some knowledge of the savage tribes had been gleaned for the benefit
+of those who should come after. There is no blatant announcement of
+great mineral wealth--a mountain with scoria of iron, some small bags
+of mica, a quantity of galena, with which the Indians painted their
+faces, a little turquoise, a few emeralds, and a small copper bell
+were all. Yet the effect of the remarkable overland journey was to
+inspire the expedition of Coronado in 1540; and it is not improbable
+that De Soto, who endeavored to enlist the services of Cabeza de
+Vaca, may likewise have been stimulated to action.
+
+After the three Spaniards returned to Mexico they united in a report
+to the Audiencia of Española (Santo Domingo), which is printed in
+Oviedo's _Historia General y Natural de las Indias_ (tomo III., lib.
+XXXV., ed. 1853). In April, 1537, they embarked for Spain, but the
+ship in which Dorantes set sail proved to be unseaworthy and returned
+to Vera Cruz. Invited to the capital by the Viceroy Mendoza, Dorantes
+was tendered a commission to explore the northern country, but this
+project was never carried out.
+
+Cabeza de Vaca, in reward for his services, was appointed governor,
+captain-general, and adelantado of the provinces of Rio de la Plata.
+Sailing from Cadiz in November, 1540, he reached Brazil in March
+of the following year. Here he remained seven months, when he sent
+his vessels ahead to Buenos Ayres and started overland to Asuncion,
+which he reached in March, 1542, after a remarkable experience in
+the tropical forests. But the province seems to have needed a man of
+sterner stuff than Alvar Nuñez, for he soon became the subject of
+animosity and intrigue, which finally resulted in open rebellion,
+and his arrest in April, 1543. He was kept under close guard for
+about two years, when he was sent to Spain, and in 1551 was sentenced
+to banishment in Africa for eight years--a judgment that does not
+seem to have been carried out, for after serving probably a year or
+so in mild captivity at Seville, he was acquitted. He died in 1557.
+
+Of the subsequent career of Castillo little is known. He returned to
+New Spain, became a citizen of the City of Mexico, married a widow,
+and was granted half the rents of the Indian town of Tehuacan.
+
+Dorantes, as has been stated, for some reason did not carry out
+the plan of exploring the north, perhaps because of the projected
+expedition of Coronado, the way for which was led by Fray Marcos
+de Niza in 1539 with the negro Estévan as a guide. Dorantes served
+Mendoza in the conquest of Jalisco, and married Doña María de la
+Torre, a widow, by whom he had a large family. One of his sons,
+Balthasar, sometime king's treasurer of Vera Cruz, was born about the
+middle of the century, and on the death of his father inherited an
+_encomienda_ that produced an income of five thousand pesos a year.
+Another son, Gaspar, inherited the _encomienda_ of the pueblos of
+Ocava; and another, Melchior, "an _encomienda_ of Indians and of very
+good rents."
+
+Of Estévan there is somewhat more definite information. Well on the
+road toward the north in 1539, he was sent ahead by Fray Marcos to
+report the character of the country and its people, and with rattle
+in hand and accompanied by many Indians of the present Gila River
+region, entered Háwikuh, the first of the Seven Cities of Cibola.
+Here Estévan and most of his Indian followers were put to death by
+the Zuñis; those who escaped fled to Fray Marcos, whose life was
+threatened but who saved himself by regaling the natives with the
+contents of his pack.
+
+There was another survivor of the inland expedition of Narvaez--Juan
+Ortiz by name. This Spaniard, who had been enticed ashore by the
+Indians of Florida, led practically the life of a slave, like his
+countrymen on the Texas main, until 1539, when he was rescued by De
+Soto, but he died before the expedition returned to civilization.
+
+The _Relación_ of Alvar Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca was first printed
+at Zamora in 1542, and with slight changes was reprinted, with
+the first edition of the _Comentarios_ on the Rio de la Plata, at
+Valladolid, in 1555. The _editio princeps_ was translated into
+Italian by Ramusio, in the third volume of his _Navigationi et
+Viaggi_ (Venice, 1556), and this was paraphrased into English by
+Samuel Purchas in volume IV. of _Purchas His Pilgrimes_ (London,
+1613, pt. IV., lib. VIII., cap. 1). The _Naufragios_ (or _Relacion_)
+and _Comentarios_ were reprinted at Madrid in 1736, preceded by the
+_Exámen Apologético_ of Antonio Ardoino, who seemed to feel it his
+duty to reply to an Austrian monk named Caspar Plautus, who, in
+1621, under the name Philoponus, published a treatise in which he
+maintained that laymen like Cabeza de Vaca should not be permitted to
+perform miracles. This edition of the narration of Cabeza de Vaca is
+included in volume I. of Barcia's _Historiadores Primitivos de las
+Indias Occidentales_, published at Madrid in 1749. The _Naufragios_
+of Alvar Nuñez, from the edition of 1555, appears in volume I. of
+Vedia's _Historiadores Primitivos de Indias_ (Madrid, ed. 1852). The
+letter to the Audiencia of Española, "edited" by Oviedo, has already
+been alluded to. A "Capitulacion que se tomó con Alvar Nuñez Cabeza
+de Vaca," dated Madrid, 18 Marzo, 1540, is found in the _Colección de
+Documentos Inéditos del Archivo de Indias_ (tomo XXIII., pp. 8-33,
+1875). A _Relación_ by Cabeza de Vaca, briefly narrating the story
+of the expedition until the arrival of its survivors in Espíritu
+Santo Bay, with his instructions as treasurer, is printed in the
+_Colección de Documentos de Indias_, XIV. 265-279 (Madrid, 1870). The
+most recent Spanish edition of the more famous _Relacion_ reprinted
+in the following pages forms a part of volume V. of the _Colección
+de Libros y Documentos referentes á la Historia de América_ (Madrid,
+1906), which also contains the _Comentarios_.
+
+The single French translation was published as volume VII. of Henri
+Ternaux-Compans's _Voyages_ (Paris, 1837), from the edition of 1555,
+while the _Commentaires_ form volume VI.
+
+In 1851 a translation of the edition of 1555 into English, by
+(Thomas) Buckingham Smith, under the title The _Narrative of Alvar
+Nuñez Cabeça de Vaca_, was published privately at Washington by
+George W. Riggs; and shortly after Mr. Smith's death, in 1871,
+another edition, with many additions, was published in New York under
+the editorial supervision of John Gilmary Shea and at the expense of
+Henry C. Murphy. It is this edition of the _Narrative_ that is here
+reprinted. A paraphrase of the 1851 edition of Smith's translation
+appears in Henry Kingsley's _Tales of Old Travels_ (London, 1869).
+The first fourteen chapters of W. W. H. Davis's _Spanish Conquest
+of New Mexico_ (Doylestown, Pa., 1869) are also a paraphrase of
+the same work. Chapters XXX.-XXXVI. of the 1871 edition of Smith,
+somewhat abridged, were printed in an _Old South Leaflet_ (Gen.
+Ser., No. 39, Boston, 1893). A "Relation of what Befel the Persons
+who Escaped from the Disasters that Attended the Armament of Captain
+Pamphilo de Narvaez on the Shores and in the countries of the North,"
+translated and condensed from the letter published by Oviedo, is
+printed in _The Historical Magazine_ (vol. XII., pp. 141, 204, 267,
+347; September-December, 1867). The most recent English edition of
+the Cabeza de Vaca _Relation_, translated from the very rare imprint
+of 1542 by Mrs. Fanny Bandelier, and edited, with an introduction,
+by her husband Ad. F. Bandelier, was published in New York, in 1905,
+under the title, _The Journey of Alvar Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca_, as one
+of the volumes of the "Trail Makers" series.
+
+  F. W. HODGE.
+
+
+
+
+THE NARRATIVE OF CABEZA DE VACA
+
+     _Relation that Alvar Nuñez Cabeça de Vaca gave of what befell
+     the armament in the Indies whither Pánfilo de Narváez went for
+     Governor from the year 1527 to the year 1536 [1537] when with
+     three comrades he returned and came to Sevilla._[1]
+
+  [1] This heading is taken from the title-page of the edition of
+  1542. The edition of 1555, generally followed in this book, has a
+  title-page so phrased as to cover both the North American and the
+  South American narratives of the author. The return really took
+  place in 1537.
+
+
+
+
+PROEM
+
+
+  SACRED CAESARIAN CATHOLIC MAJESTY:
+
+Among the many who have held sway, I think no prince can be found
+whose service has been attended with the ardor and emulation shown
+for that of your Highness[2] at this time. The inducement is evident
+and powerful: men do not pursue together the same career without
+motive, and strangers are observed to strive with those who are
+equally impelled by religion and loyalty.
+
+  [2] The Emperor Charles V.
+
+Although ambition and love of action are common to all, as to the
+advantages that each may gain, there are great inequalities of
+fortune, the result not of conduct, but only accident, nor caused by
+the fault of any one, but coming in the providence of God and solely
+by His will. Hence to one arises deeds more signal than he thought to
+achieve; to another the opposite in every way occurs, so that he can
+show no higher proof of purpose than his effort, and at times even
+this is so concealed that it cannot of itself appear.
+
+As for me, I can say in undertaking the march I made on the main
+by the royal authority, I firmly trusted that my conduct and
+services would be as evident and distinguished as were those of my
+ancestors[3] and that I should not have to speak in order to be
+reckoned among those who for diligence and fidelity in affairs your
+Majesty honors. Yet, as neither my counsel nor my constancy availed
+to gain aught for which we set out, agreeably to your interests, for
+our sins, no one of the many armaments that have gone into those
+parts has been permitted to find itself in straits great like ours,
+or come to an end alike forlorn and fatal. To me, one only duty
+remains, to present a relation of what was seen and heard in the ten
+years[4] I wandered lost and in privation through many and remote
+lands. Not merely a statement of positions and distances, animals
+and vegetation, but of the diverse customs of the many and very
+barbarous people with whom I talked and dwelt, as well as all other
+matters I could hear of and discern, that in some way I may avail
+your Highness. My hope of going out from among those nations was
+always small, still my care and diligence were none the less to keep
+in particular remembrance everything, that if at any time God our
+Lord should will to bring me where I now am, it might testify to my
+exertion in the royal behalf.
+
+  [3] He doubtless refers particularly to the services of his
+  grandfather, Pedro de Vera, conqueror of the Canaries, to whom he
+  refers at the close of this work. See the Introduction.
+
+  [4] He arrived in Florida with the Narvaez expedition in April,
+  1528, and reached New Spain overland in April, 1536--eight years
+  later.
+
+As the narrative is in my opinion of no trivial value to those who in
+your name go to subdue those countries and bring them to a knowledge
+of the true faith and true Lord, and under the imperial dominion,
+I have written this with much exactness; and although in it may be
+read things very novel and for some persons difficult to believe,
+nevertheless they may without hesitation credit me as strictly
+faithful. Better than to exaggerate, I have lessened in all things,
+and it is sufficient to say the relation is offered to your Majesty
+for truth. I beg it may be received in the name of homage, since it
+is the most that one could bring who returned thence naked.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 1
+
+_In which is told when the Armada sailed, and of the officers and
+persons who went in it._
+
+
+On the seventeenth day[5] of June, in the year fifteen hundred and
+twenty-seven, the Governor Pánphilo de Narváez left the port of San
+Lúcar de Barrameda,[6] authorized and commanded by your Majesty
+to conquer and govern the provinces of the main, extending from
+the River Palmas[7] to the cape of Florida. The fleet he took was
+five ships, in which went six hundred men, a few more or less; the
+officers (for we shall have to speak of them), were these, with their
+rank: Cabeça de Vaca, treasurer and high-sheriff; Alonso Enrriquez,
+comptroller; Alonso de Solis, distributor to your Majesty and
+assessor; Juan Xuarez,[8] a friar of Saint Francis, commissary, and
+four more friars of the same order.
+
+  [5] The Spanish edition of 1542 has the date June 27.
+
+  [6] At the mouth of the Guadalquivir, in the province of Cadiz,
+  Spain; noted as the point of debarkation of Fernão Magalhães, or
+  Magellan, September 20, 1519.
+
+  [7] Probably the Rio de Santander, which enters the Gulf of
+  Mexico one hundred miles north of Tampico. The name was later
+  applied to the province that joined the province of Pánuco on the
+  north. The latter was, in general terms, the region drained by
+  the streams that empty into the Gulf about Tampico.
+
+  [8] The edition of 1542 has "Juan Gutierrez."
+
+We arrived at the island of Santo Domingo, where we tarried near
+forty-five days, engaged in procuring for ourselves some necessary
+material, particularly horses. Here we lost from our fleet more than
+one hundred and forty men, who wished to remain, seduced by the
+partidos,[9] and advantages held out to them by the people of that
+country.
+
+  [9] A term often used to designate one of the districts or
+  territories into which a Spanish province was divided for
+  purposes of administration, and having a head pueblo or village;
+  but here employed to signify the favorable proposals which the
+  colonists made to the deserters from the fleet.
+
+We sailed from the island and arrived at Santiago,[10] a port of
+Cuba, where, during some days that we remained, the Governor supplied
+himself further with men, also with arms and horses. It happened
+there that a gentleman, Vasco Porcallo[11] of Trinidad, which is also
+on the island,[12] offered to give the Governor some provisions which
+he had in the town, a hundred leagues from the port of Santiago.
+Accordingly the Governor set out with all the fleet for Trinidad; but
+coming to a port half way, called Cabo de Santa Cruz,[13] he thought
+it well to wait there, and send a vessel to bring the stores. To this
+end he ordered that a Captain Pantoja[14] should go for them with
+his ship, and for greater security, that I should accompany him with
+another. The Governor remained with four ships, having bought one at
+the island of Santo Domingo.
+
+  [10] In southeastern Cuba, the Santiago de Cuba that was
+  surrendered to the American forces in the summer of 1898.
+
+  [11] Vasco Porcallo de Figueroa afterward became De Soto's
+  lieutenant-general in Florida, but returned to Cuba early in the
+  history of the expedition.
+
+  [12] On the southern coast, longitude 80°.
+
+  [13] Now Cabo Cruz, longitude 77° 40'.
+
+  [14] One Juan Pantoja, captain of crossbowmen and Lord of
+  Ixtlahuaca, accompanied Narvaez on his first expedition to
+  Mexico. If the same as the present Pantoja, which seems likely,
+  he was killed by Sotomayor in a quarrel. See ch. 17.
+
+We having arrived with the two vessels at the port of Trinidad,
+Captain Pantoja went with Vasco Porcalle (_sic_) to the town, a
+league off, to receive the provisions, while I remained at sea with
+the pilots, who said we ought to go thence with the greatest despatch
+possible, for it was a very bad port in which many vessels were lost.
+As what there occurred to us was very remarkable, it appears to me
+not foreign to the purpose with which I write this, to relate it here.
+
+The next morning began to give signs of bad weather; rain commenced
+falling, and the sea ran so high, that, although I gave the men
+permission to go on shore, many of them returned to the ship to avoid
+exposure to the wet and cold, and because the town was a league away.
+In this time a canoe came off, bringing me a letter from a resident
+of the place, asking me to come for the needed provisions that were
+there; from which request I excused myself, saying that I could not
+leave the ships. At noon the canoe returned with another letter, in
+which I was solicited again with much urging, and a horse was brought
+for me to ride. I gave the same answer as before, that I could not
+leave the ships; but the pilots and the people entreated me to go, so
+that I might hasten the provisions as fast as possible, and we might
+join the fleet where it lay, for they had great fear lest remaining
+long in this port, the ships should be lost. For these reasons,
+I determined to go to the town; but first I left orders with the
+pilots, that if the south wind, which often wrecks vessels there,
+came on to blow, and they should find themselves in much danger, to
+put the ships on shore at some place where the men and horses could
+be saved. I wished to take some of the men with me for company; but
+they said the weather was too rainy and cold, and the town too far
+off; that to-morrow, which was Sunday, they would come, with God's
+help, and hear mass.
+
+An hour after I left, the sea began to rise very high, and the north
+wind was so violent that neither the boats dared come to land, nor
+could the vessels be let drive on shore, because of the head wind,
+so that the people remained severely laboring against the adverse
+weather, and under a heavy fall of water all that day and Sunday
+until dark. At this time, the rain and the tempest had increased to
+such a degree, there was no less agitation in the town than on the
+sea; for all the houses and churches fell, and it was necessary in
+order to move upright, that we should go seven or eight holding on
+to each other that the wind might not blow us away; and walking in
+the groves, we had no less fear of the trees than of the houses, as
+they too were falling and might kill us under them. In this tempest
+and danger we wandered all night, without finding place or spot where
+we could remain a half-hour in safety. During the time, particularly
+from midnight forward, we heard much tumult and great clamor of
+voices, the sound of timbrels, flutes, and tambourines, as well as
+other instruments, which lasted until the morning, when the tempest
+ceased. Nothing so terrible as this storm had been seen in those
+parts before. I drew up an authenticated account of it, and sent the
+testimony to your Majesty.
+
+On Monday morning we went down to the harbor, but did not find the
+ships. The buoys belonging to them were floating on the water; whence
+we knew the ships were lost, and we walked along the shore to see
+if any thing could be found of them. As nothing was discovered, we
+struck into the woods, and, having travelled about a quarter of a
+league in water, we found the little boat of a ship lodged upon some
+trees. Ten leagues thence, along the coast, two bodies were found,
+belonging to my ship, and some lids of boxes; but the persons were
+so disfigured by beating against the rocks that they could not be
+recognized. A cloak too was seen, also a coverlet rent in pieces,
+and nothing more. Sixty persons were lost in the ships, and twenty
+horses. Those who had gone on shore the day of our arrival, who may
+have been as many as thirty, were all the survivors of both ships.
+During some days we were struggling with much hardship and hunger;
+for the provisions and subsistence were destroyed, and some herds.
+The country was left in a condition piteous to behold; the trees
+prostrate, the woods parched, there being neither grass nor leaf.
+
+Thus we lived until the fifth of November, when the Governor arrived
+with four ships, which had lived through the great storm, having run
+into a place of safety in good time. The people who came in them,
+as well as those on shore, were so intimidated by what had passed,
+that they feared to go on board in the winter, and they besought the
+Governor to spend it there. Seeing their desire and that it was also
+the wish of the townspeople, he staid through the season. He gave the
+ships and people into my charge, that I might go with them to pass
+the winter at the port of Xagua,[15] twelve leagues thence, where I
+remained until the twentieth day of February.
+
+  [15] The present Jagua, at the entrance to the bay of Cienfuegos.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 2
+
+_The coming of the Governor to the Port of Xagua and with a pilot._
+
+
+At this time, the Governor arrived with a brigantine bought in
+Trinidad, and brought with him a pilot named Miruelo, who was
+employed because he said he knew the position of the River Palmas,
+and had been there, and was a thorough pilot for all the coast of
+the North. The Governor had also purchased and left on the shore
+of Havana another vessel, of which Alvaro de la Cerda remained in
+charge, with forty infantry and twelve cavalry.
+
+The second day after arrival the Governor set sail with four hundred
+men and eighty horses, in four ships and a brigantine. The pilot
+being again on board, put the vessels among the shoals they call
+Canarreo,[16] and on the day following we struck: thus we were
+situated fifteen days, the keels of our vessels frequently touching
+bottom. At the end of this time, a tempest from the south threw
+so much water upon the shoals that we could get off, although not
+without danger. We left this place and arrived at Guaniguanico, where
+another storm overtook us, in which we were at one time near being
+lost. At Cape Corrientes[17] we had still another, which detained
+us three days. These places being passed, we doubled Cape Sant
+Anton,[18] and sailed with head winds until we were within twelve
+leagues of Havana. Standing in the next day to enter the harbor, a
+wind came from the south which drove us from the land towards the
+coast of Florida. We came in sight on Tuesday, the twelfth day of
+April, and sailed along the coast. On Holy Thursday we anchored near
+the shore in the mouth of a bay[19] at the head of which we saw some
+houses or habitations of Indians.[20]
+
+  [16] Evidently one of the numerous keys between Xagua Bank and
+  the Isle of Pines.
+
+  [17] Southwestern Cuba.
+
+  [18] The westernmost point of the island.
+
+  [19] The place of landing is identified as having been about
+  St. Clement's Point, on the peninsula west of Tampa Bay, on
+  the western coast of Florida. See Woodbury Lowery, _Spanish
+  Settlements_, 1513-1561 (New York, 1901), p. 177, and App. J.
+
+  [20] These were Indians belonging to the Timuquanan, or Timucuan
+  family, now entirely extinct. The Seminoles were comparatively
+  recent intruders in the peninsula, except in the extreme northern
+  part.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 3
+
+_Our arrival in Florida._
+
+
+On the same day[21] the comptroller, Alonzo Enrriquez, landed on an
+island in the bay. He called to the Indians, who came and remained
+with him some time; and in barter gave him fish and several pieces of
+venison. The day following, which was Good Friday,[22] the governor
+debarked with as many of the people as the boats he brought could
+contain. When we came to the _buhíos_,[23] or houses that we had
+seen, we found them vacant and abandoned, the inhabitants having fled
+at night in their canoes. One of the buhíos was very large; it could
+hold more than three hundred persons. The others were smaller. We
+found a tinklet of gold among some fish nets.
+
+  [21] April 14, 1528.
+
+  [22] April 15, 1528
+
+  [23] An Arawak term for house, referring specifically to a
+  dwelling with an open shed attached. The Spaniards became
+  acquainted with the word in Santo Domingo. For descriptions of
+  these habitations see Fewkes, "The Aborigines of Porto Rico and
+  Neighboring Islands," _Twenty-fifth Annual Report of the Bureau
+  of American Ethnology_, 1906.
+
+The next day[24] the Governor raised ensigns for your Majesty, and
+took possession of the country in your royal name.[25] He made known
+his authority, and was obeyed as governor, as your Majesty had
+commanded. At the same time we laid our commissions before him, and
+he acknowledged them according to their tenor. Then he ordered that
+the rest of the people and the horses should land. Of the beasts
+there were only forty-two; by reason of the great storms and the
+length of time passed at sea, the rest were dead. These few remaining
+were so lean and fatigued that for the time we could have little
+service from them. The following day the Indians of the town came and
+spoke to us; but as we had no interpreter we could not understand
+what they meant. They made many signs and menaces, and appeared to
+say we must go away from the country. With this they left us and went
+off, offering no interruption.
+
+  [24] April 16, 1528.
+
+  [25] For the interesting if farcical formula used in taking
+  possession of a country in the name of Spain, see Buckingham
+  Smith, _Relation of Alvar Nuñez Cabeça de Vaca_ (ed. 1871), App.
+  III., 215-217, and Lowery, _op. cit._, pp. 178-180.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 4
+
+_Our entrance into the country._
+
+
+The day following, the Governor resolved to make an incursion to
+explore the land, and see what it might contain. With him went the
+commissary, the assessor, and myself, with forty men, among them six
+cavalry, of which we could make little use. We took our way towards
+the north,[26] until the hour of vespers, when we arrived at a very
+large bay that appeared to stretch far inland.[27] We remained there
+that night, and the next day we returned to the place where were our
+ships and people. The Governor ordered that the brigantine should
+sail along the coast of Florida and search for the harbor that
+Miruelo, the pilot, said he knew (though as yet he had failed to find
+it, and could not tell in what place we were, or where was the port),
+and that if it were not found, she should steer for Havana and seek
+the ship of which Alvaro de la Cerda was in command,[28] and, taking
+provisions, together, they should come to look for us.
+
+  [26] Really northeast.
+
+  [27] The western arm of Tampa Bay, known as Old Tampa Bay.
+
+  [28] With forty men and a dozen horses.
+
+After the brigantine left, the same party, with some persons more,
+returned to enter the land. We kept along the shores of the bay we
+had found, and, having gone four leagues, we captured four Indians.
+We showed them maize, to see if they had knowledge of it, for up to
+that time we had seen no indication of any. They said they could take
+us where there was some; so they brought us to their town near by,
+at the head of the bay, and showed us a little corn not yet fit for
+gathering.
+
+There we saw many cases, such as are used to contain the merchandise
+of Castile, in each of them a dead man, and the bodies were covered
+with painted deer-skins. This appeared to the commissary to be a kind
+of idolatry, and he burned the cases with the bodies. We also found
+pieces of linen and of woollen cloth, and bunches of feathers which
+appeared like those of New Spain.[29] There were likewise traces of
+gold. Having by signs asked the Indians whence these things came,
+they motioned to us that very far from there, was a province called
+Apalachen,[30] where was much gold, and so the same abundance in
+Palachen[31] of everything that we at all cared for.
+
+  [29] In the letter addressed by the survivors to the Audiencia
+  of Santo Domingo (Oviedo, _Historia General y Natural de las
+  Indias_, III., cap. i. 583, Madrid, 1853), it is stated that when
+  the natives were asked whence came these intrusive articles,
+  which included also some pieces of shoes, canvas, broadcloth,
+  and iron, they replied by signs that they had taken them from a
+  vessel that had been wrecked in the bay. Compare also cap. VII.
+  615. It has been suggested that possibly the objects may have
+  come from the vessel which Lucas Vazquez de Ayllon lost in 1526,
+  but as this wreck occurred at the mouth of Cape Fear River, on
+  the southern coast of North Carolina, it does not seem likely
+  that they could have been derived from this source. That natives
+  of the West Indies had intercourse by canoe with Florida, and
+  that an Arawakan colony was early established on the southwest
+  coast of the peninsula, is now well established.
+
+  [30] The Apalachee were one of the Muskhogean tribes that
+  occupied northwestern Florida from the vicinity of Pensacola
+  eastward to Ocilla River, their chief seats being in the
+  vicinity of Tallahassee and St. Marks. In 1655 they numbered six
+  or eight thousand, but about the beginning of the eighteenth
+  century they were warred against by the Creeks, instigated by
+  the English of Carolina, and in 1703 and 1704 expeditions by
+  English troops, reinforced by Creek warriors, resulted in the
+  capture and enslavement of about fourteen hundred Apalachee
+  and in practically exterminating the remainder. The town of
+  Apalachicola, on the Savannah River, was inhabited by Apalachee
+  refugees colonized later by the Carolina government, but these
+  were finally merged with the Creeks. Appalachee Bay and the
+  Appalachian Mountains derive their names from this tribe.
+
+  [31] "Apalachen," as above, in the edition of 1542 (Bandelier
+  translation).
+
+Taking these Indians for guides, we departed, and travelling ten or
+twelve leagues[32] we came to a town of fifteen houses. Here a large
+piece of ground was cultivated in maize then ripe, and we likewise
+found some already dry. After staying there two days, we returned to
+where the comptroller tarried with the men and ships, and related to
+him and the pilots what we had seen, and the information the natives
+had given.
+
+  [32] The Spanish league varied greatly, but in these early
+  narratives the judicial league, equivalent to 2.634 English
+  miles, is usually meant. Distances, however, while sometimes
+  paced, were generally loose guesses, as is often shown by the
+  great disparity in the figures given by two or more chroniclers
+  of the same journey.
+
+The next day, the first of May, the Governor called aside the
+commissary, the comptroller, the assessor, myself, a sailor named
+Bartolomé Fernandez, and a notary, Hieronymo Alaniz.[33] Being
+together he said that he desired to penetrate the interior, and that
+the ships ought to go along the coast until they should come to the
+port which the pilots believed was very near on the way to the River
+Palmas. He asked us for our views.
+
+  [33] "Jerónimo de Albaniz" in the edition of 1542 (Bandelier
+  translation).
+
+I said it appeared to me that under no circumstances ought we to
+leave the vessels until they were in a secure and peopled harbor;
+that he should observe the pilots were not confident, and did not
+agree in any particular, neither did they know where we were; that,
+more than this, the horses were in no condition to serve us in such
+exigencies as might occur. Above all, that we were going without
+being able to communicate with the Indians by use of speech and
+without an interpreter, and we could but poorly understand ourselves
+with them, or learn what we desired to know of the land; that we
+were about entering a country of which we had no account, and had
+no knowledge of its character, of what there was in it, or by what
+people inhabited, neither did we know in what part of it we were; and
+beside all this, we had not food to sustain us in wandering we knew
+not whither; that with regard to the stores in the ships, rations
+could not be given to each man for such a journey, more than a pound
+of biscuit and another of bacon; that my opinion was, we should
+embark and seek a harbor and a soil better than this to occupy, since
+what we had seen of it was desert and poor, such as had never before
+been discovered in those parts.
+
+To the commissary[34] every thing appeared otherwise. He thought we
+ought not to embark; but that, always keeping the coast, we should
+go in search of the harbor, which the pilots stated was only ten or
+fifteen leagues from there, on the way to Pánuco; and that it was not
+possible, marching ever by the shore, we should fail to come upon
+it, because they said it stretched up into the land a dozen leagues;
+that whichever might first find it should wait for the other; that
+to embark would be to brave the Almighty after so many adversities
+encountered since leaving Spain, so many storms, and so great losses
+of men and ships sustained before reaching there; that for these
+reasons we should march along the coast until we reached the harbor,
+and those in the ships should take a like direction until they
+arrived at the same place.
+
+  [34] Fray Juan Xuarez.
+
+This plan seemed the best to adopt, to the rest who were present,
+except the notary, who said that when the ships should be abandoned
+they ought to be in a known, safe haven, a place with inhabitants;
+that this done the Governor might advance inland and do what might
+seem to him proper.
+
+The Governor followed his own judgment and the counsel of others.
+Seeing his determination, I required him in behalf of your Majesty,
+not to quit the ships before putting them in port and making them
+secure; and accordingly I asked a certificate of this under the hand
+of the notary. The Governor responded that he did but abide by the
+judgment of the commissary, and of the majority of the officers, and
+that I had no right to make these requirements of him. He then asked
+the notary to give him a certificate, that inasmuch as there was no
+subsistence in that country for the maintenance of a colony, nor
+haven for the ships, he broke up the settlement he had placed there,
+taking its inhabitants in quest of a port and land that should be
+better. He then ordered the people who were to go with him to be
+mustered, that they might be victualled with what was needed for the
+journey. After they had been provided for, he said to me, in the
+hearing of those present, that since I so much discouraged and feared
+entering the land, I should sail in charge of the ships and people in
+them, and form a settlement, should I arrive at the port before him;
+but from this proposal I excused myself.
+
+After we had separated, the same evening, having said that it did
+not appear to him that he could entrust the command to any one else,
+he sent to me to say that he begged I would take it; but finding,
+notwithstanding he so greatly importuned me, that I still refused,
+he asked me the cause of my reluctance. I answered that I rejected
+the responsibility, as I felt certain and knew that he was never more
+to find the ships, nor the ships him, which might be foreseen in the
+slender outfit we had for entering the country; that I desired rather
+to expose myself to the danger which he and the others adventured,
+and to pass with them what he and they might go through, than to
+take charge of the ships and give occasion for it to be said I had
+opposed the invasion and remained behind from timidity, and thus my
+courage be called in question. I chose rather to risk my life than
+put my honor in such position. Seeing that what he said to me availed
+nothing, he begged many persons to reason with me on the subject
+and entreat me. I answered them in the same way I had him; so he
+appointed for his lieutenant of the ships an alcalde he had brought
+with him, whose name was Caravallo.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 5
+
+_The Governor leaves the ships._
+
+
+On Saturday,[35] first of May, the date of this occurrence, the
+Governor ordered to each man going with him, two pounds of biscuit
+and half a pound of bacon; and thus victualled we took up our march
+into the country. The whole number of men was three hundred:[36]
+among them went the commissary, Friar Juan Xuarez, and another
+friar, Juan de Palos, three clergymen and the officers. We of the
+mounted men consisted of forty. We travelled on the allowance we had
+received fifteen days, without finding any other thing to eat than
+palmitos,[37] which are like those of Andalusia. In all that time
+we saw not an Indian, and found neither village nor house. Finally
+we came to a river,[38] which we passed with great difficulty, by
+swimming and on rafts. It detained us a day to cross because of the
+very strong current. Arrived on the other side, there appeared as
+many as two hundred natives, more or less. The Governor met them,
+and conversing by signs, they so insulted us with their gestures,
+that we were forced to break with them.[39] We seized upon five or
+six, and they took us to their houses half a league off. Near by we
+found a large quantity of maize in a fit state to be gathered. We
+gave infinite thanks to our Lord for having succored us in this great
+extremity, for we were yet young in trials, and besides the weariness
+in which we came, we were exhausted from hunger.
+
+  [35] Buckingham Smith has "Sunday," translating _Sábado_
+  ("Sabbath") literally; the Christian Sabbath is the Spanish
+  _Domingo_.
+
+  [36] The Letter (Oviedo, 584) says two hundred and sixty men
+  afoot and forty horsemen. References to the Letter to the
+  Audiencia of Santo Domingo will henceforth be cited simply as
+  Oviedo, in whose work it appears (see the Introduction).
+
+  [37] Buckingham Smith says: "This is the dwarf fan-palm, not
+  the cabbage-palm, to which we often inadvertently apply the
+  diminutive termination _ito_, mispelled _etto_." Smith lived in
+  Florida for many years.
+
+  [38] Evidently the Withlacoochee, which enters the Gulf at
+  latitude 29°.
+
+  [39] The Spaniards were still among the Timucuan tribes.
+
+On the third day after our arrival, the comptroller, the assessor,
+the commissary and I met, and together besought the Governor to
+send to look for the sea, that if possible we might find a port,
+as the Indians stated there was one not a very great way off. He
+said that we should cease to speak of the sea, for it was remote;
+but as I chiefly importuned him, he told me to go and look for it,
+and seek a harbor, to take forty men and to travel on foot. So the
+next day[40] I left with Captain Alonzo del Castello[41] and forty
+men of his company. We marched until noon, when we arrived at some
+sea sands that appeared to lie a good ways inland. Along this sand
+we walked for a league and a half,[42] with the water half way up
+the leg, treading on oysters, which cut our feet badly and made us
+much trouble, until we reached the river[43] we had before crossed,
+emptying into this bay. As we could not cross it by reason of our
+slim outfit for such purpose, we returned to camp and reported what
+we had discovered. To find out if there was a port and examine the
+outlet well, it was necessary to repass the river at the place where
+we had first gone over; so the next day the Governor ordered a
+captain, Valençuela by name, with sixty men[44] and six cavalry, to
+cross, and following the river down to the sea, ascertain if there
+was a harbor. He returned after an absence of two days, and said he
+had explored the bay, that it was not deeper any where than to the
+knee, and that he found no harbor. He had seen five or six canoes of
+Indians passing from one shore to the other, wearing many plumes.
+
+  [40] May 18, 1528.
+
+  [41] Castillo.
+
+  [42] Two leagues, according to Oviedo, _op. cit._, 585.
+
+  [43] The Withlacoochee.
+
+  [44] Forty men according to Oviedo, 585.
+
+With this information, we left the next day, going ever in quest
+of Apalache, the country of which the Indians told us, having for
+our guides those we had taken. We travelled without seeing any
+natives who would venture to await our coming up with them until the
+seventeenth day of June, when a chief approached, borne on the back
+of another Indian, and covered with a painted deer-skin. A great many
+people attended him, some walking in advance, playing on flutes of
+reed.[45] In this manner he came to where the Governor stood, and
+spent an hour with him. By signs we gave him to understand that we
+were going to Apalachen, and it appeared to us by those he made that
+he was an enemy to the people of Apalachen, and would go to assist us
+against them. We gave him beads and hawk-bells, with other articles
+of barter; and he having presented the Governor with the skin he
+wore, went back, when we followed in the road he took.
+
+  [45] When Hernando de Soto passed through this country eleven
+  years later he also was met by Indians playing flutes.
+
+That night we came to a wide and deep river with a very rapid
+current.[46] As we would not venture to cross on rafts, we made a
+canoe for the purpose, and spent a day in getting over. Had the
+Indians desired to oppose us, they could well have disputed our
+passage; for even with their help we had great difficulty in making
+it. One of the mounted men, Juan Velazquez by name, a native of
+Cuellar, impatient of detention, entered the river, when the violence
+of the current casting him from his horse, he grasped the reins of
+the bridle, and both were drowned. The people of that chief, whose
+name was Dulchanchellin, found the body of the beast; and having told
+us about where in the stream below we should find the corpse, it was
+sought for. This death caused us much regret, for until now not a man
+had been lost. The horse afforded supper to many that night.
+
+  [46] The Suwannee.
+
+Leaving that spot, the next day we arrived at the town of the chief,
+where he sent us maize. During the night one of our men was shot at
+in a place where we got water, but it pleased God that he should not
+be hit. The next day we departed, not one of the natives making his
+appearance, as all had fled. While going on our way a number came in
+sight, prepared for battle; and though we called to them, they would
+not return nor await our arrival, but retired following us on the
+road. The Governor left some cavalry in ambush, which sallying as the
+natives were about to pass, seized three or four, who thenceforth
+served as guides. They conducted us through a country very difficult
+to travel and wonderful to look upon. In it are vast forests, the
+trees being astonishingly high. So many were fallen on the ground
+as to obstruct our way in such a manner that we could not advance
+without much going about and a considerable increase of toil. Many
+of the standing trees were riven from top to bottom by bolts of
+lightning which fall in that country of frequent storms and tempests.
+
+We labored on through these impediments until the day after
+Saint John's,[47] when we came in view of Apalachen, without the
+inhabitants being aware of our approach. We gave many thanks to God,
+at seeing ourselves so near, believing true what had been told us
+of the land, and that there would be an end to our great hardships,
+caused as much by the length and badness of the way as by our
+excessive hunger; for although we sometimes found maize, we oftener
+travelled seven and eight leagues without seeing any; and besides
+this and the great fatigue, many had galled shoulders from carrying
+armor on the back; and even more than these we endured. Yet, having
+come to the place desired, and where we had been informed were much
+food and gold, it appeared to us that we had already recovered in
+part from our sufferings and fatigue.
+
+  [47] Saint John the Baptist's Day, June 24. They had been
+  travelling through the jungle for four or five days.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 6
+
+_Our arrival at Apalache._
+
+
+When we came in view of Apalachen, the Governor ordered that I should
+take nine cavalry with fifty infantry and enter the town. Accordingly
+the assessor[48] and I assailed it; and having got in, we found only
+women and boys there, the men being absent; however these returned
+to its support, after a little time, while we were walking about,
+and began discharging arrows at us. They killed the horse of the
+assessor, and at last taking to flight, they left us.
+
+  [48] The assessor, or inspector, it will be recalled, was Alonzo
+  de Solis.
+
+We found a large quantity of maize fit for plucking, and much dry
+that was housed; also many deer-skins, and among them some mantelets
+of thread, small and poor, with which the women partially cover their
+persons. There were numerous mortars for cracking maize. The town
+consisted of forty small houses, made low, and set up in sheltered
+places because of the frequent storms. The material was thatch. They
+were surrounded by very dense woods, large groves and many bodies
+of fresh water, in which so many and so large trees are fallen, that
+they form obstructions rendering travel difficult and dangerous.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 7
+
+_The character of the country._
+
+
+The country where we came on shore to this town and region of
+Apalachen is for the most part level, the ground of sand and stiff
+earth. Throughout are immense trees and open woods, in which are
+walnut, laurel, and another tree called liquid-amber,[49] cedars,
+savins, evergreen oaks, pines, red-oaks, and palmitos like those of
+Spain. There are many lakes, great and small, over every part of it;
+some troublesome of fording, on account of depth and the great number
+of trees lying throughout them. Their beds are sand. The lakes in
+the country of Apalachen are much larger than those we found before
+coming there.[50]
+
+  [49] The sweet-gum, copalm, or alligator tree (_Liquidambar
+  styraciflua_).
+
+  [50] Seemingly the lake country in the northern part of Leon and
+  Jefferson counties, Florida. "Apalachen" town was perhaps on
+  Miccosukee Lake.
+
+In this province are many maize fields; and the houses are scattered
+as are those of the Gelves. There are deer of three kinds, rabbits,
+hares, bears, lions, and other wild beasts. Among them we saw an
+animal with a pocket on its belly,[51] in which it carries its
+young until they know how to seek food, and if it happen that they
+should be out feeding and any one come near, the mother will not
+run until she has gathered them in together. The country is very
+cold.[52] It has fine pastures for herds. Birds are of various kinds.
+Geese in great numbers. Ducks, mallards, royal-ducks, fly-catchers,
+night-herons and partridges abound. We saw many falcons, gerfalcons,
+sparrow-hawks, merlins, and numerous other fowl.[53]
+
+  [51] The opossum. This is probably the first allusion to this
+  animal. The name is derived from the Algonquian language of
+  Virginia, having first been recorded by Captain John Smith.
+
+  [52] As it was now late in June, this is not explicable, unless
+  the season was an unusual one.
+
+  [53] Buckingham Smith thinks it strange that the turkey and the
+  alligator are not particularly mentioned among the fauna of the
+  region.
+
+Two hours after our arrival at Apalachen, the Indians who had fled
+from there came in peace to us, asking for their women and children,
+whom we released; but the detention of a cacique by the Governor
+produced great excitement, in consequence of which they returned for
+battle early the next day, and attacked us with such promptness and
+alacrity that they succeeded in setting fire to the houses in which
+we were. As we sallied they fled to the lakes near by, because of
+which and the large maize fields we could do them no injury, save in
+the single instance of one Indian, whom we killed. The day following,
+others came against us from a town on the opposite side of the lake,
+and attacked us as the first had done, escaping in the same way,
+except one who was also slain.
+
+We were in the town twenty-five days, in which time we made three
+incursions, and found the country very thinly peopled and difficult
+to travel for the bad passages, the woods and lakes. We inquired of
+the cacique we kept and the natives we brought with us, who were
+the neighbors and enemies of these Indians, as to the nature of the
+country, the character and condition of the inhabitants, of the
+food and all other matters concerning it. Each answered apart from
+the rest, that the largest town in all that region was Apalachen;
+the people beyond were less numerous and poorer, the land little
+occupied, and the inhabitants much scattered; that thenceforward
+were great lakes, dense forests, immense deserts and solitudes. We
+then asked touching the region towards the south, as to the towns
+and subsistence in it. They said that in keeping such a direction,
+journeying nine days, there was a town called Aute,[54] the
+inhabitants whereof had much maize, beans, and pumpkins, and being
+near the sea they had fish, and that those people were their friends.
+
+  [54] Most authorities agree that this place was at or near the
+  site of St. Marks, south-southeast of Tallahassee, although the
+  distance seems too short for nine days' travel, as will be seen.
+
+In view of the poverty of the land, the unfavorable accounts of
+the population and of everything else we heard, the Indians making
+continual war upon us, wounding our people and horses at the places
+where they went to drink, shooting from the lakes with such safety to
+themselves that we could not retaliate, killing a lord of Tescuco,
+named Don Pedro,[55] whom the commissary brought with him, we
+determined to leave that place and go in quest of the sea, and the
+town of Aute of which we were told.
+
+  [55] See Buckingham Smith, _Relation of Alvar Nuñez Cabeça de
+  Vaca_, 1871, p. 42, note 7, regarding this Aztec prince of the
+  blood.
+
+At the termination of the twenty-five days[56] after our arrival
+we departed,[57] and on the first day got through those lakes and
+passages without seeing any one, and on the second day we came to a
+lake difficult of crossing, the water reaching to the paps, and in it
+were numerous logs. On reaching the middle of it we were attacked by
+many Indians from behind trees, who thus covered themselves that we
+might not get sight of them, and others were on the fallen timbers.
+They drove their arrows with such effect that they wounded many men
+and horses, and before we got through the lake they took our guide.
+They now followed, endeavoring to contest the passage; but our coming
+out afforded no relief, nor gave us any better position; for when
+we wished to fight them they retired immediately into the lake,
+whence they continued to wound our men and beasts. The Governor,
+seeing this, commanded the cavalry to dismount and charge the Indians
+on foot. Accordingly the comptroller[58] alighting with the rest,
+attacked them, when they all turned and ran into the lake at hand,
+and thus the passage was gained.
+
+  [56] "Twenty-six days." Oviedo, 586. The edition of 1542
+  (Bandelier trans., p. 30) says: "And so we left, arriving there
+  five days after. The first day we travelled across lagunes and
+  trails without seeing a single Indian."
+
+  [57] July 19-20, 1528.
+
+  [58] Alonzo Enrriquez.
+
+Some of our men were wounded in this conflict, for whom the good
+armor they wore did not avail. There were those this day who swore
+that they had seen two red oaks, each the thickness of the lower part
+of the leg, pierced through from side to side by arrows; and this is
+not so much to be wondered at, considering the power and skill with
+which the Indians are able to project them. I myself saw an arrow
+that had entered the butt of an elm to the depth of a span.
+
+The Indians we had so far seen in Florida are all archers. They go
+naked, are large of body, and appear at a distance like giants. They
+are of admirable proportions, very spare and of great activity and
+strength. The bows they use are as thick as the arm, of eleven or
+twelve palms in length, which they will discharge at two hundred
+paces with so great precision that they miss nothing.
+
+Having got through this passage, at the end of a league we arrived
+at another of the same character, but worse, as it was longer, being
+half a league in extent. This we crossed freely, without interruption
+from the Indians, who, as they had spent on the former occasion their
+store of arrows, had nought with which they dared venture to engage
+us. Going through a similar passage the next day, I discovered the
+trail of persons ahead, of which I gave notice to the Governor, who
+was in the rear-guard, so that though the Indians came upon us, as
+we were prepared they did no harm. After emerging upon the plain
+they followed us, and we went back on them in two directions. Two we
+killed, and they wounded me and two or three others. Coming to woods
+we could do them no more injury, nor make them further trouble.
+
+In this manner we travelled eight days. After that occurrence we were
+not again beset until within a league of the place to which I have
+said we were going. There, while on our way, the Indians came about
+us without our suspicion, and fell upon the rear-guard. A hidalgo,
+named Avellaneda, hearing the cries of his serving boy, went back
+to give assistance, when he was struck by an arrow near the edge of
+his cuirass; and so severe was the wound, the shaft having passed
+almost entirely through his neck, that he presently died. The corpse
+was carried to Aute, where we arrived at the end of nine days'[59]
+travel from Apalache. We found all the inhabitants gone and the
+houses burned. Maize, beans, and pumpkins were in great plenty,
+all beginning to be fit for gathering. Having rested two days, the
+Governor begged me to go and look for the sea, as the Indians said
+it was near; and we had before discovered it, while on the way, from
+a very large stream, to which we had given the name of River of the
+Magdalena.[60]
+
+  [59] "Eight or nine days." Oviedo, 587.
+
+  [60] St. Marks River, which flows into St. Marks Bay, at the head
+  of which Aute was situated.
+
+Accordingly, I set out the next day after, in company with the
+commissary, Captain Castillo, Andrés Dorantes, seven more on
+horseback, and fifty on foot. We travelled until the hour of vespers,
+when we arrived at a road or entrance of the sea. Oysters were
+abundant, over which the men rejoiced, and we gave thanks to God that
+he had brought us there. The following morning[61] I sent twenty men
+to explore the coast and ascertain its direction. They returned the
+night after, reporting that those creeks and bays were large, and lay
+so far inland as made it difficult to examine them agreeably to our
+desires, and that the sea shore was very distant.
+
+These tidings obtained, seeing our slender means, and condition for
+exploring the coast, I went back to the Governor. On our arrival we
+found him and many others sick. The Indians had assaulted them the
+night before, and because of the malady that had come upon them, they
+had been pushed to extremity. One of the horses had been killed. I
+gave a report of what I had done, and of the embarrassing nature of
+the country. We remained there that day.
+
+  [61] August 1, 1528.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 8
+
+_We go from Aute._
+
+
+The next morning[62] we left Aute, and travelled all day before
+coming to the place I had visited. The journey was extremely
+arduous. There were not horses enough to carry the sick, who went on
+increasing in numbers day by day, and we knew of no cure. It was
+piteous and painful to witness our perplexity and distress. We saw
+on our arrival how small were the means for advancing farther. There
+was not anywhere to go; and if there had been, the people were unable
+to move forward, the greater part being ill, and those were few who
+could be on duty. I cease here to relate more of this, because any
+one may suppose what would occur in a country so remote and malign,
+so destitute of all resource, whereby either to live in it or go out
+of it; but most certain assistance is in God, our Lord, on whom we
+never failed to place reliance. One thing occurred, more afflicting
+to us than all the rest, which was, that of the persons mounted, the
+greater part commenced secretly to plot, hoping to secure a better
+fate for themselves by abandoning the Governor and the sick, who were
+in a state of weakness and prostration. But, as among them were many
+hidalgos and persons of gentle condition, they would not permit this
+to go on, without informing the Governor and the officers of your
+Majesty; and as we showed them the deformity of their purpose, and
+placed before them the moment when they should desert their captain,
+and those who were ill and feeble, and above all the disobedience
+to the orders of your Majesty, they determined to remain, and that
+whatever might happen to one should be the lot of all, without any
+forsaking the rest.
+
+  [62] August 3, 1528.
+
+After the accomplishment of this, the Governor called them all to
+him, and of each apart he asked advice as to what he should do to get
+out of a country so miserable, and seek that assistance elsewhere
+which could not here be found, a third part of the people being
+very sick, and the number increasing every hour; for we regarded it
+as certain that we should all become so, and could pass out of it
+only through death, which from its coming in such a place was to us
+all the more terrible. These, with many other embarrassments being
+considered, and entertaining many plans, we coincided in one great
+project extremely difficult to put in operation, and that was to
+build vessels in which we might go away. This appeared impossible to
+every one; we knew not how to construct, nor were there tools, nor
+iron, nor forge, nor tow, nor resin, nor rigging; finally, no one
+thing of so many that are necessary, nor any man who had a knowledge
+of their manufacture; and, above all, there was nothing to eat,
+while building, for those who should labor. Reflecting on all this,
+we agreed to think of the subject with more deliberation, and the
+conversation dropped from that day, each going his way, commending
+our course to God, our Lord, that he would direct it as should best
+serve Him.
+
+The next day it was His will that one of the company should come
+saying that he could make some pipes out of wood, which with
+deer-skins might be made into bellows; and, as we lived in a time
+when anything that had the semblance of relief appeared well, we
+told him to set himself to work. We assented to the making of nails,
+saws, axes, and other tools of which there was such need, from the
+stirrups, spurs, crossbows, and the other things of iron there were;
+and we laid out for support, while the work was going on, that we
+would make four entries into Aute, with all the horses and men that
+were able to go, and that on every third day a horse should be killed
+to be divided among those who labored in the work of the boats and
+the sick. The incursions were made with the people and horses that
+were available, and in them were brought back as many as four hundred
+fanegas[63] of maize; but these were not got without quarrels and
+contentions with the Indians. We caused many palmitos to be collected
+for the woof or covering, twisting and preparing it for use in the
+place of tow for the boats.
+
+  [63] About six hundred and forty bushels.
+
+We commenced to build on the fourth, with the only carpenter in
+the company, and we proceeded with so great diligence that on the
+twentieth day of September five boats were finished, twenty-two
+cubits in length, each caulked with the fibre of the palmito. We
+pitched them with a certain resin, made from pine trees by a Greek,
+named Don Theodoro; from the same husk of the palmito, and from
+the tails and manes of the horses we made ropes and rigging, from
+our shirts, sails, and from the savins growing there we made the
+oars that appeared to us requisite. Such was the country into which
+our sins had cast us, that only by very great search could we find
+stone for ballast and anchors, since in it all we had not seen one.
+We flayed the horses, taking the skin from their legs entire, and
+tanning them to make bottles wherein to carry water.
+
+During this time some went gathering shell-fish in the coves and
+creeks of the sea, at which employment the Indians twice attacked
+them and killed ten men in sight of the camp, without our being able
+to afford succor. We found their corpses traversed from side to side
+with arrows; and for all some had on good armor, it did not give
+adequate protection or security against the nice and powerful archery
+of which I have spoken. According to the declaration of our pilots
+under oath, from the entrance to which we had given the name Bahía de
+la Cruz[64] to this place, we had travelled two hundred and eighty
+leagues[65] or thereabout. Over all that region we had not seen a
+single mountain, and had no information of any whatsoever.
+
+  [64] Tampa Bay.
+
+  [65] In reality they could not have travelled much more than as
+  many miles in a straight line from Tampa Bay.
+
+Before we embarked there died more than forty men of disease and
+hunger, without enumerating those destroyed by the Indians. By
+the twenty-second of the month of September, the horses had been
+consumed, one only remaining; and on that day we embarked in the
+following order: In the boat of the Governor went forty-nine men; in
+another, which he gave to the comptroller and the commissary, went
+as many others; the third, he gave to Captain Alonzo del Castillo
+and Andrés Dorantes, with forty-eight men; and another he gave to
+two captains, Tellez and Peñalosa, with forty-seven men. The last
+was given to the assessor and myself, with forty-nine men. After the
+provisions and clothes had been taken in, not over a span of the
+gunwales remained above water; and more than this, the boats were so
+crowded that we could not move: so much can necessity do, which drove
+us to hazard our lives in this manner, running into a turbulent sea,
+not a single one who went having a knowledge of navigation.[66]
+
+  [66] Consult Garcilasso de la Vega, _La Florida_, 78, 1723, for
+  the finding of the relics of Narvaez by De Soto's expedition in
+  1539, and see the De Soto narration of the Gentleman of Elvas,
+  later in the present volume.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 9
+
+_We leave the Bay of Horses._
+
+
+The haven we left bears the name of Bahía de Caballos.[67] We passed
+waist deep in water through sounds without seeing any sign of the
+coast, and at the close of the seventh day, we came to an island
+near the main. My boat went first, and from her we saw Indians
+approaching in five canoes, which they abandoned and left in our
+hands, finding that we were coming after them. The other boats passed
+ahead, and stopped at some houses on the island, where we found many
+dried mullet and roes, which were a great relief in our distress.
+After taking these we went on, and two leagues thence, we discovered
+a strait the island makes with the land,[68] which we named Sant
+Miguel, for having passed through it on his day.[69] Coming out we
+went to the coast, where with the canoes I had taken, we somewhat
+improved the boats, making waist-boards and securing them, so that
+the sides rose two palms above the water. This done we returned to
+move along the coast in the direction of the River Palmas,[70] our
+hunger and thirst continually increasing; for our scant subsistence
+was getting near the end, the water was out, and the bottles made
+from the legs of the horses having soon rotted, were useless.
+Sometimes we entered coves and creeks that lay far in, and found them
+all shallow and dangerous. Thus we journeyed along them thirty days,
+finding occasionally Indian fishermen, a poor and miserable lot.
+
+  [67] "Bay of Horses": St. Marks Bay of Appalachee Bay.
+
+  [68] The conditions are applicable to the mouth of St. Marks Bay,
+  the two small islands, and the strait between them and the coast.
+
+  [69] St. Michael's Day, September 29, 1528.
+
+  [70] That is, in a southwesterly direction.
+
+At the end of this time, while the want of water was great, going
+near the coast at night we heard the approach of a canoe, for which,
+so soon as it was in sight, we paused; but it would not meet us,
+and, although we called, it would neither come nor wait for us. As
+the night was dark, we did not follow, and kept on our way. When the
+sun rose we saw a small island, and went to it to find water; but
+our labor was vain, as it had none. Lying there at anchor, a heavy
+storm came on, that detained us six days, we not daring to go to sea;
+and as it was now five days since we had drunk, our thirst was so
+excessive that it put us to the extremity of swallowing salt water,
+by which some of the men became so crazed that three or four suddenly
+died. I state this so briefly, because I do not believe there is any
+necessity for particularly relating the sufferings and toils amidst
+which we found ourselves; since, considering the place where we were,
+and the little hope we had of relief, every one may conceive much of
+what must have passed.
+
+Although the storm had not ceased, as our thirst increased and
+the water killed us, we resolved to commend ourselves to God our
+Lord, and adventure the peril of the sea rather than await the end
+which thirst made certain. Accordingly we went out by the way we
+had observed the canoe go the night we came. On this day we were
+ourselves many times overwhelmed by the waves, and in such jeopardy
+that there was not one who did not suppose his death inevitable.
+Thanks be to Him, that in the greatest dangers, He was wont to show
+us his favor; for at sunset doubling a point made by the land, we
+found shelter with much calm.[71]
+
+  [71] Pensacola Bay. The Indians were Choctaws or a closely
+  related tribe.
+
+Many canoes came off with Indians who spoke with us and returned,
+not being disposed to await our arrival. They were of large stature
+and well formed: they had no bows and arrows. We followed them to
+their houses near by, at the edge of the water, and jumped on shore.
+Before their dwellings were many clay pitchers with water, and a
+large quantity of cooked fish, which the chief of these territories
+offered to the Governor and then took him to his house. Their
+dwellings were made of mats, and so far as we observed, were not
+movable. On entering the house the cacique gave us fish, and we gave
+him of the maize we brought, which the people ate in our presence.
+They asked for more and received it, and the Governor presented the
+cacique with many trinkets. While in the house with him, at the
+middle hour of night, the Indians fell suddenly upon us, and on those
+who were very sick, scattered along the shore.[72] They also beset
+the house in which the Governor was, and with a stone struck him
+in the face. Those of our comrades present seized the cacique; but
+his people being near liberated him, leaving in our hands a robe of
+civet-marten.
+
+  [72] "Killing three men." Oviedo, p. 589.
+
+These skins are the best, I think, that can be found; they have a
+fragrance that can be equalled by amber and musk alone, and even at a
+distance is strongly perceptible. We saw there other skins, but none
+comparable to these.
+
+Those of us around, finding the Governor wounded, put him into
+his boat; and we caused others of our people to betake themselves
+likewise to their boats, some fifty remaining to withstand the
+natives. They attacked us thrice that night, and with so great
+impetuosity, that on each occasion they made us retire more than a
+stone's cast. Not one among us escaped injury: I was wounded in the
+face. They had not many arrows, but had they been further provided,
+doubtless they would have done us much harm. In the last onset, the
+Captains Dorantes, Peñalosa, and Tellez put themselves in ambuscade
+with fifteen men, and fell upon the rear in such manner that the
+Indians desisted and fled.
+
+The next morning[73] I broke up more than thirty canoes, which were
+serviceable for fuel in a north wind in which we were kept all day
+suffering severe cold, without daring to go to sea, because of the
+rough weather upon it. This having subsided, we again embarked,
+and navigated three days.[74] As we brought little water and the
+vessels were few, we were reduced to the last extremity. Following
+our course, we entered an estuary, and being there we saw Indians
+approaching in a canoe. We called to them and they came. The
+Governor, at whose boat they first arrived, asked for water, which
+they assented to give, asking for something in which they might bring
+it, when Dorotheo Theodoro, a Greek spoken of before, said that he
+wished to go with them. The Governor tried to dissuade him, and so
+did others, but were unable; he was determined to go whatever might
+betide. Accordingly he went, taking with him a negro, the natives
+leaving two of their number as hostages. At night the Indians
+returned with the vessels empty and without the Christians; and when
+those we held were spoken to by them, they tried to plunge into the
+sea. Being detained by the men, the Indians in the canoe thereupon
+fled, leaving us sorrowful and much dejected for our loss.[75]
+
+  [73] October 28, 1528.
+
+  [74] "Three or four days." Oviedo, p. 589.
+
+  [75] Biedma's Narrative (_Publications of the Hakluyt Society_,
+  IX. 1-83, 1851) says of the De Soto expedition in 1539: "Having
+  set out for this village [Mavila, Mauvila, Mobile], we found a
+  large river which we supposed to be that which falls into the
+  bay of Chuse [Pensacola Bay]; we learned that the vessels of
+  Narvaez had arrived there in want of water, and that a Christian
+  named Teodoro and an Indian had remained among these Indians: at
+  the same time they showed us a dagger which had belonged to the
+  Christian."
+
+
+
+
+  Chapter 10
+
+  _The assault from the Indians._
+
+
+  The morning having come, many natives arrived in canoes who
+  asked us for the two that had remained in the boat. The Governor
+  replied that he would give up the hostages when they should
+  bring the Christians they had taken. With the Indians had come
+  five or six chiefs,[76] who appeared to us to be the most comely
+  persons, and of more authority and condition than any we had
+  hitherto seen, although not so large as some others of whom we
+  have spoken. They wore the hair loose and very long, and were
+  covered with robes of marten such as we had before taken. Some
+  of the robes were made up after a strange fashion, with wrought
+  ties of lion skin, making a brave show. They entreated us to go
+  with them, and said they would give us the Christians, water, and
+  many other things. They continued to collect about us in canoes,
+  attempting in them to take possession of the mouth of that
+  entrance; in consequence, and because it was hazardous to stay
+  near the land, we went to sea, where they remained by us until
+  about mid-day. As they would not deliver our people, we would not
+  give up theirs; so they began to hurl clubs at us and to throw
+  stones with slings, making threats of shooting arrows, although
+  we had not seen among them all more than three or four bows.
+  While thus engaged, the wind beginning to freshen, they left us
+  and went back.
+
+  [76] "Three or four," according to the Letter (Oviedo, p. 589),
+  which also gives the number of canoes as twenty.
+
+We sailed that day until the middle of the afternoon, when my boat,
+which was the first, discovered a point made by the land, and against
+a cape opposite, passed a broad river.[77] I cast anchor near a
+little island forming the point, to await the arrival of the other
+boats. The Governor did not choose to come up, and entered a bay near
+by in which were a great many islets. We came together there, and
+took fresh water from the sea, the stream entering it in freshet.[78]
+To parch some of the maize we brought with us, since we had eaten
+it raw for two days, we went on an island; but finding no wood we
+agreed to go to the river beyond the point, one league off. By no
+effort could we get there, so violent was the current on the way,
+which drove us out, while we contended and strove to gain the land.
+The north wind, which came from the shore, began to blow so strongly
+that it forced us to sea without our being able to overcome it. We
+sounded half a league out, and found with thirty fathoms[79] we could
+not get bottom; but we were unable to satisfy ourselves that the
+current was not the cause of failure. Toiling in this manner to fetch
+the land, we navigated three days, and at the end of this time, a
+little before the sun rose, we saw smoke in several places along the
+shore. Attempting to reach them, we found ourselves in three fathoms
+of water, and in the darkness we dared not come to land; for as we
+had seen so many smokes, some surprise might lie in wait, and the
+obscurity leave us at a loss how to act. We determined therefore to
+stop until morning.
+
+  [77] According to the Letter they travelled two days more before
+  reaching this point of land.
+
+  [78] The Mississippi, the waters of which were now seen by white
+  men fourteen years before the "discovery" of the stream by De
+  Soto.
+
+  [79] The present normal depth at this distance from the delta is
+  about sixty feet.
+
+When day came, the boats had lost sight of each other. I found myself
+in thirty fathoms. Keeping my course until the hour of vespers,
+I observed two boats, and drawing near I found that the first I
+approached was that of the Governor. He asked me what I thought
+we should do. I told him we ought to join the boat which went in
+advance, and by no means to leave her; and, the three being together,
+we must keep on our way to where God should be pleased to lead. He
+answered saying that could not be done, because the boat was far to
+sea and he wished to reach the shore; that if I wished to follow him,
+I should order the persons of my boat to take the oars and work, as
+it was only by strength of arm that the land could be gained. He
+was advised to this course by a captain with him named Pantoja, who
+said that if he did not fetch land that day, in six days more they
+would not reach it, and in that time they must inevitably famish.
+Discovering his will I took my oar, and so did every one his, in my
+boat, to obey it. We rowed until near sunset; but the Governor having
+in his boat the healthiest of all the men, we could not by any means
+hold with or follow her. Seeing this, I asked him to give me a rope
+from his boat, that I might be enabled to keep up with him; but he
+answered me that he would do much, if they, as they were, should be
+able to reach the land that night. I said to him, that since he saw
+the feeble strength we had to follow him, and do what he ordered,
+he must tell me how he would that I should act. He answered that it
+was no longer a time in which one should command another; but that
+each should do what he thought best to save his own life; that he so
+intended to act; and saying this, he departed with his boat.[80]
+
+  [80] The selfishness and incompetence of Narvaez, shown
+  throughout the narration, are here further exemplified. His
+  life had more than once been spared through the self-sacrifice
+  of his men, yet he now thought more of saving himself, with the
+  aid of his hardy crew, than of lending a hand to his weakened
+  companions.
+
+As I could not follow him, I steered to the other boat at sea,
+which waited for me, and having come up, I found her to be the one
+commanded by the Captains Peñalosa and Tellez.
+
+Thus we continued in company, eating a daily allowance of half a
+handful of raw maize, until the end of four days, when we lost
+sight of each other in a storm; and such was the weather that only
+by God's favor we did not all go down. Because of winter and its
+inclemency, the many days we had suffered hunger, and the heavy
+beating of the waves, the people began next day to despair in such a
+manner that when the sun sank, all who were in my boat were fallen
+one on another, so near to death that there were few among them in a
+state of sensibility. Of the whole number at this time not five men
+were on their feet; and when night came, only the master and myself
+were left, who could work the boat. Two hours after dark, he said
+to me that I must take charge of her as he was in such condition he
+believed he should die that night. So I took the paddle, and going
+after midnight to see if the master was alive he said to me he was
+rather better, and would take the charge until day. I declare in that
+hour I would more willingly have died than seen so many people before
+me in such condition. After the master took the direction of the
+boat, I lay down a little while; but without repose, for nothing at
+that time was farther from me than sleep.
+
+Near the dawn of day, it seemed to me I heard the tumbling of the
+sea; for as the coast was low, it roared loudly. Surprised at this,
+I called to the master, who answered me that he believed we were
+near the land. We sounded and found ourselves in seven fathoms. He
+advised that we should keep to sea until sunrise; accordingly I took
+an oar and pulled on the land side, until we were a league distant,
+when we gave her stern to the sea. Near the shore a wave took us,
+that knocked the boat out of water the distance of the throw of a
+crowbar,[81] and from the violence with which she struck, nearly all
+the people who were in her like dead, were roused to consciousness.
+Finding themselves near the shore, they began to move on hands and
+feet, crawling to land into some ravines. There we made fire, parched
+some of the maize we brought, and found rain water. From the warmth
+of the fire the people recovered their faculties, and began somewhat
+to exert themselves. The day on which we arrived was the sixth of
+November [1528].
+
+  [81] _Juego de herradura_, a game played with an iron bar, often
+  a crowbar, which is grasped at the middle and cast as far as
+  possible.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 11
+
+_Of what befell Lope de Oviedo with the Indians._
+
+
+After the people had eaten, I ordered Lope de Oviedo, who had more
+strength and was stouter than any of the rest, to go to some trees
+that were near by, and climbing into one of them to look about and
+try to gain knowledge of the country. He did as I bade, and made out
+that we were on an island.[82] He saw that the land was pawed up in
+the manner that ground is wont to be where cattle range, whence it
+appeared to him that this should be a country of Christians; and thus
+he reported to us. I ordered him to return and examine much more
+particularly, and see if there were any roads that were worn, but
+without going far, because there might be danger.
+
+  [82] See p. 57, note 2.
+
+He went, and coming to a path, took it for the distance of half a
+league, and found some huts, without tenants, they having gone into
+the field.[83] He took from these an earthen pot, a little dog,
+some few mullets, and returned. As it appeared to us he was gone a
+long time, we sent two men that they should look to see what might
+have happened. They met him near by, and saw that three Indians
+with bows and arrows followed and were calling to him, while he,
+in the same way, was beckoning them on. Thus he arrived where we
+were, the natives remaining a little way back, seated on the shore.
+Half an hour after, they were supported by one hundred other Indian
+bowmen,[84] who if they were not large, our fears made giants of
+them. They stopped near us with the first three. It were idle to
+think that any among us could make defence, for it would have been
+difficult to find six that could rise from the ground. The assessor
+and I went out and called to them, and they came to us. We endeavored
+the best we could to encourage them and secure their favor. We gave
+them beads and hawk-bells, and each of them gave me an arrow, which
+is a pledge of friendship. They told us by signs that they would
+return in the morning and bring us something to eat, as at that time
+they had nothing.[85]
+
+  [83] As this was the root-digging season, the word _campo_ in the
+  original evidently refers to the digging "grounds" in the shoal
+  water, and not to "woods" as Mr. Smith interpreted it.
+
+  [84] "Two hundred archers with holes in their ears in which were
+  joints of cane." Oviedo, p. 590.
+
+  [85] For an account of these Indians, see ch. 14, p. 50, 51.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 12
+
+_The Indians bring us food._
+
+
+At sunrise the next day, the time the Indians appointed, they came
+according to their promise, and brought us a large quantity of fish
+with certain roots, some a little larger than walnuts, others a
+trifle smaller, the greater part got from under the water and with
+much labor. In the evening they returned and brought us more fish
+and roots. They sent their women and children to look at us, who
+went back rich with the hawk-bells and beads given them, and they
+came afterwards on other days, returning as before. Finding that we
+had provision, fish, roots, water, and other things we asked for, we
+determined to embark again and pursue our course. Having dug out our
+boat from the sand in which it was buried, it became necessary that
+we should strip, and go through great exertion to launch her, we
+being in such a state that things very much lighter sufficed to make
+us great labor.
+
+Thus embarked, at the distance of two crossbow shots in the sea
+we shipped a wave that entirely wet us. As we were naked, and the
+cold was very great, the oars loosened in our hands, and the next
+blow the sea struck us, capsized the boat. The assessor[86] and two
+others held fast to her for preservation, but it happened to be far
+otherwise; the boat carried them over, and they were drowned under
+her. As the surf near the shore was very high, a single roll of the
+sea threw the rest into the waves and half drowned upon the shore
+of the island, without our losing any more than those the boat took
+down. The survivors escaped naked as they were born, with the loss
+of all they had; and although the whole was of little value, at that
+time it was worth much, as we were then in November, the cold was
+severe, and our bodies were so emaciated the bones might be counted
+with little difficulty, having become the perfect figures of death.
+For myself I can say that from the month of May passed, I had eaten
+no other thing than maize, and sometimes I found myself obliged to
+eat it unparched; for although the beasts were slaughtered while the
+boats were building, I could never eat their flesh, and I did not
+eat fish ten times. I state this to avoid giving excuses, and that
+every one may judge in what condition we were. Besides all these
+misfortunes, came a north wind upon us, from which we were nearer
+to death than life. Thanks be to our Lord that, looking among the
+brands we had used there, we found sparks from which we made great
+fires. And thus were we asking mercy of Him and pardon for our
+transgressions, shedding many tears, and each regretting not his own
+fate alone, but that of his comrades about him.
+
+  [86] Alonzo de Solis.
+
+At sunset, the Indians thinking that we had not gone, came to seek
+us and bring us food; but when they saw us thus, in a plight so
+different from what it was before, and so extraordinary, they were
+alarmed and turned back. I went toward them and called, when they
+returned much frightened. I gave them to understand by signs that
+our boat had sunk and three of our number had been drowned. There,
+before them, they saw two of the departed, and we who remained were
+near joining them. The Indians, at sight of what had befallen us,
+and our state of suffering and melancholy destitution, sat down
+among us, and from the sorrow and pity they felt, they all began to
+lament so earnestly that they might have been heard at a distance,
+and continued so doing more than half an hour. It was strange to
+see these men, wild and untaught, howling like brutes over our
+misfortunes. It caused in me as in others, an increase of feeling and
+a livelier sense of our calamity.
+
+The cries having ceased, I talked with the Christians, and said that
+if it appeared well to them, I would beg these Indians to take us to
+their houses. Some, who had been in New Spain, replied that we ought
+not to think of it; for if they should do so, they would sacrifice
+us to their idols. But seeing no better course, and that any other
+led to a nearer and more certain death, I disregarded what was
+said, and besought the Indians to take us to their dwellings. They
+signified that it would give them delight, and that we should tarry
+a little, that they might do what we asked. Presently thirty men
+loaded themselves with wood and started for their houses, which were
+far off,[87] and we remained with the others until near night, when,
+holding us up, they carried us with all haste. Because of the extreme
+coldness of the weather, lest any one should die or fail by the way,
+they caused four or five very large fires to be placed at intervals,
+and at each they warmed us; and when they saw that we had regained
+some heat and strength, they took us to the next so swiftly that they
+hardly let us touch our feet to the ground. In this manner we went as
+far as their habitations, where we found that they had made a house
+for us with many fires in it. An hour after our arrival, they began
+to dance and hold great rejoicing, which lasted all night, although
+for us there was no joy, festivity nor sleep, awaiting the hour they
+should make us victims. In the morning they again gave us fish and
+roots, showing us such hospitality that we were reassured, and lost
+somewhat the fear of sacrifice.
+
+  [87] As he does not speak of crossing water, the dwellings of
+  these Indians were doubtless those seen by Lope de Oviedo on
+  the island, where they lived from October until March, for the
+  purpose of obtaining the roots from the shoal water, as well as
+  fish and oysters.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 13
+
+_We hear of other Christians._
+
+
+This day I saw a native with an article of traffic I knew was not
+one we had bestowed; and asking whence it came, I was told by signs
+that it had been given by men like ourselves who were behind. Hearing
+this I sent two Indians, and with them two Christians to be shown
+those persons. They met near by,[88] as the men were coming to look
+after us; for the Indians of the place where they were, gave them
+information concerning us. They were Captains Andrés Dorantes and
+Alonzo del Castillo, with all the persons of their boat. Having come
+up they were surprised at seeing us in the condition we were, and
+very much pained at having nothing to give us, as they had brought no
+other clothes than what they had on.
+
+  [88] This would seem to indicate that Dorantes' boat was cast
+  ashore on the same island.
+
+Thus together again, they related that on the fifth day of that
+month,[89] their boat had capsized a league and a half[90] from
+there, and they escaped without losing any thing. We all agreed to
+refit their [our] boat, that those of us might go in her who had
+vigor sufficient and disposition to do so, and the rest should remain
+until they became well enough to go, as they best might, along the
+coast until God our Lord should be pleased to conduct us alike to a
+land of Christians. Directly as we arranged this, we set ourselves
+to work. Before we threw the boat out into the water, Tavera, a
+gentleman of our company, died; and the boat, which we thought to
+use, came to its end, sinking from unfitness to float.
+
+  [89] November, 1528. Dorantes' boat was therefore cast ashore the
+  day before the landing of Cabeza de Vaca's party.
+
+  [90] About four miles.
+
+As we were in the condition I have mentioned, the greater number of
+us naked, and the weather boisterous for travel, and to cross rivers
+and bays by swimming, and we being entirely without provisions or
+the means of carrying any, we yielded obedience to what necessity
+required, to pass the winter in the place where we were. We also
+agreed that four men of the most robust should go on to Panunco,[91]
+which we believed to be near, and if, by Divine favor, they should
+reach there, they could give information of our remaining on that
+island, and of our sorrows and destitution. These men were excellent
+swimmers. One of them was Alvaro Fernandez, a Portuguese sailor and
+carpenter, the second was named Mendez, the third Figueroa, who was a
+native of Toledo, and the fourth Astudillo, a native of Çafra. They
+took with them an Indian of the island of Auia.[92]
+
+  [91] Pánuco, previously referred to.
+
+  [92] The edition of 1542 omits the last two words. _Auia_ has
+  been regarded as the native name of Malhado Island, but this
+  is seemingly an error, otherwise Cabeza de Vaca would in all
+  probability have mentioned the nativity of the Indian in later
+  speaking (ch. 17) of his death from cold and hunger. Herrera
+  says: "the island of Cuba," which seems more probable.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 14
+
+_The departure of four Christians._
+
+
+The four Christians being gone, after a few days such cold and
+tempestuous weather succeeded that the Indians could not pull up
+roots, the cane weirs in which they took fish no longer yielded any
+thing, and the houses being very open, our people began to die.
+Five Christians, of a mess [quartered] on the coast, came to
+such extremity that they ate their dead; the body of the last one
+only was found unconsumed. Their names were Sierra, Diego Lopez,
+Corral, Palacios and Gonçalo Ruiz. This produced great commotion
+among the Indians giving rise to so much censure that had they known
+it in season to have done so, doubtless they would have destroyed
+any survivor, and we should have found ourselves in the utmost
+perplexity. Finally, of eighty men who arrived in the two instances,
+fifteen only remained alive.
+
+After this, the natives were visited by a disease of the bowels, of
+which half their number died. They conceived that we had destroyed
+them,[93] and believing it firmly, they concerted among themselves to
+dispatch those of us who survived. When they were about to execute
+their purpose, an Indian who had charge of me, told them not to
+believe we were the cause of those deaths, since if we had such power
+we should also have averted the fatality from so many of our people,
+whom they had seen die without our being able to minister relief,
+already very few of us remaining, and none doing hurt or wrong, and
+that it would be better to leave us unharmed. God our Lord willed
+that the others should heed this opinion and counsel, and be hindered
+in their design.
+
+  [93] That is, the Indians believed the Christians to be sorcerers.
+
+To this island we gave the name Malhado.[94] The people[95] we found
+there are large and well formed; they have no other arms than bows
+and arrows, in the use of which they are very dexterous. The men
+have one of their nipples bored from side to side, and some have
+both, wearing a cane in each, the length of two palms and a half, and
+the thickness of two fingers. They have the under lip also bored,
+and wear in it a piece of cane the breadth of half a finger. Their
+women are accustomed to great toil. The stay they make on the island
+is from October to the end of February. Their subsistence then is
+the root I have spoken of, got from under the water in November and
+December. They have weirs of cane and take fish only in this season;
+afterwards they live on the roots. At the end of February, they go
+into other parts to seek food; for then the root is beginning to grow
+and is not food.
+
+  [94] "Misfortune," "ill-fate."
+
+  [95] The Capoques, or Cahoques, and the Hans. See ch. 26.
+
+Those people love their offspring the most of any in the world, and
+treat them with the greatest mildness.[96] When it occurs that a son
+dies, the parents and kindred weep as does everybody; the wailing
+continuing for him a whole year. They begin before dawn every day,
+the parents first and after them the whole town. They do the same at
+noon and at sunset. After a year of mourning has passed, the rites
+of the dead are performed; then they wash and purify themselves from
+the stain of smoke. They lament all the deceased in this manner,
+except the aged, for whom they show no regret, as they say that
+their season has passed, they having no enjoyment, and that living
+they would occupy the earth and take aliment from the young. Their
+custom is to bury the dead, unless it be those among them who have
+been physicians. These they burn. While the fire kindles they are all
+dancing and making high festivity, until the bones become powder.
+After the lapse of a year the funeral honors are celebrated, every
+one taking part in them, when that dust is presented in water for the
+relatives to drink.[97]
+
+  [96] This is characteristic of all Indians, who punish their
+  children very rarely.
+
+  [97] Nevertheless these same people were so horrified by the
+  uncanny action of the Spaniards who ate their dead companions
+  that they sought to put them to death. It should be noted that
+  the Attacapan and probably the Karankawan tribes of the Texas
+  coast, to which the people of Malhado Island may have belonged,
+  were reputed to be cannibals.
+
+Every man has an acknowledged wife. The physicians are allowed more
+freedom: they may have two or three wives, among whom exist the
+greatest friendship and harmony. From the time a daughter marries,
+all that he who takes her to wife kills in hunting or catches in
+fishing, the woman brings to the house of her father, without daring
+to eat or take any part of it, and thence victuals are taken to the
+husband. From that time neither her father nor mother enters his
+house, nor can he enter theirs, nor the houses of their children; and
+if by chance they are in the direction of meeting, they turn aside,
+and pass the distance of a crossbow shot from each other, carrying
+the head low the while, the eyes cast on the ground; for they hold
+it improper to see or to speak to each other.[98] But the woman has
+liberty to converse and communicate with the parents and relatives of
+her husband. The custom exists from this island the distance of more
+than fifty leagues inland.
+
+  [98] Tabu of the mother-in-law by a young man is quite common
+  among the Indians, but refusal to see or to speak to the wife's
+  father is very rare.
+
+There is another custom, which is, when a son or brother dies, at the
+house where the death takes place they do not go after food for three
+months, but sooner famish, their relatives and neighbors providing
+what they eat. As in the time we were there a great number of the
+natives died, in most houses there was very great hunger, because
+of the keeping of this their custom and observance; for although
+they who sought after food worked hard, yet from the severity of the
+season they could get but little; in consequence, the Indians who
+kept me, left the island, and passed over in canoes to the main,
+into some bays where are many oysters. For three months in the year
+they eat nothing besides these, and drink very bad water.[99] There
+is great want of wood: mosquitos are in great plenty. The houses are
+of mats, set up on masses of oyster shells, which they sleep upon,
+and in skins, should they accidentally possess them. In this way we
+lived until April [1529], when we went to the seashore, where we ate
+blackberries all the month, during which time the Indians did not
+omit to observe their _areitos_[100] and festivities.
+
+  [99] On their food, compare Oviedo, p. 592.
+
+  [100] An _areito_, or _areyto_, was a dance ceremony of the
+  Arawak Indians of the West Indies in which their traditions were
+  recounted in chants. Like _buhío_, previously mentioned, the word
+  was now carried to the continent.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 15
+
+_What befell us among the people of Malhado._
+
+
+On an island of which I have spoken, they wished to make us
+physicians without examination or inquiring for diplomas. They cure
+by blowing upon the sick, and with that breath and the imposing of
+hands they cast out infirmity. They ordered that we also should do
+this, and be of use to them in some way. We laughed at what they
+did, telling them it was folly, that we knew not how to heal. In
+consequence, they withheld food from us until we should practise
+what they required. Seeing our persistence, an Indian told me I knew
+not what I uttered, in saying that what he knew availed nothing; for
+stones and other matters growing about in the fields have virtue,
+and that passing a pebble along the stomach would take away pain and
+restore health, and certainly then we who were extraordinary men must
+possess power and efficacy over all other things. At last, finding
+ourselves in great want we were constrained to obey; but without fear
+lest we should be blamed for any failure or success.
+
+Their custom is, on finding themselves sick to send for a physician,
+and after he has applied the cure, they give him not only all
+they have, but seek among their relatives for more to give. The
+practitioner scarifies over the seat of pain, and then sucks about
+the wound. They make cauteries with fire, a remedy among them in
+high repute, which I have tried on myself and found benefit from it.
+They afterwards blow on the spot, and having finished, the patient
+considers that he is relieved.
+
+Our method was to bless the sick, breathing upon them, and recite
+a Pater-noster and an Ave-Maria, praying with all earnestness to
+God our Lord that he would give health and influence them to make
+us some good return. In his clemency he willed that all those for
+whom we supplicated, should tell the others that they were sound
+and in health, directly after we made the sign of the blessed cross
+over them. For this the Indians treated us kindly; they deprived
+themselves of food that they might give to us, and presented us with
+skins and some trifles.
+
+So protracted was the hunger we there experienced, that many times I
+was three days without eating. The natives also endured as much; and
+it appeared to me a thing impossible that life could be so prolonged,
+although afterwards I found myself in greater hunger and necessity,
+which I shall speak of farther on.
+
+The Indians who had Alonzo del Castillo, Andrés Dorantes, and the
+others that remained alive, were of a different tongue and ancestry
+from these,[101] and went to the opposite shore of the main to eat
+oysters, where they staid until the first day of April, when they
+returned. The distance is two leagues in the widest part. The island
+is half a league in breadth and five leagues in length.[102]
+
+  [101] These were evidently the Hans, of whom he speaks later.
+
+  [102] See p. 57, note 2.
+
+The inhabitants of all this region go naked. The women alone have
+any part of their persons covered, and it is with a wool[103] that
+grows on trees. The damsels dress themselves in deer-skin. The people
+are generous to each other of what they possess. They have no chief.
+All that are of a lineage keep together. They speak two languages;
+those of one are called Capoques, those of the other, Han.[104] They
+have a custom when they meet, or from time to time when they visit,
+of remaining half an hour before they speak, weeping;[105] and, this
+over, he that is visited first rises and gives the other all he has,
+which is received, and after a little while he carries it away, and
+often goes without saying a word. They have other strange customs;
+but I have told the principal of them, and the most remarkable, that
+I may pass on and further relate what befell us.
+
+  [103] Spanish moss.
+
+  [104] Important as it is in affording evidence of the route of
+  Cabeza de Vaca and his companions, it is not possible, with our
+  present knowledge of the former tribes of the coast region of
+  Texas, to identify with certainty the various Indians mentioned
+  by the narrator. Whether the names given by him are those
+  which the natives applied to themselves or are those given
+  by other tribes is unknown, and as no remnant of this once
+  considerable coast population now exists, the only hope of the
+  ultimate determination of these Indians lies in the historical
+  archives of Texas, Mexico, and Spain. The two languages and
+  stocks represented on the island of Malhado--the Capoque and
+  the Han--would seem to apply to the Karankawan and Attacapan
+  families respectively. The Capoques (called Cahoques on p. 87)
+  are seemingly identical with the Cocos who lived with the Mayayes
+  on the coast between the Brazos and Colorado Rivers in 1778, and
+  with the Cokés, who as late as 1850 are described as a branch of
+  the Koronks (Karankawa). Of the Han people nothing more definite
+  is known than that which is here recorded.
+
+  [105] Compare Barcia, _Ensayo_, 263, 1723, and Gatschet in
+  _Archaeological and Ethnological Papers of the Peabody Museum_,
+  Harvard University, 1891, for references to these "weepers."
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 16
+
+_The Christians leave the island of Malhado._
+
+
+After Dorantes and Castillo returned to the island, they brought
+together the Christians, who were somewhat separated, and found them
+in all to be fourteen. As I have said, I was opposite on the main,
+where my Indians had taken me, and where so great sickness had come
+upon me, that if anything before had given me hopes of life, this
+were enough to have entirely bereft me of them.
+
+When the Christians heard of my condition, they gave an Indian the
+cloak of marten skins we had taken from the cacique, as before
+related, to pass them over to where I was that they might visit
+me. Twelve of them crossed; for two were so feeble that their
+comrades could not venture to bring them. The names of those who
+came were Alonzo del Castillo, Andrés Dorantes, Diego Dorantes,
+Valdevieso,[106] Estrada, Tostado, Chaves, Gutierrez, Asturiano a
+clergyman, Diego de Huelva, Estevanico the black, and Benitez; and
+when they reached the main land, they found another, who was one of
+our company, named Francisco de Leon. The thirteen together followed
+along the coast. So soon as they had come over, my Indians informed
+me of it, and that Hieronymo de Alvaniz[107] and Lope de Oviedo
+remained on the island. But sickness prevented me from going with my
+companions or even seeing them.
+
+  [106] Diego Dorantes and Pedro de Valdivieso were cousins of
+  Andrés Dorantes. See p. 69.
+
+  [107] Called also Alaniz--the notary.
+
+I was obliged to remain with the people belonging to the island[108]
+more than a year, and because of the hard work they put upon me and
+the harsh treatment, I resolved to flee from them and go to those of
+Charruco, who inhabit the forests and country of the main, the life I
+led being insupportable. Besides much other labor, I had to get out
+roots from below the water, and from among the cane where they grew
+in the ground. From this employment I had my fingers so worn that
+did a straw but touch them they would bleed. Many of the canes are
+broken, so they often tore my flesh, and I had to go in the midst of
+them with only the clothing on I have mentioned.
+
+  [108] The Capoques.
+
+Accordingly, I put myself to contriving how I might get over to the
+other Indians, among whom matters turned somewhat more favorably for
+me. I set to trafficking, and strove to make my employment profitable
+in the ways I could best contrive, and by that means I got food and
+good treatment. The Indians would beg me to go from one quarter
+to another for things of which they have need; for in consequence
+of incessant hostilities, they cannot traverse the country, nor
+make many exchanges. With my merchandise and trade I went into the
+interior as far as I pleased, and travelled along the coast forty
+or fifty leagues. The principal wares were cones and other pieces
+of sea-snail, conchs used for cutting, and fruit like a bean of the
+highest value among them, which they use as a medicine and employ in
+their dances and festivities. Among other matters were sea-beads.
+Such were what I carried into the interior; and in barter I got
+and brought back skins, ochre with which they rub and color the
+face, hard canes of which to make arrows, sinews, cement and flint
+for the heads, and tassels of the hair of deer that by dyeing they
+make red. This occupation suited me well; for the travel allowed me
+liberty to go where I wished, I was not obliged to work, and was not
+a slave. Wherever I went I received fair treatment, and the Indians
+gave me to eat out of regard to my commodities. My leading object,
+while journeying in this business, was to find out the way by which
+I should go forward, and I became well known. The inhabitants were
+pleased when they saw me, and I had brought them what they wanted;
+and those who did not know me sought and desired the acquaintance,
+for my reputation. The hardships that I underwent in this were long
+to tell, as well of peril and privation as of storms and cold.
+Oftentimes they overtook me alone and in the wilderness; but I came
+forth from them all by the great mercy of God our Lord. Because of
+them I avoided pursuing the business in winter, a season in which
+the natives themselves retire to their huts and ranches, torpid and
+incapable of exertion.
+
+I was in this country nearly six years,[109] alone among the Indians,
+and naked like them. The reason why I remained so long, was that I
+might take with me the Christian, Lope de Oviedo, from the island;
+Alaniz, his companion, who had been left with him by Alonzo del
+Castillo, and by Andrés Dorantes, and the rest, died soon after
+their departure; and to get the survivor out from there, I went over
+to the island every year, and entreated him that we should go, in
+the best way we could contrive, in quest of Christians. He put me
+off every year, saying in the next coming we would start. At last I
+got him off, crossing him over the bay, and over four rivers in the
+coast,[110] as he could not swim. In this way we went on with some
+Indians, until coming to a bay a league in width, and everywhere
+deep. From the appearance we supposed it to be that which is called
+Espiritu Sancto. We met some Indians on the other side of it, coming
+to visit ours, who told us that beyond them were three men like us,
+and gave their names. We asked for the others, and were told that
+they were all dead of cold and hunger; that the Indians farther on,
+of whom they were, for their diversion had killed Diego Dorantes,
+Valdevieso, and Diego de Huelva,[111] because they left one house for
+another; and that other Indians, their neighbors with whom Captain
+Dorantes now was, had in consequence of a dream, killed Esquivel
+and Mendez.[112] We asked how the living were situated, and they
+answered that they were very ill used, the boys and some of the
+Indian men being very idle, out of cruelty gave them many kicks,
+cuffs, and blows with sticks; that such was the life they led.
+
+  [109] From 1528 to 1533.
+
+  [110] The identification of Malhado Island is a difficult
+  problem. On general principles Galveston Island would seem to
+  supply the conditions, in that it more likely would have been
+  inhabited by two distinct tribes, perhaps representing distinct
+  linguistic families, as it is known to have been occupied by
+  Indians (the Karankawa) at a later period, besides having the
+  smaller island or islands behind it. But its size and the other
+  conditions are not in favor of the identification, for its
+  length is at least twice as great as that of Malhado, as given
+  in the narrative, and it is also more than two leagues from
+  its nearest end to the first stream that the Spaniards crossed
+  after departing from the island (Oviedo, p. 593). Mr. James
+  Newton Baskett suggests that the so-called Velasco Island, next
+  south of Galveston Island, better fulfils the requirements, as
+  indeed it does topographically, except for the fact that it
+  is really a peninsula. Aside from this, it possesses all the
+  physical features,--length and width, distance from the first
+  stream to the southward, and having the necessary island or
+  islands (Mud and San Luis) off its northern shore. Accepting
+  Mr. Baskett's determination, it is not difficult to account for
+  the four streams, "very large and of rapid current," one of
+  which flowed directly into the gulf. Following the journey of
+  the Spaniards from the island, down the coast, in April, when
+  the streams were swollen by flood, the first river was crossed
+  in two leagues after they had reached the mainland. This was
+  evidently Oyster Creek. Three leagues farther was another river,
+  running so powerfully that one of the rafts was driven to sea
+  more than a league. This fully agrees with the Brazos, which
+  indeed is the only large stream of the landlocked Texas coast
+  that flows directly into the gulf. Four leagues still farther
+  they reached another river, where the boat of the comptroller and
+  the commissary was found. From this fact it may be assumed that
+  this stream also flowed into the open gulf, a condition satisfied
+  by Caney Creek. The San Bernardo may well have escaped notice in
+  travelling near the coast, from the fact that it flows into Cedar
+  Lake. Five or six leagues more brought them to another large
+  river (the Colorado), which the Indians carried them across in a
+  canoe; and in four days they reached the bay of Espíritu Santo
+  (La Vaca Bay?). "The bay was broad, nearly a league across. The
+  side toward Pánuco [the south] forms a point running out nearly
+  a quarter of a league, having on it some large white sand-stacks
+  which it is reasonable to suppose can be descried from a distance
+  at sea, and were consequently thought to mark the River Espíritu
+  Santo." After two days of exertion they succeeded in crossing the
+  bay in a broken canoe; and at the end of twelve leagues they came
+  to a small bay not more than the breadth of a river. Here they
+  found Figueroa, the only survivor of the four who had attempted
+  to return to Mexico. The distance from Malhado Island is given as
+  sixty leagues, consequently the journey from the Colorado to the
+  bay now reached, which seems to be no other than San Antonio Bay,
+  covered thirty-two to thirty-three leagues. Lofty sand dunes,
+  such as those seen on what we regard as perhaps La Vaca Bay,
+  occur on San Antonio Bay. See _United States Coast Survey Report_
+  for 1859, p. 325. The western shore of the bay is a bluff or bank
+  of twenty feet. "At one place on this side, a singular range of
+  sand-hills, known as the Sand-mounds, approaches the shore. The
+  highest peak is about seventy-five feet above the bay."
+
+  [111] These were all members of Dorantes' party who visited
+  Cabeza de Vaca when he was ill on the mainland. See p. 55.
+
+  [112] Esquivel was one of the party under Enrriquez the
+  comptroller; Mendez was one of the good swimmers who started from
+  the island in the hope of reaching Pánuco.
+
+We desired to be informed of the country ahead, and of the
+subsistence: they said there was nothing to eat, and that it was thin
+of people, who suffered of cold, having no skins or other things
+to cover them. They told us also if we wished to see those three
+Christians, two days from that time the Indians who had them would
+come to eat walnuts a league from there on the margin of that river;
+and that we might know what they told us of the ill usage to be
+true, they slapped my companion and beat him with a stick, and I was
+not left without my portion. Many times they threw lumps of mud at
+us, and every day they put their arrows to our hearts, saying that
+they were inclined to kill us in the way that they had destroyed
+our friends. Lope Oviedo, my comrade, in fear said that he wished
+to go back with the women of those who had crossed the bay with us,
+the men having remained some distance behind. I contended strongly
+against his returning, and urged my objections; but in no way could I
+keep him. So he went back, and I remained alone with those savages.
+They are called Quevenes,[113] and those with whom he returned,
+Deaguanes.[114]
+
+  [113] _Guevenes_ in the edition of 1542 (Bandelier translation).
+  There is reason to believe that these people may have been
+  identical with the Cohani, who lived west of the Colorado River
+  of Texas in the first quarter of the nineteenth century.
+
+  [114] _Doguenes_ in ch. 26.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 17
+
+_The coming of Indians with Andrés Dorantes, Castillo, and
+Estevanico._
+
+
+Two days after Lope de Oviedo left, the Indians who had Alonzo del
+Castillo and Andrés Dorantes, came to the place of which we had been
+told, to eat walnuts. These are ground with a kind of small grain,
+and this is the subsistence of the people two months in the year
+without any other thing; but even the nuts they do not have every
+season, as the tree produces in alternate years. The fruit is the
+size of that in Galicia; the trees are very large and numerous.
+
+An Indian told me of the arrival of the Christians, and that if I
+wished to see them I must steal away and flee to the point of a wood
+to which he directed me, and that as he and others, kindred of his,
+should pass by there to visit those Indians, they would take me with
+them to the spot where the Christians were. I determined to attempt
+this and trust to them, as they spoke a language distinct from that
+of the others. I did so, and the next day they left, and found me in
+the place that had been pointed out, and accordingly took me with
+them.
+
+When I arrived near their abode, Andrés Dorantes came out to see
+who it could be, for the Indians had told him that a Christian was
+coming. His astonishment was great when he saw me, as they had for
+many a day considered me dead, and the natives had said that I was.
+We gave many thanks at seeing ourselves together, and this was a day
+to us of the greatest pleasure we had enjoyed in life. Having come
+to where Castillo was, they inquired of me where I was going. I told
+them my purpose was to reach the land of Christians, I being then in
+search and pursuit of it. Andrés Dorantes said that for a long time
+he had entreated Castillo and Estevanico to go forward; but that they
+dared not venture, because they knew not how to swim, and greatly
+dreaded the rivers and bays they should have to cross, there being
+many in that country. Thus the Almighty had been pleased to preserve
+me through many trials and diseases, conducting me in the end to the
+fellowship of those who had abandoned me, that I might lead them over
+the bays and rivers that obstructed our progress. They advised me on
+no account to let the natives know or have a suspicion of my desire
+to go on, else they would destroy me; and that for success it would
+be necessary for me to remain quiet until the end of six months, when
+comes the season in which these Indians go to another part of the
+country to eat prickly pears.[115] People would arrive from parts
+farther on, bringing bows to barter and for exchange, with whom,
+after making our escape, we should be able to go on their return.
+Having consented to this course, I remained. The prickly pear is the
+size of a hen's egg, vermillion and black in color, and of agreeable
+flavor. The natives live on it three months in the year, having
+nothing beside.
+
+  [115] The fruit of the _Opuntia_ cactus, of which there are about
+  two hundred species.
+
+I was given as a slave to an Indian, with whom was Dorantes. He
+was blind of one eye, as were also his wife and sons, and likewise
+another who was with him; so that of a fashion they were all blind.
+These are called Marians;[116] Castillo was with another neighboring
+people, called Yguases.[117]
+
+  [116] _Mariames_ in ch. 26, and in the edition of 1542. These
+  people are not identified. They were possibly of Karankawan or
+  Coahuiltecan affinity, but there is no direct evidence of this.
+
+  [117] _Iguaces_ in the edition of 1542.
+
+While here the Christians related to me how they had left the
+island of Malhado, and found the boat in which the comptroller and
+the friars had sailed, bottom up on the seashore; and that going
+along crossing the rivers, which are four,[118] very large and of
+rapid current, their boats[119] were swept away and carried to sea,
+where four of their number were drowned; that thus they proceeded
+until they crossed the bay, getting over it with great difficulty,
+and fifteen leagues thence they came to another. By the time they
+reached this, they had lost two companions in the sixty leagues they
+travelled, and those remaining were nearly dead, in all the while
+having eaten nothing but crabs and rockweed.[120] Arrived at this
+bay, they found Indians eating mulberries, who, when they saw them,
+went to a cape opposite. While contriving and seeking for some means
+to cross the bay, there came over to them an Indian, and a Christian
+whom they recognized to be Figueroa, one of the four we had sent
+forward from the island of Malhado. He there recounted how he and
+his companions had got as far as that place, when two of them and
+an Indian[121] died of cold and hunger, being exposed in the most
+inclement of seasons. He and Mendez were taken by the Indians, and
+while with them his associate fled, going as well as he could in the
+direction of Pánuco, and the natives pursuing, put him to death.
+
+  [118] See p. 57, note 2.
+
+  [119] Rafts built for the purpose of crossing the streams.
+
+  [120] _Yerba pedrera_: "Of which glass is made in Spain." Oviedo,
+  p. 593. Doubtless kelp. It was burned and from the product glass
+  and soap were formerly manufactured. It is still a source of
+  manufacture of carbonate of soda and iodine.
+
+  [121] Alvaro Fernandez, the Portuguese sailor and carpenter;
+  Astudillo, the native of Zafra; and the Indian from the island of
+  "Auia" (Cuba).
+
+While living with these Indians, Figueroa learned from them that
+there was a Christian among the Mariames, who had come over from the
+opposite side, and he found him among the Quevenes. This was Hernando
+de Esquivel, a native of Badajoz, who had come in company with the
+commissary. From him Figueroa learned the end to which the Governor,
+the comptroller, and the others had come. Esquivel told him that the
+comptroller and the friars had upset their boat at the confluence
+of the rivers,[122] and that the boat of the Governor, moving along
+the coast, came with its people to land. Narváez went in the boat
+until arriving at that great bay, where he took in the people, and,
+crossing them to the opposite point, returned for the comptroller,
+the friars, and the rest. And he related that being disembarked, the
+Governor had recalled the commission the comptroller held as his
+lieutenant, assigning the duties to a captain with him named Pantoja:
+that Narváez stayed the night in his boat, not wishing to come on
+shore, having a cockswain with him and a page who was unwell, there
+being no water nor anything to eat on board; that at midnight, the
+boat having only a stone for anchor, the north wind blowing strongly
+took her unobserved to sea, and they never knew more of their
+commander.
+
+  [122] The Mississippi delta.
+
+The others then went along the coast, and as they were arrested by a
+wide extent of water, they made rafts with much labor, on which they
+crossed to the opposite shore. Going on, they arrived at a point of
+woods on the banks of the water where were Indians, who, as they saw
+them coming, put their houses[123] into their canoes and went over to
+the opposite side. The Christians, in consideration of the season,
+for it was now the month of November, stopped at this wood, where
+they found water and fuel, some crabs and shell-fish. They began, one
+by one, to die of cold and hunger; and, more than this, Pantoja, who
+was Lieutenant-Governor, used them severely, which Soto-Mayor (the
+brother of Vasco Porcallo, of the island of Cuba), who had come with
+the armament as camp-master, not being able to bear, had a struggle
+with him, and, giving him a blow with a club, Pantoja was instantly
+killed.
+
+  [123] Doubtless consisting of mats fastened to a framework.
+
+Thus did the number go on diminishing. The living dried the flesh of
+them that died; and the last that died was Soto-Mayor, when Esquivel
+preserved his flesh, and, feeding on it, sustained existence until
+the first of March, when an Indian of those that had fled, coming to
+see if they were alive, took Esquivel with him. While he was in the
+possession of the native, Figueroa saw him, and learned all that had
+been related. He besought Esquivel to come with him, that together
+they might pursue the way to Pánuco; to which Esquivel would not
+consent, saying that he had understood from the friars that Pánuco
+had been left behind:[124] so he remained there and Figueroa went to
+the coast where he was accustomed to live.
+
+  [124] That is, he supposed that he was then somewhere on the
+  coast of central Mexico.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 18
+
+_The story Figueroa recounted from Esquivel._
+
+
+This account was all given by Figueroa, according to the relation he
+received from Esquivel, and from him through the others it came to
+me; whence may be seen and understood the fate of the armament, and
+the individual fortunes of the greater part of the people. Figueroa
+said, moreover, that if the Christians should at any time go in that
+direction, it were possible they might see Esquivel, for he knew that
+he had fled from the Indian with whom he was, to the Mariames, who
+were neighbors. After Figueroa had finished telling the story, he and
+the Asturian made an attempt to go to other Indians farther on; but
+as soon as they who had the Christians discovered it, they followed,
+and beating them severely, stripped the Asturian and shot an arrow
+through his arm. They finally escaped by flight.
+
+The other Christians remained, and prevailed on the Indians to
+receive them as slaves. In their service they were abused as slaves
+never were, nor men in any condition have ever been. Not content with
+frequently buffeting them, striking them with sticks, and pulling
+out their beard for amusement, they killed three of the six for only
+going from one house to another. These were the persons I have named
+before: Diego Dorantes, Valdivieso, and Diego de Huelva: and the
+three that remained looked forward to the same fate. Not to endure
+this life, Andrés Dorantes fled, and passed to the Mariames, the
+people among whom Esquivel tarried. They told him that having had
+Esquivel there, he wished to run away because a woman dreamed that a
+son of hers would kill him; and that they followed after, and slew
+him. They showed Dorantes his sword, beads, and book, with other
+things that had been his.[125]
+
+  [125] See the extracts from the letter of the survivors
+  (preserved by Oviedo) appended to this chapter.
+
+Thus in obedience to their custom they take life, destroying even
+their male children on account of dreams. They cast away their
+daughters at birth, and cause them to be eaten by dogs. The reason of
+their doing this, as they state, is because all the nations of the
+country are their foes; and as they have unceasing war with them,
+if they were to marry away their daughters, they would so greatly
+multiply their enemies that they must be overcome and made slaves;
+thus they prefer to destroy all, rather than that from them should
+come a single enemy. We asked why they did not themselves marry
+them; and they said it would be a disgustful thing to marry among
+relatives, and far better to kill than to give them either to their
+kindred or to their foes.
+
+This is likewise the practice of their neighbors the Yguazes, but of
+no other people of that country. When the men would marry, they buy
+the women of their enemies: the price paid for a wife is a bow, the
+best that can be got, with two arrows: if it happens that the suitor
+should have no bow, then a net a fathom in length and another in
+breadth. They kill their male children, and buy those of strangers.
+The marriage state continues no longer than while the parties are
+satisfied, and they separate for the slightest cause. Dorantes was
+among this people, and after a few days escaped.
+
+Castillo and Estevanico went inland to the Yguazes. This people are
+universally good archers and of a fine symmetry, although not so
+large as those we left. They have a nipple and a lip bored.[126]
+Their support is principally roots, of two or three kinds, and they
+look for them over the face of all the country. The food is poor
+and gripes the persons who eat it. The roots require roasting two
+days: many are very bitter, and withal difficult to be dug. They are
+sought the distance of two or three leagues, and so great is the
+want these people experience, that they cannot get through the year
+without them. Occasionally they kill deer, and at times take fish;
+but the quantity is so small and the famine so great, that they eat
+spiders and the eggs of ants, worms, lizards, salamanders, snakes,
+and vipers that kill whom they strike; and they eat earth and wood,
+and all that there is, the dung of deer, and other things that I omit
+to mention; and I honestly believe that were there stones in that
+land they would eat them. They save the bones of the fishes they
+consume, of snakes and other animals, that they may afterwards beat
+them together and eat the powder. The men bear no burthens, nor carry
+anything of weight; such are borne by women and old men who are of
+the least esteem. They have not so great love for their children as
+those we have before spoken of.[127] Some among them are accustomed
+to sin against nature. The women work very hard, and do a great deal;
+of the twenty-four hours they have only six of repose; the rest of
+the night they pass in heating the ovens to bake those roots they
+eat. At daybreak they begin to dig them, to bring wood and water to
+their houses and get in readiness other things that may be necessary.
+The majority of the people are great thieves; for though they are
+free to divide with each other, on turning the head, even a son or a
+father will take what he can. They are great liars, and also great
+drunkards, which they became from the use of a certain liquor.[128]
+
+  [126] Evidently for the insertion of canes, as was the custom of
+  the Capoques and Hans of the island of Malhado.
+
+  [127] The Capoques of Malhado Island.
+
+  [128] It is not improbable that the liquor was made from the
+  peyote, or mescal button, still used by the Kiowa, Comanche, and
+  others to produce stupefaction. See Mooney in _Seventeenth Report
+  of the Bureau of American Ethnology_, 1898.
+
+These Indians are so accustomed to running, that without rest or
+fatigue they follow a deer from morning to night. In this way they
+kill many. They pursue them until tired down, and sometimes overtake
+them in the race. Their houses are of matting, placed upon four
+hoops. They carry them on the back, and remove every two or three
+days in search of food. Nothing is planted for support. They are a
+merry people, considering the hunger they suffer; for they never
+cease, notwithstanding, to observe their festivities and _areytos_.
+To them the happiest part of the year is the season of eating prickly
+pears; they have hunger then no longer, pass all the time in dancing,
+and eat day and night. While these last, they squeeze out the juice,
+open and set them to dry, and when dry they are put in hampers like
+figs. These they keep to eat on their way back. The peel is beaten to
+powder.
+
+It occurred to us many times while we were among this people, and
+there was no food, to be three or four days without eating, when
+they, to revive our spirits, would tell us not to be sad, that soon
+there would be prickly pears when we should eat a plenty and drink
+of the juice, when our bellies would be very big and we should be
+content and joyful, having no hunger. From the time they first told
+us this, to that at which the earliest were ripe enough to be eaten,
+was an interval of five or six months; so having tarried until the
+lapse of this period, and the season had come, we went to eat the
+fruit.
+
+We found mosquitos of three sorts, and all of them abundant in every
+part of the country. They poison and inflame, and during the greater
+part of the summer gave us great annoyance. As a protection we made
+fires, encircling the people with them, burning rotten and wet wood
+to produce smoke without flame. The remedy brought another trouble,
+and the night long we did little else than shed tears from the smoke
+that came into our eyes, besides feeling intense heat from the many
+fires, and if at any time we went out for repose to the seaside and
+fell asleep, we were reminded with blows to make up the fires. The
+Indians of the interior have a different method, as intolerable, and
+worse even than the one I have spoken of, which is to go with brands
+in the hand firing the plains and forests within their reach, that
+the mosquitos may fly away, and at the same time to drive out lizards
+and other like things from the earth for them to eat.
+
+They are accustomed also to kill deer by encircling them with fires.
+The pasturage is taken from the cattle by burning, that necessity may
+drive them to seek it in places where it is desired they should go.
+They encamp only where there are wood and water; and sometimes all
+carry loads of these when they go to hunt deer, which are usually
+found where neither is to be got. On the day of their arrival, they
+kill the deer and other animals which they can, and consume all the
+water and all the wood in cooking and on the fires they make to
+relieve them of mosquitos. They remain the next day to get something
+to sustain them on their return; and when they go, such is their
+state from those insects that they appear to have the affliction
+of holy Lazarus. In this way do they appease their hunger, two or
+three times in the year, at the cost I have mentioned. From my own
+experience, I can state there is no torment known in this world that
+can equal it.
+
+Inland are many deer, birds, and beasts other than those I have
+spoken of. Cattle[129] come as far as here. Three times I have seen
+them and eaten of their meat. I think they are about the size of
+those in Spain. They have small horns like the cows of Morocco; the
+hair is very long and flocky like the merino's. Some are tawny,
+others black. To my judgment the flesh is finer and fatter than that
+of this country. Of the skins of those not full grown the Indians
+make blankets, and of the larger they make shoes and bucklers. They
+come as far as the sea-coast of Florida, from a northerly direction,
+ranging through a tract of more than four hundred leagues; and
+throughout the whole region over which they run, the people who
+inhabit near, descend and live upon them, distributing a vast many
+hides into the interior country.
+
+  [129] This is the first printed reference to the bison.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+[Buckingham Smith introduces the following translation from the
+_Letter_ (Oviedo, pp. 594-598) as throwing important light on the
+occurrences related in the foregoing chapter. F. W. H.]
+
+     "Thus ended the account of Figueroa, without his being able
+     to add more to it, than that Esquivel was about there in the
+     possession of some natives, and they might see him in a little
+     while; but a month afterwards, it was known that he no longer
+     lived, for having gone from the natives, they had followed after
+     and put him to death. Figueroa tarried a few moments, long
+     enough to relate the sad news. The Indian who brought him would
+     not permit him to remain. Asturiano, the clergyman, and a young
+     man being the only ones who could swim, accompanied them for
+     the purpose of returning with fish which they were promised, as
+     likewise that they should be brought back over that bay; but
+     when the Indians found them at their houses, they would neither
+     bring them nor let them return; on the contrary, they put their
+     houses into their canoes and took the two Christians with them,
+     saying that they would soon come back....
+
+     "The eight companions remained that day to appease their hunger,
+     and the next morning they saw two Indians of a rancho coming
+     over the water to place their dwellings on the hither side. The
+     purpose was to live on blackberries that grow in some places
+     along the coast, which they seek at a season they know full
+     well, and although precarious, they promise a food that supports
+     life. They called to the Indians, who came as to persons they
+     thought lightly of, taking some part of what they possessed
+     almost by force. The Christians besought the natives to set them
+     over, which they did in a canoe, taking them to their houses
+     near by, and at dark gave them a small quantity of fish. They
+     went out the next day for more, and returned at night, giving
+     them a part of what they had caught. The day following they
+     moved off with the Christians and never after were the two seen
+     whom the other Indians had taken away.
+
+     "At last the natives, weary of seeking food for their guests,
+     turned away five, that they should go to some Indians who they
+     said were to be found in another bay, six leagues farther on.
+     Alonzo del Castillo went there with Pedro de Valdivieso, cousin
+     of Andrés Dorantes, and another, Diego de Huelva, where they
+     remained a long time; the two others went down near the coast,
+     seeking relief, where they died, as Dorantes states, who found
+     the bodies, one of whom, Diego Dorantes, was his cousin. The two
+     hidalgos and the negro remaining in that rancho, sufficed for
+     the use of the natives, to bring back-loads of wood and water as
+     slaves. After three or four days however, these likewise were
+     turned off, when for some time they wandered about lost, without
+     hope of relief; and going naked among marshes, having been
+     previously despoiled one night of their clothing, they came upon
+     those dead.
+
+     "They continued the route until they found some Indians, with
+     whom Andrés Dorantes remained. A cousin of his, one of the three
+     who had gone on to the bay where they stopped, came over from
+     the opposite shore, and told him that the swimmers who went
+     from them had passed in that direction, having their clothes
+     taken from them and they much bruised about the head with sticks
+     because they would not remain; still though beaten and stripped,
+     they had gone on for the sake of the oath they had taken, never
+     to stop even if death stood in the path, before coming to a
+     country of Christians. Dorantes states that he saw in the rancho
+     where he was, the clothes belonging to the clergyman and to one
+     of the swimmers, with a breviary or prayer book. Valdivieso
+     returned, and a couple of days afterwards was killed, because he
+     wished to flee, and likewise in a little time Diego de Huelva,
+     because he forsook one lodge-house for another.
+
+     "The Christians were there made slaves, forced with more cruelty
+     to serve than the Moor would have used. Besides going stark
+     naked and bare-footed over the coast burning in summer like
+     fire, their continual occupation was bringing wood and water on
+     the back, or whatever the Indians needed, and dragging canoes
+     over inundated grounds in hot weather.
+
+     "These natives eat nothing the year round but fish, and of
+     that not much. They experience far less hunger however, than
+     the inhabitants inland among whom the Spaniards afterwards
+     lived. The food often fails, causing frequent removals, or
+     otherwise they starve.... They have finger nails that for any
+     ordinary purpose are knives, and are their principal arms among
+     themselves....
+
+     "The Spaniards lived here fourteen months, from May to the May
+     ensuing of the year 1530, and to the middle of the month of
+     August, when Andrés Dorantes, being at a point that appeared
+     most favorable for going, commended himself to God, and went off
+     at mid-day.... Castillo tarried among that hard people a year
+     and a half later, until an opportunity presented for starting;
+     but on arriving he found only the negro; Dorantes, finding these
+     Indians unbearably cruel, had gone back more than twenty leagues
+     to a river near the bay of Espíritu Sancto, among those who had
+     killed Esquivel, the solitary one that had escaped from the
+     boats of the Governor and Alonzo Enrriques, slain, as they were
+     told, because a woman had dreamed some absurdity. The people of
+     this country have belief in dreams, their only superstition. On
+     account of them they will even kill their children; and this
+     hidalgo Dorantes states, that in the course of four years he
+     had been a witness to the killing or burying alive of eleven or
+     twelve young males, and rarely do they let a girl live....
+
+     "Andrés Dorantes passed ten months among this people, enduring
+     much privation with continual labor, and in fear of being
+     killed...."
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 19
+
+_Our separation by the Indians._
+
+
+When the six months were over, I had to spend with the Christians to
+put in execution the plan we had concerted, the Indians went after
+prickly pears, the place at which they grew being thirty leagues
+off;[130] and when we approached the point of flight, those among
+whom we were, quarrelled about a woman. After striking with fists,
+beating with sticks and bruising heads in great anger, each took
+his lodge and went his way, whence it became necessary that the
+Christians should also separate, and in no way could we come together
+until another year.
+
+  [130] In an article on the wanderings of Cabeza de Vaca, by
+  Ponton and McFarland (_Texas Historical Association Quarterly_,
+  I. 176, map, 1898), the northern limit of the cactus belt is
+  placed on a line extending irregularly westward from the mouth of
+  the Colorado River of Texas.
+
+In this time I passed a hard life, caused as much by hunger as ill
+usage. Three times I was obliged to run from my masters, and each
+time they went in pursuit and endeavored to slay me; but God our Lord
+in his mercy chose to protect and preserve me; and when the season
+of prickly pears returned, we again came together in the same place.
+After we had arranged our escape, and appointed a time, that very day
+the Indians separated and all went back. I told my comrades I would
+wait for them among the prickly-pear plants until the moon should be
+full. This day was the first of September,[131] and the first of the
+moon; and I said that if in this time they did not come as we had
+agreed, I would leave and go alone. So we parted, each going with his
+Indians. I remained with mine until the thirteenth day of the moon,
+having determined to flee to others when it should be full.
+
+  [131] 1534. Cabeza de Vaca had evidently lost his reckoning
+  (perhaps during his illness), as the date of the new moon in this
+  year was September 8.
+
+At this time Andrés Dorantes arrived with Estevanico and informed
+me that they had left Castillo with other Indians near by, called
+Lanegados;[132] that they had encountered great obstacles and
+wandered about lost; that the next day the Indians, among whom we
+were, would move to where Castillo was, and were going to unite with
+those who held him and become friends, having been at war until then,
+and that in this way we should recover Castillo.
+
+  [132] _Anagados_ in the 1542 edition. The tribe cannot be
+  identified, although it may be well known under some other name.
+  _Anegado_ is Spanish for "overflowed," "inundated," but it is by
+  no means certain that the Spaniards applied this name to them.
+  Buckingham Smith suggests that they may have been the Nacadoch
+  (Nacogdoches), but this does not seem probable, as the latter
+  tribe lived very far to the northeast of the point where the
+  Spaniards now were, that is, some thirty leagues inland from the
+  coast between latitude 28° and 29°. The name sounds more like
+  _N[)a]dáko_, the designation which the Anadarcos give themselves.
+  This Caddoan tribe, when first known, lived high up on the Brazos
+  and the Trinity, but in 1812 their village was on the Sabine.
+  They are now incorporated with the Caddo in Oklahoma.
+
+We had thirst all the time we ate the pears, which we quenched with
+their juice. We caught it in a hole made in the earth, and when it
+was full we drank until satisfied. It is sweet, and the color of
+must. In this manner they collect it for lack of vessels. There are
+many kinds of prickly pears, among them some very good, although they
+all appeared to me to be so, hunger never having given me leisure to
+choose, nor to reflect upon which were the best.
+
+Nearly all these people drink rain-water, which lies about in
+spots. Although there are rivers, as the Indians never have fixed
+habitations, there are no familiar or known places for getting water.
+Throughout the country are extensive and beautiful plains with good
+pasturage; and I think it would be a very fruitful region were it
+worked and inhabited by civilized men. We nowhere saw mountains.
+
+These Indians told us that there was another people next in advance
+of us, called Camones,[133] living towards the coast, and that they
+had killed the people who came in the boat of Peñalosa and Tellez,
+who arrived so feeble that even while being slain they could offer no
+resistance, and were all destroyed. We were shown their clothes and
+arms, and were told that the boat lay there stranded. This, the fifth
+boat, had remained till then unaccounted for. We have already stated
+how the boat of the Governor had been carried out to sea, and that of
+the comptroller and the friars had been cast away on the coast, of
+which Esquevel[134] narrated the fate of the men. We have once told
+how the two boats in which Castillo, I, and Dorantes came, foundered
+near the Island of Malhado.
+
+  [133] _Camoles_ in ch. 26. They evidently lived toward the
+  northeast, north of Malhado Island; unidentified.
+
+  [134] Esquivel.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 20
+
+_Of our escape._
+
+
+The second day after we had moved, we commended ourselves to God and
+set forth with speed, trusting, for all the lateness of the season
+and that the prickly pears were about ending, with the mast which
+remained in the woods [field], we might still be enabled to travel
+over a large territory. Hurrying on that day in great dread lest
+the Indians should overtake us, we saw some smokes, and going in
+the direction of them we arrived there after vespers, and found an
+Indian. He ran as he discovered us coming, not being willing to wait
+for us. We sent the negro[135] after him, when he stopped, seeing him
+alone. The negro told him we were seeking the people who made those
+fires. He answered that their houses were near by, and he would guide
+us to them. So we followed him. He ran to make known our approach,
+and at sunset we saw the houses. Before our arrival, at the distance
+of two crossbow shots from them, we found four Indians, who waited
+for us and received us well. We said in the language of the Mariames,
+that we were coming to look for them. They were evidently pleased
+with our company, and took us to their dwellings. Dorantes and the
+negro were lodged in the house of a physician,[136] Castillo and
+myself in that of another.
+
+  [135] Estévanico.
+
+  [136] A shaman, or "medicine-man."
+
+These people speak a different language, and are called
+Avavares.[137] They are the same that carried bows to those with whom
+we formerly lived,[138] going to traffic with them, and although
+they are of a different nation and tongue, they understand the other
+language. They arrived that day with their lodges, at the place where
+we found them. The community directly brought us a great many prickly
+pears, having heard of us before, of our cures, and of the wonders
+our Lord worked by us, which, although there had been no others,
+were adequate to open ways for us through a country poor like this,
+to afford us people where oftentimes there are none, and to lead us
+through immediate dangers, not permitting us to be killed, sustaining
+us under great want, and putting into those nations the heart of
+kindness, as we shall relate hereafter.
+
+  [137] _Chavavares_ in ch. 26, in which it is said that they
+  joined the Mariames. Their affinity is unknown. The statement
+  that the Spaniards are again among these tribes suggests that
+  they were now pursuing a northerly direction.
+
+  [138] The Mariames. See note to ch. 26, respecting these tribes.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 21
+
+_Our cure of some of the afflicted._
+
+
+That same night of our arrival, some Indians came to Castillo and
+told him that they had great pain in the head, begging him to cure
+them. After he made over them the sign of the cross, and commended
+them to God, they instantly said that all the pain had left, and went
+to their houses bringing us prickly pears, with a piece of venison,
+a thing to us little known. As the report of Castillo's performances
+spread, many came to us that night sick, that we should heal them,
+each bringing a piece of venison, until the quantity became so great
+we knew not where to dispose of it. We gave many thanks to God, for
+every day went on increasing his compassion and his gifts. After
+the sick were attended to, they began to dance and sing, making
+themselves festive, until sunrise; and because of our arrival, the
+rejoicing was continued for three days.
+
+When these were ended, we asked the Indians about the country farther
+on, the people we should find in it, and of the subsistence there.
+They answered us, that throughout all the region prickly-pear plants
+abounded; but the fruit was now gathered and all the people had gone
+back to their houses. They said the country was very cold, and there
+were few skins. Reflecting on this, and that it was already winter,
+we resolved to pass the season with these Indians.
+
+Five days after our arrival, all the Indians went off, taking us with
+them to gather more prickly pears, where there were other peoples
+speaking different tongues. After walking five days in great hunger,
+since on the way was no manner of fruit, we came to a river[139]
+and put up our houses. We then went to seek the product of certain
+trees, which is like peas. As there are no paths in the country, I
+was detained some time. The others returned, and coming to look for
+them in the dark I got lost. Thank God I found a burning tree, and
+in the warmth of it I passed the cold of that night. In the morning,
+loading myself with sticks, and taking two brands with me, I returned
+to seek them. In this manner I wandered five days, ever with my fire
+and load; for if the wood had failed me where none could be found,
+as many parts are without any, though I might have sought sticks
+elsewhere, there would have been no fire to kindle them. This was all
+the protection I had against cold, while walking naked as I was born.
+Going to the low woods near the rivers, I prepared myself for the
+night, stopping in them before sunset. I made a hole in the ground
+and threw in fuel which the trees abundantly afforded, collected in
+good quantity from those that were fallen and dry. About the whole
+I made four fires, in the form of a cross, which I watched and made
+up from time to time. I also gathered some bundles of the coarse
+straw that there abounds, with which I covered myself in the hole. In
+this way I was sheltered at night from cold. On one occasion while
+I slept, the fire fell upon the straw, when it began to blaze so
+rapidly that notwithstanding the haste I made to get out of it, I
+carried some marks on my hair of the danger to which I was exposed.
+All this while I tasted not a mouthful, nor did I find anything
+I could eat. My feet were bare and bled a good deal. Through the
+mercy of God, the wind did not blow from the north in all this time,
+otherwise I should have died.
+
+  [139] This may have been the San Antonio or the San
+  Marcos-Guadalupe.
+
+At the end of the fifth day I arrived on the margin of a river,[140]
+where I found the Indians, who with the Christians, had considered me
+dead, supposing that I had been stung by a viper. All were rejoiced
+to see me, and most so were my companions. They said that up to that
+time they had struggled with great hunger, which was the cause of
+their not having sought me. At night, all gave me of their prickly
+pears, and the next morning we set out for a place where they were
+in large quantity, with which we satisfied our great craving, the
+Christians rendering thanks to our Lord that He had ever given us His
+aid.
+
+  [140] Presumably the river last mentioned, where they had erected
+  their shelters.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 22
+
+_The coming of other sick to us the next day._
+
+
+The next day morning, many Indians came, and brought five persons
+who had cramps and were very unwell. They came that Castillo might
+cure them. Each offered his bow and arrows, which Castillo received.
+At sunset he blessed them, commending them to God our Lord, and we
+all prayed to Him the best we could to send health; for that He knew
+there was no other means, than through Him, by which this people
+would aid us, so we could come forth from this unhappy existence.
+He bestowed it so mercifully, that, the morning having come, all
+got up well and sound, and were as strong as though they never had
+a disorder. It caused great admiration, and inclined us to render
+many thanks to God our Lord, whose goodness we now clearly beheld,
+giving us firm hopes that He would liberate and bring us to where we
+might serve Him. For myself I can say that I ever had trust in His
+providence that He would lead me out from that captivity, and thus I
+always spoke of it to my companions.
+
+The Indians having gone and taken their friends with them in health,
+we departed for a place at which others were eating prickly pears.
+These people are called Cuthalchuches[141] and Malicones, who speak
+different tongues. Adjoining them were others called Coayos and
+Susolas, who were on the opposite side, others called Atayos,[142]
+who were at war with the Susolas, exchanging arrow shots daily. As
+through all the country they talked only of the wonders which God our
+Lord worked through us, persons came from many parts to seek us that
+we might cure them. At the end of the second day after our arrival,
+some of the Susolas came to us and besought Castillo that he would go
+to cure one wounded and others sick, and they said that among them
+was one very near his end. Castillo was a timid practitioner, most
+so in serious and dangerous cases, believing that his sins would
+weigh, and some day hinder him in performing cures. The Indians told
+me to go and heal them, as they liked me; they remembered that I
+had ministered to them in the walnut grove when they gave us nuts
+and skins, which occurred when I first joined the Christians. So I
+had to go with them, and Dorantes accompanied me with Estevanico.
+Coming near their huts, I perceived that the sick man we went to heal
+was dead. Many persons were around him weeping, and his house was
+prostrate, a sign that the one who dwelt in it is no more.[143] When
+I arrived I found his eyes rolled up, and the pulse gone, he having
+all the appearances of death, as they seemed to me and as Dorantes
+said. I removed a mat with which he was covered, and supplicated our
+Lord as fervently as I could, that He would be pleased to give health
+to him, and to the rest that might have need of it. After he had been
+blessed and breathed upon many times, they brought me his bow, and
+gave me a basket of pounded prickly pears.
+
+  [141] Cultalchulches in ch. 26 (q. v.), and in the edition of
+  1542.
+
+  [142] These were possibly the Adai, or Adaize, although their
+  country was in northeastern Texas, about Red River and the
+  Sabine; nevertheless they may have wandered very far during the
+  prickly-pear season. There is evidence that in 1792, fourteen
+  families of the Adai migrated to a region south of San Antonio de
+  Béjar, where they were merged with the tribes living thereabout.
+  The main body, although greatly reduced, did not leave their old
+  home until the nineteenth century, when the remnant, who had been
+  missionized, were incorporated with their kindred the Caddo.
+
+  [143] It is not uncommon for all the possessions of an Indian,
+  including his dwelling, to be destroyed at the time of his death.
+  In recent times this custom has had the tendency, as among the
+  Navahos, for example, to cause them to adhere to their simple
+  aboriginal form of dwellings instead of to go to the trouble of
+  erecting substantial houses that might have to be demolished.
+
+The natives took me to cure many others who were sick of a stupor,
+and presented me two more baskets of prickly pears, which I gave to
+the Indians who accompanied us. We then went back to our lodgings.
+Those to whom we gave the fruit tarried, and returned at night to
+their houses, reporting that he who had been dead and for whom I
+wrought before them, had got up whole and walked, had eaten and
+spoken with them and that all to whom I had ministered were well and
+much pleased. This caused great wonder and fear, and throughout the
+land the people talked of nothing else. All to whom the fame of it
+reached, came to seek us that we should cure them and bless their
+children.
+
+When the Cuthalchuches, who were in company with our Indians, were
+about to return to their own country, they left us all the prickly
+pears they had, without keeping one: they gave us flints of very
+high value there, a palm and a half in length, with which they cut.
+They begged that we would remember them and pray to God that they
+might always be well, and we promised to do so. They left, the most
+satisfied beings in the world, having given us the best of all they
+had.
+
+We remained with the Avavares eight months, reckoned by the number
+of moons. In all this time people came to seek us from many parts,
+and they said that most truly we were children of the sun. Dorantes
+and the negro to this time had not attempted to practise; but because
+of the great solicitation made by those coming from different parts
+to find us, we all became physicians, although in being venturous
+and bold to attempt the performance of any cure, I was the most
+remarkable. No one whom we treated, but told us he was left well;
+and so great was the confidence that they would become healed if we
+administered to them, they even believed that whilst we remained none
+of them could die. These and the rest of the people behind, related
+an extraordinary circumstance, and by the way they counted, there
+appeared to be fifteen or sixteen years since it occurred.
+
+They said that a man wandered through the country whom they called
+Badthing; he was small of body and wore beard, and they never
+distinctly saw his features. When he came to the house where they
+lived, their hair stood up and they trembled. Presently a blazing
+torch shone at the door, when he entered and seized whom he chose,
+and giving him three great gashes in the side with a very sharp
+flint, the width of the hand and two palms in length, he put his
+hand through them, drawing forth the entrails, from one of which
+he would cut off a portion more or less, the length of a palm, and
+throw it on the embers. Then he would give three gashes to an arm,
+the second cut on the inside of an elbow, and would sever the limb.
+A little after this, he would begin to unite it, and putting his
+hands on the wounds, these would instantly become healed. They said
+that frequently in the dance he appeared among them, sometimes in the
+dress of a woman, at others in that of a man; that when it pleased
+him he would take a buhío,[144] or house, and lifting it high, after
+a little he would come down with it in a heavy fall. They also stated
+that many times they offered him victuals, but that he never ate:
+they asked him whence he came and where was his abiding place, and
+he showed them a fissure in the earth and said that his house was
+there below. These things they told us of, we much laughed at and
+ridiculed; and they seeing our incredulity, brought to us many of
+those they said he had seized; and we saw the marks of the gashes
+made in the places according to the manner they had described. We
+told them he was an evil one, and in the best way we could, gave
+them to understand, that if they would believe in God our Lord, and
+become Christians like us, they need have no fear of him, nor would
+he dare to come and inflict those injuries, and they might be certain
+he would not venture to appear while we remained in the land. At this
+they were delighted and lost much of their dread. They told us that
+they had seen the Asturian and Figueroa with people farther along the
+coast, whom we had called those of the figs.[145]
+
+  [144] See page 19, note 5.
+
+  [145] See chap. 26.
+
+They are all ignorant of time, either by the sun or moon, nor do they
+reckon by the month or year; they better know and understand the
+differences of the seasons, when the fruits come to ripen, where the
+fish resort,[146] and the position of the stars, at which they are
+ready and practised. By these we were ever well treated. We dug our
+own food and brought our loads of wood and water. Their houses and
+also the things we ate, are like those of the nation from which we
+came, but they suffer far greater want, having neither maize, acorns,
+nor nuts. We always went naked like them, and covered ourselves at
+night with deer-skins.
+
+  [146] Buckingham Smith prefers this meaning for _i en tiempo que
+  muere el Pescado_ to "by the time when the fish die," or "at
+  times at which the fishes die."
+
+Of the eight months we were among this people, six we supported in
+great want, for fish are not to be found where they are. At the
+expiration of the time, the prickly pears began to ripen,[147] and
+I and the negro went, without these Indians knowing it, to others
+farther on, a day's journey distant, called Maliacones.[148] At
+the end of three days, I sent him to bring Castillo and Dorantes,
+and they having arrived, we all set out with the Indians who
+were going to get the small fruit of certain trees on which they
+support themselves ten or twelve days whilst the prickly pears are
+maturing. They joined others called Arbadaos,[149] whom we found to
+be very weak, lank, and swollen, so much so as to cause us great
+astonishment. We told those with whom we came, that we wished to stop
+with these people, at which they showed regret and went back by the
+way they came; so we remained in the field near the houses of the
+Indians, which when they observed, after talking among themselves
+they came up together, and each of them taking one of us by the hand,
+led us to their dwellings. Among them we underwent greater hunger
+than with the others; we ate daily not more than two handfuls of the
+prickly pears, which were green and so milky they burned our mouths.
+As there was lack of water, those who ate suffered great thirst. In
+our extreme want we bought two dogs, giving in exchange some nets,
+with other things, and a skin I used to cover myself.
+
+  [147] That is, until the summer of 1535.
+
+  [148] See ch. 27: "By the coast live those called Quitoks, and in
+  front inward on the main are the Chavavares, to whom adjoin the
+  Maliacones, the Cultalchulches and others called Susolas and the
+  Comos." This would seem to indicate that he was journeying in a
+  generally northward or north-westward direction.
+
+  [149] The name suggests the Bidai, a Caddoan tribe that lived at
+  a later period west of the Trinity, about latitude 31°, but this
+  locality does not agree with the narrative.
+
+I have already stated that throughout all this country we went naked,
+and as we were unaccustomed to being so, twice a year we cast our
+skins like serpents. The sun and air produced great sores on our
+breasts and shoulders, giving us sharp pain; and the large loads we
+had, being very heavy, caused the cords to cut into our arms. The
+country is so broken and thickset, that often after getting our wood
+in the forests, the blood flowed from us in many places, caused by
+the obstruction of thorns and shrubs that tore our flesh wherever
+we went. At times, when my turn came to get wood, after it had cost
+me much blood, I could not bring it out either on my back or by
+dragging. In these labors my only solace and relief were in thinking
+of the sufferings of our Redeemer, Jesus Christ, and in the blood
+He shed for me, in considering how much greater must have been the
+torment He sustained from the thorns, than that I there received.
+
+I bartered with these Indians in combs that I made for them and
+in bows, arrows, and nets. We made mats, which are their houses,
+that they have great necessity for; and although they know how to
+make them, they wish to give their full time to getting food, since
+when otherwise employed they are pinched with hunger. Sometimes the
+Indians would set me to scraping and softening skins; and the days of
+my greatest prosperity there, were those in which they gave me skins
+to dress. I would scrape them a very great deal and eat the scraps,
+which would sustain me two or three days. When it happened among
+these people, as it had likewise among others whom we left behind,
+that a piece of meat was given us, we ate it raw; for if we had put
+it to roast, the first native that should come along would have taken
+it off and devoured it; and it appeared to us not well to expose it
+to this risk; besides we were in such condition it would have given
+us pain to eat it roasted, and we could not have digested it so well
+as raw. Such was the life we spent there; and the meagre subsistence
+we earned by the matters of traffic which were the work of our hands.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 23
+
+_Of our departure after having eaten the dogs._
+
+
+After eating the dogs, it seemed to us we had some strength to go
+forward; and so commending ourselves to God our Lord, that He would
+guide us, we took our leave of the Indians. They showed us the way
+to others, near by, who spoke their language. While on our journey,
+rain fell, and we travelled the day in wet. We lost our way and went
+to stop in an extensive wood. We pulled many leaves of the prickly
+pear, which we put at night in an oven we made, and giving them much
+heat, by the morning they were in readiness. After eating, we put
+ourselves under the care of the Almighty and started. We discovered
+the way we had lost. Having passed the wood, we found other houses,
+and coming up to them, we saw two women with some boys walking in the
+forest, who were frightened at the sight of us and fled, running into
+the woods to call the men. These arriving, stopped behind trees to
+look at us. We called to them, and they came up with much timidity.
+After some conversation they told us that food was very scarce with
+them; that near by were many houses of their people to which they
+would guide us. We came at night where were fifty dwellings. The
+inhabitants were astonished at our appearance, showing much fear.
+After becoming somewhat accustomed to us, they reached their hands to
+our faces and bodies, and passed them in like manner over their own.
+
+We stayed there that night, and in the morning the Indians brought us
+their sick, beseeching us that we would bless them. They gave us of
+what they had to eat, the leaves of the prickly pear and the green
+fruit roasted. As they did this with kindness and good will, and were
+happy to be without anything to eat, that they might have food to
+give us, we tarried some days. While there, others came from beyond,
+and when they were about to depart, we told our entertainers that we
+wished to go with those people. They felt much uneasiness at this,
+and pressed us warmly to stay: however, we took our leave in the
+midst of their weeping, for our departure weighed heavily upon them.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 24
+
+_Customs of the Indians of that country._
+
+
+From the Island of Malhado to this land, all the Indians whom we saw
+have the custom from the time in which their wives find themselves
+pregnant, of not sleeping with them until two years after they have
+given birth. The children are suckled until the age of twelve years,
+when they are old enough to get support for themselves. We asked
+why they reared them in this manner; and they said because of the
+great poverty of the land, it happened many times, as we witnessed,
+that they were two or three days without eating, sometimes four, and
+consequently, in seasons of scarcity, the children were allowed to
+suckle, that they might not famish; otherwise those who lived would
+be delicate, having little strength.
+
+If any one chance to fall sick in the desert, and cannot keep up
+with the rest, the Indians leave him to perish, unless it be a son
+or a brother; him they will assist, even to carrying on their back.
+It is common among them all to leave their wives when there is no
+conformity, and directly they connect themselves with whom they
+please. This is the course of the men who are childless; those who
+have children remain with their wives and never abandon them. When
+they dispute and quarrel in their towns, they strike each other with
+the fists, fighting until exhausted, and then separate. Sometimes
+they are parted by the women going between them; the men never
+interfere. For no disaffection that arises do they resort to bows and
+arrows. After they have fought, or had out their dispute, they take
+their dwellings and go into the woods, living apart from each other
+until their heat has subsided. When no longer offended and their
+anger is gone, they return. From that time they are friends as if
+nothing had happened; nor is it necessary that any one should mend
+their friendships, as they in this way again unite them. If those
+that quarrel are single, they go to some neighboring people, and
+although these should be enemies, they receive them well and welcome
+them warmly, giving them so largely of what they have, that when
+their animosity cools, and they return to their town, they go rich.
+
+They are all warlike, and have as much strategy for protecting
+themselves against enemies as they could have were they reared in
+Italy in continual feuds. When they are in a part of the country
+where their enemies may attack them, they place their houses on the
+skirt of a wood, the thickest and most tangled they can find, and
+near it make a ditch in which they sleep. The warriors are covered
+by small pieces of stick through which are loop-holes; these hide
+them and present so false an appearance, that if come upon they
+are not discovered. They open a very narrow way, entering into the
+midst of the wood, where a spot is prepared on which the women and
+children sleep. When night comes they kindle fires in their lodges,
+that should spies be about, they may think to find them there; and
+before daybreak they again light those fires. If the enemy comes to
+assault the houses, they who are in the ditch make a sally; and from
+their trenches do much injury without those who are outside seeing
+or being able to find them. When there is no wood in which they can
+take shelter in this way, and make their ambuscades, they settle on
+open ground at a place they select, which they invest with trenches
+covered with broken sticks, having apertures whence to discharge
+arrows. These arrangements are made for night.
+
+While I was among the Aguenes,[150] their enemies coming suddenly
+at midnight, fell upon them, killed three and wounded many, so that
+they ran from their houses to the fields before them. As soon as
+these ascertained that their assailants had withdrawn, they returned
+to pick up all the arrows the others had shot, and following after
+them in the most stealthy manner possible, came that night to their
+dwellings without their presence being suspected. At four o'clock
+in the morning the Aguenes attacked them, killed five, and wounded
+numerous others, and made them flee from their houses, leaving their
+bows with all they possessed. In a little while came the wives of the
+Quevenes[151] to them and formed a treaty whereby the parties became
+friends. The women, however, are sometimes the cause of war. All
+these nations, when they have personal enmities, and are not of one
+family, assassinate at night, waylay, and inflict gross barbarities
+on each other.
+
+  [150] Elsewhere called Doguenes.
+
+  [151] Guevenes in the edition of 1542.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 25
+
+_Vigilance of the Indians in war._
+
+
+They are the most watchful in danger of any people I ever knew. If
+they fear an enemy they are awake the night long, each with a bow
+at his side and a dozen arrows. He that would sleep tries his bow,
+and if it is not strung, he gives the turn necessary to the cord.
+They often come out from their houses, bending to the ground in such
+manner that they cannot be seen, looking and watching on all sides to
+catch every object. If they perceive anything about, they are at once
+in the bushes with their bows and arrows, and there remain until day,
+running from place to place where it is needful to be, or where they
+think their enemies are. When the light has come, they unbend their
+bows until they go out to hunt. The strings are the sinews of deer.
+
+The method they have of fighting, is bending low to the earth, and
+whilst shot at they move about, speaking and leaping from one point
+to another, thus avoiding the shafts of their enemies. So effectual
+is their manoeuvring that they can receive very little injury from
+crossbow or arquebus; they rather scoff at them; for these arms are
+of little value employed in open field, where the Indians move
+nimbly about. They are proper for defiles and in water; everywhere
+else the horse will best subdue, being what the natives universally
+dread.[152] Whosoever would fight them must be cautious to show no
+fear, or desire to have anything that is theirs; while war exists
+they must be treated with the utmost rigor; for if they discover
+any timidity or covetousness, they are a race that well discern the
+opportunities for vengeance, and gather strength from any weakness of
+their adversaries. When they use arrows in battle and exhaust their
+store, each returns his own way, without the one party following the
+other, although the one be many and the other few, such being their
+custom. Oftentimes the body of an Indian is traversed by the arrow;
+yet unless the entrails or the heart be struck, he does not die but
+recovers from the wound.
+
+  [152] Cabeza de Vaca is now evidently recalling the experience of
+  Narvaez's men in Florida.
+
+I believe these people see and hear better, and have keener senses
+than any other in the world. They are great in hunger, thirst, and
+cold, as if they were made for the endurance of these more than other
+men, by habit and nature.
+
+Thus much I have wished to say, beyond the gratification of that
+desire men have to learn the customs and manners of each other,
+that those who hereafter at some time find themselves amongst these
+people, may have knowledge of their usages and artifices, the value
+of which they will not find inconsiderable in such event.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 26
+
+_Of the nations and tongues._
+
+
+I desire to enumerate the natives and tongues that exist from those
+of Malhado to the farthest Cuchendados there are. Two languages are
+found in the island; the people of one are called Cahoques,[153]
+of the other, Han. On the tierra-firme, over against the island,
+is another people, called Chorruco, who take their names from the
+forests where they live. Advancing by the shores of the sea, others
+inhabit who are called the Doguenes, and opposite them others by
+the name of Mendica. Farther along the coast are the Quevenes, and
+in front of them on the main, the Mariames; and continuing by the
+coast are other called Guaycones; and in front of them, within on
+the main, the Yguazes. At the close of these are the Atayos; and in
+their rear others, the Acubadaos, and beyond them are many in the
+same direction. By the coast live those called Quitoks, and in front
+inward on the main are the Chavavares, to whom adjoin the Maliacones,
+the Cultalchulches and others called Susolas, and the Comos; and
+by the coast farther on are the Camoles; and on the same coast in
+advance are those whom we called People of the Figs.
+
+  [153] In the 1542 edition these tribal names are similarly
+  spelled except in the case of Capoques, Charruco, Deguenes,
+  Yeguaces, Decubadaos (for Acubadaos), Quitoles (for Quitoks),
+  Chauauares, and Camolas. None of these Indians have thus far been
+  conclusively identified with later historical tribes, with the
+  possible exception of the Atayos and the Quevenes. See p. 76,
+  note 2, and p. 59, note 1.
+
+They all differ in their habitations, towns and tongues. There is a
+language in which calling to a person, for "look here" they say "Arre
+aca," and to a dog "Xo."[154] Everywhere they produce stupefaction
+with a smoke, and for that they will give whatever they possess.
+They drink a tea made from leaves of a tree like those of the oak,
+which they toast in a pot; and after these are parched, the vessel,
+still remaining on the fire, is filled with water. When the liquor
+has twice boiled, they pour it into a jar, and in cooling it use the
+half of a gourd. So soon as it is covered thickly with froth, it is
+drunk as warm as can be supported; and from the time it is taken
+out of the pot until it is used they are crying aloud: "Who wishes
+to drink?" When the women hear these cries, they instantly stop,
+fearing to move; and although they may be heavily laden, they dare do
+nothing further. Should one of them move, they dishonor her, beating
+her with sticks, and greatly vexed, throw away the liquor they have
+prepared; while they who have drunk eject it, which they do readily
+and without pain. The reason they give for this usage is, that when
+they are about to drink, if the women move from where they hear the
+cry, something pernicious enters the body in that liquid, shortly
+producing death. At the time of boiling, the vessel must be covered;
+and if it should happen to be open when a woman passes, they use no
+more of that liquid, but throw it out. The color is yellow. They are
+three days taking it, eating nothing in the time, and daily each one
+drinks an arroba and a half.[155]
+
+  [154] In the 1542 edition, as given by Mrs. Bandelier, "Among
+  them is a language wherein they call men _mira aca_, _arraca_,
+  and dogs _xo_." Compare _háka_, "sit down," in Karankawa
+  (Gatschet, _Karankawa Indians_, Cambridge, Mass., 1891, p. 80).
+  In the above it would appear as if the Spanish _mira_ had been
+  regarded as a part of the Indian exclamation.
+
+  [155] The tree from which the so-called "black drink" is made
+  is _Ilex cassine_, and the custom of preparing and partaking
+  of the liquid (known also as Carolina tea) was general among
+  the tribes of the South, including the Gulf coast. The drink
+  was known among the Catawbas as _yaupon_, among the Creeks as
+  _ássi-lupútski_, the latter signifying "small leaves," commonly
+  abbreviated _ássi_, whence the name of the celebrated Seminole
+  chief _Osceola_, _i.e._, "Black-drink Hallooer," or "Black-drink
+  Singer." The partaking of the black drink was an important part
+  of the _puskita_, or _busk_, ceremony among the Creeks.
+
+When the women have their indisposition, they seek food only for
+themselves, as no one else will eat of what they bring. In the time I
+was thus among these people, I witnessed a diabolical practice; a man
+living with another, one of those who are emasculate and impotent.
+These go habited like women, and perform their duties, use the bow,
+and carry heavy loads. Among them we saw many mutilated in the way
+I describe. They are more muscular than other men, and taller: they
+bear very weighty burthens.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 27
+
+_We moved away and were well received._
+
+
+After parting with those we left weeping,[156] we went with the
+others to their houses and were hospitably received by the people
+in them. They brought their children to us that we might touch their
+hands, and gave us a great quantity of the flour of mezquiquez.[157]
+The fruit while hanging on the tree, is very bitter and like unto the
+carob; when eaten with earth it is sweet and wholesome. The method
+they have of preparing it is this: they make a hole of requisite
+depth in the ground, and throwing in the fruit, pound it with a club
+the size of the leg, a fathom and a half in length, until it is well
+mashed. Besides the earth that comes from the hole, they bring and
+add some handfuls, then returning to beat it a little while longer.
+Afterward it is thrown into a jar, like a basket, upon which water is
+poured until it rises above and covers the mixture. He that beats it
+tastes it, and if it appears to him not sweet, he asks for earth to
+stir in, which is added until he finds it sweet. Then all sit round,
+and each putting in a hand, takes out as much as he can. The pits
+and hulls are thrown upon a skin, whence they are taken by him who
+does the pounding, and put into the jar whereon water is poured as at
+first, whence having expressed the froth and juice, again the pits
+and husks are thrown upon the skin. This they do three or four times
+to each pounding. Those present, for whom this is a great banquet,
+have their stomachs greatly distended by the earth and water they
+swallow. The Indians made a protracted festival of this sort on our
+account, and great _areitos_[158] during the time we remained.
+
+  [156] The Arbadaos or Acubadaos. See chs. 22, 23.
+
+  [157] The mesquite (_Prosopis juliflora_). The beans are still
+  extensively used as food by the Indians of southern Arizona and
+  northern Mexico.
+
+  [158] See p. 52, note 3.
+
+When we proposed to leave them, some women of another people came
+there who lived farther along. They informed us whereabout were
+their dwellings, and we set out for them, although the inhabitants
+entreated us to remain for that day, because the houses whither we
+were going were distant, there was no path to them, the women had
+come tired, and would the next day go with us refreshed and show us
+the way. Soon after we had taken our leave, some of the women, who
+had come on together from the same town, followed behind us. As
+there are no paths in the country we presently got lost, and thus
+travelled four leagues, when, stopping to drink, we found the women
+in pursuit of us at the water, who told us of the great exertion
+they had made to overtake us. We went on taking them for guides,
+and passed over a river towards evening, the water reaching to the
+breast. It might be as wide as that at Seville; its current was very
+rapid.[159]
+
+  [159] Probably the Colorado River. Buckingham Smith remarks that
+  the Guadalquivir at Seville is about a hundred paces in width.
+
+At sunset we reached a hundred Indian habitations. Before we arrived,
+all the people who were in them came out to receive us, with such
+yells as were terrific, striking the palms of their hands violently
+against their thighs. They brought us gourds bored with holes
+and having pebbles in them, an instrument for the most important
+occasions, produced only at the dance or to effect cures, and which
+none dare touch but those who own them. They say there is virtue in
+them, and because they do not grow in that country, they come from
+heaven; nor do they know where they are to be found, only that the
+rivers bring them in their floods.[160] So great were the fear and
+distraction of these people, some to reach us sooner than others that
+they might touch us, they pressed us so closely that they lacked
+little of killing us; and without letting us put our feet to the
+ground, carried us to their dwellings. We were so crowded upon by
+numbers, that we went into the houses they had made for us. On no
+account would we consent that they should rejoice over us any more
+that night. The night long they passed in singing and dancing among
+themselves; and the next day they brought us all the people of the
+town, that we should touch and bless them in the way we had done to
+others among whom we had been. After this performance they presented
+many arrows to some women of the other town who had accompanied
+theirs.
+
+  [160] The Pueblo Indians of New Mexico have cultivated gourds for
+  use as rattles and receptacles, especially dippers, from time
+  immemorial. If the Pecos were the stream, or one of the streams,
+  whence the gourds were derived, they might have come from the
+  pueblo of Pecos, southeast of the present Santa Fé; if from the
+  Rio Grande, they might have come from various villages along that
+  river and its tributaries in the north. See p. 95, note 1.
+
+The next day we left, and all the people of the place went with us;
+and when we came to the other Indians we were as well received as
+we had been by the last. They gave us of what they had to eat, and
+the deer they had killed that day. Among them we witnessed another
+custom, which is this: they who were with us took from him who came
+to be cured, his bow and arrows, shoes and beads if he wore any, and
+then brought him before us, that we should heal him. After being
+attended to, he would go away highly pleased, saying that he was
+well. So we parted from these Indians, and went to others by whom we
+were welcomed. They brought us their sick, which, we having blessed,
+they declared were sound; he who was healed, believed we could cure
+him; and with what the others to whom we had administered would
+relate, they made great rejoicing and dancing, so that they left us
+no sleep.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 28
+
+_Of another strange custom._
+
+
+Leaving these Indians, we went to the dwellings of numerous others.
+From this place began another novel custom, which is, that while
+the people received us very well, those who accompanied us began to
+use them so ill as to take their goods and ransack their houses,
+without leaving anything. To witness this unjust procedure gave us
+great concern, inflicted too on those who received us hospitably;
+we feared also that it might provoke offence, and be the cause of
+some tumult between them; but, as we were in no condition to make it
+better, or to dare chastise such conduct, for the present we had to
+bear with it, until a time when we might have greater authority among
+them. They, also, who lost their effects, noticing our dejection,
+attempted to console us by saying that we should not be grieved on
+this account, as they were so gratified at having seen us, they held
+their properties to be well bestowed, and that farther on they would
+be repaid by others who were very rich.
+
+On all the day's travel we received great inconvenience from the many
+persons following us. Had we attempted to escape we could not have
+succeeded, such was their haste in pursuit, in order to touch us. So
+great was the importunity for this privilege, we consumed three hours
+in going through with them that they might depart. The next day all
+the inhabitants were brought before us. The greater part were clouded
+of an eye, and others in like manner were entirely blind, which
+caused in us great astonishment. They are a people of fine figure,
+agreeable features, and whiter than any of the many nations we had
+seen until then.
+
+Here we began to see mountains; they appeared to come in succession
+from the North Sea, and, according to the information the Indians
+gave us, we believe they rise fifteen leagues from the sea.[161] We
+set forth in a direction towards them with these Indians, and they
+guided us by the way of some kindred of theirs; for they wished to
+take us only where were their relations, and were not willing that
+their enemies should come to such great good, as they thought it
+was to see us. After we arrived they that went with us plundered
+the others; but as the people there knew the fashion, they had
+hidden some things before we came; and having welcomed us with great
+festivity and rejoicing, they brought out and presented to us what
+they had concealed. These were beads, ochre, and some little bags of
+silver.[162] In pursuance of custom, we directly gave them to the
+Indians who came with us, which, when they had received, they began
+their dances and festivities, sending to call others from a town near
+by, that they also might see us.
+
+  [161] Probably the escarpment that extends from Austin to Eagle
+  Pass. The Colorado (which was probably the wide, deep stream
+  previously encountered) was crossed seemingly below the present
+  Austin. It should be remembered that the information regarding
+  the point at which the mountains commenced to rise was given by
+  Indians whose language the Spaniards could not understand. At any
+  rate, the fact that the latter believed the mountains to rise
+  fifteen leagues from the sea would tend to indicate that the
+  direction they had been following was a northerly one. See the
+  statement in the following paragraph of the text.
+
+  [162] According to Oviedo (p. 617): "This is an error of the
+  printer, and should read 'little bags of margarite [pearl-mica],'
+  instead of silver." Buckingham Smith translates Oviedo's
+  _margarita_, "pearls," and Cabeza de Vaca's _margarita_ (ch. 29)
+  as "marquesite." It may be added that magnetic iron ore of the
+  highest quality occurs in Mason County, Texas.
+
+In the afternoon they all came and brought us beads and bows, with
+trifles of other sort, which we also distributed. Desiring to leave
+the next day, the inhabitants all wished to take us to others,
+friends of theirs, who were at the point of the ridge, stating that
+many houses were there, and people who would give us various things.
+As it was out of our way, we did not wish to go to them, and took
+our course along the plain near the mountains, which we believed
+not to be distant from the coast[163] where the people are all evil
+disposed, and we considered it preferable to travel inland;[164]
+for those of the interior are of a better condition and treated
+us mildly, and we felt sure that we should find it more populous
+and better provisioned. Moreover, we chose this course because in
+traversing the country we should learn many particulars of it, so
+that should God our Lord be pleased to take any of us thence, and
+lead us to the land of Christians, we might carry that information
+and news of it. As the Indians saw that we were determined not to go
+where they would take us, they said that in the direction we would
+go, there were no inhabitants, nor any prickly pears nor other thing
+to eat, and begged us to tarry there that day; we accordingly did
+so. They directly sent two of their number to seek for people in the
+direction that we wished to go; and the next day we left, taking
+with us several of the Indians. The women went carrying water, and
+so great was our authority that no one dared drink of it without our
+permission.
+
+  [163] In the face of such an assertion it is difficult to
+  conceive that the Spaniards had been journeying directly
+  westward, away from the coast.
+
+  [164] That is, they decided to change their course from northward
+  to a more westward direction.
+
+Two leagues from there we met those who had gone out, and they
+said that they had found no one; at which the Indians seemed
+much disheartened, and began again to entreat us to go by way
+of the mountains. We did not wish to do so, and they, seeing our
+disposition, took their leave of us with much regret, and returned
+down the river to their houses, while we ascended along by it. After
+a little time we came upon two women with burthens, who put them down
+as they saw us, and brought to us, of what they carried. It was the
+flour of maize. They told us that farther up on that river we should
+find dwellings, a plenty of prickly pears and of that meal. We bade
+them farewell: they were going to those whom we had left.
+
+We walked until sunset, and arrived at a town of some twenty houses,
+where we were received with weeping and in great sorrow; for they
+already knew that wheresoever we should come, all would be pillaged
+and spoiled by those who accompanied us. When they saw that we were
+alone, they lost their fear, and gave us prickly pears with nothing
+more. We remained there that night, and at dawn, the Indians who had
+left us the day before, broke upon their houses. As they came upon
+the occupants unprepared and in supposed safety, having no place in
+which to conceal anything, all they possessed was taken from them,
+for which they wept much. In consolation the plunderers told them
+that we were children of the sun and that we had power to heal the
+sick and to destroy; and other lies even greater than these, which
+none knew how to tell better than they when they find it convenient.
+They bade them conduct us with great respect, advised that they
+should be careful to offend us in nothing, give us all they might
+possess, and endeavor to take us where people were numerous; and that
+wheresoever they arrived with us, they should rob and pillage the
+people of what they have, since this was customary.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 29
+
+_The Indians plunder each other._
+
+
+After the Indians had told and shown these natives well what to do,
+they left us together and went back. Remembering the instruction,
+they began to treat us with the same awe and reverence that the
+others had shown. We travelled with them three days, and they took us
+where were many inhabitants. Before we arrived, these were informed
+of our coming by the others, who told them respecting us all that
+the first had imparted, adding much more; for these people are all
+very fond of romance, and are great liars, particularly so where they
+have any interest. When we came near the houses all the inhabitants
+ran out with delight and great festivity to receive us. Among other
+things, two of their physicians gave us two gourds, and thenceforth
+we carried these with us, and added to our authority a token highly
+reverenced by Indians.[165] Those who accompanied us rifled the
+houses; but as these were many and the others few, they could not
+carry off what they took, and abandoned more than the half.
+
+  [165] The possession of one of these "medicine" rattles was not
+  improbably one of the causes of the death of Estévanico at the
+  hands of the Zuñis of Cibola in 1539. See the Introduction, and
+  compare p. 90, note 2; p. 117, note 2.
+
+From here we went along the base of the ridge, striking inland more
+than fifty leagues, and at the close we found upwards of forty
+houses. Among the articles given us, Andrés Dorantes received a
+hawk-bell of copper, thick and large, figured with a face, which the
+natives had shown, greatly prizing it. They told him that they had
+received it from others, their neighbors; we asked them whence the
+others had obtained it, and they said it had been brought from the
+northern direction, where there was much copper, which was highly
+esteemed. We concluded that whencesoever it came there was a foundry,
+and that work was done in hollow form.[166]
+
+  [166] See p. 97, note 1.
+
+We departed the next day, and traversed a ridge seven leagues in
+extent. The stones on it are scoria of iron.[167] At night we arrived
+at many houses seated on the banks of a very beautiful river.[168]
+The owners of them came half way out on the road to meet us,
+bringing their children on their backs. They gave us many little bags
+of margarite[169] and pulverized galena,[170] with which they rub the
+face. They presented us many beads, and blankets of cowhide, loading
+all who accompanied us with some of every thing they had. They eat
+prickly pears and the seed of pine. In that country are small pine
+trees,[171] the cones like little eggs; but the seed is better than
+that of Castile, as its husk is very thin, and while green is beaten
+and made into balls, to be thus eaten. If the seed be dry, it is
+pounded in the husk, and consumed in the form of flour.
+
+  [167] See pp. 92-93, note 2, regarding the occurrence of magnetic
+  iron in Mason County, where it is found in great quantities, but
+  is yet unworked.
+
+  [168] Perhaps the Llano, a branch of the Colorado, or possibly
+  they had met the Colorado again. See p. 90, note 1.
+
+  [169] See p. 92, note 2. In the edition of 1542 the text here
+  says _silver_.
+
+  [170] Lead is found in Texas in the trans-Pecos region. The
+  mineral resources of the state have not yet been well exploited.
+
+  [171] Doubtless the nut pine (_Pinus edulis_). Cabeza de Vaca
+  evidently here aims to describe the character of this tree and
+  its fruit without necessarily asserting that the tree was found
+  growing very far east of the Pecos. In the valley of the latter
+  stream it is more or less prolific.
+
+Those who there received us, after they had touched us went running
+to their houses and directly returned, and did not stop running,
+going and coming, to bring us in this manner many things for support
+on the way. They fetched a man to me and stated that a long time
+since he had been wounded by an arrow in the right shoulder, and
+that the point of the shaft was lodged above his heart, which, he
+said, gave him much pain, and in consequence, he was always sick.
+Probing the wound I felt the arrow-head, and found it had passed
+through the cartilage. With a knife I carried, I opened the breast
+to the place, and saw the point was aslant and troublesome to take
+out. I continued to cut, and, putting in the point of the knife, at
+last with great difficulty I drew the head forth. It was very large.
+With the bone of a deer, and by virtue of my calling, I made two
+stitches that threw the blood over me, and with hair from a skin I
+stanched the flow. They asked me for the arrow-head after I had taken
+it out, which I gave, when the whole town came to look at it. They
+sent it into the back country that the people there might view it.
+In consequence of this operation they had many of their customary
+dances and festivities. The next day I cut the two stitches and the
+Indian was well. The wound I made appeared only like a seam in the
+palm of the hand. He said he felt no pain or sensitiveness in it
+whatsoever. This cure gave us control throughout the country in all
+that the inhabitants had power, or deemed of any value, or cherished.
+We showed them the hawk-bell we brought, and they told us that in
+the place whence that had come, were buried many plates of the same
+material; it was a thing they greatly esteemed, and where it came
+from were fixed habitations.[172] The country we considered to be on
+the South Sea, which we had ever understood to be richer than the one
+of the North.
+
+  [172] The allusion is probably to Mexico rather than to a
+  northern country, as previously asserted by the Indians. See the
+  second preceding paragraph.
+
+We left there, and travelled through so many sorts of people, of
+such diverse languages, the memory fails to recall them. They ever
+plundered each other, and those that lost, like those that gained,
+were fully content.[173] We drew so many followers that we had not
+use for their services. While on our way through these vales, every
+Indian carried a club three palms in length, and kept on the alert.
+On raising a hare, which animals are abundant, they surround it
+directly and throw numerous clubs at it with astonishing precision.
+Thus they cause it to run from one to another; so that, according to
+my thinking, it is the most pleasing sport which can be imagined,
+as oftentimes the animal runs into the hand. So many did they give
+us that at night when we stopped we had eight or ten back-loads
+apiece.[174] Those having bows were not with us; they dispersed about
+the ridge in pursuit of deer; and at dark came bringing five or six
+for each of us, besides quail, and other game. Indeed, whatever
+they either killed or found, was put before us, without themselves
+daring to take anything until we had blessed it, though they should
+be expiring of hunger, they having so established the rule, since
+marching with us.
+
+  [173] Of this exchange of gifts, or perhaps we may call it
+  plunder, there was an echo a few years later, when Coronado and
+  his army were traversing the eastern part of the Staked Plain,
+  under the guidance of the "Turk," in search of Quivira, in 1541.
+  Before sending the army back, and while among the ravines of
+  western Texas, Rodrigo Maldonado was sent forward to explore, and
+  in four days reached a deep ravine in the bottom of which was a
+  village that Cabeza de Vaca had visited, on which account (see
+  p. 332) "they presented Don Rodrigo with a pile of tanned skins
+  and other things." An unfair distribution being threatened, the
+  men rushed upon the skins and took possession without further
+  ado. "The women and some others were left crying, because they
+  thought that the strangers were not going to take anything, but
+  would bless them as Cabeza de Vaca and Dorantes had done _when
+  they passed through here_." Captain Jaramillo does not mention
+  this occurrence in his narrative (_Fourteenth Report of the
+  Bureau of American Ethnology_, p. 588), but he speaks of reaching
+  a settlement of Indians, in advance of that, according to the
+  narrations, of which Castañeda speaks, "among whom there was an
+  old blind man with a beard, who gave us to understand by signs
+  which he made, that he had seen four others like us many days
+  before, whom he had seen near there and rather more toward New
+  Spain [Mexico], and we so understood him, and presumed that it
+  was Dorantes and Cabeza de Vaca and those whom I have mentioned."
+  Although we do not have here conclusive evidence that Cabeza de
+  Vaca actually visited the village or villages mentioned, there is
+  no question that he must have been in this vicinity, and as the
+  evidence is strong that the Rio Colorado was the ravined stream
+  alluded to, there is little likelihood that Cabeza de Vaca's
+  route lay far below that river.
+
+  [174] The Pueblo Indians of New Mexico have similar communal
+  rabbit-hunts, in which the animals are killed with a curved stick
+  shaped somewhat like a boomerang.
+
+The women carried many mats, of which the men made us houses, each of
+us having a separate one, with all his attendants. After these were
+put up, we ordered the deer and hares to be roasted, with the rest
+that had been taken. This was done by means of certain ovens made for
+the purpose. Of each we took a little and the remainder we gave to
+the principal personage of the people coming with us, directing him
+to divide it among the rest. Every one brought his portion to us,
+that we might breathe upon and give it our benediction; for not until
+then did they dare eat any of it. Frequently we were accompanied by
+three or four thousand persons, and as we had to breathe upon and
+sanctify the food and drink for each, and grant permission to do the
+many things they would come to ask, it may be seen how great was the
+annoyance. The women first brought us prickly pears, spiders, worms,
+and whatever else they could gather; for even were they famishing,
+they would eat nothing unless we gave it them.
+
+In company with these, we crossed a great river coming from the
+north,[175] and passing over some plains thirty leagues in extent,
+we found many persons coming a long distance to receive us, who met
+us on the road over which we were to travel, and welcomed us in the
+manner of those we had left.
+
+  [175] Evidently the Pecos. This is the first stream mentioned as
+  flowing from the north.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 30
+
+_The fashion of receiving us changes._
+
+
+From this place was another method of receiving us, as respects the
+pillage. Those who came out in the ways to bring us presents were not
+plundered; but on our coming into their houses, themselves offered us
+all they had, as well as the houses. We gave the things to the chief
+personages who accompanied us, that they should divide them; those
+who were despoiled always followed us until coming to a populous
+country, where they might repair their loss. They would tell those
+among whom we came, to retain everything and make no concealment,
+as nothing could be done without our knowledge, and we might cause
+them to die, as the sun revealed everything to us. So great was their
+fear that during the first days they were with us, they continually
+trembled, without daring even to speak, or raise their eyes to the
+heavens. They guided us through more than fifty leagues of desert,
+over rough mountains, which being dry were without game, and in
+consequence we suffered much from hunger.[176]
+
+  [176] Eighty leagues would probably be a reasonable estimate
+  of the distance from the Pecos to the Rio Grande, which the
+  travellers had now reached. It would seem strange that no mention
+  is made of the cañon of the latter stream (which hereabouts flows
+  through a territory four thousand feet above sea level), were
+  it not for the fact that they had become thoroughly inured to
+  suffering and hard travelling; nevertheless, the terribly rough
+  country through which they had just been guided from stream to
+  stream is commented on, while the fact that the Rio Grande here
+  "flows between some ridges" is mentioned farther on.
+
+At the termination we forded a very large river, the water coming up
+to our breasts. From this place, many of the people began to sicken
+from the great privation and labor they had undergone in the passage
+of those ridges, which are sterile and difficult in the extreme. They
+conducted us to certain plains at the base of the mountains, where
+people came to meet us from a great distance, and received us as the
+last had done, and gave so many goods to those who came with us, that
+the half were left because they could not be carried. I told those
+who gave, to resume the goods that they might not lie there and be
+lost; but they answered they could in no wise do so, as it was not
+their custom after they had bestowed a thing to take it back;[177] so
+considering the articles no longer of value, they were left to perish.
+
+  [177] An assertion quite contrary to the popular belief in
+  "Indian gifts."
+
+We told these people that we desired to go where the sun sets; and
+they said inhabitants in that direction were remote. We commanded
+them to send and make known our coming; but they strove to excuse
+themselves the best they could, the people being their enemies, and
+they did not wish to go to them. Not daring to disobey, however,
+they sent two women, one of their own, the other a captive from that
+people; for the women can negotiate even though there be war. We
+followed them, and stopped at a place where we agreed to wait. They
+tarried five days; and the Indians said they could not have found
+anybody.
+
+We told them to conduct us towards the north; and they answered, as
+before, that except afar off there were no people in that direction,
+and nothing to eat, nor could water be found.[178] Notwithstanding
+all this, we persisted, and said we desired to go in that course.
+They still tried to excuse themselves in the best manner possible.
+At this we became offended, and one night I went out to sleep in
+the woods apart from them; but directly they came to where I was,
+and remained all night without sleep, talking to me in great fear,
+telling me how terrified they were, beseeching us to be no longer
+angry, and said that they would lead us in the direction it was our
+wish to go, though they knew they should die on the way.
+
+  [178] The Indians were evidently endeavoring to compel the
+  Spaniards to remain among them as long as possible.
+
+Whilst we still feigned to be displeased lest their fright should
+leave them, a remarkable circumstance happened, which was that on the
+same day many of the Indians became ill, and the next day eight men
+died. Abroad in the country, wheresoever this became known, there was
+such dread that it seemed as if the inhabitants would die of fear at
+sight of us. They besought us not to remain angered, nor require that
+more of them should die. They believed we caused their death by only
+willing it, when in truth it gave us so much pain that it could not
+be greater; for, beyond their loss, we feared they might all die, or
+abandon us of fright, and that other people thenceforward would do
+the same, seeing what had come to these. We prayed to God, our Lord,
+to relieve them; and from that time the sick began to get better.
+
+We witnessed one thing with great admiration, that the parents,
+brothers, and wives of those who died had great sympathy for them
+in their suffering; but, when dead, they showed no feeling, neither
+did they weep nor speak among themselves, make any signs, nor dare
+approach the bodies until we commanded these to be taken to burial.
+
+While we were among these people, which was more than fifteen days,
+we saw no one speak to another, nor did we see an infant smile: the
+only one that cried they took off to a distance, and with the sharp
+teeth of a rat they scratched it from the shoulders down nearly to
+the end of the legs. Seeing this cruelty, and offended at it, I asked
+why they did so: they said for chastisement, because the child had
+wept in my presence. These terrors they imparted to all those who had
+lately come to know us, that they might give us whatever they had;
+for they knew we kept nothing, and would relinquish all to them. This
+people were the most obedient we had found in all the land, the best
+conditioned, and, in general, comely.
+
+The sick having recovered, and three days having passed since we came
+to the place, the women whom we sent away returned, and said they
+had found very few people; nearly all had gone for cattle, being
+then in the season. We ordered the convalescent to remain and the
+well to go with us, and that at the end of two days' journey those
+women should go with two of our number to fetch up the people, and
+bring them on the road to receive us. Consequently, the next morning
+the most robust started with us. At the end of three days' travel we
+stopped, and the next day Alonzo del Castillo set out with Estevanico
+the negro, taking the two women as guides. She that was the captive
+led them to the river which ran between some ridges,[179] where was a
+town at which her father lived; and these habitations were the first
+seen, having the appearance and structure of houses.[180]
+
+  [179] _The_ river was the Rio Grande, to which they had now
+  returned. The description of the topography is in accordance with
+  the facts.
+
+  [180] The substantial character of the houses was noted also
+  by Antonio de Espejo, toward the close of 1582, on his journey
+  northward to New Mexico. Espejo speaks of these Indians, the
+  Jumanos, or Patarabueyes, as occupying five villages from about
+  the junction of the Conchos northward up the Rio Grande for
+  twelve days' journey, and as numbering ten thousand souls--but
+  Espejo's estimates of population are always greatly exaggerated.
+  More important is his statement that the Jumanos knew something
+  of Christianity which they had gleaned years before from three
+  Christians and a negro, whom he naturally believed to have been
+  "Alvaro Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca, y Dorantes, y Castillo Maldonado,
+  y un negro," who had made their escape from Narvaez's fleet.
+  This is one of the few definite points of the narrative that can
+  be established without question. See _Coleccion de Documentos
+  Inéditos relativos ... de América y Oceanía_, XV. 107 (1871).
+
+Here Castillo and Estevanico arrived, and, after talking with the
+Indians, Castillo returned at the end of three days to the spot where
+he had left us, and brought five or six of the people. He told us
+he had found fixed dwellings of civilization, that the inhabitants
+lived on beans and pumpkins,[181] and that he had seen maize. This
+news the most of anything delighted us, and for it we gave infinite
+thanks to our Lord. Castillo told us the negro was coming with all
+the population to wait for us in the road not far off. Accordingly
+we left, and, having travelled a league and a half, we met the negro
+and the people coming to receive us. They gave us beans, many
+pumpkins, calabashes,[182] blankets of cowhide and other things. As
+this people and those who came with us were enemies,[183] and spoke
+not each other's language, we discharged the latter, giving them
+what we received, and we departed with the others. Six leagues from
+there, as the night set in we arrived at the houses, where great
+festivities were made over us. We remained one day, and the next set
+out with these Indians. They took us to the settled habitations of
+others,[184] who lived upon the same food.
+
+  [181] _Melones_ in the edition of 1542. Bandelier has no doubt
+  that a species of squash is meant.
+
+  [182] ... "beans and many squashes to eat, gourds to carry water
+  in" (ed. of 1542, Bandelier translation).
+
+  [183] That is, the Jumanos and probably the Tobosos respectively.
+  The captive woman evidently belonged to the latter tribe.
+
+  [184] Apparently other settlements of the Jumanos, as mentioned
+  in the above note. The Spaniards were now going up the Rio Grande.
+
+From that place onward was another usage. Those who knew of our
+approach did not come out to receive us on the road as the others had
+done, but we found them in their houses, and they had made others for
+our reception. They were all seated with their faces turned to the
+wall, their heads down, the hair brought before their eyes, and their
+property placed in a heap in the middle of the house. From this place
+they began to give us many blankets of skin; and they had nothing
+they did not bestow. They have the finest persons of any people we
+saw, of the greatest activity and strength, who best understood us
+and intelligently answered our inquiries. We called them the Cow
+nation, because most of the cattle killed are slaughtered in their
+neighborhood, and along up that river for over fifty leagues they
+destroy great numbers.[185]
+
+  [185] Although they resided in permanent habitations at this
+  time, the Jumanos lived east of the Rio Grande, in New Mexico,
+  a century later and practised the habits of the buffalo-hunting
+  plains tribes rather than those of sedentary Indians. The
+  "neighborhood" was evidently not the immediate vicinity, and the
+  stream alluded to seems much more likely to have been the Pecos
+  than the Rio Grande, the former having been named Rio de las
+  Vacas by Espejo in 1583. On this point see the opening paragraph
+  of the following chapter.
+
+They go entirely naked after the manner of the first we saw. The
+women are dressed with deer-skin, and some few men, mostly the aged,
+who are incapable of fighting. The country is very populous. We asked
+how it was they did not plant maize. They answered it was that they
+might not lose what they should put in the ground; that the rains
+had failed for two years in succession, and the seasons were so dry
+the seed had everywhere been taken by the moles, and they could not
+venture to plant again until after water had fallen copiously. They
+begged us to tell the sky to rain, and to pray for it, and we said we
+would do so. We also desired to know whence they got the maize, and
+they told us from where the sun goes down; there it grew throughout
+the region, and the nearest was by that path. Since they did not wish
+to go thither, we asked by what direction we might best proceed,
+and bade them inform us concerning the way; they said the path was
+along up by that river towards the north, for otherwise in a journey
+of seventeen days we should find nothing to eat, except a fruit
+they call _chacan_, that is ground between stones, and even then it
+could with difficulty be eaten for its dryness and pungency,--which
+was true. They showed it to us there, and we could not eat it. They
+informed us also that, whilst we travelled by the river upward, we
+should all the way pass through a people that were their enemies, who
+spoke their tongue, and, though they had nothing to give us to eat,
+they would receive us with the best good will, and present us with
+mantles of cotton, hides, and other articles of their wealth.[186]
+Still it appeared to them we ought by no means to take that course.
+
+  [186] The Pueblo Indians of New Mexico are here referred to.
+  Later Spanish explorers found cotton garments in abundance in
+  their country. The statement here that the Jumanos spoke the same
+  tongue as some of the Pueblos is significant, and accounts in a
+  measure for the affiliation of the Jumanos with the Piros when
+  missions were established by the Franciscans among these two
+  tribes east of the Rio Grande, in New Mexico, in 1629.
+
+Doubting what it would be best to do, and which way we should
+choose for suitableness and support, we remained two days with
+these Indians, who gave us beans and pumpkins for our subsistence.
+Their method of cooking is so new that for its strangeness I desire
+to speak of it; thus it may be seen and remarked how curious and
+diversified are the contrivances and ingenuity of the human family.
+Not having discovered the use of pipkins, to boil what they would
+eat, they fill the half of a large calabash with water, and throw
+on the fire many stones of such as are most convenient and readily
+take the heat. When hot, they are taken up with tongs of sticks and
+dropped into the calabash until the water in it boils from the fervor
+of the stones. Then whatever is to be cooked is put in, and until it
+is done they continue taking out cooled stones and throwing in hot
+ones. Thus they boil their food.[187]
+
+  [187] This was not an uncommon practice, especially among the
+  non-sedentary tribes who could not readily transport pottery from
+  place to place. The name _Assiniboin_, meaning "stone Sioux,"
+  abbreviated to "Stonies," is derived from this custom. Tightly
+  woven baskets and wooden bowls were also used for the purpose.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 31
+
+_Of our taking the way to the maize._
+
+
+Two days being spent while we tarried, we resolved to go in search
+of the maize. We did not wish to follow the path leading to where
+the cattle are, because it is towards the north, and for us very
+circuitous, since we ever held it certain that going towards the
+sunset we must find what we desired.
+
+Thus we took our way, and traversed all the country until coming
+out at the South Sea. Nor was the dread we had of the sharp hunger
+through which we should have to pass (as in verity we did, throughout
+the seventeen days' journey of which the natives spoke) sufficient
+to hinder us. During all that time, in ascending by the river, they
+gave us many coverings of cowhide; but we did not eat of the fruit.
+Our sustenance each day was about a handful of deer-suet, which we
+had a long time been used to saving for such trials. Thus we passed
+the entire journey of seventeen days, and at the close we crossed the
+river[188] and travelled other seventeen days.
+
+  [188] Probably the Rio Santa Maria, in Chihuahua.
+
+As the sun went down, upon some plains that lie between chains
+of very great mountains,[189] we found a people who for the third
+part of the year eat nothing but the powder of straw, and, that
+being the season when we passed, we also had to eat of it, until
+reaching permanent habitations, where was abundance of maize brought
+together.[190] They gave us a large quantity in grain and flour,
+pumpkins, beans, and shawls of cotton. With all these we loaded our
+guides, who went back the happiest creatures on earth. We gave thanks
+to God, our Lord, for having brought us where we had found so much
+food.
+
+  [189] The Sierra Madre.
+
+  [190] The numerous villages of the Opata and cognate tribes of
+  Sonora.
+
+Some houses are of earth, the rest all of cane mats. From this
+point we marched through more than a hundred leagues of country,
+and continually found settled domicils, with plenty of maize and
+beans. The people gave us many deer and cotton shawls better than
+those of New Spain, many beads and certain corals found on the South
+Sea, and fine turquoises that come from the north. Indeed they gave
+us every thing they had. To me they gave five emeralds[191] made
+into arrow-heads, which they use at their singing and dancing. They
+appeared to be very precious. I asked whence they got these; and they
+said the stones were brought from some lofty mountains that stand
+toward the north, where were populous towns and very large houses,
+and that they were purchased with plumes and the feathers of parrots.
+
+  [191] Bandelier (p. 156) believes that there may have been
+  malachites.
+
+Among this people the women are treated with more decorum than in
+any part of the Indias we had visited. They wear a shirt of cotton
+that falls as low as the knee, and over it half sleeves with skirts
+reaching to the ground, made of dressed deer-skin.[192] It opens
+in front and is brought close with straps of leather. They soap
+this with a certain root[193] that cleanses well, by which they are
+enabled to keep it becomingly. Shoes are worn. The people all came to
+us that we should touch and bless them, they being very urgent, which
+we could accomplish only with great labor, for sick and well all
+wished to go with a benediction. Many times it occurred that some of
+the women who accompanied us gave birth; and so soon as the children
+were born the mothers would bring them to us that we should touch and
+bless them.
+
+  [192] For the clothing of the Opata Indians, see Castañeda's
+  narration in this volume.
+
+  [193] Amole, the root of the yucca.
+
+These Indians ever accompanied us until they delivered us to others;
+and all held full faith in our coming from heaven. While travelling,
+we went without food all day until night, and we ate so little as
+to astonish them. We never felt exhaustion, neither were we in fact
+at all weary, so inured were we to hardship. We possessed great
+influence and authority: to preserve both, we seldom talked with
+them. The negro was in constant conversation; he informed himself
+about the ways we wished to take, of the towns there were, and the
+matters we desired to know.
+
+We passed through many and dissimilar tongues. Our Lord granted us
+favor with the people who spoke them, for they always understood us,
+and we them. We questioned them, and received their answers by signs,
+just as if they spoke our language and we theirs; for, although we
+knew six languages, we could not everywhere avail ourselves of them,
+there being a thousand differences.
+
+Throughout all these countries the people who were at war immediately
+made friends, that they might come to meet us, and bring what they
+possessed. In this way we left all the land at peace, and we taught
+all the inhabitants by signs, which they understood, that in heaven
+was a Man we called God, who had created the sky and the earth; Him
+we worshipped and had for our master; that we did what He commanded
+and from His hand came all good; and would they do as we did, all
+would be well with them. So ready of apprehension we found them that,
+could we have had the use of language by which to make ourselves
+perfectly understood, we should have left them all Christians. Thus
+much we gave them to understand the best we could. And afterward,
+when the sun rose, they opened their hands together with loud
+shouting towards the heavens, and then drew them down all over their
+bodies. They did the same again when the sun went down. They are a
+people of good condition and substance, capable in any pursuit.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 32
+
+_The Indians give us the hearts of deer._
+
+
+In the town where the emeralds were presented to us the people gave
+Dorantes over six hundred open hearts of deer. They ever keep a
+good supply of them for food, and we called the place Pueblo de los
+Corazones.[194] It is the entrance into many provinces on the South
+Sea. They who go to look for them, and do not enter there, will be
+lost. On the coast is no maize: the inhabitants eat the powder of
+rush and of straw, and fish that is caught in the sea from rafts, not
+having canoes. With grass and straw the women cover their nudity.
+They are a timid and dejected people.[195]
+
+  [194] Town of the Hearts, at or near the present Ures, on the Rio
+  Sonora. The place became celebrated in 1540, when Coronado's army
+  passed through the country. See the Castañeda narration in this
+  volume.
+
+  [195] These were the Seri, Guaymas, Upanguaymas, and Tepoca
+  tribes. The Seri particularly have ever been noted for their
+  warlike character, but Cabeza de Vaca does not here speak from
+  personal knowledge.
+
+We think that near the coast by way of those towns through which
+we came are more than a thousand leagues of inhabited country,
+plentiful of subsistence. Three times the year it is planted with
+maize and beans. Deer are of three kinds; one the size of the young
+steer of Spain. There are innumerable houses, such as are called
+_bahíos_.[196] They have poison from a certain tree the size of the
+apple. For effect no more is necessary than to pluck the fruit and
+moisten the arrow with it, or, if there be no fruit, to break a twig
+and with the milk do the like. The tree is abundant and so deadly
+that, if the leaves be bruised and steeped in some neighboring water,
+the deer and other animals drinking it soon burst.[197]
+
+  [196] That is, in the West Indies, see p. 19, note 5.
+
+  [197] See the Castañeda narration, p. 326, _post_; and compare
+  the _Rudo Ensayo_ (_ca._ 1763), p. 64, 1863, which says: "_Mago_,
+  in the Opata language, is a small tree, very green, luxuriant,
+  and beautiful to the eye; but it contains a deadly juice which
+  flows upon making a slight incision in the bark. The natives rub
+  their arrows with it, and for this reason they call it arrow
+  herb; but at present they use very little."
+
+We were in this town three days. A day's journey[198] farther was
+another town,[199] at which the rain fell heavily while we were
+there, and the river became so swollen we could not cross it, which
+detained us fifteen days. In this time Castillo saw the buckle of a
+sword-belt on the neck of an Indian and stitched to it the nail of
+a horseshoe. He took them, and we asked the native what they were:
+he answered that they came from heaven. We questioned him further,
+as to who had brought them thence: they all responded that certain
+men who wore beards like us had come from heaven and arrived at that
+river, bringing horses, lances, and swords, and that they had lanced
+two Indians. In a manner of the utmost indifference we could feign,
+we asked them what had become of those men. They answered us that
+they had gone to sea, putting their lances beneath the water, and
+going themselves also under the water; afterwards that they were
+seen on the surface going towards the sunset. For this we gave many
+thanks to God our Lord. We had before despaired of ever hearing more
+of Christians. Even yet we were left in great doubt and anxiety,
+thinking those people were merely persons who had come by sea on
+discoveries. However, as we had now such exact information, we made
+greater speed, and, as we advanced on our way, the news of the
+Christians continually grew. We told the natives that we were going
+in search of that people, to order them not to kill nor make slaves
+of them, nor take them from their lands, nor do other injustice. Of
+this the Indians were very glad.
+
+  [198] Twelve leagues, and the same distance from the Gulf of
+  California, according to the last paragraph of this chapter.
+
+  [199] Perhaps at or in the vicinity of the present Hermosillo,
+  Sonora, although the distance is greater than that given later.
+
+We passed through many territories and found them all vacant: their
+inhabitants wandered fleeing among the mountains, without daring
+to have houses or till the earth for fear of Christians. The sight
+was one of infinite pain to us, a land very fertile and beautiful,
+abounding in springs and streams, the hamlets deserted and burned,
+the people thin and weak, all fleeing or in concealment. As they did
+not plant, they appeased their keen hunger by eating roots and the
+bark of trees. We bore a share in the famine along the whole way;
+for poorly could these unfortunates provide for us, themselves being
+so reduced they looked as though they would willingly die. They
+brought shawls of those they had concealed because of the Christians,
+presenting them to us; and they related how the Christians at other
+times had come through the land, destroying and burning the towns,
+carrying away half the men, and all the women and the boys, while
+those who had been able to escape were wandering about fugitives. We
+found them so alarmed they dared not remain anywhere. They would not
+nor could they till the earth, but preferred to die rather than live
+in dread of such cruel usage as they received. Although these showed
+themselves greatly delighted with us, we feared that on our arrival
+among those who held the frontier, and fought against the Christians,
+they would treat us badly, and revenge upon us the conduct of their
+enemies; but, when God our Lord was pleased to bring us there, they
+began to dread and respect us as the others had done, and even
+somewhat more, at which we no little wondered. Thence it may at once
+be seen that, to bring all these people to be Christians and to the
+obedience of the Imperial Majesty, they must be won by kindness,
+which is a way certain, and no other is.
+
+They took us to a town on the edge of a range of mountains, to which
+the ascent is over difficult crags. We found many people there
+collected out of fear of the Christians. They received us well,
+and presented us all they had. They gave us more than two thousand
+back-loads of maize, which we gave to the distressed and hungered
+beings who guided us to that place. The next day we despatched four
+messengers through the country, as we were accustomed to do, that
+they should call together all the rest of the Indians at a town
+distant three days' march. We set out the day after with all the
+people. The tracks of the Christians and marks where they slept were
+continually seen. At mid-day we met our messengers, who told us
+they had found no Indians, that they were roving and hiding in the
+forests, fleeing that the Christians might not kill nor make them
+slaves; the night before they had observed the Christians from behind
+trees, and discovered what they were about, carrying away many people
+in chains.
+
+Those who came with us were alarmed at this intelligence; some
+returned to spread the news over the land that the Christians were
+coming; and many more would have followed, had we not forbidden
+it and told them to cast aside their fear, when they reassured
+themselves and were well content. At the time we had Indians with us
+belonging a hundred leagues behind, and we were in no condition to
+discharge them, that they might return to their homes. To encourage
+them, we stayed there that night; the day after we marched and slept
+on the road. The following day those whom we had sent forward as
+messengers guided us to the place where they had seen Christians. We
+arrived in the afternoon, and saw at once that they told the truth.
+We perceived that the persons were mounted, by the stakes to which
+the horses had been tied.
+
+From this spot, called the river Petutan,[200] to the river to
+which Diego de Guzmán came,[201] where we heard of Christians, may
+be as many as eighty leagues; thence to the town where the rains
+overtook us, twelve leagues, and that is twelve leagues from the
+South Sea.[202] Throughout this region, wheresoever the mountains
+extend, we saw clear traces of gold and lead, iron, copper, and other
+metals. Where the settled habitations are, the climate is hot; even
+in January the weather is very warm. Thence toward the meridian, the
+country unoccupied to the North Sea is unhappy and sterile. There we
+underwent great and incredible hunger. Those who inhabit and wander
+over it are a race of evil inclination and most cruel customs. The
+people of the fixed residences[203] and those beyond regard silver
+and gold with indifference, nor can they conceive of any use for them.
+
+  [200] Petatlan; so also in the edition of 1542. This is the Rio
+  Sinaloa. See Castañeda's narration of the Coronado expedition,
+  part 2, ch. 2, _post_.
+
+  [201] See the note on Guzman in the Castañeda relation. The
+  narrative is here slightly confused, as the town at which
+  they first heard of Christians was the one in which they were
+  overtaken by the rain, according to Cabeza de Vaca's previous
+  statement in this chapter.
+
+  [202] The Gulf of California. As he did not go to the coast,
+  however, his estimate is considerably below the actual distance.
+
+  [203] The Jumanos, previously mentioned.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 33
+
+_We see traces of Christians._
+
+
+When we saw sure signs of Christians, and heard how near we were to
+them, we gave thanks to God our Lord for having chosen to bring us
+out of a captivity so melancholy and wretched. The delight we felt
+let each one conjecture, when he shall remember the length of time
+we were in that country, the suffering and perils we underwent. That
+night I entreated my companions that one of them should go back three
+days' journey after the Christians who were moving about over the
+country, where we had given assurance of protection. Neither of them
+received this proposal well, excusing themselves because of weariness
+and exhaustion; and although either might have done better than I,
+being more youthful and athletic, yet seeing their unwillingness, the
+next morning I took the negro with eleven Indians, and, following the
+Christians by their trail, I travelled ten leagues, passing three
+villages, at which they had slept.
+
+The day after I overtook four of them on horseback, who were
+astonished at the sight of me, so strangely habited as I was, and
+in company with Indians.[204] They stood staring at me a length of
+time, so confounded that they neither hailed me nor drew near to make
+an inquiry. I bade them take me to their chief: accordingly we went
+together half a league to the place where was Diego de Alcaraz, their
+captain.[205]
+
+  [204] There were twenty horsemen according to the _Letter_
+  (Oviedo, p. 612).
+
+  [205] Alcaraz later served as a lieutenant under Diaz in the
+  Coronado expedition. Castañeda characterizes him as a weakling.
+
+After we had conversed, he stated to me that he was completely
+undone; he had not been able in a long time to take any Indians; he
+knew not which way to turn, and his men had well begun to experience
+hunger and fatigue. I told him of Castillo and Dorantes, who were
+behind, ten leagues off, with a multitude that conducted us. He
+thereupon sent three cavalry to them, with fifty of the Indians who
+accompanied him. The negro returned to guide them, while I remained.
+I asked the Christians to give me a certificate of the year, month,
+and day I arrived there, and of the manner of my coming, which they
+accordingly did. From this river[206] to the town of the Christians,
+named San Miguel,[207] within the government of the province called
+New Galicia, are thirty leagues.
+
+  [206] Evidently the Rio Sinaloa.
+
+  [207] San Miguel Culiacan. See Castañeda's narration.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 34
+
+_Of sending for the Christians._
+
+
+Five days having elapsed, Andrés Dorantes and Alonzo del Castillo
+arrived with those who had been sent after them. They brought more
+than six hundred persons of that community, whom the Christians had
+driven into the forests, and who had wandered in concealment over the
+land. Those who accompanied us so far had drawn them out, and given
+them to the Christians, who thereupon dismissed all the others they
+had brought with them. Upon their coming to where I was, Alcaraz
+begged that we would summon the people of the towns on the margin of
+the river, who straggled about under cover of the woods, and order
+them to fetch us something to eat. This last was unnecessary, the
+Indians being ever diligent to bring us all they could. Directly we
+sent our messengers to call them, when there came six hundred souls,
+bringing us all the maize in their possession. They fetched it in
+certain pots, closed with clay, which they had concealed in the
+earth. They brought us whatever else they had; but we, wishing only
+to have the provision, gave the rest to the Christians, that they
+might divide among themselves. After this we had many high words with
+them; for they wished to make slaves of the Indians we brought.
+
+In consequence of the dispute, we left at our departure many bows
+of Turkish shape we had along with us and many pouches. The five
+arrows with the points of emerald were forgotten among others, and
+we lost them. We gave the Christians a store of robes of cowhide and
+other things we brought. We found it difficult to induce the Indians
+to return to their dwellings, to feel no apprehension and plant
+maize. They were willing to do nothing until they had gone with us
+and delivered us into the hands of other Indians, as had been the
+custom; for, if they returned without doing so, they were afraid
+they should die, and, going with us, they feared neither Christians
+nor lances. Our countrymen became jealous at this, and caused their
+interpreter to tell the Indians that we were of them, and for a long
+time we had been lost; that they were the lords of the land who must
+be obeyed and served, while we were persons of mean condition and
+small force. The Indians cared little or nothing for what was told
+them; and conversing among themselves said the Christians lied: that
+we had come whence the sun rises, and they whence it goes down; we
+healed the sick, they killed the sound; that we had come naked and
+barefooted, while they had arrived in clothing and on horses with
+lances; that we were not covetous of anything, but all that was given
+to us we directly turned to give, remaining with nothing; that the
+others had the only purpose to rob whomsoever they found, bestowing
+nothing on any one.
+
+In this way they spoke of all matters respecting us, which they
+enhanced by contrast with matters concerning the others, delivering
+their response through the interpreter of the Spaniards. To other
+Indians they made this known by means of one among them through whom
+they understood us. Those who speak that tongue we discriminately
+call Primahaitu, which is like saying Vasconyados.[208] We found
+it in use over more than four hundred leagues of our travel,
+without another over that whole extent. Even to the last, I could
+not convince the Indians that we were of the Christians; and only
+with great effort and solicitation we got them to go back to their
+residences. We ordered them to put away apprehension, establish their
+towns, plant and cultivate the soil.
+
+  [208] Evidently intended for _Pimahaitu_, through
+  misunderstanding. These tribes who lived in permanent
+  habitations, from the village of the Corazones (Hearts) to
+  Culiacan, were all of the Piman family, and consequently spoke
+  related languages. The Pima do not call themselves _Pima_, but
+  _O-otam_, "men," "people." _Pima_ means "no"; _pimahaitu_, "no
+  thing." The term _Vasconyados_, or _Vascongados_, refers to the
+  Biscayans.
+
+From abandonment the country had already grown up thickly in trees.
+It is, no doubt, the best in all these Indias, the most prolific
+and plenteous in provisions. Three times in the year it is planted.
+It produces great variety of fruit, has beautiful rivers, with many
+other good waters. There are ores with clear traces of gold and
+silver. The people are well disposed: they serve such Christians as
+are their friends, with great good will. They are comely, much more
+so than the Mexicans. Indeed, the land needs no circumstance to make
+it blessed.
+
+The Indians, at taking their leave, told us they would do what we
+commanded, and would build their towns, if the Christians would
+suffer them; and this I say and affirm most positively, that, if they
+have not done so, it is the fault of the Christians.
+
+After we had dismissed the Indians in peace, and thanked them for the
+toil they had supported with us, the Christians with subtlety sent
+us on our way under charge of Zebreros, an alcalde, attended by two
+men. They took us through forests and solitudes, to hinder us from
+intercourse with the natives, that we might neither witness nor have
+knowledge of the act they would commit. It is but an instance of how
+frequently men are mistaken in their aims; we set about to preserve
+the liberty of the Indians and thought we had secured it, but the
+contrary appeared; for the Christians had arranged to go and spring
+upon those we had sent away in peace and confidence. They executed
+their plan as they had designed, taking us through the woods, wherein
+for two days we were lost, without water and without way. Seven of
+our men died of thirst, and we all thought to have perished. Many
+friendly to the Christians in their company were unable to reach
+the place where we got water the second night, until the noon of
+next day. We travelled twenty-five leagues, little more or less, and
+reached a town of friendly Indians. The alcalde left us there, and
+went on three leagues farther to a town called Culiacan where was
+Melchior Diaz, principal alcalde and captain of the province.[209]
+
+  [209] For the later career of this officer, see Castañeda's
+  narration. Melchior Diaz was a man of very different stamp to
+  Guzman, Alcaraz, and Zebreros (or Cebreros), so far as his
+  treatment of the Indians is concerned.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 35
+
+_The chief alcalde receives us kindly the night we arrive._
+
+
+The _alcalde mayor_ knew of the expedition, and, hearing of our
+return, he immediately left that night and came to where we were.
+He wept with us, giving praises to God our Lord for having extended
+over us so great care. He comforted and entertained us hospitably.
+In behalf of the Governor, Nuño de Guzman and himself, he tendered
+all that he had, and the service in his power. He showed much regret
+for the seizure, and the injustice we had received from Alcaraz and
+others. We were sure, had he been present, what was done to the
+Indians and to us would never have occurred.
+
+The night being passed, we set out the next day for Anhacan. The
+chief alcalde besought us to tarry there, since by so doing we could
+be of eminent service to God and your Majesty; the deserted land was
+without tillage and everywhere badly wasted, the Indians were fleeing
+and concealing themselves in the thickets, unwilling to occupy their
+towns; we were to send and call them, commanding them in behalf of
+God and the King, to return to live in the vales and cultivate the
+soil.
+
+To us this appeared difficult to effect. We had brought no native
+of our own, nor of those who accompanied us according to custom,
+intelligent in these affairs. At last we made the attempt with two
+captives, brought from that country, who were with the Christians
+we first overtook. They had seen the people who conducted us, and
+learned from them the great authority and command we carried and
+exercised throughout those parts, the wonders we had worked, the sick
+we had cured, and the many things besides we had done. We ordered
+that they, with others of the town, should go together to summon the
+hostile natives among the mountains and of the river Petachan,[210]
+where we had found the Christians, and say to them they must come
+to us, that we wished to speak with them. For the protection of the
+messengers, and as a token to the others of our will, we gave them
+a gourd of those we were accustomed to bear in our hands, which had
+been our principal insignia and evidence of rank,[211] and with this
+they went away.
+
+  [210] Petatlan--the Rio Sinaloa.
+
+  [211] Evidently one of those obtained in Texas and which the
+  Indians there so highly regarded. See p. 90, note 2; p. 95, note
+  1.
+
+The Indians were gone seven days, and returned with three chiefs of
+those revolted among the ridges, who brought with them fifteen men,
+and presented us beads, turquoises, and feathers. The messengers
+said they had not found the people of the river where we appeared,
+the Christians having again made them run away into the mountains.
+Melchior Diaz told the interpreter to speak to the natives for us;
+to say to them we came in the name of God, who is in heaven; that
+we had travelled about the world many years, telling all the people
+we found that they should believe in God and serve Him; for He was
+the Master of all things on the earth, benefiting and rewarding the
+virtuous, and to the bad giving perpetual punishment of fire; that,
+when the good die, He takes them to heaven, where none ever die, nor
+feel cold, nor hunger, nor thirst, nor any inconvenience whatsoever,
+but the greatest enjoyment possible to conceive; that those who will
+not believe in Him, nor obey His commands, He casts beneath the earth
+into the company of demons, and into a great fire which is never
+to go out, but always torment; that, over this, if they desired to
+be Christians and serve God in the way we required, the Christians
+would cherish them as brothers and behave towards them very kindly;
+that we would command they give no offence nor take them from their
+territories, but be their great friends. If the Indians did not do
+this, the Christians would treat them very hardly, carrying them away
+as slaves into other lands.[212]
+
+  [212] Among the Indians of this region who were carried away into
+  captivity were the Yaqui, who have been hostile to the whites to
+  this day.
+
+They answered through the interpreter that they would be true
+Christians and serve God. Being asked to whom they sacrifice and
+offer worship, from whom they ask rain for their corn-fields and
+health for themselves, they answered of a man that is in heaven. We
+inquired of them his name, and they told us Aguar; and they believed
+he created the whole world, and the things in it. We returned to
+question them as to how they knew this; they answered their fathers
+and grandfathers had told them, that from distant time had come their
+knowledge, and they knew the rain and all good things were sent to
+them by him. We told them that the name of him of whom they spoke we
+called Dios; and if they would call him so, and would worship him as
+we directed, they would find their welfare. They responded that they
+well understood, and would do as we said. We ordered them to come
+down from the mountains in confidence and peace, inhabit the whole
+country and construct their houses: among these they should build one
+for God, at its entrance place a cross like that which we had there
+present; and, when Christians came among them, they should go out to
+receive them with crosses in their hands, without bows or any arms,
+and take them to their dwellings, giving of what they have to eat,
+and the Christians would do them no injury, but be their friends; and
+the Indians told us they would do as we had commanded.
+
+The captain having given them shawls and entertained them, they
+returned, taking the two captives who had been used as emissaries.
+This occurrence took place before the notary, in the presence of many
+witnesses.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 36
+
+_Of building churches in that land._
+
+
+As soon as these Indians went back, all those of that province who
+were friendly to the Christians, and had heard of us, came to visit
+us, bringing beads and feathers. We commanded them to build churches
+and put crosses in them: to that time none had been raised; and we
+made them bring their principal men to be baptized.
+
+Then the captain made a covenant with God, not to invade nor consent
+to invasion, nor to enslave any of that country and people, to whom
+we had guaranteed safety; that this he would enforce and defend until
+your Majesty and the Governor Nuño de Guzman, or the Viceroy in your
+name, should direct what would be most for the service of God and
+your Highness.
+
+When the children had been baptized, we departed for the town of San
+Miguel. So soon as we arrived, April 1, 1536, came Indians, who told
+us many people had come down from the mountains and were living in
+the vales; that they had made churches and crosses, doing all we had
+required. Each day we heard how these things were advancing to a full
+improvement.
+
+Fifteen days of our residence having passed, Alcaraz got back with
+the Christians from the incursion, and they related to the captain
+the manner in which the Indians had come down and peopled the plain;
+that the towns were inhabited which had been tenantless and deserted,
+the residents, coming out to receive them with crosses in their
+hands, had taken them to their houses, giving of what they had, and
+the Christians had slept among them over night. They were surprised
+at a thing so novel; but, as the natives said they had been assured
+of safety, it was ordered that they should not be harmed, and the
+Christians took friendly leave of them.
+
+God in His infinite mercy is pleased that in the days of your
+Majesty, under your might and dominion, these nations should come to
+be thoroughly and voluntarily subject to the Lord, who has created
+and redeemed us. We regard this as certain, that your Majesty is he
+who is destined to do so much, not difficult to accomplish; for in
+the two thousand leagues we journeyed on land, and in boats on water,
+and in that we travelled unceasingly for ten months after coming out
+of captivity, we found neither sacrifices nor idolatry.
+
+In the time, we traversed from sea to sea; and from information
+gathered with great diligence, there may be a distance from one to
+another at the widest part, of two thousand leagues; and we learned
+that on the coast of the South Sea there are pearls and great riches,
+and the best and all the most opulent countries are near there.
+
+We were in the village of San Miguel until the fifteenth day of
+May.[213] The cause of so long a detention was, that from thence to
+the city of Compostela, where the Governor Nuño de Guzman resided,
+are a hundred leagues of country, entirely devastated and filled
+with enemies, where it was necessary we should have protection.
+Twenty mounted men went with us for forty leagues, and after that six
+Christians accompanied us, who had with them five hundred slaves.
+Arrived at Compostela, the Governor entertained us graciously and
+gave us of his clothing for our use. I could not wear any for some
+time, nor could we sleep anywhere else but on the ground. After ten
+or twelve days we left for Mexico, and were all along on the way well
+entertained by Christians. Many came out on the roads to gaze at us,
+giving thanks to God for having saved us from so many calamities.
+We arrived at Mexico on Sunday, the day before the vespers of Saint
+Iago,[214] where we were handsomely treated by the Viceroy and
+the Marquis del Valle,[215] and welcomed, with joy. They gave us
+clothing and proffered whatsoever they had. On the day of Saint Iago
+was a celebration, and a joust of reeds with bulls.
+
+  [213] 1536.
+
+  [214] The day of Saint James the Apostle--July 25, 1536.
+
+  [215] The Viceroy Mendoza and Cortés.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 37
+
+_Of what occurred when I wished to return._
+
+
+When we had rested two months in Mexico, I desired to return to these
+kingdoms;[216] and being about to embark in the month of October, a
+storm came on, capsizing the ship, and she was lost. In consequence I
+resolved to remain through the winter; because in those parts it is
+a boisterous season for navigation. After that had gone by, Dorantes
+and I left Mexico, about Lent, to take shipping at Vera Cruz. We
+remained waiting for a wind until Palm Sunday, when we went on board,
+and were detained fifteen days longer for a wind. The ship leaked so
+much that I quitted her, and went to one of two other vessels that
+were ready to sail, but Dorantes remained in her.
+
+  [216] Spain.
+
+On the tenth day of April,[217] the three ships left the port, and
+sailed one hundred and fifty leagues. Two of them leaked a great
+deal; and one night the vessel I was in lost their company. Their
+pilots and masters, as afterwards appeared, dared not proceed with
+the other vessels so, and without telling us of their intentions, or
+letting us know aught of them, put back to the port they had left.
+We pursued our voyage, and on the fourth day of May we entered the
+harbor of Havana, in the island of Cuba. We remained waiting for the
+other vessels, believing them to be on their way, until the second
+of June, when we sailed, in much fear of falling in with Frenchmen,
+as they had a few days before taken three Spanish vessels. Having
+arrived at the island of Bermuda, we were struck by one of those
+storms that overtake those who pass there, according to what they
+state who sail thither. All one night we considered ourselves lost;
+and we were thankful that when morning was come, the storm ceased,
+and we could go on our course.
+
+  [217] 1537.
+
+At the end of twenty-nine days after our departure from Havana, we
+had sailed eleven hundred leagues, which are said to be thence to the
+town of the Azores. The next morning, passing by the island called
+Cuervo,[218] we fell in with a French ship. At noon she began to
+follow, bringing with her a caravel captured from the Portuguese, and
+gave us chase. In the evening we saw nine other sail; but they were
+so distant we could not make out whether they were Portuguese or of
+those that pursued us. At night the Frenchman was within shot of a
+lombard from our ship, and we stole away from our course in the dark
+to evade him, and this we did three or four times. He approached so
+near that he saw us and fired. He might have taken us, or, at his
+option could leave us until the morning. I remember with gratitude to
+the Almighty when the sun rose, and we found ourselves close with the
+Frenchman, that near us were the nine sail we saw the evening before,
+which we now recognized to be of the fleet of Portugal. I gave thanks
+to our Lord for escape from the troubles of the land and perils of
+the sea. The Frenchman, so soon as he discovered their character,
+let go the caravel he had seized with a cargo of negroes and kept as
+a prize, to make us think he was Portuguese, that we might wait for
+him. When he cast her off, he told the pilot and the master of her,
+that we were French and under his convoy. This said, sixty oars were
+put out from his ship, and thus with these and sail he commenced to
+flee, moving so fast it was hardly credible. The caravel being let
+go, went to the galleon, and informed the commander that the other
+ship and ours were French. As we drew nigh the galleon, and the fleet
+saw we were coming down upon them, they made no doubt we were, and
+putting themselves in order of battle, bore up for us, and when near
+we hailed them. Discovering that we were friends, they found that
+they were mocked in permitting the corsair to escape, by being told
+that we were French and of his company.
+
+  [218] Corvo.
+
+Four caravels were sent in pursuit. The galleon drawing near, after
+the salutation from us, the commander, Diego de Silveira, asked
+whence we came and what merchandise we carried, when we answered
+that we came from New Spain, and were loaded with silver and gold.
+He asked us how much there might be; the captain told him we carried
+three thousand _castellanos_. The commander replied: "In honest truth
+you come very rich, although you bring a very sorry ship and a still
+poorer artillery. By Heaven, that renegade whoreson Frenchman has
+lost a good mouthful. Now that you have escaped, follow me, and do
+not leave me that I may, with God's help, deliver you in Spain."
+
+After a little time, the caravels that pursued the Frenchman
+returned, for plainly he moved too fast for them; they did not like
+either, to leave the fleet, which was guarding three ships that came
+laden with spices. Thus we reached the island of Terceira, where we
+reposed fifteen days, taking refreshment and awaiting the arrival of
+another ship coming with a cargo from India, the companion of the
+three of which the armada was in charge. The time having run out, we
+left that place with the fleet, and arrived at the port of Lisbon on
+the ninth of August, on the vespers of the day of our master Saint
+Lawrence,[219] in the year one thousand five hundred and thirty-seven.
+
+  [219] The day of Saint Lawrence (San Lorenzo) is August 10.
+
+That what I have stated in my foregoing narrative is true, I
+subscribe with my name.
+
+  CABEZA DE VACA.
+
+The narrative here ended is signed with his name and arms.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 38
+
+_Of what became of the others who went to Indias._
+
+
+Since giving this circumstantial account of events attending the
+voyage to Florida, the invasion, and our going out thence until the
+arrival in these realms, I desire to state what became of the ships
+and of the people who remained with them. I have not before touched
+on this, as we were uninformed until coming to New Spain, where we
+found many of the persons, and others here in Castile, from whom we
+learned everything to the latest particular.
+
+At the time we left, one of the ships had already been lost on the
+breakers, and the three others were in considerable danger, having
+nearly a hundred souls on board and few stores. Among the persons
+were ten married women, one of whom had told the Governor many things
+that afterwards befell him on the voyage. She cautioned him before he
+went inland not to go, as she was confident that neither he nor any
+going with him could ever escape; but should any one come back from
+that country, the Almighty must work great wonders in his behalf,
+though she believed few or none would return. The Governor said
+that he and his followers were going to fight and conquer nations
+and countries wholly unknown, and in subduing them he knew that
+many would be slain; nevertheless, that those who survived would be
+fortunate, since from what he had understood of the opulence of that
+land, they must become very rich. And further he begged her to inform
+him whence she learned those things that had passed, as well as
+those she spoke of, that were to come; she replied that in Castile a
+Moorish woman of Hornachos had told them to her, which she had stated
+to us likewise before we left Spain, and while on the passage many
+things happened in the way she foretold.
+
+After the Governor had made Caravallo, a native of Cuenca de Huete,
+his lieutenant and commander of the vessels and people, he departed,
+leaving orders that all diligence should be used to repair on board,
+and take the direct course to Pánuco, keeping along the shore closely
+examining for the harbor, and having found it, the vessels should
+enter there and await our arrival. And the people state, that when
+they had betaken themselves to the ships, all of them looking at that
+woman, they distinctly heard her say to the females, that well,
+since their husbands had gone inland, putting their persons in so
+great jeopardy, their wives should in no way take more account of
+them, but ought soon to be looking after whom they would marry, and
+that she should do so. She did accordingly: she and others married,
+or became the concubines of those who remained in the ships.
+
+After we left, the vessels made sail, taking their course onward; but
+not finding the harbor, they returned. Five leagues below the place
+at which we debarked, they found the port, the same we discovered
+when we saw the Spanish cases containing dead bodies, which were of
+Christians.[220] Into this haven and along this coast, the three
+ships passed with the other ship that came from Cuba, and the
+brigantine, looking for us nearly a year, and not finding us, they
+went to New Spain.
+
+  [220] Tampa Bay, Florida.
+
+The port of which we speak is the best in the world. At the entrance
+are six fathoms of water and five near the shore. It runs up into the
+land seven or eight leagues. The bottom is fine white sand. No sea
+breaks upon it nor boisterous storm, and it can contain many vessels.
+Fish is in great plenty. There are a hundred leagues to Havana, a
+town of Christians in Cuba, with which it bears north and south. The
+north-east wind ever prevails and vessels go from one to the other,
+returning in a few days; for the reason that they sail either way
+with it on the quarter.
+
+As I have given account of the vessels, it may be well that I state
+who are, and from what parts of these kingdoms come, the persons whom
+our Lord has been pleased to release from these troubles. The first
+is Alonzo del Castillo Maldonado, native of Salamanca, son of Doctor
+Castillo and Doña Aldonça Maldonado. The second is Andrés Dorantes,
+son of Pablo Dorantes, native of Béjar, and citizen of Gibraleon. The
+third is Alvar Nuñez Cabeça de Vaca, son of Francisco de Vera, and
+grandson of Pedro de Vera who conquered the Canaries, and his mother
+was Doña Tereça Cabeça de Vaca, native of Xeréz de la Frontera. The
+fourth, called Estevanico, is an Arabian black, native of Açamor.
+
+
+THE END
+
+The present tract was imprinted in the very magnificent, noble and
+very ancient City of Zamora, by the honored residents Augustin de Paz
+and Juan Picardo, partners, printers of books, at the cost and outlay
+of the virtuous Juan Pedro Musetti, book merchant of Medina del
+Campo, having been finished the sixth day of the month of October, in
+the year one thousand five hundred and forty-two of the birth of our
+Saviour Jesus Christ.[221]
+
+  [221] Colophon of the first edition.
+
+
+
+
+THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF HERNANDO DE SOTO, BY THE GENTLEMAN
+OF ELVAS
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+
+In the early annals of the exploration, conquest, and settlement
+of the territory of the United States none are to be found to
+which more interest is attached than to the expedition of Hernando
+de Soto through the Gulf States. History, tradition, and poetry
+are indissolubly linked with his name. Counties, towns, and lakes
+have been named after him, and tradition attaches his name to many
+localities far removed from the line of his march.
+
+In the narrative of the expedition we get our first geographical
+knowledge of the interior of the states of Florida, Georgia, North
+and South Carolina, Tennessee, Alabama, Mississippi, Arkansas,
+Texas, and the Indian Territory. The Spaniards while on their minor
+expeditions among the Indians may also have entered the states of
+Missouri and Louisiana, but of this there is no certainty.
+
+The earliest history of the great Indian tribes or nations residing
+in the above-named states is related by these narratives, the
+expedition having traversed the territory of the Timuguas, Cherokees,
+the various divisions or tribes of the Muskogee or Creek confederacy,
+the Choctaws, Chickasaws, Quapaws or Arkansas, several branches
+of the great Pani nation, and some other tribes that are not so
+easily identified. In the narratives are also to be found the first
+descriptions of the habits, manners, and customs of the native tribes
+met with. Their towns, villages, houses, temples, granaries, bridges,
+canoes, banners, arms, wearing apparel, and culinary implements are
+also described.
+
+The first published narrative was written by a gentleman from
+the town of Elvas, in Portugal, who joined the expedition and
+participated in its trials and privations, and in the weary but
+memorable march through what was then known as Florida. If he was one
+of those Portuguese who are named in the book as having started from
+Elvas, the inference may be drawn from the wording of the narrative
+that he was named Alvaro Fernandez. His narrative was written after
+his return from the expedition, and is evidently not based upon a
+diary, or even field-notes, but seemingly was drawn entirely from
+memory. His descriptions are somewhat vague, the localities sometimes
+indefinite, the distances sometimes confused, and there are some
+palpable errors. The lengthy addresses of the caciques belong to
+romance rather than to history; at least, they are open to grave
+suspicion that they were manufactured for the occasion. Nevertheless,
+when the narrative is considered as a whole, it is decidedly the
+best full account that has been handed down to us. It records the
+first discovery and navigation of the Mississippi River, the death
+of its discoverer, De Soto, the building of the first sea-going
+vessels--brigantines--by Moscoso, the first voyage down "the great
+river," and the arrival in Mexico of the remnants of the once
+powerful expedition. The narrative, taken in connection with that
+of Ranjel, preserved in Oviedo's _Historia General y Natural de las
+Indias_ (Seville, 1547), supplies almost a daily record of the events
+as they occurred.
+
+The Gentleman of Elvas having been an eye-witness, and his narrative
+being the best one that has been preserved, it must be taken as a
+basis for laying down the route of the expedition. The abridged
+journal of Ranjel, De Soto's private secretary, should also be
+accepted as a standard, especially as to dates and the order in which
+the towns and provinces are named. The narrative of Biedma, the
+factor of the expedition,[222] although written after his arrival
+in Mexico, supplies some additional information. It furnishes the
+only clue as to the direction pursued by Moscoso, after leaving
+Guachoya, and therefore contains valuable auxiliary evidence. The
+account written by Garcilaso de la Vega, "the Inca," _Florida del
+Ynca_ (Lisbon, 1605), is principally based upon the oral statements
+of a noble Spaniard who accompanied Soto as a volunteer, and the
+written but illiterate reports of two common soldiers, Alonzo
+de Carmona and Juan Coles. After eliminating all the overdrawn,
+flowery, and fanciful portions of the account, there is a residue
+consisting, in part, of misplaced towns, provinces, and events,
+together with occasional duplications of descriptions. Of the
+remainder, only such portions as conform to, or do not conflict
+with, the other narratives are worthy of consideration. By combining
+the geographical, topographical, and descriptive portions of the
+narratives, and exploring the probable and possible sections of the
+route, the present writer has succeeded in identifying a number of
+points visited by Soto and his followers. A detailed description
+of the places identified will be found in the _Publications of the
+Mississippi Historical Society_ (VI. 449-467); and the relative value
+of the narratives, together with the minor documents, is discussed in
+the same series (VII. 379-387).
+
+  [222] First printed by Buckingham Smith in his _Coleccion de
+  varios Documentos para la Historia de la Florida_ (London, 1857).
+
+The Gentleman of Elvas, unlike Ranjel, does not put himself forward,
+but was so modest that only once does he refer to himself while on
+the march through Florida, and that was on the occasion of the death
+of some relatives while at Aminoya. Seemingly he did not take an
+active part at the front or in the advances, but was always with the
+main army.
+
+The Narrative of the Gentleman of Elvas was first published at
+Evora, Portugal, in 1557. It was reprinted at Lisbon in 1844 by
+the Royal Academy, and again in 1875. The first French edition
+appeared in 1685, and an English translation from this edition was
+published in 1686. The first English version, by Hakluyt, entitled
+_Virginia richly valued by the Description of the Mainland of
+Florida_, appeared in 1609, and a reprint entitled _The worthye and
+famous Historie of the Travailles, Discovery, and Conquest of Terra
+Florida_, in 1611. A reprint from the latter, edited by William
+B. Rye, was published by the Hakluyt Society in 1851. The version
+of 1611 is included in Force's _Tracts_, Volume IV., 1846, and in
+French's _Historical Collections of Louisiana_, Part 2. The English
+translation by Buckingham Smith, which was published by the Bradford
+Club in 1866, in a volume entitled _The Career of Hernando de Soto in
+the Conquest of Florida_, is the latest and most authentic version.
+It is this which is followed in the present volume. A reprint of
+Smith's translation, edited by Professor Edward G. Bourne, was
+published in 1904.
+
+  T. HAYES LEWIS.
+
+
+
+
+THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF HERNANDO DE SOTO, BY THE GENTLEMAN
+OF ELVAS
+
+     _True relation of the vicissitudes that attended the Governor
+     Don Hernando de Soto and some nobles of Portugal in the
+     discovery of the Province of Florida now just given by a Fidalgo
+     of Elvas. Viewed by the Lord Inquisitor._[223]
+
+  [223] From the title page of the original.
+
+     Fernando da Silveira, Senhor da Serzedas, great Poet and very
+     Illustrious, respecting the Material of this Book, and in Praise
+     of the Author.
+
+
+EPIGRAM
+
+    He who would see the New World,
+    The Golden Pole,[224] the second,
+    Other seas, other lands,
+    Achievements great, and wars,
+    And such things attempted
+    As alarm and give pleasure,
+    Strike terror and lend delight;--
+    Read of the author this pleasing story,
+    Where nothing fabulous is told,
+    All worthy of being esteemed,
+    Read, considered, used.
+
+  [224] We inhabit the Northern Arctic Pole, and that people
+  inhabit the Southern Antarctic Pole. Golden Pole is used because
+  the region is rich. (Footnote in the original.)
+
+
+ANDRÉ DE BURGOS[225] TO THE PRUDENT READER.
+
+  [225] The printer.
+
+Aristotle writes that all, or at least most men, are given or prone
+to look at and listen to novelties, especially when they are of
+foreign or remote countries. These things, he says, enliven the
+heavy while they give recreation to delicate and subtile minds, that
+propensity moving men not only to see and hear, but, if possible,
+to take part in occurrences. This desire exists in the Lusitanians
+more than in any other people,--for two reasons: the one, because
+they are very ingenious and warlike; the other, because they are by
+nature great navigators, having discovered more land, with wider
+sailing, than all the nations of the earth beside. So, it appearing
+to me that I could do some little service to those who should read
+this book, I resolved to imprint it, assured, beyond its being in the
+Portuguese, that it is composed by a native, and likewise because
+citizens of Elvas took part in the discovery, as the narrative will
+itself disclose. What he has written I undoubtingly credit: he tells
+no tales, nor speaks of fabulous things; and we may believe that
+the author--having no interest in the matter--would not swerve from
+truth. We have his assurance besides, that all he has set down passed
+before him. Should the language, by chance, appear to you careless,
+lay not the fault on me; I imprint and do not write. God be your
+protector.
+
+
+DISCOVERY OF FLORIDA
+
+     _Relation of the toils and hardships that attended Don Hernando
+     de Soto, governor of Florida, in the conquest of that country;
+     in which is set forth who he was, and also who were others
+     with him; containing some account of the peculiarities and
+     diversities of the country, of all that they saw and of what
+     befell them._
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 1
+
+     _Who Soto was, and how he came to get the government of Florida._
+
+
+Hernando de Soto was the son of an esquire of Xeréz de Badajóz, and
+went to the Indias of the Ocean Sea, belonging to Castile, at the
+time Pedrárias Dávila was the Governor. He had nothing more than
+blade and buckler: for his courage and good qualities Pedrárias
+appointed him to be captain of a troop of horse, and he went by his
+order with Hernando Pizarro to conquer Peru.[226] According to the
+report of many persons who were there, he distinguished himself
+over all the captains and principal personages present, not only at
+the seizure of Atabalípa, lord of Peru, and in carrying the City
+of Cuzco, but at all other places wheresoever he went and found
+resistance. Hence, apart from his share in the treasure of Atabalípa,
+he got a good amount, bringing together in time, from portions
+falling to his lot, one hundred and eighty thousand cruzados, which
+he brought with him to Spain. Of this the Emperor borrowed a part,
+which was paid; six hundred thousand reales[227] in duties on the
+silks of Granada, and the rest at the Casa de Contratacion.[228]
+
+  [226] In 1531.
+
+  [227] Span. _real_, the eighth of a silver dollar.
+
+  [228] The India House, or Board of Trade, at Seville.
+
+In Seville, Soto employed a superintendent of household, an usher,
+pages, equerry, chamberlain, footmen, and all the other servants
+requisite for the establishment of a gentleman. Thence he went to
+Court, and while there was accompanied by Juan de Añasco of Seville,
+Luis Moscoso de Alvarado, Nuño de Tobár, and Juan Rodriguez Lobillo.
+All, except Añasco, came with him from Peru; and each brought
+fourteen or fifteen thousand cruzados. They went well and costly
+apparelled; and Soto, although by nature not profuse, as it was the
+first time he was to show himself at Court, spent largely, and went
+about closely attended by those I have named, by his dependents, and
+by many others who there came about him. He married Doña Ysabel de
+Bobadilla, daughter of Pedrárias Dávila, Count of Puñonrostro. The
+Emperor made him Governor of the Island of Cuba and Adelantado of
+Florida, with title of Marquis to a certain part of the territory he
+should conquer.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 2
+
+     _How Cabeça de Vaca arrived at Court, and gave account of the
+     country of Florida; and of the persons who assembled at Seville
+     to accompany Don Hernando de Soto._
+
+
+After Don Hernando had obtained the concession, a fidalgo[229]
+arrived at Court from the Indias, Cabeça de Vaca by name, who had
+been in Florida with Narvaez; and he stated how he with four others
+had escaped, taking the way to New Spain; that the Governor had been
+lost in the sea, and the rest were all dead. He brought with him a
+written relation of adventures, which said in some places: Here I
+have seen this; and the rest which I saw I leave to confer of with
+His Majesty: generally, however, he described the poverty of the
+country, and spoke of the hardships he had undergone. Some of his
+kinsfolk, desirous of going to the Indias, strongly urged him to
+tell them whether he had seen any rich country in Florida or not;
+but he told them that he could not do so; because he and another (by
+name Orantes,[230] who had remained in New Spain with the purpose of
+returning into Florida) had sworn not to divulge certain things which
+they had seen, lest some one might beg the government in advance of
+them, for which he had come to Spain; nevertheless, he gave them to
+understand that it was the richest country in the world.
+
+  [229] Gentleman.
+
+  [230] Dorantes.
+
+Don Hernando de Soto was desirous that Cabeça de Vaca should go with
+him, and made him favorable proposals; but after they had come upon
+terms they disagreed, because the Adelantado would not give the money
+requisite to pay for a ship that the other had bought. Baltasar
+de Gallegos and Cristóbal de Espindola told Cabeça de Vaca, their
+kinsman, that as they had made up their minds to go to Florida, in
+consequence of what he had told them, they besought him to counsel
+them; to which he replied, that the reason he did not go was because
+he hoped to receive another government, being reluctant to march
+under the standard of another; that he had himself come to solicit
+the conquest of Florida, and though he found it had already been
+granted to Don Hernando de Soto, yet, on account of his oath, he
+could not divulge what they desired to know; nevertheless, he would
+advise them to sell their estates and go--that in so doing they would
+act wisely.
+
+As soon as Cabeça de Vaca had an opportunity he spoke with the
+Emperor; and gave him an account of all that he had gone through
+with, seen, and could by any means ascertain. Of this relation,
+made by word of mouth, the Marquis of Astorga was informed. He
+determined at once to send his brother, Don Antonio Osorio; and with
+him Francisco and Garcia Osorio, two of his kinsmen, also made ready
+to go. Don Antonio disposed of sixty thousand reales income that he
+received of the Church, and Francisco of a village of vassals he
+owned in Campos. They joined the Adelantado at Seville, as did also
+Nuño de Tobár, Luis de Moscoso, and Juan Rodriguez Lobillo. Moscoso
+took two brothers; there went likewise Don Carlos, who had married
+the Governor's niece, and he carried her with him. From Badajóz went
+Pedro Calderon, and three kinsmen of the Adelantado: Arias Tinoco,
+Alonso Romo, and Diego Tinoco.
+
+As Luis de Moscoso passed through Elvas,[231] André de Vasconcelos
+spoke with him, and requested him to speak to Don Hernando de Soto
+in his behalf; and he gave him warrants, issued by the Marquis of
+Vilareal, conferring on him the captaincy of Ceuta, that he might
+show them; which when the Adelantado saw, and had informed himself of
+who he was, he wrote to him that he would favor him in and through
+all, and would give him a command in Florida. From Elvas went André
+de Vasconcelos, Fernan Pegado, Antonio Martinez Segurado, Men Royz
+Pereyra, Joam Cordeiro, Estevan Pegado, Bento Fernandez, Alvaro
+Fernandez; and from Salamanca, Jaen, Valencia, Albuquerque, and
+other parts of Spain, assembled many persons of noble extraction in
+Seville; so much so that many men of good condition, who had sold
+their lands, remained behind in Sanlúcar for want of shipping, when
+for known countries and rich it was usual to lack men: and the cause
+of this was what Cabeça de Vaca had told the Emperor, and given
+persons to understand who conversed with him respecting that country.
+He went for Governor to Rio de la Plata, but his kinsmen followed
+Soto.
+
+  [231] In eastern Portugal, near the Spanish border.
+
+Baltasar de Gallegos received the appointment of chief castellan, and
+took with him his wife. He sold houses, vineyards, a rent of wheat,
+and ninety geiras of olive-field in the Xarafe of Seville. There went
+also many other persons of mark. The offices, being desired of many,
+were sought through powerful influence: the place of factor was held
+by Antonio de Biedma, that of comptroller by Juan de Añasco, and that
+of treasurer by Juan Gaytan, nephew of the Cardinal of Ciguenza.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 3
+
+     _How the Portuguese went to Seville and thence to Sanlúcar; and
+     how the captains were appointed over the ships, and the people
+     distributed among them._
+
+
+The Portuguese left Elvas the 15th day of January, and came to
+Seville on the vespers of Saint Sebastian.[232] They went to the
+residence of the Governor; and entering the court, over which
+were some galleries in which he stood, he came down and met them
+at the foot of the stairs, whence they returned with him; and he
+ordered chairs to be brought, in which they might be seated. André
+de Vasconcelos told him who he was, and who the others were; that
+they had all come to go with him, and aid in his enterprise. The
+Adelantado thanked him, and appeared well pleased with their coming
+and proffer. The table being already laid, he invited them to sit
+down; and while at dinner, he directed his major-domo to find
+lodgings for them near his house.
+
+  [232] January 20.
+
+From Seville the Governor went to Sanlúcar, with all the people that
+were to go. He commanded a muster to be made, to which the Portuguese
+turned out in polished armor, and the Castilians very showily, in
+silk over silk, pinked and slashed. As such luxury did not appear
+to him becoming on such occasion, he ordered a review to be called
+for the next day, when every man should appear with his arms; to
+which the Portuguese came as at first; and the Governor set them in
+order near the standard borne by his ensign. The greater number of
+the Castilians were in very sorry and rusty shirts of mail; all wore
+steel caps or helmets, but had very poor lances. Some of them sought
+to get among the Portuguese. Those that Soto liked and accepted of
+were passed, counted, and enlisted; six hundred men in all followed
+him to Florida. He had bought seven ships; and the necessary
+subsistence was already on board. He appointed captains, delivering
+to each of them his ship, with a roll of the people he was to take
+with him.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 4
+
+     _How the Adelantado with his people left Spain, going to the
+     Canary Islands, and afterward arrived in the Antillas._
+
+
+In the month of April, of the year 1538 of the Christian era, the
+Adelantado delivered the vessels to their several captains, took
+for himself a new ship, fast of sail, and gave another to André de
+Vasconcelos, in which the Portuguese were to go. He passed over the
+bar of Sanlúcar on Sunday, the morning of Saint Lazarus, with great
+festivity, commanding the trumpets to be sounded and many charges of
+artillery to be fired. With a favorable wind he sailed four days,
+when it lulled, the calms continuing for eight days, with such
+rolling sea that the ships made no headway.
+
+The fifteenth day after our departure we came to Gomera, one of
+the Canaries, on Easter Sunday, in the morning. The Governor of the
+Island was apparelled all in white, cloak, jerkin, hose, shoes, and
+cap, so that he looked like a governor of Gypsies. He received the
+Adelantado with much pleasure, lodging him well and the rest with him
+gratuitously. To Doña Ysabel he gave a natural daughter of his to be
+her waiting-maid. For our money we got abundant provision of bread,
+wine, and meats, bringing off with us what was needful for the ships.
+Sunday following, eight days after arrival, we took our departure.
+
+On Pentecost we came into the harbor of the city of Santiago, in
+Cuba of the Antillas. Directly a gentleman of the town sent to the
+seaside a splendid roan horse, well caparisoned, for the Governor to
+mount, and a mule for his wife; and all the horsemen and footmen in
+town at the time came out to receive him at the landing. He was well
+lodged, attentively visited and served by all the citizens. Quarters
+were furnished to every one without cost. Those who wished to go into
+the country were divided among the farm-houses, into squads of four
+and six persons, according to the several ability of the owners, who
+provided them with food.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 5
+
+     _Of the inhabitants there are in the city of Santiago and other
+     towns of the island,--the character of the soil and of the
+     fruit._
+
+
+The city of Santiago consists of about eighty spacious and
+well-contrived dwellings. Some are built of stone and lime, covered
+with tiles: the greater part have the sides of board and the roofs
+of dried grass. There are extensive country seats, and on them many
+trees, which differ from those of Spain. The fig-tree bears fruit as
+big as the fist, yellow within and of little flavor: another tree
+with a delicious fruit, called anane, is of the shape and size of a
+small pine-apple, the skin of which being taken off, the pulp appears
+like a piece of curd. On the farms about in the country are other
+larger pines, of very agreeable and high flavor, produced on low
+trees that look like the aloe. Another tree yields a fruit called
+mamei, the size of a peach, by the islanders more esteemed than any
+other in the country. The guayaba is in the form of a filbert, and
+is the size of a fig. There is a tree, which is a stalk without any
+branch, the height of a lance, each leaf the length of a javelin, the
+fruit of the size and form of a cucumber, the bunch having twenty or
+thirty of them, with which the tree goes on bending down more and
+more as they grow: they are called plantanos in that country, are of
+good flavor, and will ripen after they are gathered, although they
+are better when they mature on the tree. The stalks yield fruit but
+once, when they are cut down, and others, which spring up at the
+butt, bear in the coming year. There is another fruit called batata,
+the subsistence of a multitude of people, principally slaves, and
+now grows in the island of Terceira, belonging to this kingdom of
+Portugal. It is produced in the earth, and looks like the ynhame,
+with nearly the taste of chestnut. The bread of the country is made
+from a root that looks like the batata, the stalk of which is like
+alder. The ground for planting is prepared in hillocks; into each are
+laid four or five stalks, and a year and a half after they have been
+set the crop is fit to be dug. Should any one, mistaking the root for
+batata, eat any of it, he is in imminent danger; as experience has
+shown, in the case of a soldier, who died instantly from swallowing
+a very little. The roots being peeled and crushed, they are squeezed
+in a sort of press; the juice that flows has an offensive smell; the
+bread is of little taste and less nourishment. The fruit from Spain
+are figs and oranges, which are produced the year round, the soil
+being very rich and fertile.
+
+There are numerous cattle and horses in the country, which find
+fresh grass at all seasons. From the many wild cows and hogs, the
+inhabitants everywhere are abundantly supplied with meat. Out of the
+towns are many fruits wild over the country; and, as it sometimes
+happens, when a Christian misses his way and is lost for fifteen or
+twenty days, because of the many paths through the thick woods made
+by the herds traversing to and fro, he will live on fruit and on
+wild cabbage, there being many and large palm-trees everywhere which
+yield nothing else available beside.
+
+The island of Cuba is three hundred leagues long from east to
+southeast, and in places thirty, in others forty leagues from north
+to south. There are six towns of Christians, which are Santiago,
+Baracoa, the Báyamo, Puerto Principe, Sancti Spiritus, and Havana.
+They each have between thirty and forty householders, except Santiago
+and Havana, which have some seventy or eighty dwellings apiece.
+The towns have all a chaplain to hear confession, and a church in
+which to say mass. In Santiago is a monastery of the order of Saint
+Francis; it has few friars, though well supported by tithes, as the
+country is rich. The Church of Santiago is endowed, has a cura, a
+prebend, and many priests, as it is the church of the city which is
+the metropolis.
+
+Although the earth contains much gold, there are few slaves to seek
+it, many having destroyed themselves because of the hard usage they
+receive from the Christians in the mines. The overseer of Vasco
+Porcallo, a resident of the island, having understood that his slaves
+intended to hang themselves, went with a cudgel in his hand and
+waited for them in the place at which they were to meet, where he
+told them that they could do nothing, nor think of any thing, that he
+did not know beforehand; that he had come to hang himself with them,
+to the end that if he gave them a bad life in this world, a worse
+would he give them in that to come. This caused them to alter their
+purpose and return to obedience.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 6
+
+     _How the Governor sent Doña Ysabel with the ships from Santiago
+     to Havana, while he with some of the men went thither by land._
+
+
+The Governor sent Don Carlos with the ships, in company with Doña
+Ysabel, to tarry for him at Havana, a port in the eastern end of the
+island, one hundred and eighty leagues from Santiago. He and those
+that remained, having bought horses, set out on their journey, and at
+the end of twenty-five leagues came to Báyamo, the first town. They
+were lodged, as they arrived, in parties of four and six, where their
+food was given to them; and nothing was paid for any other thing than
+maize for the beasts; because the Governor at each town assessed tax
+on the tribute paid, and the labor done, by the Indians.
+
+A deep river runs near Báyamo, larger than the Guadiana, called
+Tanto. The monstrous alligators do harm in it sometimes to the
+Indians and animals in the crossing. In all the country there are
+no wolves, foxes, bears, lions, nor tigers: there are dogs in the
+woods, which have run wild from the houses, that feed upon the swine:
+there are snakes, the size of a man's thigh, and even bigger; but
+they are very sluggish and do no kind of injury. From that town to
+Puerto Principe there are fifty leagues. The roads throughout the
+island are made by cutting out the undergrowth, which if neglected to
+be gone over, though only for a single year, the shrubs spring up in
+such manner that the ways disappear; and so numerous likewise are the
+paths made by cattle, that no one can travel without an Indian of the
+country for a guide, there being everywhere high and thick woods.
+
+From Puerto Principe the Governor went by sea in a canoe to the
+estate of Vasco Porcallo, near the coast, to get news of Doña Ysabel,
+who, at the time, although not then known, was in a situation of
+distress, the ships having parted company, two of them being driven
+in sight of the coast of Florida, and all on board were suffering
+for lack of water and subsistence. The storm over, and the vessels
+come together, not knowing where they had been tossed, Cape San
+Antonio was described, an uninhabited part of the island, where they
+got water; and at the end of forty days from the time of leaving
+Santiago, they arrived at Havana. The Governor presently received the
+news and hastened to meet Doña Ysabel. The troops that went by land,
+one hundred and fifty mounted men in number, not to be burdensome
+upon the islanders, were divided into two squadrons, and marched to
+Sancti Spiritus, sixty leagues from Puerto Principe. The victuals
+they carried was the caçabe[233] bread I have spoken of, the nature
+of which is such that it directly dissolves from moisture; whence
+it happened that some ate meat and no bread for many days. They
+took dogs with them, and a man of the country, who hunted as they
+journeyed, and who killed the hogs at night found further necessary
+for provision where they stopped; so that they had abundant supply,
+both of beef and pork. They found immense annoyance from mosquitos,
+particularly in a lake called Bog of Pia, which they had much ado in
+crossing between mid-day and dark, it being more than half a league
+over, full half a bow-shot of the distance swimming, and all the rest
+of the way the water waist deep, having clams on the bottom that
+sorely cut the feet, for not a boot nor shoe sole was left entire at
+half way. The clothing and saddles were floated over in baskets of
+palm-leaf. In this time the insects came in great numbers and settled
+on the person where exposed, their bite raising lumps that smarted
+keenly, a single blow with the hand sufficing to kill so many that
+the blood would run over the arms and body. There was little rest at
+night, as happened also afterwards at like seasons and places.
+
+  [233] Cassava.
+
+They came to Sancti Spiritus, a town of thirty houses, near which
+passes a little river. The grounds are very fertile and pleasant,
+abundant in good oranges, citrons, and native fruit. Here one half
+the people were lodged; the other half went on twenty-five leagues
+farther, to a town of fifteen or twenty householders, called
+Trinidad. There is a hospital for the poor, the only one in the
+island. They say the town was once the largest of any; and that
+before the Christians came into the country a ship sailing along the
+coast had in her a very sick man, who begged to be set on shore,
+which the captain directly ordered, and the vessel kept on her way.
+The inhabitants, finding him where he had been left, on that shore
+which had never yet been hunted up by Christians carried him home,
+and took care of him until he was well. The chief of the town gave
+him a daughter; and being at war with the country round about,
+through the prowess and exertion of the Christian he subdued and
+reduced to his control all the people of Cuba. A long time after,
+when Diego Velasquez went to conquer the island, whence he made the
+discovery of New Spain, this man, then among the natives, brought
+them, by his management, to obedience, and put them under the rule of
+that Governor.
+
+From Trinidad they travelled a distance of eighty leagues without
+a town, and arrived at Havana in the end of March. They found the
+Governor there, and the rest of the people who had come with him from
+Spain. He sent Juan de Añasco in a caravel, with two pinnaces and
+fifty men, to explore the harbor in Florida, who brought back two
+Indians taken on the coast. In consequence, as much because of the
+necessity of having them for guides and interpreters, as because they
+said, by signs, that there was much gold in Florida, the Governor and
+all the company were greatly rejoiced, and longed for the hour of
+departure--that land appearing to them to be the richest of any which
+until then had been discovered.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 7
+
+     _How we left Havana and came to Florida, and what other matters
+     took place._
+
+
+Before our departure, the Governor deprived Nuño de Tobár of the
+rank of captain-general, and conferred it on a resident of Cuba,
+Vasco Porcallo de Figueroa, which caused the vessels to be well
+provisioned, he giving a great many hogs and loads of caçabe bread.
+That was done because Nuño de Tobár had made love to Doña Ysabel's
+waiting-maid, daughter of the Governor of Gomera; and though he had
+lost his place, yet, to return to Soto's favor, for she was with
+child by him, he took her to wife and went to Florida. Doña Ysabel
+remained, and with her the wife of Don Carlos, of Baltasar de
+Gallegos, and of Nuño de Tobár. The Governor left, as his lieutenant
+over the island, Juan de Rojas, a fidalgo of Havana.
+
+On Sunday, the 18th day of May, in the year 1539, the Adelantado
+sailed from Havana with a fleet of nine vessels, five of them ships,
+two caravels, two pinnaces; and he ran seven days with favorable
+weather. On the 25th of the month, being the festival of Espiritu
+Santo,[234] the land was seen, and anchor cast a league from shore,
+because of the shoals. On Friday, the 30th, the army landed in
+Florida, two leagues from the town[235] of an Indian chief named
+Ucita. Two hundred and thirteen horses were set on shore, to unburden
+the ships, that they should draw the less water; the seamen only
+remained on board, who going up every day a little with the tide, the
+end of eight days brought them near to the town.
+
+  [234] Whitsunday.
+
+  [235] Ucita or Oçita. This first town was on the point at the
+  mouth of Charlotte Harbor, Florida.
+
+So soon as the people were come to land, the camp was pitched on the
+sea-side, nigh the bay, which goes up close to the town. Presently
+the captain-general, Vasco Porcallo, taking seven horsemen with him,
+beat up the country half a league about, and discovered six Indians,
+who tried to resist him with arrows, the weapons they are accustomed
+to use. The horsemen killed two, and the four others escaped, the
+country being obstructed by bushes and ponds, in which the horses
+bogged and fell, with their riders, of weakness from the voyage. At
+night the Governor, with a hundred men in the pinnaces, came upon
+a deserted town; for, so soon as the Christians appeared in sight
+of land, they were descried, and all along on the coast many smokes
+were seen to rise, which the Indians make to warn one another. The
+next day, Luis de Moscoso, master of the camp, set the men in order.
+The horsemen he put in three squadrons--the vanguard, battalion, and
+rearward; and thus they marched that day and the next, compassing
+great creeks which run up from the bay; and on the first of June,
+being Trinity Sunday, they arrived at the town of Ucita,[236] where
+the Governor tarried.
+
+  [236] The name of this town was Hirriga, according to the Inca,
+  and it seems to have been located on the northeast arm of the
+  harbor.
+
+The town was of seven or eight houses, built of timber, and covered
+with palm-leaves. The chief's house stood near the beach, upon a very
+high mount made by hand for defence; at the other end of the town
+was a temple, on the top of which perched a wooden fowl with gilded
+eyes, and within were found some pearls of small value, injured by
+fire, such as the Indians pierce for beads, much esteeming them, and
+string to wear about the neck and wrists. The Governor lodged in the
+house of the chief, and with him Vasco Porcallo and Luis de Moscoso;
+in other houses, midway in the town, was lodged the chief castellan,
+Baltasar de Gallegos, where were set apart the provisions brought in
+the vessels. The rest of the dwellings, with the temple, were thrown
+down, and every mess of three or four soldiers made a cabin, wherein
+they lodged. The ground about was very fenny, and encumbered with
+dense thicket and high trees. The Governor ordered the woods to be
+felled the distance of a crossbow-shot around the place, that the
+horses might run, and the Christians have the advantage, should the
+Indians make an attack at night. In the paths, and at proper points,
+sentinels of foot-soldiers were set in couples, who watched by turns;
+the horsemen, going the rounds, were ready to support them should
+there be an alarm.
+
+The Governor made four captains of horsemen and two of footmen: those
+of the horse were André de Vasconcelos, Pedro Calderon of Badajóz,
+and the two Cardeñosas his kinsmen (Arias Tinoco and Alfonso Romo),
+also natives of Badajóz; those of the foot were Francisco Maldonado
+of Salamanca, and Juan Rodriguez Lobillo. While we were in this town
+of Ucita, the Indians which Juan de Añasco had taken on that coast,
+and were with the Governor as guides and interpreters, through the
+carelessness of two men who had charge of them, got away one night.
+For this the Governor felt very sorry, as did every one else; for
+some excursions had already been made, and no Indians could be
+taken, the country being of very high and thick woods, and in many
+places marshy.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 8
+
+     _Of some inroads that were made, and how a Christian was found
+     who had been a long time in the possession of a Cacique._
+
+
+From the town of Ucita the Governor sent the chief castellan,
+Baltasar de Gallegos, into the country, with forty horsemen and
+eighty footmen, to procure an Indian if possible. In another
+direction he also sent, for the same purpose, Captain Juan Rodriguez
+Lobillo, with fifty infantry: the greater part were of sword and
+buckler; the remainder were crossbow and gun men. The command of
+Lobillo marched over a swampy land, where horses could not travel;
+and, half a league from camp, came upon some huts near a river. The
+people in them plunged into the water; nevertheless, four women were
+secured; and twenty warriors, who attacked our people, so pressed us
+that we were forced to retire into camp.
+
+The Indians are exceedingly ready with their weapons, and so
+warlike and nimble, that they have no fear of footmen; for if
+these charge them they flee, and when they turn their backs they
+are presently upon them. They avoid nothing more easily than the
+flight of an arrow. They never remain quiet, but are continually
+running, traversing from place to place, so that neither crossbow nor
+arquebuse can be aimed at them. Before a Christian can make a single
+shot with either, an Indian will discharge three or four arrows;
+and he seldom misses of his object. Where the arrow meets with no
+armor, it pierces as deeply as the shaft from a crossbow. Their bows
+are very perfect; the arrows are made of certain canes, like reeds,
+very heavy, and so stiff that one of them, when sharpened, will pass
+through a target. Some are pointed with the bone of a fish, sharp
+and like a chisel; others with some stone like a point of diamond:
+of such the greater number, when they strike upon armor, break at
+the place the parts are put together; those of cane split, and will
+enter a shirt of mail, doing more injury than when armed.
+
+Juan Rodriguez Lobillo got back to camp with six men wounded, of whom
+one died, and he brought with him the four women taken in the huts,
+or cabins. When Baltasar de Gallegos came into the open field, he
+discovered ten or eleven Indians, among whom was a Christian, naked
+and sun-burnt, his arms tattooed after their manner, and he in no
+respect differing from them. As soon as the horsemen came in sight,
+they ran upon the Indians, who fled, hiding themselves in a thicket,
+though not before two or three of them were overtaken and wounded.
+The Christian, seeing a horseman coming upon him with a lance, began
+to cry out: "Do not kill me, cavalier; I am a Christian! Do not slay
+these people; they have given me my life!" Directly he called to the
+Indians, putting them out of fear, when they left the wood and came
+to him. The horsemen took up the Christian and Indians behind them
+on their beasts, and, greatly rejoicing, got back to the Governor at
+nightfall. When he and the rest who had remained in camp heard the
+news, they were no less pleased than the others.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 9
+
+     _How the Christian came to the land of Florida, who he was, and
+     of what passed at his interview with the Governor._
+
+
+The name of the Christian was Juan Ortiz, a native of Seville, and of
+noble parentage. He had been twelve years among the Indians, having
+gone into the country with Pánphilo de Narvaez, and returned in the
+ships to the island of Cuba, where the wife of the Governor remained;
+whence, by her command, he went back to Florida, with some twenty
+or thirty others, in a pinnace; and coming to the port in sight of
+the town, they saw a cane sticking upright in the ground, with a
+split in the top, holding a letter, which they supposed the Governor
+had left there, to give information of himself before marching into
+the interior. They asked it, to be given to them, of four or five
+Indians walking along the beach, who, by signs, bade them come to
+land for it, which Ortiz and another did, though contrary to the
+wishes of the others. No sooner had they got on shore, when many
+natives came out of the houses, and, drawing near, held them in such
+way that they could not escape. One, who would have defended himself,
+they slew on the spot; the other they seized by the hands, and took
+him to Ucita, their chief. The people in the pinnace, unwilling to
+land, kept along the coast and returned to Cuba.
+
+By command of Ucita, Juan Ortiz was bound hand and foot to four
+stakes, and laid upon scaffolding, beneath which a fire was kindled,
+that he might be burned; but a daughter of the chief entreated that
+he might be spared. Though one Christian, she said, might do no good,
+certainly he could do no harm, and it would be an honor to have one
+for a captive; to which the father acceded, directing the injuries to
+be healed. When Ortiz got well, he was put to watching a temple, that
+the wolves, in the night-time, might not carry off the dead there,
+which charge he took in hand, having commended himself to God. One
+night they snatched away from him the body of a little child, son
+of a principal man; and, going after them, he threw a dart at the
+wolf that was escaping, which, feeling itself wounded, let go its
+hold, and went off to die; and he returned, without knowing what he
+had done in the dark. In the morning, finding the body of the little
+boy gone, he became very sober; and Ucita, when he heard what had
+happened, determined he should be killed; but having sent on the
+trail which Ortiz pointed out as that the wolves had made, the body
+of the child was found, and a little farther on a dead wolf; at which
+circumstance the chief became well pleased with the Christian, and
+satisfied with the guard he had kept, ever after taking much notice
+of him.
+
+Three years having gone by since he had fallen into the hands of
+this chief, there came another, named Mocoço,[237] living two days'
+journey distant from that port, and burnt the town, when Ucita fled
+to one he had in another seaport, whereby Ortiz lost his occupation,
+and with it the favor of his master. The Indians are worshippers of
+the Devil, and it is their custom to make sacrifices of the blood and
+bodies of their people, or of those of any other they can come by;
+and they affirm, too, that when he would have them make an offering,
+he speaks, telling them that he is athirst, and that they must
+sacrifice to him. The girl who had delivered Ortiz from the fire,
+told him how her father had the mind to sacrifice him the next day,
+and that he must flee to Mocoço, who she knew would receive him with
+regard, as she had heard that he had asked for him, and said he would
+like to see him: and as he knew not the way, she went half a league
+out of town with him at dark, to put him on the road, returning early
+so as not to be missed.
+
+  [237] The town of Mocoço was located west of Miakka River (Macaco
+  of the old maps), which enters the northwest arm of the harbor.
+
+Ortiz travelled all night, and in the morning came to a river, the
+boundary of the territory of Mocoço, where he discovered two men
+fishing. As this people were at war with those of Ucita, and their
+languages different, he did not know how he should be able to tell
+them who he was, and why he came, or make other explanation, that
+they might not kill him as one of the enemy. It was not, however,
+until he had come up to where their arms were placed that he was
+discovered, when they fled towards the town; and though he called out
+to them to wait, that he would do them no injury, they only ran the
+faster for not understanding him. As they arrived, shouting, many
+Indians came out of the town, and began surrounding, in order to
+shoot him with their arrows, when he, finding himself pressed, took
+shelter behind trees, crying aloud that he was a Christian fled from
+Ucita, come to visit and serve Mocoço. At the moment, it pleased God
+that an Indian should come up, who, speaking the language, understood
+him and quieted the others, telling them what was said. Three or
+four ran to carry the news, when the cacique, much gratified, came
+a quarter of a league on the way to receive him. He caused the
+Christian immediately to swear to him, according to the custom of
+his country, that he would not leave him for any other master; and,
+in return, he promised to show him much honor, and if at any time
+Christians should come to that land, he would let him go freely, and
+give him his permission to return to them, pledging his oath to this
+after the Indian usage.
+
+Three years from that time, some people fishing out at sea, three
+leagues from land, brought news of having seen ships; when Mocoço,
+calling Ortiz, gave him permission to depart, who, taking leave,
+made all haste possible to the shore, where, finding no vessels, he
+supposed the story to be only a device of the cacique to discover
+his inclination. In this way he remained with him nine years, having
+little hope of ever seeing Christians more; but no sooner had the
+arrival of the Governor in Florida taken place, when it was known to
+Mocoço, who directly told Ortiz that Christians were in the town of
+Ucita. The captive, thinking himself jested with, as he had supposed
+himself to be before, said that his thoughts no longer dwelt on
+his people, and that his only wish now was to serve him. Still the
+cacique assured him that it was even as he stated, and gave him leave
+to go, telling him that if he did not, and the Christians should
+depart, he must not blame him, for he had fulfilled his promise.
+
+Great was the joy of Ortiz at this news, though still doubtful of
+its truth; however, he thanked Mocoço, and went his way. A dozen
+principal Indians were sent to accompany him; and on their way to
+the port, they met Baltasar de Gallegos, in the manner that has been
+related. Arrived at the camp, the Governor ordered that apparel be
+given to him, good armor, and a fine horse. When asked if he knew
+of any country where there was either gold or silver, he said that
+he had not been ten leagues in any direction from where he lived;
+but that thirty leagues distant was a chief named Paracoxi, to whom
+Mocoço, Ucita, and all they that dwelt along the coast paid tribute,
+and that he perhaps had knowledge of some good country, as his land
+was better than theirs, being more fertile, abounding in maize.
+Hearing this, the Governor was well pleased, and said he only
+desired to find subsistence, that he might be enabled to go inland
+with safety; for that Florida was so wide, in some part or other of
+it, there could not fail to be a rich country. The cacique of Mocoço
+came to the port, and calling on the Governor, he thus spoke:
+
+     MOST HIGH AND POWERFUL CHIEF:
+
+     Though less able, I believe, to serve you than the least of
+     these under your control, but with the wish to do more than even
+     the greatest of them can accomplish, I appear before you in the
+     full confidence of receiving your favor, as much so as though I
+     deserved it, not in requital of the trifling service I rendered
+     in setting free the Christian while he was in my power, which I
+     did, not for the sake of my honor and of my promise, but because
+     I hold that great men should be liberal. As much as in your
+     bodily perfections you exceed all, and in your command over fine
+     men are you superior to others, so in your nature are you equal
+     to the full enjoyment of earthly things. The favor I hope for,
+     great Lord, is that you will hold me to be your own, calling on
+     me freely to do whatever may be your wish.
+
+The Governor answered him, that although it were true, in freeing
+and sending him the Christian, he had done no more than to keep his
+word and preserve his honor, nevertheless he thanked him for an act
+so valuable, that there was no other for him that could be compared
+to it, and that, holding him henceforth to be a brother, he should in
+all, and through all, favor him. Then a shirt and some other articles
+of clothing were directed to be given to the chief, who, thankfully
+receiving them, took leave and went to his town.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 10
+
+     _How the Governor, having sent the ships to Cuba, marched
+     inland, leaving one hundred men at the port._
+
+
+From the port of Espiritu Santo, where the Governor was, he sent the
+chief castellan, with fifty cavalry and thirty or forty infantry, to
+the province of Paracoxi, to observe the character of the country,
+to inquire of that farther on, and to let him hear by message of
+what he should discover; he also sent the vessels to Cuba, that,
+at an appointed time, they might return with provisions. As the
+principal object of Vasco Porcallo de Figueroa in coming to Florida
+had been to get slaves for his plantation and mines, finding, after
+some incursions, that no seizures could be made, because of dense
+forest and extensive bogs, he determined to go back to Cuba; and
+in consequence of that resolution, there grew up such a difference
+between him and Soto, that neither of them treated nor spoke to the
+other kindly. Still, with words of courtesy, he asked permission of
+him to return, and took his leave.
+
+Baltasar de Gallegos having arrived at Paracoxi, thirty Indians
+came to him on the part of the absent cacique, one of whom said:
+"King Paracoxi, lord of this province, whose vassals we are, sends
+us to ask of you what it is you seek in his country, and in what he
+can serve you;" to which the chief castellan replied, that he much
+thanked the cacique for his proffer, and bade them tell him to return
+to his town, where they would talk together of a peace and friendship
+he greatly desired to establish. They went off, and came again the
+next day, reporting that as their lord could not appear, being very
+unwell, they had come in his stead to see what might be wanted. They
+were asked if they had knowledge or information of any country where
+gold and silver might be found in plenty; to which they answered yes;
+that towards the sunset was a province called Cale, the inhabitants
+of which were at war with those of territories where the greater
+portion of the year was summer, and where there was so much gold,
+that when the people came to make war upon those of Cale, they wore
+golden hats like casques.
+
+As the cacique had not come, Gallegos, reflecting, suspected the
+message designed for delay, that he might put himself in a condition
+of safety; and fearing that, if those men were suffered to depart,
+they might never return, he ordered them to be chained together,
+and sent the news to camp by eight men on horseback. The Governor,
+hearing what had passed, showed great pleasure, as did the rest who
+were with him, believing what the Indians said might be true. He left
+thirty cavalry and seventy infantry at the port, with provisions
+for two years, under command of Captain Calderon, marching with the
+others inland to Paracoxi; thence, having united with the force
+already there, he passed through a small town named Acela, and came
+to another called Tocaste,[238] whence he advanced with fifty of
+foot and thirty horse towards Cale;[239] and having gone through an
+untenanted town, some natives were seen in a lake, to whom having
+spoken by an interpreter, they came out and gave him a guide. From
+there he went to a river of powerful current, in the midst of which
+was a tree, whereon they made a bridge. Over this the people passed
+in safety, the horses being crossed swimming to a hawser, by which
+they were drawn to the other bank, the first that entered the water
+having been drowned for the want of one.
+
+  [238] Tocaste was on an island in the marsh at the first crossing
+  of "the great marsh," so graphically described by the Inca.
+
+  [239] This was the river or marsh of Cale, and the Inca's second
+  crossing of the great marsh.
+
+The Governor sent two men on horseback, with word to those in the
+rear that they should advance rapidly, for that the way was becoming
+toilsome and the provisions were short. He came to Cale and found
+the town abandoned; but he seized three spies, and tarried there
+until the people should arrive, they travelling hungry and on bad
+roads, the country being very thin of maize, low, very wet, pondy,
+and thickly covered with trees.[240] Where there were inhabitants,
+some watercresses could be found, which they who arrived first would
+gather, and, cooking them in water with salt, eat them without other
+thing; and they who could get none, would seize the stalks of maize
+and eat them, the ear, being young, as yet containing no grain.
+Having come to the river, which the Governor had passed, they got
+cabbage from the low palmetto growing there, like that of Andalusia.
+There they were met by the messengers, who, reporting a great deal
+of maize in Cale, gave much satisfaction.
+
+  [240] They had now reached the higher country, which begins in
+  the southern part of Polk County.
+
+While the people should be coming up, the Governor ordered all the
+ripe grain in the fields, enough for three months, to be secured.
+In gathering it three Christians were slain. One of two Indians who
+were made prisoners stated that seven days' journey distant was a
+large province, abounding in maize, called Apalache. Presently, with
+fifty cavalry and sixty infantry, he set out from Cale, leaving Luis
+de Moscoso, the master of the camp,[241] in command, with directions
+not to move until he should be ordered. Up to that time, no one had
+been able to get servants who should make his bread; and the method
+being to beat out the maize in log mortars with a one-handed pestle
+of wood, some also sifting the flour afterward through their shirts
+of mail, the process was found so laborious, that many, rather than
+crush the grain, preferred to eat it parched and sodden. The mass
+was baked in clay dishes, set over fire, in the manner that I have
+described as done in Cuba.
+
+  [241] An officer somewhat like an adjutant-general.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 11
+
+     _How the Governor arrived at Caliquen, and thence, taking
+     the cacique with him, came to Napetaca, where the Indians,
+     attempting to rescue him, had many of their number killed and
+     captured._
+
+
+On the eleventh day of August, in the year 1539, the Governor left
+Cale, and arrived to sleep at a small town called Ytara, and the
+next day at another called Potano, and the third at Utinama, and
+then at another named Malapaz. This place was so called because one,
+representing himself to be its cacique, came peacefully, saying that
+he wished to serve the Governor with his people, and asked that he
+would cause the twenty-eight men and women, prisoners taken the night
+before, to be set at liberty; that provisions should be brought,
+and that he would furnish a guide for the country in advance of
+us; whereupon, the Governor having ordered the prisoners to be let
+loose, and the Indian put under guard, the next day in the morning
+came many natives close to a scrub surrounding the town, near which
+the prisoner asked to be taken, that he might speak and satisfy them,
+as they would obey in whatever he commanded; but no sooner had he
+found himself close to them, than he boldly started away, and fled
+so swiftly that no one could overtake him, going off with the rest
+into the woods. The Governor ordered a bloodhound, already fleshed
+upon him, to be let loose, which, passing by many, seized upon the
+faithless cacique, and held him until the Christians had come up.
+
+From this town the people went to sleep at that of Cholupaha, which,
+for its abundance of maize, received the name of Villafarta; thence,
+crossing a river before it, by a bridge they had made of wood, the
+Christians marched two days through an uninhabited country.
+
+On the seventeenth day of August they arrived at Caliquen, where
+they heard of the province of Apalache, of Narvaez having been there
+and having embarked, because no road was to be found over which to
+go forward, and of there being no other town, and that water was on
+all sides. Every mind was depressed at this information, and all
+counselled the Governor to go back to the port, that they might not
+be lost, as Narvaez had been, and to leave the land of Florida; that,
+should they go further, they might not be able to get back, as the
+little maize that was yet left the Indians would secure: to which
+Soto replied, that he would never return until he had seen with his
+own eyes what was asserted, things that to him appeared incredible.
+Then he ordered us to be in readiness for the saddle, sending word to
+Luis de Moscoso to advance from Cale, that he waited for him; and,
+as in the judgment of the master of the camp, and of many others,
+they should have to return from Apalache, they buried in Cale some
+iron implements with other things. They reached Caliquen through
+much suffering; for the land over which the Governor had marched lay
+wasted and was without maize.
+
+All the people having come up, a bridge was ordered to be made over
+a river that passed near the town, whereon we crossed, the tenth day
+of September, taking with us the cacique. When three days on our
+journey, some Indians arrived to visit their lord; and every day they
+came out to the road, playing upon flutes, a token among them that
+they come in peace. They stated that further on there was a cacique
+named Uzachil, kinsman of the chief of Caliquen, their lord, who
+waited the arrival of the Governor, prepared to do great services;
+and they besought him to set their cacique free, which he feared to
+do, lest they should go off without giving him any guides; so he got
+rid of them from day to day with specious excuses.
+
+We marched five days, passing through some small towns, and arrived
+at Napetaca on the fifteenth day of September, where we found
+fourteen or fifteen Indians who begged for the release of the cacique
+of Caliquen, to whom the Governor declared that their lord was no
+prisoner, his attendance being wished only as far as Uzachil. Having
+learned from Juan Ortiz, to whom a native had made it known, that
+the Indians had determined to assemble and fall upon the Christians,
+for the recovery of their chief, the Governor, on the day for which
+the attack was concerted, commanded his men to be in readiness, the
+cavalry to be armed and on horseback, each one so disposed of in his
+lodge as not to be seen of the Indians, that they might come to the
+town without reserve. Four hundred warriors, with bows and arrows,
+appeared in sight of the camp; and, going into a thicket, they sent
+two of their number to demand the cacique: the Governor, with six men
+on foot, taking the chief by the hand, conversing with him the while
+to assure the Indians, went towards the place where they were, when,
+finding the moment propitious, he ordered a trumpet to be sounded:
+directly, they who were in the houses, foot as well as horse, set
+upon the natives, who, assailed unexpectedly, thought only of their
+safety. Of two horses killed, one was that of the Governor, who was
+mounted instantly on another. From thirty to forty natives fell by
+the lance; the rest escaped into two very large ponds, situated some
+way apart, wherein they swam about; and, being surrounded by the
+Christians, they were shot at with crossbow and arquebuse, although
+to no purpose, because of the long distance they were off.
+
+At night, one of the lakes was ordered to be guarded, the people
+not being sufficient to encircle both. The Indians, in attempting
+to escape in the dark, would come swimming noiselessly to the
+shore, with a leaf of water-lily on the head, that they might pass
+unobserved; when those mounted, at sight of any ruffle on the
+surface, would dash into the water up to the breasts of the horses,
+and the natives would again retire. In such way passed the night,
+neither party taking any rest. Juan Ortiz told them that, as escape
+was impossible, they would do well to give up; which they did, driven
+by extreme chillness of the water; and one after another, as cold
+overpowered, called out to him, asking not to be killed--that he was
+coming straightway to put himself in the hands of the Governor. At
+four o'clock in the morning they had all surrendered, save twelve
+of the principal men, who, as of more distinction and more valiant
+than the rest, preferred to die rather than yield: then the Indians
+of Paracoxi, who were going about unshackled, went in after them,
+swimming, and pulled them out by the hair. They were all put in
+chains, and, on the day following, were divided among the Christians
+for their service.
+
+While captives, these men determined to rebel, and gave the lead to
+an interpreter, one reputed brave, that when the Governor might come
+near to speak with him, he should strangle him; but no sooner was the
+occasion presented, and before his hands could be thrown about the
+neck of Soto, his purpose was discovered, and he received so heavy
+a blow from him in the nostrils, that they gushed with blood. The
+Indians all rose together. He who could only catch up a pestle from
+a mortar, as well as he who could grasp a weapon, equally exerted
+himself to kill his master, or the first one he met; and he whose
+fortune it was to light on a lance, or a sword, handled it in a
+manner as though he had been accustomed to use it all his days. One
+Indian, in the public yard of the town, with blade in hand, fought
+like a bull in the arena, until the halberdiers of the Governor,
+arriving, put an end to him. Another got up, with a lance, into a
+maize crib, made of cane, called by Indians barbacoa, and defended
+the entrance with the uproar of ten men, until he was stricken down
+with a battle-axe. They who were subdued may have been in all two
+hundred men: some of the youngest the Governor gave to those who
+had good chains and were vigilant; all the rest were ordered to
+execution, and, being bound to a post in the middle of the town yard,
+they were shot to death with arrows by the people of Paracoxi.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 12
+
+     _How the Governor arrived at Palache, and was informed that
+     there was much gold inland._
+
+
+On the twenty-third day of September the Governor left Napetaca, and
+went to rest at a river, where two Indians brought him a deer from
+the cacique of Uzachil; and the next day, having passed through a
+large town called Hapaluya, he slept at Uzachil. He found no person
+there; for the inhabitants, informed of the deaths at Napetaca, dared
+not remain. In the town was found their food, much maize, beans, and
+pumpkins, on which the Christians lived. The maize is like coarse
+millet; the pumpkins are better and more savory than those of Spain.
+
+Two captains having been sent in opposite directions, in quest of
+Indians, a hundred men and women were taken, one or two of whom were
+chosen out for the Governor, as was always customary for officers to
+do after successful inroads, dividing the others among themselves and
+companions. They were led off in chains, with collars about the neck,
+to carry luggage and grind corn, doing the labor proper to servants.
+Sometimes it happened that, going with them for wood or maize, they
+would kill the Christian, and flee, with the chain on, which others
+would file at night with a splinter of stone, in the place of iron,
+at which work, when caught, they were punished, as a warning to
+others, and that they might not do the like. The women and youths,
+when removed a hundred leagues from their country, no longer cared,
+and were taken along loose, doing the work, and in a very little time
+learning the Spanish language.
+
+From Uzachil the Governor went towards Apalache, and at the end of
+two days' travel arrived at a town called Axille. After that, the
+Indians having no knowledge of the Christians, they were come upon
+unawares, the greater part escaping, nevertheless, because there were
+woods near town. The next day, the first of October, the Governor
+took his departure in the morning, and ordered a bridge to be made
+over a river which he had to cross. The depth there, for a stone's
+throw, was over the head, and afterward the water came to the waist,
+for the distance of a crossbow-shot, where was a growth of tall and
+dense forest, into which the Indians came, to ascertain if they could
+assail the men at work and prevent a passage; but they were dispersed
+by the arrival of crossbowmen, and some timbers being thrown in, the
+men gained the opposite side and secured the way. On the fourth day
+of the week, Wednesday of St. Francis,[242] the Governor crossed over
+and reached Uitachuco, a town subject to Apalache, where he slept. He
+found it burning, the Indians having set it on fire.
+
+  [242] St. Francis's day is the fourth of the month (October), but
+  it was not Wednesday in 1539. Ranjel says that the crossing was
+  finished on Friday, October 3.
+
+Thenceforward the country was well inhabited, producing much corn,
+the way leading by many habitations like villages. Sunday, the
+twenty-fifth of October,[243] he arrived at the town of Uzela,[244]
+and on Monday at Anhayca Apalache, where the lord of all that country
+and province resided. The camp-master, whose duty it is to divide and
+lodge the men, quartered them about the town, at the distance of half
+a league to a league apart. There were other towns which had much
+maize, pumpkins, beans, and dried plums of the country, whence were
+brought together at Anhayca Apalache what appeared to be sufficient
+provision for the winter. These _ameixas_[245] are better than those
+of Spain, and come from trees that grow in the fields without being
+planted.
+
+  [243] This should be Sunday, October 5. October 25, 1539, came on
+  Saturday.
+
+  [244] Calahuchi, according to Ranjel. The modern name may be
+  Chattahuchi.
+
+  [245] This word means plums, but when applied to the American
+  fruit, it has reference to the persimmon.
+
+Informed that the sea was eight leagues distant, the Governor
+directly sent a captain thither, with cavalry and infantry, who found
+a town called Ochete, eight leagues on the way; and, coming to the
+coast, he saw where a great tree had been felled, the trunk split
+up into stakes, and with the limbs made into mangers. He found also
+the skulls of horses. With these discoveries he returned, and what
+was said of Narvaez was believed to be certain, that he had there
+made boats,[246] in which he left the country, and was lost in them
+at sea. Presently Juan de Añasco made ready to go to the port of
+Espiritu Santo, taking thirty cavalry, with orders from the Governor
+to Calderon, who had remained there, that he should abandon the town,
+and bring all the people to Apalache.
+
+  [246] The bay where Narvaez built his brigantines was known to
+  the Spaniards as Bahia de Caballos, or Horse Bay. The modern name
+  is Bay Ocklockonee.
+
+In Uzachill, and other towns on the way, Añasco found many people who
+had already become careless; still, to avoid detention, no captures
+were made, as it was not well to give the Indians sufficient time
+to come together. He went through the towns at night, stopping at a
+distance from the population for three or four hours, to rest, and at
+the end of ten days arrived at the port. He despatched two caravels
+to Cuba, in which he sent to Doña Ysabel twenty women brought by
+him from Ytara and Potano, near Cale; and, taking with him the
+foot-soldiers in the brigantines, from point to point along the coast
+by sea, he went towards Palache. Calderon with the cavalry, and some
+crossbowmen of foot, went by land. The Indians at several places
+beset him, and wounded some of the men. On his arrival, the Governor
+ordered planks and spikes to be taken to the coast for building a
+piragua, into which thirty men entered well armed from the bay, going
+to and coming from sea, waiting the arrival of the brigantines, and
+sometimes fighting with the natives, who went up and down the estuary
+in canoes. On Saturday, the twenty-ninth of November, in a high wind,
+an Indian passed through the sentries undiscovered, and set fire
+to the town, two portions of which, in consequence, were instantly
+consumed.
+
+On Sunday, the twenty-eighth of December, Juan de Añasco arrived;
+and the Governor directed Francisco Maldonado, captain of infantry,
+to run the coast to the westward with fifty men, and look for an
+entrance; proposing to go himself in that direction by land on
+discoveries. The same day, eight men rode two leagues about the
+town in pursuit of Indians, who had become so bold that they would
+venture up within two crossbow-shot of the camp to kill our people.
+Two were discovered engaged in picking beans, and might have escaped,
+but a woman being present, the wife of one of them, they stood to
+fight. Before they could be killed, three horses were wounded, one
+of which died in a few days. Calderon going along the coast near
+by, the Indians came out against him from a wood, driving him from
+his course, and capturing from many of his company a part of their
+indispensable subsistence.
+
+Three or four days having elapsed beyond the time set for the going
+and return of Maldonado, the Governor resolved that, should he not
+appear at the end of eight days, he would go thence and wait no
+longer; when the captain arrived, bringing with him an Indian from
+a Province called Ochus, sixty leagues from Apalache, and the news
+of having found a sheltered port with a good depth of water. The
+Governor was highly pleased, hoping to find a good country ahead; and
+he sent Maldonado to Havana for provisions, with which to meet him at
+that port of his discovery, to which he would himself come by land;
+but should he not reach there that summer, then he directed him to go
+back to Havana and return there the next season to await him, as he
+would make it his express object to march in quest of Ochus.
+
+Francisco Maldonado went, and Juan de Guzman remained instead,
+captain of his infantry. Of the Indians taken in Napetuca, the
+treasurer, Juan Gaytan, brought a youth with him, who stated that he
+did not belong to that country, but to one afar in the direction of
+the sun's rising, from which he had been a long time absent visiting
+other lands; that its name was Yupaha, and was governed by a woman,
+the town she lived in being of astonishing size, and many neighboring
+lords her tributaries, some of whom gave her clothing, others gold in
+quantity. He showed how the metal was taken from the earth, melted,
+and refined, exactly as though he had seen it all done, or else the
+Devil had taught him how it was; so that they who knew aught of
+such matters declared it impossible that he could give that account
+without having been an eye-witness; and they who beheld the signs he
+made, credited all that was understood as certain.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 13
+
+     _How the Governor went from Apalache in quest of Yupaha, and
+     what befell him._
+
+
+On Wednesday, the third of March, in the year 1540, the Governor
+left Anhaica Apalache to seek Yupaha. He had ordered his men to go
+provided with maize for a march through sixty leagues of desert. The
+cavalry carried their grain on the horses, and the infantry theirs
+on the back; because the Indians they brought with them for service,
+being naked and in chains, had perished in great part during the
+winter. On the fourth day of the journey they arrived at a deep
+river,[247] where a piragua was made; and, in consequence of the
+violence of the current, a cable of chains was extended from shore to
+shore, along which the boat passed, and the horses were drawn over,
+swimming thereto, by means of a windlass to the other side.
+
+  [247] Probably Flint River.
+
+A day and a half afterwards, they arrived at a town by the name of
+Capachiqui, and on Friday, the eleventh,[248] the inhabitants were
+found to have gone off. The following day, five Christians, going
+in the rear of the camp to search for mortars, in which the natives
+beat maize, went to some houses surrounded by a thicket, where many
+Indians lurked as spies, an equal number of whom, separating from
+the rest, set upon our men, one of whom fled back, crying out to
+arms. When they who could first answer to the call reached the spot,
+they found one of the Christians killed, and the three others badly
+wounded, the Indians fleeing into a sheet of water, full of woods,
+into which the horses could not go. The Governor left Capachiqui,
+passing through a desert; and on Wednesday, the twenty-first[249] of
+the month, came to Toalli.
+
+  [248] This should be Thursday the eleventh, which was the day on
+  which they arrived at the first town in Capachiqui. Capachiqui
+  was the second town in that province, according to Ranjel.
+
+  [249] Wednesday was the twenty-fourth, but they arrived at Toalli
+  early on the morning of the twenty-third, according to Ranjel.
+
+The houses of this town were different from those behind, which were
+covered with dry grass; thenceforward they were roofed with cane,
+after the fashion of tile. They are kept very clean: some have their
+sides so made of clay as to look like tapia.[250] Throughout the cold
+country every Indian has a winter house, plastered inside and out,
+with a very small door, which is closed at dark, and a fire being
+made within, it remains heated like an oven, so that clothing is not
+needed during the night-time. He has likewise a house for summer,
+and near it a kitchen, where fire is made and bread baked. Maize is
+kept in a barbacoa, which is a house with wooden sides, like a room,
+raised aloft on four posts, and has a floor of cane. The difference
+between the houses of the masters, or principal men, and those of the
+common people is that, besides being larger than the others, they
+have deep balconies on the front side, with cane seats, like benches;
+and about are many barbacoas, in which they bring together the
+tribute their people give them of maize, skins of deer, and blankets
+of the country. These are like shawls, some of them made from the
+inner bark of trees, and others of a grass resembling nettle, which,
+by treading out, becomes like flax. The women use them for covering,
+wearing one about the body from the waist downward, and another over
+the shoulder, with the right arm left free, after the manner of the
+Gypsies: the men wear but one, which they carry over the shoulder
+in the same way, the loins being covered with a _bragueiro_ of
+deer-skin, after the fashion of the woollen breech-cloth that was
+once the custom of Spain. The skins are well dressed, the color being
+given to them that is wished, and in such perfection, that, when of
+vermilion, they look like very fine red broadcloth; and when black,
+the sort in use for shoes, they are of the purest. The same hues are
+given to blankets.
+
+  [250] Mud walls.
+
+The Governor left Toalli on the twenty-fourth day of March, and
+arrived on Thursday, in the evening, at a little stream[251] where a
+small bridge was made, and the people passed to the opposite side.
+Benito Fernandes, a Portuguese, fell off from it, and was drowned. So
+soon as the Governor had crossed, he found a town, a short way on,
+by the name of Achese, the people of which, having had no knowledge
+of the Christians, plunged into a river; nevertheless, some men
+and women were taken, among whom was found one who understood the
+youth, the guide to Yupaha, which rather confirmed what he stated, as
+they had come through regions speaking different languages, some of
+which he did not understand. By one of the Indians taken there, the
+Governor sent to call the cacique from the farther side of the river,
+who, having come to him, thus spoke:
+
+     VERY HIGH, POWERFUL, AND GOOD MASTER:
+
+     The things that seldom happen bring astonishment. Think, then,
+     what must be the effect on me and mine, of the sight of you and
+     your people, whom we have at no time seen, astride the fierce
+     brutes, your horses, entering with such speed and fury into
+     my country, that we had no tidings of your coming--things so
+     altogether new, as to strike awe and terror to our hearts, which
+     it was not nature to resist, so that we should receive you with
+     the sobriety due to so kingly and famous a lord. Trusting to
+     your greatness and personal qualities, I hope no fault will be
+     found in me, and that I shall rather receive favors, of which
+     one is that with my person, my country, and my vassals, you will
+     do as with your own things; and another, that you tell me who
+     you are, whence you come, whither you go, and what it is you
+     seek, that I may the better serve you.
+
+  [251] Before arriving at this stream they crossed a very broad
+  river, according to Ranjel, which Biedma says was the first river
+  flowing to the east. This was the Ocmulgee River.
+
+The Governor responded, that he greatly thanked him for his
+good-will, as much so as though he had given him a great treasure. He
+told him that he was the child of the Sun, coming from its abode, and
+that he was going about the country, seeking for the greatest prince
+there, and the richest province. The cacique stated that farther on
+was a great lord, whose territory was called Ocute. He gave him a
+guide, who understood the language, to conduct him thither; and the
+Governor commanded his subjects to be released. A high cross, made of
+wood, was set up in the middle of the town-yard; and, as time did not
+allow more to be done, the Indians were instructed that it was put
+there to commemorate the suffering of Christ, who was God and man;
+that he had created the skies and the earth, and had suffered for the
+salvation of all, and therefore, that they should revere that sign;
+and they showed by their manner that they would do so.
+
+The Governor set out on the first day of April, and advanced
+through the country of the chief, along up a river, the shores of
+which were very populous. On the fourth he went through the town
+of Altamaca,[252] and on the tenth arrived at Ocute. The cacique
+sent him a present, by two thousand Indians, of many rabbits and
+partridges, maize bread, many dogs, and two turkeys. On account
+of the scarcity of meat, the dogs were as much esteemed by the
+Christians as though they had been fat sheep. There was such want
+of meat and salt that oftentimes, in many places, a sick man had
+nothing for his nourishment, and was wasting away to bone, of some
+ail that elsewhere might have found a remedy; and would die of pure
+debility, saying: "Now, if I had but a slice of meat, or only a few
+lumps of salt, I should not thus die."
+
+  [252] Altamaha, according to Ranjel. Before arriving at this
+  place they crossed a great river which was either the Oconee or
+  the Altamaha River.
+
+The Indians never lacked meat. With arrows they get abundance of
+deer, turkeys, rabbits, and other wild animals, being very skilful
+in killing game, which the Christians were not; and even if they
+had been, there was not the opportunity for it, they being on the
+march the greater part of their time; nor did they, besides, ever
+dare to straggle off. Such was the craving for meat, that when the
+six hundred men who followed Soto arrived at a town, and found there
+twenty or thirty dogs, he who could get sight of one and kill him,
+thought he had done no little; and he who proved himself so active,
+if his captain knew of it, and he forgot to send him a quarter, would
+show his displeasure, and make him feel it in the watches, or in any
+matter of labor that came along, with which he could bear upon him.
+
+On Monday, the twelfth of April, the Governor took his departure, the
+cacique of Ocute giving him four hundred tamemes, the Indians that
+carry burdens. He passed through a town, the lord of which was called
+Cofaqui, and came to the province of another, named Patofa, who,
+being at peace with the chief of Ocute and other neighboring lords,
+had heard of the Governor for a long time, and desired to see him. He
+went to call on him, and made this speech:
+
+     POWERFUL LORD:
+
+     Not without reason, now, will I ask that some light mishap
+     befall me, in return for so great good fortune, and deem my lot
+     a happy one; since I have come to what I most wished in life, to
+     behold and have the opportunity in some way to serve you. Thus
+     the tongue casts the shadow of the thought; but I, nevertheless,
+     am as unable to produce the perfect image of my feelings as to
+     control the appearances of my contentment. By what circumstance
+     has this your land, which I govern, deserved to be seen by one
+     so superior and excellent that all on earth should obey and
+     serve him [Soto] as a prince? And those who here inhabit being
+     so insignificant, how can they forget, in receiving this vast
+     enjoyment, that, in the order of things, will follow upon it
+     some great adversity? If we are held worthy of being yours,
+     we can never be other than favored, nor less than protected
+     in whatsoever is reasonable and just; for they that fail of
+     deserving either, with the name of men can only be considered
+     brutes. From the depth of my heart, and with the respect due to
+     such a chief, I make mine offer; and pray that, in return for so
+     sincere good-will, you dispose of me, my country, and my vassals.
+
+The Governor answered that his offers and good-will, shown in works,
+would greatly please him, and that he should ever bear them in memory
+to honor and favor him as he would a brother. From this province of
+Patofa, back to the first cacique we found at peace, a distance of
+fifty leagues, the country is abundant, picturesque, and luxuriant,
+well watered, and having good river margins; thence to the harbor of
+Espiritu Santo, where we first arrived, the land of Florida, which
+may be three hundred leagues in length, a little more or less, is
+light, the greater part of it of pine-trees, and low, having many
+ponds; and in places are high and dense forests, into which the
+Indians that were hostile betook themselves, where they could not be
+found; nor could horses enter there, which, to the Christians, was
+the loss of the food they carried away, and made it troublesome to
+get guides.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 14
+
+     _How the Governor left the province of Patofa, marching into a
+     desert country, where he, with his people, became exposed to
+     great peril and underwent severe privation._
+
+
+In the town of Patofa, the youth, whom the Governor brought with
+him for guide and interpreter, began to froth at the mouth, and
+threw himself on the ground as if he were possessed of the Devil. An
+exorcism being said over him, the fit went off. He stated that four
+days' journey from there, towards the sunrise, was the province he
+spoke of: the Indians at Patofa said that they knew of no dwellings
+in that direction, but that towards the northwest there was a
+province called Coça, a plentiful country having very large towns.
+The cacique told the Governor that if he desired to go thither he
+would give him a guide and Indians to carry burdens, and if he would
+go in the direction pointed out by the youth, he would furnish him
+with everything necessary for that also.
+
+With words of love, and tendering each other services, they parted,
+the Governor receiving seven hundred tamemes. He took maize for the
+consumption of four days, and marched by a road that, gradually
+becoming less, on the sixth day disappeared. Led by the youth, they
+forded two rivers,[253] each the breadth of two shots of a crossbow,
+the water rising to the stirrups of the saddles, and passing in a
+current so powerful, that it became necessary for those on horseback
+to stand one before another, that they on foot, walking near, might
+cross along above them: then came to another[254] of a more violent
+current, and larger, which was got over with more difficulty, the
+horses swimming for a lance's length at the coming out, into a
+pine-grove. The Governor menaced the youth, motioning that he would
+throw him to the dogs for having lied to him in saying that it was
+four days' journey, whereas they had travelled nine, each day of
+seven or eight leagues; and that the men and horses had become very
+thin, because of the sharp economy practised with the maize. The
+youth declared that he knew not where he was. Fortunately for him,
+at the time, there was not another whom Juan Ortiz understood, or he
+would have been cast to the dogs.
+
+  [253] The Great Ohoopee and Cannouchee rivers.
+
+  [254] The Ogeechee River.
+
+The Governor, leaving the camp among the pine-trees, marched that
+day, with some cavalry and infantry, five or six leagues, looking
+for a path, and came back at night very cast down, not having found
+any sign of inhabitants. The next day there was a variety of opinion
+about the course proper to take, whether to return or do otherwise.
+The country through which they had come remained wasted and without
+maize; the grain they had so far brought with them was spent; the
+beasts, like the men, were become very lean; and it was held very
+doubtful whether relief was anywhere to be found: moreover, it was
+the opinion that they might be beaten by any Indians whatsoever who
+should venture to attack them, so that continuing thus, whether by
+hunger or in strife, they must inevitably be overcome. The Governor
+determined to send thence in all directions on horseback, in quest
+of habitations; and the next day he despatched four captains to as
+many points, with eight of cavalry to each. They came back at night
+leading their beasts by the bridle, unable to carry their masters, or
+driven before them with sticks, having found no road, nor any sign of
+a settlement. He sent other four again the next day, with eight of
+cavalry apiece, men who could swim, that they might cross any ponds
+and rivers in the way, the horses being chosen of the best that were;
+Baltasar de Gallegos ascending by the river, Juan de Añasco going
+down it, Alfonso Romo and Juan Rodriguez Lobillo striking into the
+country.
+
+The Governor had brought thirteen sows to Florida, which had
+increased to three hundred swine; and the maize having failed for
+three or four days, he ordered to be killed daily, for each man, half
+a pound of pork, on which small allowance, and some boiled herbs, the
+people with much difficulty lived. There being no food to give to
+the Indians of Patofa, they were dismissed, though they still wished
+to keep with the Christians in their extremity, and showed great
+regret at going back before leaving them in a peopled country. Juan
+de Añasco came in on Sunday, in the afternoon, bringing with him a
+woman and a youth he had taken, with the report that he had found a
+small town twelve or thirteen leagues off; at which the Governor and
+his people were as much delighted as though they had been raised from
+death to life.
+
+On Monday, the twenty-sixth of April, the Governor set out for Aymay,
+a town to which the Christians gave the name of Socorro. At the foot
+of a tree, in the camp, they buried a paper, and in the bark, with a
+hatchet, they cut these words: "Dig here; at the root of this pine
+you will find a letter;" and this was so fixed that the captains,
+who had gone in quest of an inhabited country, should learn what the
+Governor had done and the direction he had taken. There was no other
+road than the one Juan de Añasco had made moving along through the
+woods.
+
+On Monday the Governor arrived at the town, with those the best
+mounted, all riding the hardest possible; some sleeping two leagues
+off, others three and four, each as he was able to travel and his
+strength held out. A barbacoa was found full of parched meal and some
+maize, which were distributed by allowance. Four Indians were taken,
+not one of whom would say anything else than that he knew of no other
+town. The Governor ordered one of them to be burned; and thereupon
+another said, that two days' journey from there was a province called
+Cutifachiqui.[255]
+
+  [255] From the wording of the Ranjel narrative, Aymay was on the
+  east side of the Savannah River and Cutifachiqui on the west
+  side. The latter town was not at Silver Bluff, South Carolina, as
+  commonly thought, but further down the river. Cofitachequi (as
+  Ranjel spells it) is proper Creek, and means Dog-wood Town.
+
+On Wednesday the three captains came up: they had found the letter
+and followed on after the rest. From the command of Juan Rodriguez
+two men remained behind, their horses having given out, for which the
+Governor reprimanded him severely, and sent him to bring them. While
+they should be coming on he set out for Cutifachiqui, capturing three
+Indians in the road, who stated that the mistress of that country
+had already information of the Christians, and was waiting for them
+in a town. He sent to her by one of them, offering his friendship
+and announcing his approach. Directly as the Governor arrived, four
+canoes came towards him, in one of which was a kinswoman of the
+Cacica, who, coming near, addressed him in these words:
+
+  EXCELLENT LORD:
+
+     My sister sends me to salute you, and to say, that the reason
+     why she has not come in person is, that she has thought to
+     serve you better by remaining to give orders on the other
+     shore; and that, in a short time, her canoes will all be here,
+     in readiness to conduct you thither, where you may take your
+     repose and be obeyed.
+
+The Governor thanked her, and she returned to cross the river. After
+a little time the Cacica came out of the town, seated in a chair,
+which some principal men having borne to the bank, she entered a
+canoe. Over the stern was spread an awning, and in the bottom lay
+extended a mat where were two cushions, one above the other, upon
+which she sate; and she was accompanied by her chief men, in other
+canoes, with Indians. She approached the spot where the Governor was,
+and, being arrived, thus addressed him:
+
+  EXCELLENT LORD:
+
+     Be this coming to these your shores most happy. My ability can
+     in no way equal my wishes, nor my services become the merits of
+     so great a prince; nevertheless, good wishes are to be valued
+     more than all the treasures of the earth without them. With
+     sincerest and purest good-will I tender you my person, my lands,
+     my people, and make you these small gifts.
+
+The Cacica presented much clothing of the country, from the shawls
+and skins that came in the other boats; and drawing from over her
+head a large string of pearls, she threw them about his neck,
+exchanging with him many gracious words of friendship and courtesy.
+She directed that canoes should come to the spot, whence the Governor
+and his people passed to the opposite side of the river. So soon as
+he was lodged in the town, a great many turkeys were sent to him.
+The country was delightful and fertile, having good interval lands
+upon the streams; the forest was open, with abundance of walnut and
+mulberry trees. The sea was stated to be distant two days' travel.
+About the place, from half a league to a league off, were large
+vacant towns, grown up in grass, that appeared as if no people had
+lived in them for a long time. The Indians said that, two years
+before, there had been a pest in the land, and the inhabitants had
+moved away to other towns. In the barbacoas were large quantities of
+clothing, shawls of thread, made from the bark of trees, and others
+of feathers, white, gray, vermilion, and yellow, rich and proper for
+winter. There were also many well-dressed deer-skins, of colors drawn
+over with designs, of which had been made shoes, stockings, and hose.
+The Cacica, observing that the Christians valued the pearls, told
+the Governor that, if he should order some sepulchres that were in
+the town to be searched, he would find many; and if he chose to send
+to those that were in the uninhabited towns, he might load all his
+horses with them. They examined those in the town, and found three
+hundred and fifty pounds' weight of pearls, and figures of babies and
+birds made of them.
+
+The inhabitants are brown of skin, well formed and proportioned.
+They are more civilized than any people seen in all the territories
+of Florida, wearing clothes and shoes. This country, according to
+what the Indians stated, had been very populous. It appeared that
+the youth who was the guide had heard of it; and what was told him
+he declared to have seen, and magnified such parts as he chose, to
+suit his pleasure. He told the Governor that they had begun to enter
+upon the country he had spoken to him about, which, because of its
+appearance, with his being able to understand the language of the
+people, gained for him some credit. He wished to become a Christian,
+and asked to be baptized, which was done, he receiving the name of
+Pedro; and the Governor commanded the chain to be struck off that he
+had carried until then.
+
+In the town were found a dirk and beads that had belonged to
+Christians, who, the Indians said, had many years before been in
+the port, distant two days' journey. He that had been there was the
+Governor-licentiate Ayllon, who came to conquer the land, and, on
+arriving at the port, died, when there followed divisions and murders
+among the chief personages, in quarrels as to who should command; and
+thence, without knowing any thing of the country, they went back to
+Spain.
+
+To all it appeared well to make a settlement there, the point being
+a favorable one, to which could come all the ships from New Spain,
+Peru, Sancta Marta, and Tierra-Firme, going to Spain; because it is
+in the way thither, is a good country, and one fit in which to raise
+supplies; but Soto, as it was his object to find another treasure
+like that of Atabalípa, lord of Peru, would not be content with good
+lands nor pearls, even though many of them were worth their weight in
+gold (and if the country were divided among Christians, more precious
+should those be the Indians would procure than these they have, being
+bored with heat, which causes them to lose their hue): so he answered
+them who urged him to make a settlement, that in all the country
+together there was not support for his troops a single month; that
+it was necessary to return to Ochus, where Maldonado was to wait;
+and should a richer country not be found, they could always return
+to that who would, and in their absence the Indians would plant
+their fields and be better provided with maize. The natives were
+asked if they had knowledge of any great lord farther on, to which
+they answered, that twelve days' travel thence was a province called
+Chiaha, subject to a chief of Coça.
+
+The Governor then resolved at once to go in quest of that country,
+and being an inflexible man, and dry of word, who, although he liked
+to know what the others all thought and had to say, after he once
+said a thing he did not like to be opposed, and as he ever acted as
+he thought best, all bent to his will; for though it seemed an error
+to leave that country, when another might have been found about it,
+on which all the people could have been sustained until the crops had
+been made and the grain gathered, there were none who would say a
+thing to him after it became known that he had made up his mind.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 15
+
+     _How the Governor went from Cutifachiqui in quest of Coça, and
+     what occurred to him on the journey._
+
+
+On the third day of May,[256] the Governor set out from Cutifachiqui;
+and, it being discovered that the wish of the Cacica was to leave the
+Christians, if she could, giving them neither guides nor tamemes,
+because of the outrages committed upon the inhabitants, there never
+failing to be men of low degree among the many, who will put the
+lives of themselves and others in jeopardy for some mean interest,
+the Governor ordered that she should be placed under guard and took
+her with him. This treatment, which was not a proper return for the
+hospitable welcome he had received, makes true the adage, For well
+doing, etc.; and thus she was carried away on foot with her female
+slaves.
+
+  [256] This should be May 13, according to Ranjel.
+
+This brought us service in all the places that were passed, she
+ordering the Indians to come and take the loads from town to town.
+We travelled through her territories a hundred leagues, in which,
+according to what we saw, she was greatly obeyed, whatsoever she
+ordered being performed with diligence and efficacy. Pedro, the
+guide, said she was not the suzeraine, but her niece, who had come to
+that town by her command to punish capitally some principal Indians
+who had seized upon the tribute; but to this no credit was given,
+because of the falsehoods in which he had been taken, though all
+was put up with, from the necessity of having some one whereby to
+understand what the Indians said.
+
+In seven days the Governor arrived at the province of Chalaque,[257]
+the country poorest off for maize of any that was seen in Florida,
+where the inhabitants subsisted on the roots of plants that they
+dig in the wilds, and on the animals they destroy there with their
+arrows. They are very domestic people, are slight of form, and go
+naked. One lord brought the Governor two deer-skins as a great gift.
+Turkeys were abundant; in one town they presented seven hundred,
+and in others brought him what they had and could procure. He was
+detained in going from this province to that of Xualla[258] five
+days, where they found little grain, but remained two days, because
+of the weariness of the men and the leanness of the horses.
+
+  [257] In two days, according to Ranjel.
+
+  [258] This town is the Choualla of the Inca and the old Cherokee
+  town of Qualla, which was located above the junction of the
+  Tuckaseegee and Oconna-Luftee Rivers, in Swain County, North
+  Carolina. From Cofitachequi the army took a northerly course,
+  probably following the old Indian and traders' trail to old Fort
+  Prince George, in Jackson County, South Carolina, and from there
+  to Xualla.
+
+From Ocute to Cutifachiqui are one hundred and thirty leagues, of
+which eighty are desert; from Cutifa to Xualla are two hundred and
+fifty of mountainous country; thence to Guaxule, the way is over very
+rough and lofty ridges.
+
+One day while on this journey, the Cacica of Cutifachi, whom the
+Governor brought with him, as has been stated, to the end of taking
+her to Guaxule, the farthest limit of her territories, conducted
+by her slaves, she left the road, with an excuse of going into a
+thicket, where, deceiving them, she so concealed herself that for
+all their search she could not be found. She took with her a cane
+box, like a trunk, called petaca, full of unbored pearls, of which
+those who had the most knowledge of their value said they were very
+precious. They were carried for her by one of the women; and the
+Governor, not to give offence, permitted it so, thinking that in
+Guaxulle he would beg them of her when he should give her leave to
+depart; but she took them with her, going to Xualla, with three
+slaves who had fled from the camp. A horseman, named Alimamos, who
+remained behind, sick of a fever, wandering out of the way, got lost;
+and he labored with the slaves to make them leave their evil design.
+Two of them did so, and came on with him to the camp. They overtook
+the Governor, after a journey of fifty leagues, in a province called
+Chiaha; and he reported that the Cacica remained in Xualla, with a
+slave of André de Vasconcelos, who would not come with him, and that
+it was very sure they lived together as man and wife, and were to go
+together to Cutifachiqui.
+
+At the end of five days the Governor arrived at Guaxulle.[259] The
+Christians being seen to go after dogs, for their flesh, which the
+Indians do not eat, they gave them three hundred of those animals.
+Little maize was found there, or anywhere upon that route. The
+Governor sent a native with a message to the cacique of Chiaha,
+begging that he would order some maize to be brought together at
+his town, that he might sojourn there some time. He left Guaxulle,
+and after two days' travel arrived at Canasagua, where twenty men
+came out from the town on the road, each laden with a basket of
+mulberries. This fruit is abundant and good, from Cutifachiqui to
+this place, and thence onward in other provinces, as are the walnut
+and the plum (persimmon); the trees growing about over the country,
+without planting or pruning, of the size and luxuriance they would
+have were they cultivated in orchards, by hoeing and irrigation.
+Leaving Canasagua, he marched five days through a desert.
+
+  [259] The second day after leaving Xualla they camped at the
+  junction of two rivers, according to Ranjel. This was probably at
+  the junction of the Little Tennessee and Oconna-Luftee rivers.
+
+Two leagues before he came to Chiaha, fifteen men met the Governor,
+bearing loads of maize, with word from the cacique that he waited
+for him, having twenty barbacoas full; that, moreover, himself, his
+lands, and his vassals, were subject to his orders. On the fifth day
+of July[260] the Governor entered Chiaha.[261] The cacique received
+him with great pleasure, and, resigning to him his dwellings for his
+residence, thus addressed him:--
+
+     POWERFUL AND EXCELLENT MASTER:
+
+     Fortunate am I that you will make use of my services. Nothing
+     could happen that would give me so great contentment, or which I
+     should value more. From Guaxule you sent to have maize for you
+     in readiness to last two months: you have in this town twenty
+     barbacoas full of the choicest and the best to be found in all
+     this country. If the reception I give is not worthy of so great
+     a prince, consider my youth, which will relieve me of blame, and
+     receive my good-will, which, with true loyalty and pure, shall
+     ever be shown in all things that concern your welfare.
+
+  [260] It should be June 5, according to Ranjel.
+
+  [261] Chiaha was evidently on the island at the junction of
+  the Little Tennessee and Tennessee Rivers, in Loudon County,
+  Tennessee.
+
+The Governor answered him, that his gifts and his kindness pleased
+him greatly, and that he should ever consider him to be his brother.
+
+There was abundance of lard in calabashes, drawn like olive oil,
+which the inhabitants said was the fat of bear. There was likewise
+found much oil of walnuts, which, like the lard, was clear and of
+good taste; and also a honey-comb, which the Christians had never
+seen before, nor saw afterwards, nor honey, nor bees, in all the
+country.
+
+The town was isolated, between two arms of a river, and seated near
+one of them. Above it, at the distance of two crossbow-shot, the
+water divided, and united again a league below. The vale between,
+from side to side, was the width in places of a crossbow-shot,
+and in others of two. The branches were very wide, and both were
+fordable: along their shores were very rich meadow-lands, having many
+maize-fields.
+
+As the Indians remained at home, no houses were taken save those
+of the chief, in which the Governor lodged; the people lived out,
+wherever there happened to be shelter, each man having his tree.
+In this manner the army lay, the men out of order and far apart.
+The Governor passed it over, as the Indians were peaceful, and the
+weather very calm: the people would have suffered greatly had they
+been required to do differently. The horses arrived so worn out, that
+they could not bear their riders from weakness; for they had come
+all the way with only a little maize to live on, travelling, hungry
+and tired, even from beyond the desert of Ocute; so, as the greater
+part of them were unfit to be mounted, even in the necessary case of
+battle, they were turned out at night to graze, about a quarter of a
+league from the camp. The Christians were greatly exposed, so much so
+that if at that time the Indians had set upon them, they would have
+been in bad way to defend themselves.
+
+The duration of the sojourn was thirty days, in which time, the soil
+being covered with verdure, the horses fattened. At the departure,
+in consequence of the importunity of some who wanted more than was
+in reason, the Governor asked thirty women of the chief for slaves,
+who replied that he would confer with his principal men; when one
+night, before giving an answer, all went off from the town with their
+women and children. The next day, he having made up his mind to go
+in search of them, the cacique arrived, and, approaching, thus
+addressed him:--
+
+     POWERFUL LORD:
+
+     Because of my shame, and out of fear of you, discovering that
+     my subjects, contrary to my wishes, had chosen to absent
+     themselves, I left without your permission; but, finding the
+     error of my way, I have returned like a true vassal, to put
+     myself in your power, that you may do with my person as shall
+     seem best to you. My people will not obey me, nor do any thing
+     that an uncle of mine does not command: he governs this country,
+     in my place, until I shall be of mature age. If you would pursue
+     and punish them for disobedience, I will be your guide, since my
+     fate at present forbids me doing more.
+
+The Governor then, with thirty mounted men and as many footmen, went
+in search of the people. Passing by the towns of some of the chiefs
+who had gone off, he cut down and destroyed the great maize-fields;
+and going along up the stream where the natives were, on an islet, to
+which the cavalry could not go, he sent word to them, by an Indian,
+that they should put away all their fears, and, returning to their
+abodes, give him tamemes, as had been done all the way along, since
+he did not wish to have women, finding how very dear they were to
+them. The Indians judged it well to come and make their excuses to
+him, so they all went back to the town.
+
+A cacique of Acoste, who came to see the Governor, after tendering
+his services, and they had exchanged compliments and proffers of
+friendship, was asked if he had any information of a rich land; he
+answered yes: that towards the north there was a province called
+Chisca, and that a forge was there for copper, or other metal of
+that color, though brighter, having a much finer hue, and was to
+appearances much better, but was not so much used, for being softer;
+which was the statement that had been given in Cutifachiqui, where
+we had seen some chopping-knives that were said to have a mixture
+of gold. As the country on the way was thinly peopled, and it was
+said there were mountains over which the beasts could not go, the
+Governor would not march directly thither, but judged that, keeping
+in an inhabited territory, the men and animals would be in better
+condition, while he would be more exactly informed of what there was,
+until he should turn to it through the ridges and a region which he
+could more easily travel. He sent two Christians to the country of
+Chisca, by Indians who spoke the language, that they might view it,
+and were told that he would await their return at Chiaha for what
+they should have to say.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 16
+
+     _How the Governor left Chiaha, and, having run a hazard of
+     falling by the hands of the Indians, at Acoste, escaped by his
+     address: what occurred to him on the route, and how he came to
+     Coça._
+
+
+When the Governor had determined to move from Chiaha towards
+Coste,[262] he sent for the cacique to come before him, and with
+kind words took his leave, receiving some slaves as a gift, which
+pleased him. In seven days the journey was concluded. On the
+second day of July, the camp being pitched among the trees, two
+crossbow-shot distant from the town, he went with eight men of his
+guard toward where the cacique was, who received him evidently with
+great friendship. While they were conversing, some infantry went
+into the town after maize, and, not satisfied with what they got,
+they rummaged and searched the houses, taking what they would; at
+which conduct the owners began to rise and arm; some of them, with
+clubs in their hands, going at five or six men who had given offence,
+beat them to their satisfaction. The Governor, discovering that they
+were all bent upon some mischief, and himself among them with but
+few Christians about him, turned to escape from the difficulty by a
+stratagem much against his nature, clear and reliable as it was, and
+the more unwillingly as it grieved him that an Indian should presume,
+either with or without cause, to offer any indignity to a Christian:
+he seized a stave and took part with the assailants against his own
+people, which while it gave confidence, directly he sent a message
+secretly to the camp, that armed men should approach where he was;
+then taking the chief by the hand, speaking to him with kind words,
+drew him with some principal men away from the town, out into an open
+road in sight of the encampment, where cautiously the Christians
+issued and by degrees surrounded them. In this manner they were
+conducted within the tents; and when near his marquee the Governor
+ordered them to be put under guard. He told them that they could not
+go thence without giving him a guide and Indians for carrying loads,
+nor until the sick men had arrived whom he had ordered to come down
+by the river in canoes from Chiaha, and so likewise those he had
+sent to the province of Chisca. He feared that both the one and the
+other had been killed by the Indians. In three days they that went
+to Chisca got back, and related that they had been taken through a
+country so scant of maize, and with such high mountains, that it was
+impossible the army should march in that direction; and finding the
+distance was becoming long, and that they should be back late, upon
+consultation they agreed to return, coming from a poor little town
+where there was nothing of value, bringing a cow-hide as delicate as
+a calf-skin the people had given them, the hair being like the soft
+wool on the cross of the merino with the common sheep.
+
+  [262] This place was located on one of the islands in the
+  Tennessee River, just above Chattanooga.
+
+The cacique having furnished the guide and tamemes, by permission of
+the Governor he went his way. The Christians left Coste the ninth day
+of July, and slept that night at Tali.[263] The cacique had come from
+the town to meet the Governor on the road, and made him this speech:--
+
+     EXCELLENT GREAT PRINCE:
+
+     Worthy are you of being served and obeyed by all the princes
+     of the world, for by the face can one judge far of the inner
+     qualities. Who you are I knew, and also of your power, before
+     your coming here. I wish not to draw attention to the lowliness
+     in which I stand before you, to make my poor services acceptable
+     and agreeable, since, where the strength fails, the will should
+     instead be praised and taken. Hence, I dare to ask that you will
+     only consider and attend to what you will command me to do here
+     in your country.
+
+  [263] Tali was located in the bend of the Tennessee River, just
+  below Chattanooga. Here they left the river.
+
+The Governor answered, that his good-will and offer pleased him as
+much as though he had tendered him all the treasures of the earth:
+that he would always be treated by him as a true brother, favored and
+esteemed. The cacique ordered provision to be brought for two days'
+use, the time the Governor should be present; and on his departure,
+gave him the use of two men and four women, who were wanted to carry
+burdens.
+
+They travelled six days, passing by many towns subject to the
+cacique of Coça; and, as they entered those territories, numerous
+messengers came from him on the road every day to the Governor, some
+going, others coming, until they arrived at Coça,[264] on Friday,
+the sixteenth of July. The cacique came out to receive him at the
+distance of two crossbow-shot from the town, borne in a litter on the
+shoulders of his principal men, seated on a cushion, and covered with
+a mantle of marten-skins, of the size and shape of a woman's shawl:
+on his head he wore a diadem of plumes, and he was surrounded by
+many attendants playing upon flutes and singing. Coming to where the
+Governor was, he made his obeisance, and followed it by these words:--
+
+     POWERFUL LORD, SUPERIOR TO EVERY OTHER OF THE EARTH:
+
+     Although I come but now to meet you, it is a long time since
+     I have received you in my heart. That was done the first day
+     I heard of you, with so great desire to serve, please, and
+     give you contentment, that this, which I express, is nothing
+     in comparison with that which is within me. Of this you may be
+     sure, that to have received the dominion of the world would not
+     have interested me so greatly as the sight of you, nor would
+     I have held it for so great a felicity. Do not look for me to
+     offer you that which is your own--this person, these lands,
+     these vassals. My only desire is to employ myself in commanding
+     these people, that, with all diligence and befitting respect,
+     they conduct you hence to the town in festivity of voices and
+     with flutes, where you will be lodged and waited upon by me and
+     them, where all I possess you will do with as with your own, and
+     in thus doing you will confer favor.
+
+  [264] Coça may not have been the Coosa of the last century, which
+  was located some two miles north of Childersburg, in Talladega
+  County, Alabama.
+
+The Governor gave him thanks, and with mutual satisfaction they
+walked on toward the place conferring, the Indians giving up their
+habitations by order of their cacique, and in which the General and
+his men took lodging. In the barbacoas was a great quantity of maize
+and beans: the country, thickly settled in numerous and large towns,
+with fields between, extending from one to another, was pleasant, and
+had a rich soil with fair river margins. In the woods were many plums
+(persimmons), as well those of Spain as of the country; and wild
+grapes on vines growing up into the trees, near the streams; likewise
+a kind that grew on low vines elsewhere, the berry being large and
+sweet, but, for want of hoeing and dressing, had large stones.
+
+It was the practice to keep watch over the caciques that none
+should absent themselves, they being taken along by the Governor
+until coming out of their territories; for by thus having them the
+inhabitants would await their arrival in the towns, give a guide, and
+men to carry the loads, who before leaving their country would have
+liberty to return to their homes, as sometimes would the tamemes,
+so soon as they came to the domain of any chief where others could
+be got. The people of Coça, seeing their lord was detained, took it
+amiss, and, going off, hid themselves in the scrub, as well those
+of the town of the cacique as those of the towns of the principal
+men his vassals. The Governor despatched four captains in as many
+directions to search for them: many men and women were taken who were
+put in chains. Seeing how much harm they received, and how little
+they gained by going off, they came in, declaring that they desired
+to serve in all that was possible. Of the prisoners, some of the
+chiefs, whom the cacique interceded for, were let go; of the rest,
+each one took away with him as slaves those he had in chains, none
+returning to their country save some whose fortune it was to escape,
+laboring diligently to file off their irons at night; or, while on
+the march, could slip out of the way, observing the carelessness of
+those who had them in charge, sometimes taking off with them in their
+chains the burdens and the clothing with which they were laden.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 17
+
+     _Of how the Governor went from Coça to Tascaluça._
+
+
+The Governor rested in Coça twenty-five days. On Friday, the
+twentieth of August, he set out in quest of a province called
+Tascaluça, taking with him the cacique of Coça. The first day he
+went through Tallimuchase, a great town without inhabitants, halting
+to sleep half a league beyond, near a river-bank. The following day
+he came to Ytaua, a town subject to Coça. He was detained six days,
+because of a river near by that was then swollen: so soon as it could
+be crossed he took up his march, and went towards Ullibahali. Ten
+or twelve chiefs came to him on the road, from the cacique of that
+province, tendering his service, bearing bows and arrows and wearing
+bunches of feathers.
+
+The Governor having arrived at the town with a dozen cavalry and
+several of his guard, he left them at the distance of a crossbow-shot
+and entered the town. He found all the Indians with their weapons,
+and, according to their ways, it appeared to him in readiness for
+action: he understood afterwards that they had determined to wrest
+the cacique of Coça from his power, should that chief have called on
+them. The place was enclosed, and near by ran a small stream. The
+fence, which was like that seen afterwards to other towns, was of
+large timber sunk deep and firmly into the earth, having many long
+poles the size of the arm, placed crosswise to nearly the height of
+a lance, with embrasures, and coated with mud inside and out, having
+loop-holes for archery.[265] The Governor ordered all his men to
+enter the town. The cacique, who at the moment was at a town on the
+opposite shore, was sent for, and he came at once. After some words
+between him and the Governor, proffering mutual service, he gave the
+tamemes that were requisite and thirty women as slaves. Mançano, a
+native of Salamanca, of noble ancestry, having strayed off in search
+of the grapes, which are good here, and plenty, was lost.
+
+  [265] Ranjel applies a similar description to an old town on the
+  road, three days' march from Toasi or Tuasi.
+
+The Christians left, and that day they arrived to sleep at a town
+subject to the lord of Ullibahali, and the next day they came to
+pass the night at the town of Toasi, where the inhabitants gave
+the Governor thirty women and the tamemes that were wanted. The
+amount of travel usually performed was five or six leagues a day,
+passing through settled country; and when through desert, all the
+haste possible was made, to avoid the want of maize. From Toasi,
+passing through some towns subject to the lord of the province of
+Tallise,[266] he journeyed five days, and arrived at the town the
+eighteenth day of September.
+
+  [266] This is probably not the modern town of that name,
+  which was located above the elbow of the Tallapoosa River, in
+  Tallapoosa County.
+
+Tallise was large, situated by the side of a great river, other towns
+and many fields of maize being on the opposite shore, the country on
+both sides having the greatest abundance of grain. The inhabitants
+had gone off. The Governor sent to call the cacique, who, having
+arrived, after an interchange of kind words and good promises, lent
+him forty men. A chief came to the Governor in behalf of the cacique
+of Tastaluça,[267] and made the following address:
+
+     VERY POWERFUL, VIRTUOUS, AND ESTEEMED LORD:
+
+     The grand cacique of Tascaluça, my master, sends me to salute
+     you. He bids me say, that he is told how all, not without
+     reason, are led captive by your perfections and power; that
+     wheresoever lies your path you receive gifts and obedience,
+     which he knows are all your due; and that he longs to see you
+     as much as he could desire for the continuance of life. Thus,
+     he sends me to offer you his person, his lands, his subjects;
+     to say, that wheresoever it shall please you to go through his
+     territories, you will find service and obedience, friendship
+     and peace. In requital of this wish to serve you, he asks that
+     you so far favor him as to say when you will come; for that the
+     sooner you do so, the greater will be the obligation, and to him
+     the earlier pleasure.
+
+  [267] Tascaluça is correct Creek (meaning Black Warrior),
+  and Tastaluça, there can be little doubt, is a misspelling;
+  nevertheless we think it better to present all the native names
+  in the spellings of the Portuguese original.
+
+The Governor received and parted with the messenger graciously,
+giving him beads (which by the Indians are not much esteemed) and
+other articles, that he should take them to his lord. He dismissed
+the cacique of Coça, that he might return to his country: he of
+Tallise gave him the tamemes that were needed; and, having sojourned
+twenty days, the Governor set out for Tastaluça. He slept the night
+at a large town called Casiste, and the next day, passing through
+another, arrived at a village in the province of Tastaluça; and the
+following night he rested in a wood, two leagues from the town where
+the cacique resided, and where he was then present. He sent the
+master of the camp, Luis de Moscoso, with fifteen cavalry, to inform
+him of his approach.
+
+The cacique was at home, in a piazza. Before his dwelling, on a
+high place, was spread a mat for him, upon which two cushions were
+placed, one above another, to which he went and sat down, his men
+placing themselves around, some way removed, so that an open circle
+was formed about him, the Indians of the highest rank being nearest
+to his person. One of them shaded him from the sun with a circular
+umbrella, spread wide, the size of a target, with a small stem, and
+having deer-skin extended over cross-sticks, quartered with red
+and white, which at a distance made it look of taffeta, the colors
+were so very perfect. It formed the standard of the chief, which he
+carried into battle. His appearance was full of dignity: he was tall
+of person, muscular, lean, and symmetrical. He was the suzerain of
+many territories, and of a numerous people, being equally feared by
+his vassals and the neighboring nations. The master of the camp,
+after he had spoken to him, advanced with his company, their steeds
+leaping from side to side, and at times towards the chief, when he,
+with great gravity, and seemingly with indifference, now and then
+would raise his eyes, and look on as in contempt.
+
+The Governor approached him, but he made no movement to rise; he took
+him by the hand, and they went together to seat themselves on the
+bench that was in the piazza. The cacique addressed him these words:--
+
+     POWERFUL CHIEF:
+
+     Your lordship is very welcome. With the sight of you I receive
+     as great pleasure and comfort as though you were an own brother
+     whom I dearly loved. It is idle to use many words here, as it is
+     not well to speak at length where a few may suffice. The greater
+     the will the more estimable the deed; and acts are the living
+     witnesses of truth. You shall learn how strong and positive is
+     my will, and how disinterested my inclination to serve you. The
+     gifts you did me the favor to send I esteem in all their value,
+     but most because they were yours. See in what you will command
+     me.
+
+The Governor satisfied the chief with a few brief words of kindness.
+On leaving he determined, for certain reasons, to take him along. The
+second day on the road he came to a town called Piache;[268] a great
+river ran near, and the Governor asked for canoes. The Indians said
+they had none, but that they could have rafts of cane and dried wood,
+whereon they might readily enough go over, which they diligently set
+about making, and soon completed. They managed them; and the water
+being calm, the Governor and his men easily crossed.
+
+  [268] From Ranjel's description of this place it is not
+  improbable that Piachi was located on the north side of the Black
+  Warrior River.
+
+From the port of Espiritu Santo to Palache, a march of about a
+hundred leagues, the course was west; from Apalache to Cutifachiqui,
+which may be four hundred and thirty leagues, it was northeast; from
+thence to Xualla, two hundred and fifty leagues, it was towards the
+north; and thence to Tastaluça, which may be some other two hundred
+and fifty leagues, one hundred and ninety of them were toward the
+west, going to the province of Coça, and the sixty southwardly, in
+going thence to Tastaluça.
+
+After crossing the river of Piache, a Christian having gone to look
+after a woman gotten away from him, he had been either captured
+or killed by the natives, and the Governor pressed the chief to
+tell what had been done; threatening, that should the man not
+appear, he would never release him. The cacique sent an Indian
+thence to Mauilla, the town of a chief, his vassal, whither they
+were going, stating that he sent to give him notice that he should
+have provisions in readiness and Indians for loads; but which, as
+afterwards appeared, was a message for him to get together there all
+the warriors in his country.
+
+The Governor marched three days, the last one of them continually
+through an inhabited region, arriving on Monday, the eighteenth day
+of October, at Mauilla.[269] He rode forward in the vanguard, with
+fifteen cavalry and thirty infantry, when a Christian he had sent
+with a message to the cacique, three or four days before, with orders
+not to be gone long, and to discover the temper of the Indians, came
+out from the town and reported that they appeared to him to be making
+preparation; for that while he was present many weapons were brought,
+and many people came into the town, and work had gone on rapidly to
+strengthen the palisade. Luis de Moscoso said that, since the Indians
+were so evil disposed, it would be better to stop in the woods; to
+which the Governor answered, that he was impatient of sleeping out,
+and that he would lodge in the town.
+
+  [269] Mauilla or Mabila may have been located on the prairie
+  north of the Black Warrior and east of the Tombigbee River, in
+  Greene County, Alabama.
+
+Arriving near, the chief came out to receive him, with many Indians
+singing and playing on flutes, and after tendering his services,
+gave him three cloaks of marten-skins. The Governor entered the town
+with the caciques, seven or eight men of his guard, and three or
+four cavalry,[270] who had dismounted to accompany them; and they
+seated themselves in a piazza. The cacique of Tastaluça asked the
+Governor to allow him to remain there, and not to weary him any more
+with walking; but, finding that was not to be permitted, he changed
+his plan, and, under pretext of speaking with some of the chiefs, he
+got up from where he sate, by the side of the Governor, and entered
+a house where were many Indians with their bows and arrows. The
+Governor, finding that he did not return, called to him; to which the
+cacique answered that he would not come out, nor would he leave that
+town; that if the Governor wished to go in peace, he should quit at
+once, and not persist in carrying him away by force from his country
+and its dependencies.
+
+  [270] "Only forty horsemen," according to Ranjel.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 18
+
+     _How the Indians rose upon the Governor, and what followed upon
+     that rising._
+
+
+The Governor, in view of the determination and furious answer of the
+cacique, thought to soothe him with soft words; to which he made no
+answer, but, with great haughtiness and contempt, withdrew to where
+Soto could not see nor speak to him. The Governor, that he might send
+word to the cacique for him to remain in the country at his will, and
+to be pleased to give him a guide, and persons to carry burdens, that
+he might see if he could pacify him with gentle words, called to a
+chief who was passing by. The Indian replied, loftily, that he would
+not listen to him. Baltasar de Gallegos, who was near, seized him by
+the cloak of marten-skins that he had on, drew it off over his head,
+and left it in his hands; whereupon, the Indians all beginning to
+rise, he gave him a stroke with a cutlass, that laid open his back,
+when they, with loud yells, came out of the houses, discharging their
+bows.
+
+The Governor, discovering that if he remained there they could not
+escape, and if he should order his men, who were outside of the town,
+to come in, the horses might be killed by the Indians from the houses
+and great injury done, he ran out; but before he could get away he
+fell two or three times, and was helped to rise by those with him.
+He and they were all badly wounded: within the town five Christians
+were instantly killed. Coming forth, he called out to all his men to
+get farther off, because there was much harm doing from the palisade.
+The natives discovering that the Christians were retiring, and some,
+if not the greater number, at more than a walk, the Indians followed
+with great boldness, shooting at them, or striking down such as they
+could overtake. Those in chains having set down their burdens near
+the fence while the Christians were retiring, the people of Mauilla
+lifted the loads on to their backs, and, bringing them into the
+town, took off their irons, putting bows and arms in their hands,
+with which to fight. Thus did the foe come into possession of all
+the clothing, pearls, and whatsoever else the Christians had beside,
+which was what their Indians carried. Since the natives had been at
+peace as far as to that place, some of us, putting our arms in the
+luggage, had gone without any; and two, who were in the town, had
+their swords and halberds taken from them, and put to use.
+
+The Governor, presently as he found himself in the field, called for
+a horse, and, with some followers, returned and lanced two or three
+of the Indians; the rest, going back into the town, shot arrows from
+the palisade. Those who would venture on their nimbleness came out a
+stone's throw from behind it, to fight, retiring from time to time,
+when they were set upon.
+
+At the time of the affray there was a friar, a clergyman, a servant
+of the Governor, and a female slave in the town, who, having no time
+in which to get away, took to a house, and there remained until after
+the Indians became masters of the place. They closed the entrance
+with a lattice door; and there being a sword among them, which the
+servant had, he put himself behind the door, striking at the Indians
+that would have come in; while, on the other side, stood the friar
+and the priest, each with a club in hand, to strike down the first
+that should enter. The Indians, finding that they could not get in
+by the door, began to unroof the house: at this moment the cavalry
+were all arrived at Mauilla, with the infantry that had been on the
+march, when a difference of opinion arose as to whether the Indians
+should be attacked, in order to enter the town; for the result was
+held doubtful, but finally it was concluded to make the assault.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 19
+
+     _How the Governor set his men in order of battle and entered the
+     town of Mauilla._
+
+
+So soon as the advance and the rear of the force were come up, the
+Governor commanded that all the best armed should dismount, of which
+he made four squadrons of footmen. The Indians, observing how he
+was going on arranging his men, urged the cacique to leave, telling
+him, as was afterwards made known by some women who were taken in
+the town, that as he was but one man, and could fight but as one
+only, there being many chiefs present very skilful and experienced
+in matters of war, any one of whom was able to command the rest,
+and as things in war were so subject to fortune, that it was never
+certain which side would overcome the other, they wished him to put
+his person in safety; for if they should conclude their lives there,
+on which they had resolved rather than surrender, he would remain to
+govern the land: but for all that they said, he did not wish to go,
+until, from being continually urged, with fifteen or twenty of his
+own people he went out of the town, taking with him a scarlet cloak
+and other articles of the Christians' clothing, being whatever he
+could carry and that seemed best to him.
+
+The Governor, informed that the Indians were leaving the town,
+commanded the cavalry to surround it; and into each squadron of foot
+he put a soldier, with a brand, to set fire to the houses, that the
+Indians might have no shelter. His men being placed in full concert,
+he ordered an arquebuse to be shot off: at the signal the four
+squadrons, at their proper points, commenced a furious onset, and,
+both sides severely suffering, the Christians entered the town. The
+friar, the priest, and the rest who were with them in the house,
+were all saved, though at the cost of the lives of two brave and
+very able men who went thither to their rescue. The Indians fought
+with so great spirit that they many times drove our people back
+out of the town. The struggle lasted so long that many Christians,
+weary and very thirsty, went to drink at a pond near by, tinged with
+the blood of the killed, and returned to the combat. The Governor,
+witnessing this, with those who followed him in the returning
+charge of the footmen, entered the town on horseback, which gave
+opportunity to fire the dwellings; then breaking in upon the Indians
+and beating them down, they fled out of the place, the cavalry and
+infantry driving them back through the gates, where, losing the hope
+of escape, they fought valiantly; and the Christians getting among
+them with cutlasses, they found themselves met on all sides by their
+strokes, when many, dashing headlong into the flaming houses, were
+smothered, and, heaped one upon another, burned to death.
+
+They who perished there were in all two thousand five hundred, a few
+more or less: of the Christians there fell eighteen, among whom was
+Don Carlos, brother-in-law of the Governor; one Juan de Gamez, a
+nephew; Men. Rodriguez, a Portuguese; and Juan Vazquez, of Villanueva
+de Barcarota, men of condition and courage; the rest were infantry.
+Of the living, one hundred and fifty Christians had received seven
+hundred wounds from the arrow; and God was pleased that they should
+be healed in little time of very dangerous injuries. Twelve horses
+died, and seventy were hurt. The clothing the Christians carried with
+them, the ornaments for saying mass, and the pearls, were all burned
+there; they having set the fire themselves, because they considered
+the loss less than the injury they might receive of the Indians from
+within the houses, where they had brought the things together.
+
+The Governor learning in Mauilla that Francisco Maldonado was waiting
+for him in the port of Ochuse, six days' travel distant, he caused
+Juan Ortiz to keep the news secret, that he might not be interrupted
+in his purpose; because the pearls he wished to send to Cuba for
+show, that their fame might raise the desire of coming to Florida,
+had been lost, and he feared that, hearing of him without seeing
+either gold or silver, or other thing of value from that land, it
+would come to have such reputation that no one would be found to go
+there when men should be wanted: so he determined to send no news of
+himself until he should have discovered a rich country.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 20
+
+     _How the Governor set out from Mauilla to go to Chicaça, and
+     what befell him._
+
+
+From the time the Governor arrived in Florida until he went from
+Mauilla, there died one hundred and two Christians, some of sickness,
+others by the hand of the Indians. Because of the wounded, he stopped
+in that place twenty-eight days, all the time remaining out in the
+fields. The country was a rich soil, and well inhabited: some towns
+were very large, and were picketed about. The people were numerous
+everywhere, the dwellings standing a crossbow-shot or two apart.
+
+On Sunday, the eighteenth of November,[271] the sick being found
+to be getting on well, the Governor left Mauilla, taking with him
+a supply of maize for two days. He marched five days through a
+wilderness, arriving in a province called Pafallaya, at the town
+Taliepataua; and thence he went to another, named Cabusto,[272] near
+which was a large river, whence the Indians on the farther bank
+shouted to the Christians that they would kill them should they come
+over there. He ordered the building of a piragua within the town,
+that the natives might have no knowledge of it; which being finished
+in four days, and ready, he directed it to be taken on sleds half
+a league up stream, and in the morning thirty men entered it, well
+armed. The Indians discovering what was going on, they who were
+nearest went to oppose the landing, and did the best they could; but
+the Christians drawing near, and the piragua being about to reach the
+shore, they fled into some cane-brakes. The men on horses went up the
+river to secure a landing-place, to which the Governor passed over,
+with the others that remained. Some of the towns were well stored
+with maize and beans.
+
+  [271] This should be the fourteenth, according to Ranjel.
+
+  [272] According to Ranjel they crossed a large river at a
+  town called Moçulixa which was located one-half league from
+  Taliepataua, and recrossed the river at Cabusto. Apparently
+  Cabusto was above the Sipsey River and west of the Tombigbee
+  River, while Moçulixa was below the former and east of the latter
+  stream.
+
+Thence towards Chicaça the Governor marched five days through a
+desert, and arrived at a river,[273] on the farther side of which
+were Indians, who wished to arrest his passage. In two days another
+piragua was made, and when ready he sent an Indian in it to the
+cacique, to say, that if he wished his friendship he should quietly
+wait for him; but they killed the messenger before his eyes, and
+with loud yells departed. He crossed the river the seventeenth of
+December, and arrived the same day at Chicaça, a small town of twenty
+houses.[274] There the people underwent severe cold, for it was
+already winter, and snow fell: the greater number were then lying in
+the fields, it being before they had time to put up habitations. The
+land was thickly inhabited, the people living about over it as they
+do in Mauilla; and as it was fertile, the greater part being under
+cultivation, there was plenty of maize. So much grain was brought
+together as was needed for getting through with the season.
+
+  [273] The east side of the Tombigbee River, and probably in the
+  northern part of Monroe County, Mississippi.
+
+  [274] This town was located about one mile northwest of Redland,
+  in Pontotoc County, Mississippi.
+
+Some Indians were taken, among whom was one the cacique greatly
+esteemed. The Governor sent an Indian to the cacique to say, that he
+desired to see him and have his friendship. He came, and offered him
+the services of his person, territories, and subjects: he said that
+he would cause two chiefs to visit him in peace. In a few days he
+returned with them, they bringing their Indians. They presented the
+Governor one hundred and fifty rabbits, with clothing of the country,
+such as shawls and skins. The name of the one was Alimamu, of the
+other Nicalasa.
+
+The cacique of Chicaça came to visit him many times: on some
+occasions he was sent for, and a horse taken, on which to bring and
+carry him back. He made complaint that a vassal of his had risen
+against him, withholding tribute; and he asked for assistance,
+desiring to seek him in his territory, and give him the chastisement
+he deserved. The whole was found to be feigned, to the end that,
+while the Governor should be absent with him, and the force divided,
+they would attack the parts separately--some the one under him,
+others the other, that remained in Chicaça. He went to the town where
+he lived, and came back with two hundred Indians, bearing bows and
+arrows.
+
+The Governor, taking thirty cavalry and eighty infantry, marched to
+Saquechuma,[275] the province of the chief whom the cacique said
+had rebelled. The town was untenanted, and the Indians, for greater
+dissimulation, set fire to it; but the people with the Governor being
+very careful and vigilant, as were also those that had been left
+in Chicaça, no enemy dared to fall upon them. The Governor invited
+the caciques and some chiefs to dine with him, giving them pork to
+eat, which they so relished, although not used to it, that every
+night Indians would come up to some houses where the hogs slept,
+a crossbow-shot off from the camp, to kill and carry away what
+they could of them. Three were taken in the act: two the Governor
+commanded to be slain with arrows, and the remaining one, his hands
+having first been cut off, was sent to the cacique, who appeared
+grieved that they had given offence, and glad that they were punished.
+
+  [275] This province was located on the lower Tallahatchie River,
+  and the town burned by the Indians, as mentioned by Ranjel, was
+  probably located in Tallahatchie County.
+
+This chief was half a league from where the Christians were, in an
+open country, whither wandered off four of the cavalry: Francisco
+Osorio, Reynoso, a servant of the Marquis of Astorga, and two
+servants of the Governor,--the one Ribera, his page, the other
+Fuentes, his chamberlain. They took some skins and shawls from
+the Indians, who made great outcry in consequence, and abandoned
+their houses. When the Governor heard of it, he ordered them to
+be apprehended, and condemned Osorio and Fuentes to death, as
+principals, and all of them to lose their goods. The friars, the
+priests, and other principal personages solicited him to let Osorio
+live, and moderate the sentence; but he would do so for no one. When
+about ordering them to be taken to the town-yard to be beheaded,
+some Indians arrived, sent by the chief to complain of them. Juan
+Ortiz, at the entreaty of Baltasar de Gallegos and others, changed
+their words, telling the Governor, as from the cacique, that he had
+understood those Christians had been arrested on his account; that
+they were in no fault, having offended him in nothing, and that if
+he would do him a favor, to let them go free: then Ortiz said to the
+Indians, that the Governor had the persons in custody, and would
+visit them with such punishment as should be an example to the rest.
+The prisoners were ordered to be released.
+
+So soon as March had come, the Governor, having determined to leave
+Chicaça, asked two hundred tamemes of the cacique, who told him that
+he would confer with his chiefs. Tuesday, the eighth, he went where
+the cacique was, to ask for the carriers, and was told that he would
+send them the next day. When the Governor saw the chief, he said to
+Luis de Moscoso that the Indians did not appear right to him; that
+a very careful watch should be kept that night, to which the master
+of the camp paid little attention. At four o'clock in the morning
+the Indians fell upon them in four squadrons, from as many quarters,
+and directly as they were discovered, they beat a drum. With loud
+shouting, they came in such haste, that they entered the camp at the
+same moment with some scouts that had been out; of which, by the time
+those in the town were aware, half the houses were in flames. That
+night it had been the turn of three horsemen to be of the watch,--two
+of them men of low degree, the least value of any in the camp, and
+the third a nephew of the Governor, who had been deemed a brave man
+until now, when he showed himself as great a coward as either of the
+others; for they all fled, and the Indians, finding no resistance,
+came up and set fire to the place. They waited outside of the town
+for the Christians, behind the gates, as they should come out of the
+doors, having had no opportunity to put on their arms; and as they
+ran in all directions, bewildered by the noise, blinded by the smoke
+and the brightness of the flame, knowing not whither they were going,
+nor were able to find their arms, or put saddles on their steeds,
+they saw not the Indians who shot arrows at them. Those of the horses
+that could break their halters got away, and many were burned to
+death in the stalls.
+
+The confusion and rout were so great that each man fled by the way
+that first opened to him, there being none to oppose the Indians: but
+God, who chastiseth his own as he pleaseth, and in the greatest wants
+and perils hath them in his hand, shut the eyes of the Indians, so
+that they could not discern what they had done, and believed that the
+beasts running about loose were the cavalry gathering to fall upon
+them. The Governor, with a soldier named Tapia, alone got mounted,
+and, charging upon the Indians, he struck down the first of them he
+met with a blow of the lance, but went over with the saddle, because
+in the haste it had not been tightly drawn, and he fell. The men on
+foot, running to a thicket outside of the town, came together there:
+the Indians imagining, as it was dark, that the horses were cavalry
+coming upon them, as has been stated, they fled, leaving only one
+dead, which was he the Governor smote.
+
+The town lay in cinders. A woman, with her husband, having left a
+house, went back to get some pearls that had remained there; and when
+she would have come out again the fire had reached the door, and she
+could not, neither could her husband assist her, so she was consumed.
+Three Christians came out of the fire in so bad plight, that one of
+them died in three days from that time, and the two others for a long
+while were carried in their pallets, on poles borne on the shoulders
+of Indians, for otherwise they could not have got along. There died
+in this affair eleven Christians, and fifty horses. One hundred of
+the swine remained, four hundred having been destroyed, from the
+conflagration of Mauilla.
+
+If, by good luck, any one had been able to save a garment until then,
+it was there destroyed. Many remained naked, not having had time to
+catch up their skin dresses. In that place they suffered greatly
+from cold, the only relief being in large fires, and they passed
+the night long in turning, without the power to sleep; for as one
+side of a man would warm, the other would freeze. Some contrived
+mats of dried grass sewed together, one to be placed below, and the
+other above them: many who laughed at this expedient were afterwards
+compelled to do the like. The Christians were left so broken up, that
+what with the want of the saddles and arms which had been destroyed,
+had the Indians returned the second night, they might, with little
+effort, have been overpowered. They removed from that town to the one
+where the cacique was accustomed to live, because it was in the open
+field.[276] In eight days' time they had constructed many saddles
+from the ash, and likewise lances, as good as those made in Biscay.
+
+  [276] Chicacilla of the Inca, which was probably located about
+  three and one-half miles north of Chicaça.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 21
+
+     _How the Indians returned to attack the Christians, and how the
+     Governor went to Alimamu, and they tarried to give him battle in
+     the way._
+
+
+On Wednesday,[277] the fifteenth day of March, in the year 1541,
+eight days having passed since the Governor had been living on a
+plain, half a league from the place where he wintered, after he had
+set up a forge, and tempered the swords which in Chicaça had been
+burned, and already had made many targets, saddles, and lances, on
+Tuesday, at four o'clock in the morning, while it was still dark,
+there came many Indians, formed in three squadrons, each from a
+different direction, to attack the camp, when those who watched
+beat to arms. In all haste he drew up his men in three squadrons
+also, and leaving some for the defence of the camp, he went out to
+meet them. The Indians were overthrown and put to flight. The ground
+was plain, and in a condition advantageous to the Christians. It
+was now daybreak; and but for some disorder, thirty or forty more
+enemies might have been slain. It was caused by a friar raising great
+shouts in the camp, without any reason, crying, "To the camp! To the
+camp!" In consequence the Governor and the rest went thither, and the
+Indians had time to get away in safety.
+
+  [277] This should be Tuesday.
+
+From some prisoners taken, the Governor informed himself of the
+region in advance. On the twenty-fifth day of April he left Chicaça
+and went to sleep at a small town called Alimamu. Very little maize
+was found; and as it became necessary to attempt thence to pass a
+desert, seven days' journey in extent, the next day the Governor
+ordered that three captains, each with cavalry and foot, should take
+a different direction, to get provision for the way. Juan de Añasco,
+the comptroller, went with fifteen horse and forty foot on the course
+the Governor would have to march, and found a staked fort,[278] where
+the Indians were awaiting them. Many were armed, walking upon it,
+with their bodies, legs, and arms painted and ochred, red, black,
+white, yellow, and vermilion in stripes, so that they appeared
+to have on stockings and doublet. Some wore feathers, and others
+horns on the head, the face blackened, and the eyes encircled with
+vermilion, to heighten their fierce aspect. So soon as they saw the
+Christians draw nigh they beat drums, and, with loud yells, in great
+fury came forth to meet them. As to Juan de Añasco and others it
+appeared well to avoid them and to inform the Governor, they retired
+over an even ground in sight, the distance of a crossbow-shot from
+the enclosure, the footmen, the crossbowmen, and targeteers putting
+themselves before those on horseback, that the beasts might not
+be wounded by the Indians, who came forth by sevens and eights to
+discharge their bows at them and retire. In sight of the Christians
+they made a fire, and, taking an Indian by the head and feet,
+pretended to give him many blows on the head and cast him into the
+flames, signifying in this way what they would do with the Christians.
+
+  [278] This fort and ford were on the Tallahatchie River, and
+  probably at or near New Albany, in Union County, Mississippi.
+  From here the army turned to the westward.
+
+A message being sent with three of the cavalry to the Governor,
+informing him of this, he came directly. It was his opinion that they
+should be driven from the place. He said that if this was not done
+they would be emboldened to make an attack at some other time, when
+they might do him more harm: those on horseback were commanded to
+dismount, and, being set in four squadrons, at the signal charged the
+Indians. They resisted until the Christians came up to the stakes;
+then, seeing that they could not defend themselves, they fled through
+that part near which passed a stream, sending back some arrows from
+the other bank; and because, at the moment, no place was found where
+the horses might ford, they had time to make their escape. Three
+Indians were killed and many Christians wounded, of whom, after a
+few days, fifteen died on the march. Every one thought the Governor
+committed a great fault in not sending to examine the state of the
+ground on the opposite shore, and discover the crossing-place before
+making the attack; because, with the hope the Indians had of escaping
+unseen in that direction, they fought until they were broken; and it
+was the cause of their holding out so long to assail the Christians,
+as they could, with safety to themselves.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 22
+
+     _How the Governor went from Quizquiz, and thence to the River
+     Grande._
+
+
+Three days having gone by since some maize had been sought after,
+and but little found in comparison with the great want there was of
+it, the Governor became obliged to move at once, notwithstanding the
+wounded had need of repose, to where there should be abundance. He
+accordingly set out for Quizquiz, and marched seven days through
+a wilderness, having many pondy places, with thick forests, all
+fordable, however, on horseback, except some basins or lakes that
+were swum. He arrived at a town of Quizquiz without being descried,
+and seized all the people before they could come out of their houses.
+Among them was the mother of the cacique; and the Governor sent word
+to him, by one of the captives, to come and receive her, with the
+rest he had taken. The answer he returned was, that if his lordship
+would order them to be loosed and sent, he would come to visit and do
+him service.
+
+The Governor, since his men arrived weary, and likewise weak, for
+want of maize, and the horses were also lean, determined to yield
+to the requirement and try to have peace; so the mother and the
+rest were ordered to be set free, and with words of kindness were
+dismissed. The next day, while he was hoping to see the chief, many
+Indians came, with bows and arrows, to set upon the Christians, when
+he commanded that all the armed horsemen should be mounted and in
+readiness. Finding them prepared, the Indians stopped at the distance
+of a crossbow-shot from where the Governor was, near a river-bank,
+where, after remaining quietly half an hour, six chiefs arrived at
+the camp, stating that they had come to find out what people it might
+be; for that they had knowledge from their ancestors that they were
+to be subdued by a white race; they consequently desired to return to
+the cacique, to tell him that he should come presently to obey and
+serve the Governor. After presenting six or seven skins and shawls
+brought with them, they took their leave, and returned with the
+others who were waiting for them by the shore. The cacique came not,
+nor sent another message.
+
+There was little maize in the place, and the Governor moved to
+another town, half a league from the great river,[279] where it was
+found in sufficiency. He went to look at the river, and saw that near
+it there was much timber of which piraguas might be made, and a good
+situation in which the camp might be placed. He directly moved,
+built houses, and settled on a plain a crossbow-shot from the water,
+bringing together there all the maize of the towns behind, that at
+once they might go to work and cut down trees for sawing out planks
+to build barges. The Indians soon came from up the stream, jumped on
+shore, and told the Governor that they were the vassals of a great
+lord, named Aquixo, who was the suzerain of many towns and people on
+the other shore; and they made known from him, that he would come
+the day after, with all his people, to hear what his lordship would
+command him.
+
+  [279] The Mississippi.
+
+The next day the cacique arrived, with two hundred canoes filled with
+men, having weapons. They were painted with ochre, wearing great
+bunches of white and other plumes of many colors, having feathered
+shields in their hands, with which they sheltered the oarsmen on
+either side, the warriors standing erect from bow to stern, holding
+bows and arrows. The barge in which the cacique came had an awning
+at the poop, under which he sate; and the like had the barges of
+the other chiefs; and there, from under the canopy, where the chief
+man was, the course was directed and orders issued to the rest. All
+came down together, and arrived within a stone's cast of the ravine,
+whence the cacique said to the Governor, who was walking along the
+river-bank, with others who bore him company, that he had come to
+visit, serve, and obey him; for he had heard that he was the greatest
+of lords, the most powerful on all the earth, and that he must see
+what he would have him do. The Governor expressed his pleasure, and
+besought him to land, that they might the better confer; but the
+chief gave no reply, ordering three barges to draw near, wherein was
+great quantity of fish, and loaves like bricks, made of the pulp of
+plums (persimmons), which Soto receiving, gave him thanks and again
+entreated him to land.
+
+Making the gift had been a pretext, to discover if any harm might
+be done; but, finding the Governor and his people on their guard,
+the cacique began to draw off from the shore, when the crossbowmen
+who were in readiness, with loud cries shot at the Indians, and
+struck down five or six of them. They retired with great order,
+not one leaving the oar, even though the one next to him might have
+fallen, and covering themselves, they withdrew. Afterwards they came
+many times and landed; when approached, they would go back to their
+barges. These were fine-looking men, very large and well formed; and
+what with the awnings, the plumes, and the shields, the pennons, and
+the number of people in the fleet, it appeared like a famous armada
+of galleys.
+
+During the thirty days that were passed there, four piraguas were
+built, into three of which, one morning, three hours before daybreak,
+the Governor ordered twelve cavalry to enter, four in each, men in
+whom he had confidence that they would gain the land notwithstanding
+the Indians, and secure the passage, or die: he also sent some
+crossbowmen of foot with them, and in the other piragua, oarsmen, to
+take them to the opposite shore. He ordered Juan de Guzman to cross
+with the infantry, of which he had remained captain in the place of
+Francisco Maldonado; and because the current was stiff, they went up
+along the side of the river a quarter of a league, and in passing
+over they were carried down, so as to land opposite the camp; but,
+before arriving there, at twice the distance of a stone's cast, the
+horsemen rode out from the piraguas to an open area of hard and even
+ground, which they all reached without accident.
+
+So soon as they had come to shore the piraguas returned; and when
+the sun was up two hours high, the people had all got over.[280] The
+distance was near half a league: a man standing on the shore could
+not be told, whether he were a man or something else, from the other
+side. The stream was swift, and very deep; the water, always flowing
+turbidly, brought along from above many trees and much timber, driven
+onward by its force. There were many fish of several sorts, the
+greater part differing from those of the fresh waters of Spain, as
+will be told hereafter.
+
+  [280] The crossing was made either at Council Bend or Walnut
+  Bend, in Tunica County, Mississippi, in a straight line some
+  twenty-five to thirty-eight miles below Memphis.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 23
+
+     _How the Governor went from Aquixo to Casqui, and thence to
+     Pacaha; and how this country differs from the other._
+
+
+The Rio Grande being crossed, the Governor marched a league and a
+half, to a large town of Aquixo, which was abandoned before his
+arrival. Over a plain thirty Indians were seen to draw nigh, sent
+by the cacique to discover what the Christians intended to do, but
+who fled directly as they saw them. The cavalry pursued, killed ten,
+and captured fifteen. As the town toward which the Governor marched
+was near the river, he sent a captain, with the force he thought
+sufficient, to take the piraguas up the stream. As they frequently
+wound about through the country, having to go round the bays that
+swell out of the river, the Indians had opportunity to attack those
+in the piraguas, placing them in great peril, being shot at with bows
+from the ravines, while they dared not leave the shore, because of
+the swiftness of the current; so that, as soon as the Governor got
+to the town, he directly sent crossbowmen to them down the stream,
+for their protection. When the piraguas arrived, he ordered them to
+be taken to pieces, and the spikes kept for making others, when they
+should be needed.
+
+The Governor slept at the town one night, and the day following he
+went in quest of a province called Pacaha, which he had been informed
+was nigh Chisca, where the Indians said there was gold. He passed
+through large towns in Aquixo, which the people had left for fear
+of the Christians. From some Indians that were taken, he heard that
+three days' journey thence resided a great cacique, called Casqui.
+He came to a small river, over which a bridge was made, whereby he
+crossed.[281] All that day, until sunset, he marched through water,
+in places coming to the knees; in others, as high as the waist.
+They were greatly rejoiced on reaching the dry land; because it had
+appeared to them that they should travel about, lost, all night in
+the water. At mid-day they came to the first town of Casqui, where
+they found the Indians off their guard, never having heard of them.
+Many men and women were taken, much clothing, blankets, and skins;
+such they likewise took in another town in sight of the first, half a
+league off in the field, whither the horsemen had run.
+
+  [281] This was Fifteen-Mile Bayou, and the crossing-place was
+  probably near the southeast corner of St. Francis County,
+  Arkansas.
+
+This land is higher, drier, and more level than any other along
+the river that had been seen until then. In the fields were many
+walnut-trees, bearing tender-shelled nuts in the shape of acorns,
+many being found stored in the houses. The tree did not differ in any
+thing from that of Spain, nor from the one seen before, except the
+leaf was smaller. There were many mulberry-trees, and trees of plums
+(persimmons), having fruit of vermilion hue, like one of Spain, while
+others were gray, differing, but far better. All the trees, the year
+round, were as green as if they stood in orchards, and the woods were
+open.
+
+The Governor marched two days through the country of Casqui, before
+coming to the town[282] where the cacique was, the greater part of
+the way lying through fields thickly set with great towns, two or
+three of them to be seen from one. He sent word by an Indian to the
+cacique, that he was coming to obtain his friendship and to consider
+him as a brother; to which he received for answer, that he would be
+welcomed; that he would be received with special good-will, and all
+that his lordship required of him should be done; and the chief sent
+him on the road a present of skins, shawls, and fish. After these
+gifts were made, all the towns into which the Governor came were
+found occupied; and the inhabitants awaited him in peace, offering
+him skins, shawls, and fish.
+
+  [282] This place was probably located near the mouth of Tyronza
+  River.
+
+Accompanied by many persons, the cacique came half a league on the
+road from the town where he dwelt to receive the Governor, and,
+drawing nigh to him, thus spoke:
+
+     VERY HIGH, POWERFUL, AND RENOWNED MASTER:
+
+     I greet your coming. So soon as I had notice of you, your power
+     and perfections, although you entered my territory capturing
+     and killing the dwellers upon it, who are my vassals, I
+     determined to conform my wishes to your will, and hold as right
+     all that you might do, believing that it should be so for a good
+     reason, providing against some future event, to you perceptible
+     but from me concealed; since an evil may well be permitted to
+     avoid another greater, that good can arise, which I trust will
+     be so; for from so excellent a prince, no bad motive is to
+     be suspected. My ability is so small to serve you, according
+     to your great merit, that though you should consider even my
+     abundant will and humility in proffering you all manner of
+     services, I must still deserve little in your sight. If this
+     ability can with reason be valued, I pray you receive it, and
+     with it my country and my vassals, of me and them disposing at
+     your pleasure; for though you were lord of the earth, with no
+     more good-will would you be received, served, and obeyed.
+
+The Governor responded appropriately in a few words which satisfied
+the chief. Directly they fell to making each other great proffers,
+using much courtesy, the cacique inviting the Governor to go and take
+lodging in his houses. He excused himself, the better to preserve
+peace, saying that he wished to lie in the field; and, because the
+heat was excessive, he pitched the camp among some trees, quarter of
+a league from the town. The cacique went to his town, and returned
+with many Indians singing, who, when they had come to where the
+Governor was, all prostrated themselves. Among them were two blind
+men. The cacique made an address, of which, as it was long, I will
+give the substance in a few words. He said, that inasmuch as the
+Governor was son of the Sun, he begged him to restore sight to those
+Indians: whereupon the blind men arose, and they very earnestly
+entreated him to do so. Soto answered them, that in the heavens above
+there was One who had the power to make them whole, and do whatever
+they could ask of Him, whose servant he was; that this great Lord
+made the sky and the earth, and man after His image; that He had
+suffered on the tree of the true cross to save the human race, and
+risen from the grave on the third day,--what of man there was of Him
+dying, what of divinity being immortal; and that, having ascended
+into heaven, He was there with open arms to receive all that would
+be converted to Him. He then directed a lofty cross of wood to be
+made and set up in the highest part of the town, declaring to the
+cacique that the Christians worshipped that, in the form and memory
+of the one on which Christ suffered. He placed himself with his
+people before it, on their knees, which the Indians did likewise; and
+he told them that from that time thenceforth they should thus worship
+the Lord, of whom he had spoken to them, that was in the skies,
+asking Him for whatsoever they stood in need of.
+
+The chief being asked what was the distance to Pacaha, he answered
+that it was one day's journey, and said that on the extreme of his
+territory there was a lake, like an estuary, that entered into the
+Rio Grande, to which he would send persons in advance to build a
+bridge, whereby they might pass over it. The night of the day the
+Governor left, he slept at a town of Casqui; and the next day he
+passed in sight of two other towns, and arrived at the lake, which
+was half a crossbow-shot over, of great depth and swiftness of
+current.[283] The Indians had just got the bridge done as he came up.
+It was built of wood, in the manner of timber thrown across from tree
+to tree; on one side there being a rail of poles, higher than the
+rest, as a support for those who should pass. The cacique of Casqui
+having come with his people, the Governor sent word by an Indian
+to the cacique of Pacaha, that though he might be at enmity with
+him of Casqui, and that chief be present, he should receive neither
+injury nor insult, provided that he attended in peace and desired his
+friendship, for as a brother would he treat him. The Indian went as
+he was bid, and returned, stating that the cacique took no notice of
+the message, but that he fled out of the town, from the back part,
+with all his people. Then the Governor entered there, and with the
+cavalry charged in the direction the Indians were running, and at
+another town, a quarter of a league off, many were taken. As fast
+as they were captured, the horsemen delivered them to the Indians
+of Casqui, who, from being their enemies, brought them with great
+heed and pleasure to the town where the Christians were, greatly
+regretting that they had not the liberty to kill them. Many shawls,
+deer-skins, lion and bear-skins, and many cat-skins were found in the
+town. Numbers who had been a long time badly covered, there clothed
+themselves. Of the shawls they made mantles and cassocks; some made
+gowns and lined them with cat-skins, as they also did the cassocks.
+Of the deer-skins were made jerkins, shirts, stockings, and shoes:
+and from the bear-skins they made very good cloaks, such as no water
+could get through. They found shields of raw cowhide out of which
+armor was made for the horses.
+
+  [283] Tyronza River.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 24
+
+     _Of how the cacique of Pacaha came in peace, and he of Casqui
+     having absented himself, returned to excuse his conduct; and how
+     the Governor made friendship between the chiefs._
+
+
+On Wednesday, the nineteenth day of June, the Governor entered
+Pacaha,[284] and took quarters in the town where the cacique was
+accustomed to reside. It was enclosed and very large. In the towers
+and the palisade were many loopholes. There was much dry maize, and
+the new was in great quantity, throughout the fields. At the distance
+of half a league to a league off were large towns, all of them
+surrounded with stockades.
+
+  [284] It was on Wednesday, June 29, that they entered Pacaha.
+  This place was probably located in the vicinity of Osceola,
+  Mississippi County, Arkansas, but not further northward.
+
+Where the Governor stayed was a great lake, near to the enclosure;
+and the water entered a ditch that well-nigh went round the town.
+From the River Grande to the lake was a canal, through which the
+fish came into it, and where the chief kept them for his eating and
+pastime. With nets that were found in the place, as many were taken
+as need required; and however much might be the casting, there was
+never any lack of them. In the many other lakes about were also many
+fish, though the flesh was soft, and none of it so good as that
+which came from the river. The greater number differ from those in
+the fresh water of Spain. There was a fish called bagre, the third
+part of which was head, with gills from end to end, and along the
+sides were great spines, like very sharp awls. Those of this sort
+that lived in the lake were as big as pike; in the river were some
+that weighed from one hundred to one hundred and fifty pounds. Many
+were taken with the hook. There was one in the shape of barbel;
+another like bream, with the head of a hake, having a color between
+red and brown, and was the most esteemed. There was likewise a kind
+called peel-fish, the snout a cubit in length, the upper lip being
+shaped like a shovel. Another fish was like a shad. Except the bagres
+and the peel, they were all of scale. There was one, called pereo,
+the Indians sometimes brought, the size of a hog, and had rows of
+teeth above and below.
+
+The cacique of Casqui many times sent large presents of fish, shawls,
+and skins. Having told the Governor that he would deliver into his
+hands the cacique of Pacaha, he went to Casqui, and ordered many
+canoes to ascend the river, while he should march by land, taking
+many of his warriors. The Governor, with forty cavalry and sixty
+infantry, was conducted by him up stream; and the Indians who were
+in the canoes discovered the cacique of Pacaha on an islet between
+two arms of the river. Five Christians entered a canoe, of whom was
+Don Antonio Osorio, to go in advance and see what number of people
+the cacique had with him. There were five or six thousand souls, of
+whom, directly as they saw the people, taking the Indians who went in
+the canoes to be Christians also, the cacique and as many as could
+get into three canoes that were there, fled to the opposite bank; the
+greater part of the rest, in terror and confusion, plunging into the
+river to swim, many, mostly women and infants, got drowned. Then the
+Governor, who was on land, without knowing what was passing with Don
+Antonio and those who accompanied him, ordered the Christians, in
+all haste, to enter the canoes with the Indians of Casqui, and they
+directly joining Don Antonio on the islet, many men and women were
+taken, and much clothing.
+
+Many clothes, which the Indians had in cane hurdles and on rafts to
+carry over, floated down stream, the people of Casqui filling their
+canoes with them; and, in fear that the Christians might take these
+away, their chief went off with them down the river to his territory,
+without taking leave. At this the Governor became indignant, and
+directly returning to Pacaha, two leagues on the road, he overran the
+country of Casqui, capturing twenty or thirty of its men. The horses
+being tired, and there remaining no time that day to go farther, he
+went on to Pacaha, with the intention of marching in three or four
+days upon Casqui, directly letting loose a man of Pacaha, sending
+word by him to its chief, that should he wish his friendship he
+should come to him, and together they would go to carry war upon
+Casqui: and immediately there arrived many people of Pacaha, bringing
+as the chief an Indian, who was exposed by a prisoner, brother of
+the cacique. The Governor told them that their lord must come; that
+he well knew that Indian was not he; for that nothing could be done
+without its being known to him before they so much as thought of it.
+The cacique came the next day, followed by many Indians, with a large
+gift of fish, skins, and shawls. He made a speech, that all were glad
+to hear, and concluded by saying, that although his lordship had
+causelessly inflicted injury on his country and his subjects, he did
+not any the less cease to be his, and was always at his command. The
+Governor ordered his brother to be let go, and some principal men he
+held captives. That day a messenger arrived from Casqui, saying that
+his master would come early on the morrow to excuse the error he had
+committed in going away without his licence; to which the Governor
+bade him say, in return, to the cacique, that if he did not come
+himself in person he would go after him, and inflict the punishment
+he deserved.
+
+The chief of Casqui came the next day, and after presenting many
+shawls, skins, and fish, he gave the Governor a daughter, saying that
+his greatest desire was to unite his blood with that of so great
+a lord as he was, begging that he would take her to wife. He made
+a long and discreet oration, full of praise of Soto; and concluded
+by asking his forgiveness, for the love of that cross he had left,
+for having gone off without his permission; that he had done so
+because of the shame he felt for what his people had done without his
+consent. The Governor said that he had taken a good sponsor; that he
+had himself determined, if the cacique had not come to apologize, to
+go after him and burn his towns, kill him and his people, and lay
+waste his country. To this the chief replied:
+
+     MASTER:
+
+     I and mine belong to you; and my territory is yours, so that you
+     will destroy it, if you will, as your own, and your people you
+     will slay. All that falls from your hand I shall receive as from
+     my lord's, and as merited chastisement. Know, that the service
+     you have done me in leaving that cross has been signal, and more
+     than I have deserved; for, you know, of great droughts the maize
+     in our fields was perishing, and no sooner had I and mine thrown
+     ourselves on our knees before it, asking for water, than the
+     want was supplied.
+
+The Governor made friendship between the chiefs of Casqui and Pacaha,
+and placed them at the table, that they should eat with him. They
+had a difficulty as to who should sit at his right hand, which the
+Governor quieted by telling them that among the Christians the
+one seat was as good as the other; that they should so consider
+it, and while with him no one should understand otherwise, each
+taking the seat he first came to. Thence he sent thirty horsemen
+and fifty footmen to the province of Caluça,[285] to see if in that
+direction they could turn back towards Chisca, where the Indians
+said there was a foundry of gold and copper. They travelled seven
+days through desert, and returned in great extremity, eating green
+plums (persimmons) and maize-stalks, which they had found in a
+poor town of seven or eight houses. The Indians stated that thence
+towards the north, the country, being very cold, was very thinly
+populated; that cattle were in such plenty, no maize-field could be
+protected from them, and the inhabitants lived upon the meat. Seeing
+that the country was so poorly off for maize that there could be no
+support, the Governor asked the Indians in what direction there were
+most inhabitants; and they said that they had knowledge of a large
+province and a country of great abundance, called Quiguate, that lay
+in the southern direction.
+
+  [285] It was from Chicaça that the expedition was sent. This
+  province was probably located in the northeastern part of
+  Mississippi, extending from Baldwyn, Prentiss County, to the
+  Tennessee River, in Tishomingo County.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 25
+
+_How the Governor went from Pacaha to Aquiguate and to Coligoa, and
+came to Cayas._
+
+
+The Governor rested in Pacaha forty days, during which time the two
+caciques made him presents of fish, shawls, and skins, in great
+quantity, each striving to outdo the other in the magnitude of the
+gifts. At the time of his departure, the chief of Pacaha bestowed
+on him two of his sisters, telling him that they were tokens of
+love, for his remembrance, to be his wives. The name of one was
+Macanoche, that of the other Mochila. They were symmetrical, tall,
+and full: Macanoche bore a pleasant expression; in her manners and
+features appeared the lady; the other was robust. The cacique of
+Casqui ordered the bridge to be repaired; and the Governor, returning
+through his territory, lodged in the field near his town. He brought
+there much fish, exchanged two women for as many shirts with two
+of the Christians, and furnished a guide and tamemes. The Governor
+marched to one of his towns, and slept, and the next night came to
+another that was near a river,[286] where he ordered him to bring
+canoes, that he might cross over. There taking his leave, the chief
+went back.
+
+  [286] St. Francis River.
+
+The Governor travelled towards Aquiguate,[287] and on the fourth
+day of August came to the residence of the cacique, who, although
+he had sent him a present, on the road, of many shawls and skins,
+abandoned the place through fear on his arrival. That town was the
+largest seen in Florida: one-half of it was occupied by the Governor
+and his people; and, after a few days, discovering that the Indians
+were dealing in falsehoods, he ordered the other part to be burned,
+that it might not afford them cover should they attack him at night,
+nor be an embarrassment to his cavalry in a movement to repel them.
+An Indian having come, attended by a multitude, declaring himself to
+be the cacique, the Governor delivered him over to be looked after
+by his body-guard. Many of the Indians went off, and returned with
+shawls and skins; but, finding small opportunity for carrying out
+their evil plan, one day the pretended cacique, walking out of the
+house with the Governor, ran away with such swiftness that not one of
+the Christians could overtake him; and plunging into the river, at
+the distance of a crossbow-shot from the town, he made for the other
+shore, where many Indians, giving loud shouts, began to make use
+of their arrows. The Governor directly crossed over to attack them
+with horse and foot; but they dared not await him: following them
+up, he came to a town that was abandoned, before which there was a
+lake[288] the horses could not pass over, and on the other side were
+many females. The footmen having crossed, capturing many of them,
+took much clothing. Returning to the camp early in the night, the
+sentinels seized a spy, who assenting to the request to lead to where
+the cacique was, the Governor directly set out with twenty cavalry
+and fifty infantry in quest of him. After travelling a day and a
+half, they found him in a thick wood; and a soldier, ignorant of who
+he was, having struck him on the head with a cutlass, he called out
+not to kill him, that he was the chief; so he was captured, and with
+him one hundred and forty of his people.
+
+  [287] This place was on the west side of the St. Francis River,
+  in the northern part of Lee County or the southern part of St.
+  Francis County, Arkansas.
+
+  [288] This may have been Lake Michigamia of the French maps,
+  which ceased to exist after the New Madrid earthquakes.
+
+The Governor, returning to Quiguate, directed him to tell his people
+to come and serve the Christians; but, after waiting some days,
+in the hope of their arrival, and finding that they did not come,
+he sent two captains, each on an opposite side of the river, with
+infantry and cavalry, whereby many of both sexes were made prisoners.
+The Indians, seeing the harm that they received for their rebellious
+conduct, waited on the Governor to take his commands, coming and
+going often, bringing with them presents of fish. The cacique and two
+of his wives being at their liberty in the quarters of the Governor,
+which were guarded by his halberdiers, he asked them what part of the
+country was most inhabited; to which they replied, that to the south,
+or down the river, where were large towns, and the caciques governed
+wide territories, with numerous people; and that to the northwest was
+a province, near some mountains, called Coligoa. He, with the others,
+deemed it well to go thither first; saying that the mountains,
+perhaps, would make a difference in the soil, and that silver and
+gold might afterward follow.
+
+The country of Aquiguate, like that of Casqui and Pacaha, was level
+and fertile, having rich river margins, on which the Indians made
+extensive fields. From Tascaluça to the River Grande may be three
+hundred leagues; a region very low, having many lakes: from Pacaha
+to Quiguate there may be one hundred and ten leagues. There he left
+the cacique in his own town; and an Indian guided them through an
+immense pathless thicket of desert for seven days, where they slept
+continually in ponds and shallow puddles.[289] Fish were so plentiful
+in them that they were killed with blows of cudgels; and as the
+Indians travelled in chains, they disturbed the mud at the bottom, by
+which the fish, becoming stupefied, would swim to the surface, when
+as many were taken as were desired.
+
+  [289] They crossed four swamps, according to Ranjel, which were
+  the L'Anguille River, Big Creek, Bayou de Vue, and Cache River.
+
+The inhabitants of Coligoa had never heard of the Christians, and
+when these got so near their town as to be seen, they fled up stream
+along a river that passed near by there; some throwing themselves
+into the water, whence they were taken by their pursuers, who, on
+either bank, captured many of both sexes, and the cacique with the
+rest. Three days from that time came many Indians, by his order, with
+offerings of shawls, deer-skins, and two cowhides: they stated that
+at the distance of five or six leagues towards the north were many
+cattle, where the country, being cold, was thinly inhabited; and
+that, to the best of their knowledge, the province that was better
+provisioned than any other, and more populous, was one to the south,
+called Cayas.
+
+About forty leagues from Quiguate stood Coligoa,[290] at the foot of
+a mountain, in the vale of a river of medium size, like the Caya, a
+stream that passes through Estremadura. The soil was rich, yielding
+maize in such profusion that the old was thrown out of store to
+make room for the new grain. Beans and pumpkins were likewise in
+great plenty: both were larger and better than those of Spain: the
+pumpkins, when roasted, have nearly the taste of chestnuts. The
+cacique continued behind in his own town, having given a guide for
+the way to Cayas.
+
+  [290] Coligoa was in the valley of Little Red River, and before
+  arriving there, they crossed White River below the mouth of
+  Little Red River, in Woodruff County, Arkansas.
+
+We travelled five days, and came to the province of Palisema.[291]
+The house of the cacique was canopied with colored deer-skins,
+having designs drawn on them, and the ground was likewise covered in
+the same manner, as if with carpets. He had left it in that state
+for the use of the Governor, a token of peace, and of a desire for
+friendship, though still he did not dare to await his coming. The
+Governor, finding that he had gone away, sent a captain with horse
+and foot to look after him; and though many persons were seen,
+because of the roughness of the country, only a few men and boys
+were secured. The houses were few and scattered: only a little maize
+was found.
+
+  [291] According to Ranjel, before arriving at this place they
+  passed through Calpista, where there was a flowing salt spring.
+  This spring was on the bank of Little Red River, in Cleburne
+  County.
+
+Directly the Governor set forward and came to Tatalicoya,[292] whence
+he took the cacique, who guided him to Cayas, a distance of four
+days' journey from that town. When he arrived and saw the scattered
+houses, he thought, from the information he had received of the great
+populousness of the country, that the cacique was lying to him--that
+it was not the province; and he menaced him, bidding him tell where
+he was. The chief, as likewise the other Indians taken near by,
+declared that to be in Cayas,[293] the best town in all the province;
+and that although the houses were far apart, the country occupied
+being extensive, it had numerous people and many maize-fields. The
+town was called Tanico.[294] The camp was placed in the best part
+of it, nigh a river. On the day of arrival, the Governor, with some
+mounted men, went a league farther, but found no one, and only some
+skins, which the cacique had put on the road to be taken, a sign of
+peace, by the usage of the country.
+
+  [292] After leaving Tatalicoya they came to a great river,
+  according to Ranjel. This was White River.
+
+  [293] This province was in the region of northwestern Arkansas
+  and the Indian Territory.
+
+  [294] Tanico was located on the east side of Grand or Neosho
+  River, in the Indian Territory.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 26
+
+_How the Governor went to visit the province of Tulla, and what
+happened to him._
+
+
+The Governor tarried a month in the province of Cayas. In this time
+the horses fattened and throve more than they had done at other
+places in a longer time, in consequence of the large quantity of
+maize there, The blade of it, I think, is the best fodder that grows.
+The beasts drank so copiously from the very warm and brackish lake,
+that they came having their bellies swollen with the leaf when they
+were brought back from watering. Till they reached that spot the
+Christians had wanted salt: they now made a quantity and took it
+with them. The Indians carry it into other parts, to exchange for
+skins and shawls.
+
+The salt is made along by a river, which, when the water goes down,
+leaves it upon the sand. As they cannot gather the salt without a
+large mixture of sand, it is thrown together into certain baskets
+they have for the purpose, made large at the mouth and small at the
+bottom. These are set in the air on a ridge-pole; and water being
+thrown on, vessels are placed under them wherein it may fall; then,
+being strained and placed on the fire, it is boiled away, leaving
+salt at the bottom.
+
+The lands on the shores of the river were fields, and maize was in
+plenty. The Indians dared not cross the river to where we were. Some
+appearing, were called to by the soldiers who saw them, and having
+come over were conducted by them before the Governor. On being asked
+for the cacique, they said that he was peaceful but afraid to show
+himself. The Governor directly sent them back to tell him to come,
+and, if he desired his friendship, to bring an interpreter and a
+guide for the travel before them; that if he did not do so he would
+go in pursuit, when it would be the worse for him. The Governor
+waited three days, and finding that the cacique did not come, he went
+in pursuit and brought him there a captive, with one hundred and
+fifty of his people. He asked him if he had knowledge of any great
+cacique, and in what direction the country was most inhabited. The
+Indian stated, that the largest population about there was that of a
+province lying to the southward, thence a day and a half's travel,
+called Tulla; that he could give him a guide, but no interpreter;
+that the tongue of that country was different from his, and that he
+and his ancestors had ever been at war with its chiefs, so that they
+neither conversed together nor understood each other.
+
+Then the Governor, with cavalry and fifty infantry, directly set out
+for Tulla, to see if it were such a land as he might pass through
+with his troops. So soon as it became known that he had reached
+there, the inhabitants were summoned; and as they gathered by fifteen
+and twenty at a time, they would come to attack the Christians.
+Finding that they were sharply handled, and that in running the
+horses would overtake them, they got upon the house-tops, where they
+endeavored to defend themselves with their bows and arrows. When
+beaten off from one roof, they would get up on to another; and while
+the Christians were going after some, others would attack them from
+an opposite direction. The struggle lasted so long that the steeds,
+becoming tired, could not be made to run. One horse was killed and
+others were wounded. Of the Indians fifteen were slain, and forty
+women and boys made prisoners; for to no one who could draw a bow and
+could be reached was his life spared him.
+
+The Governor determined at once to go back, before the inhabitants
+should have time to come together. That afternoon, he set out, and
+travelling into the night, he slept on the road to avoid Tulla, and
+arrived the next day at Cayas. Three days later he marched to Tulla,
+bringing with him the cacique, among whose Indians he was unable to
+find one who spoke the language of that place. He was three days on
+the way, and at his arrival found the town abandoned, the inhabitants
+not venturing to remain for him. But no sooner did they know that
+he was in the town, than, at four o'clock on the morning of the
+first night, they came upon him in two squadrons, from different
+directions, with bows and arrows and with long staves like pikes. So
+soon as they were felt, both cavalry and infantry turned out. Some
+Christians and some horses were injured. Many of the Indians were
+killed.
+
+Of those made captive, the Governor sent six to the cacique, their
+right hands and their noses cut off, with the message, that, if he
+did not come to him to apologize and render obedience, he would go in
+pursuit, and to him, and as many of his as he might find, would he do
+as he had done to those he sent. He allowed him three days in which
+to appear, making himself understood by signs, in the best manner
+possible, for want of an interpreter. At the end of that time an
+Indian, bearing a back-load of cow-skins from the cacique, arrived,
+weeping with great sobs, and coming to where the Governor was, threw
+himself at his feet. Soto raised him up, and the man made a speech,
+but there was none to understand him. The Governor, by signs, told
+him to return and say to the cacique, that he must send him some one
+who could speak with the people of Cayas. Three Indians came the next
+day with loads of cow-skins, and three days afterward came twenty
+others. Among them was one who understood those of Cayas. After a
+long oration from him, of apologies for the cacique and in praise of
+the Governor, he concluded by saying, that he with the others had
+come, in behalf of the chief, to inquire what his lordship would
+command, for that he was ready to serve him.
+
+At hearing these words the Governor and the rest were all rejoiced;
+for in no way could they go on without a guide. He ordered the man to
+be safely kept, and told the Indians who came with him to go back to
+the cacique and say, that he forgave him the past and greatly thanked
+him for the interpreter and the presents; that he should be pleased
+to see him, and to come the next day, that they might talk together.
+He came at the end of three days, and with him eighty Indians. As
+he and his men entered the camp they wept,--the token of obedience
+and the repentance of a past error, according to the usage of that
+country. He brought a present of many cow-skins, which were found
+very useful; the country being cold, they were taken for bed-covers,
+as they were very soft and the wool like that of sheep.[295] Near by,
+to the northward, are many cattle. The Christians did not see them,
+nor go where they were, because it was a country thinly populated,
+having little maize. The cacique of Tulla made an address to the
+Governor, in which he apologized and offered him his country, his
+vassals, and his person. The speech of this cacique--like those of
+the other chiefs, and all the messengers in their behalf who came
+before the Governor--no orator could more elegantly phrase.
+
+  [295] Buffalo skins are meant.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 27
+
+_How the Governor went from Tulla to Autiamque, where he passed the
+winter._
+
+
+The Governor informed himself of the country in every direction. He
+ascertained that toward the west there was a thin population, and to
+the southeast were great towns, principally in a province, abundant
+of maize, called Autiamque, at the distance of about eighty leagues,
+ten days' journey from Tulla. The winter was already come. The cold,
+rain, and snow did not permit the people to travel for two or three
+months in the year, and the Governor feared to remain among that
+sparse population, lest his force could not be subsisted for that
+length of time. Moreover, the Indians said that near Autiamque was
+a great water, which, from their account, appeared to him to be an
+arm of the sea. Hence, he determined to winter in that province, and
+in the following summer to go to the sea-side, where he would build
+two brigantines,--one to send to Cuba, the other to New Spain, that
+the arrival of either might bear tidings of him. Three years had
+elapsed since he had been heard of by Doña Ysabel, or by any person
+in a civilized community. Two hundred and fifty men of his were
+dead, likewise one hundred and fifty horses. He desired to recruit
+from Cuba of man and beast, calculating, out of his property there,
+to refit and again go back to advance, to discover and to conquer
+farther on towards the west, where he had not reached, and whither
+Cabeça de Vaca had wandered.
+
+Having dismissed the caciques of Tulla and Cayas, the Governor took
+up his course, marching five days over very sharp mountains,[296]
+and arrived in a peopled district called Quipana. Not a native could
+be captured, because of the roughness of the country, and the town
+was among ridges. At night an ambuscade was set, in which two men
+were taken, who said that Autiamque was six days' journey distant,
+and that there was another province toward the south, eight days'
+travel off, called Guahate, very abundant in maize and very populous.
+However, as Autiamque was nearer, and most of the Indians spoke of
+it, the Governor continued on his journey thither.[297]
+
+  [296] The Boston Mountains.
+
+  [297] According to Ranjel they entered the plains on the second
+  day after leaving Quipana. Before doing so, they crossed the
+  Arkansas River, probably at the old ford, located some fifteen
+  miles above Fort Smith.
+
+At the end of three days he came to a town called Anoixi. Having sent
+a captain in advance, with thirty horse and fifty foot, they came
+suddenly upon the inhabitants, taking many of both sexes. On the
+second day afterwards, the Governor arrived at another town, called
+Catamaya, and slept in the adjacent fields. Two Indians coming to
+him from the cacique, with the pretext of a message, in order to
+ascertain his business, he told them to say to their master, that
+he wished to speak with him; but they came no more, nor was other
+word returned. The next day the Christians went to the town, which
+was without people, and having taken what maize they needed, that
+night they reached a wood to rest, and the day following arrived at
+Autiamque.[298]
+
+  [298] This town was located within thirty miles east of Fort
+  Smith, and on the south side of the Arkansas River.
+
+They found in store much maize, also beans, walnuts, and dried plums
+(persimmons) in large quantities. Some Indians were taken while
+gathering up their clothing, having already carried away their wives.
+The country was level and very populous. The Governor lodged in the
+best portion of the town, and ordered a fence immediately to be put
+up about the encampment, away from the houses, that the Indians
+without might do no injury with fire. Measuring off the ground by
+pacing, he allotted to each his part to build, according to the
+Indians he possessed; and the timber being soon brought by them, in
+three days it was finished, made of very high trees sunk deep in the
+ground, and traversed by many pieces.
+
+Near by passed a river of Cayas, the shores of it well peopled, both
+above and below the town. Indians appeared on the part of the cacique
+with a present of shawls and skins, and a lame chief, the lord of a
+town called Tietiquaquo,[299] subject to the cacique of Autiamque,
+came frequently to visit the Governor, and brought him gifts of the
+things he possessed. The cacique sent to the Governor to inquire what
+length of time he would remain in his territory; and hearing that he
+was to be there more than three days, he sent no more messages nor
+Indians, but treated with the lame chief to rise in revolt. Numerous
+inroads were made, in which many persons of both sexes were taken,
+and among the rest that chief, whom the Governor, having reprehended
+and admonished, set at liberty, in consideration of the presents he
+had made, giving him two Indians to bear him away on their shoulders.
+
+  [299] This place was located in the province of Chaguate.
+
+The cacique of Autiamque, desiring to drive the strangers out of his
+territory, ordered spies to be set about them. An Indian, coming at
+night to the entrance of the palisade, was noticed by a soldier on
+guard, who, putting himself behind the door as he entered, struck him
+down with a cutlass. When taken before the Governor, he was asked why
+he came, but fell dead without utterance. The next night the Governor
+sent a soldier to beat the alarm, and cry out that he saw Indians, in
+order to ascertain how fast the men would hasten to the call. This
+was done also in other places, at times when it appeared to him they
+were careless, that he might reprove those who were late in coming;
+so that for danger, as well as for doing his duty, each one on such
+occasion would strive to be the first.
+
+The Christians stayed three months in Autiamque, enjoying the
+greatest plenty of maize, beans, walnuts, and dried plums
+(persimmons); also rabbits, which they had never had ingenuity enough
+to ensnare until the Indians there taught them. The contrivance is
+a strong spring, that lifts the animal off its feet, a noose being
+made of a stiff cord to run about the neck, passing through rings
+of cane, that it may not be gnawed. Many of them were taken in the
+maize-fields, usually when it was freezing or snowing. The Christians
+were there a month in snow, when they did not go out of town, save
+to a wood, at the distance of two crossbow-shots, to which, whenever
+fuel was wanted, a road was opened, the Governor and others, on
+horseback, going to and returning from it many times, when the fuel
+was brought from there by those on foot. In this time many rabbits
+were killed with arrows by the Indians, who were now allowed to go at
+large in their shackles. The animal is of two sorts; one of them like
+that of Spain, the other of the color, form, and size of the great
+hare, though longer even, and having bigger loins.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 28
+
+_How the Governor went from Autiamque to Nilco, and thence to
+Guachoya._
+
+
+On Monday, the sixth day of March, of the year 1542 of the Christian
+era, the Governor set out from Autiamque to seek Nilco, which the
+Indians said was nigh the River Grande, with the purpose, by going
+to the sea, to recruit his forces. He had not over three hundred
+efficient men, nor more than forty horses. Some of the beasts were
+lame, and useful only in making out the show of a troop of cavalry;
+and, from the lack of iron, they had all gone a year without shoes,
+though, from the circumstance of travelling in a smooth country, they
+had little need of them.
+
+Juan Ortiz died in Autiamque, a loss the Governor greatly regretted;
+for, without an interpreter, not knowing whither he was travelling,
+Soto feared to enter the country, lest he might get lost. Thenceforth
+a lad, taken in Cutifachiqui, who had learned somewhat of the
+language of the Christians, served as the interpreter. The death was
+so great a hindrance to our going, whether on discovery or out of the
+country, that to learn of the Indians what would have been rendered
+in four words, it became necessary now to have the whole day: and
+oftener than otherwise the very opposite was understood of what was
+asked; so that many times it happened the road that we travelled one
+day, or sometimes two or three days, would have to be returned over,
+wandering up and down, lost in thickets.
+
+The Governor went to a province called Ayays,[300] arriving at a town
+near the river that passed by Cayas, and by Autiamque, from which
+he had been ten days in coming. He ordered a piragua to be built,
+in which he crossed;[301] and, having arrived on the other shore,
+there set in such weather that marching was impossible for four days,
+because of snow. When that ceased to fall, he travelled three days
+through desert, a region so low, so full of lakes and bad passages,
+that at one time, for the whole day, the travel lay through water up
+to the knees at places, in others to the stirrups; and occasionally,
+for the distance of a few paces, there was swimming. And he came
+to Tutelpinco,[302] a town untenanted, and found to be without
+maize, seated near a lake that flowed copiously into the river with
+a violent current. Five Christians, in charge of a captain, in
+attempting to cross, by order of the Governor, were upset; when some
+seized hold of the canoe they had employed, others of trees that grew
+in the water, while one, a worthy man, Francisco Bastian, a native of
+Villanueva de Barcarota, became drowned. The Governor travelled all
+one day along the margin of the lake, seeking for a ford, but could
+discover none, nor any way to get over.
+
+  [300] This province should not be confounded with the province of
+  Aays, which was located to the southward of Red River, in Texas.
+
+  [301] This crossing-place was to the northward of Pine Bluff, and
+  probably in Jefferson County.
+
+  [302] This place was on Big Bayou Meto, near the southeast corner
+  of town 6, range 5, east, in Jefferson County.
+
+Returning to Tutelpinco at night, the Governor found two friendly
+natives, who were willing to show him the crossing, and the road
+he was to take. From the reeds and timber of the houses, rafts and
+causeways were made, on which the river was crossed. After three
+days' marching, at Tianto, in the territory of Nilco, thirty Indians
+were taken, among whom were two chiefs of the town. A captain,
+with infantry and cavalry, was directly despatched to Nilco, that
+the inhabitants might not have time to carry off their provisions.
+In going through three or four large towns, at the one where the
+cacique resided, two leagues from where the Governor stayed, many
+Indians were found to be in readiness, with bows and arrows, who,
+surrounding the place, appeared to invite an onset; but so soon as
+they saw the Christians drawing nigh to them without faltering, they
+approached the dwelling of the cacique, setting fire to it, and, by a
+pond near the town, through which the horses could not go, they fled.
+
+The following day, Wednesday, the twenty-ninth of March, the Governor
+arrived at Nilco,[303] making his quarters, and those of his people,
+in the town of the cacique, which was in an open field, that for a
+quarter of a league over was all inhabited; and at the distance of
+from half a league to a league off were many other large towns, in
+which was a good quantity of maize, beans, walnuts, and dried plums
+(persimmons). This was the most populous of any country that was
+seen in Florida, and the most abundant in maize, excepting Coça and
+Apalache. An Indian, attended by a party, arrived at the camp, and,
+presenting the Governor with a cloak of marten-skins and a string of
+pearls, he received some margaridetas (a kind of bead much esteemed
+in Peru) and other trinkets, with which he was well pleased. At
+leaving, he promised to be back in two days, but did not return. In
+the night-time, however, the Indians came in canoes, and carrying
+away all the maize they could take, set up their huts on the other
+side of the river, among the thickest bushes. The Governor, finding
+that the Indians did not arrive within the time promised, ordered an
+ambuscade to be placed at some cribs, near the lake, to which the
+Indians came for maize. Two of them were taken, who told him that
+the person who had come to visit him was not the cacique, but one
+sent by him, pretending to be he, in order to observe what might be
+the vigilance of the Christians, and whether it was their purpose to
+remain in that country, or to go farther. Directly a captain, with
+men on horseback and foot, were sent over to the other shore; but, as
+their crossing was observed, only ten or a dozen Indians, of both
+sexes, could be taken; and with these the Christians returned to camp.
+
+  [303] Nilco was located a few miles southeast of Arkansas Post,
+  on section 30, town 8, south, range 2, west, in Desha County,
+  where there is a large mound.
+
+This river, passing by Anilco, is the same that flows by Cayas and
+Autiamque, and falls into the River Grande, which flows by Pacaha and
+Aquixo, near the province of Guachoya, the lord of which ascended in
+canoes to carry war upon him of Nilco. In his behalf a messenger came
+to the Governor, saying that the cacique was his servant, desiring to
+be so considered, and that in two days from that time he would come
+to make his salutation. He arrived in season, accompanied by some of
+his principal men, and with great proffers and courtesy, he presented
+many shawls and deer-skins. The Governor gave him some articles of
+barter, showing him much attention, and inquired what towns there
+might be on the river below. He replied that he knew of none other
+than his own; that opposite was the province of a cacique called
+Quigaltam; then, taking his leave, returned to his town.
+
+The Governor determined to go to Guachoya within a few days, to
+learn if the sea were near, or if there were any inhabited territory
+nigh it, where he might find subsistence whilst those brigantines
+were building, that he desired to send to a country of Christians.
+As he crossed the River of Nilco, there came up Indians in canoes
+from Guachoya, who, when they saw him, thinking that he was in their
+pursuit, to do them harm, they returned down the river, and informed
+the cacique, when he took away from the town whatsoever his people
+could carry, and passed over with them, all that night, to the other
+bank of the River Grande. The Governor sent a captain with fifty men,
+in six canoes, down the river to Guachoya;[304] while he, with the
+rest, marched by land, arriving there on Sunday, the seventeenth day
+of April.[305] He took up his quarters in the town of the cacique,
+which was palisaded, seated a crossbow-shot from the stream, that is
+there called the River Tamaliseu, Tapatu at Nilco, Mico at Coça, and
+at its entrance is known as The River.
+
+  [304] Guachoya was in the vicinity of Arkansas City, in Desha
+  County, and possibly at or near the large mound one mile to the
+  northward.
+
+  [305] Sunday was the sixteenth of April.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 29
+
+_The message sent to Quigaltam, and the answer brought back to the
+Governor, and what occurred the while._
+
+
+So soon as the Governor arrived in Guachoya, he ordered Juan de
+Añasco, with as many people as could go in the canoes, to ascend the
+river; for while they were coming from Anilco they saw some cabins
+newly built on the opposite shore. The comptroller went, and brought
+back the boats laden with maize, beans, dried plums (persimmons),
+and the pulp of them made into many loaves. The same day an Indian
+arrived from Guachoya, and said that the cacique would come on the
+morrow. The next day, many canoes were seen ascending the river;
+and the people in them remained for an hour on the opposite side of
+the River Grande, in consultation, as to whether they should come
+to us or not; but finally they concluded to come, and crossed the
+river, among them being the cacique of Guachoya with many Indians,
+bringing much fish, many dogs, skins, and blankets. So soon as they
+had landed, they went to the lodging of the Governor in the town, and
+having presented him with the offerings, the cacique thus spoke:
+
+     POTENT AND EXCELLENT MASTER:
+
+     I entreat you to forgive me the error I committed in going away
+     from this town, and not waiting to greet and to obey you; since
+     the occasion should have been for me, and is, one of pride; but
+     I dreaded what I should not have feared, and did consequently
+     what was out of reason; for error comes of haste, and I left
+     without proper thought. So soon as I had reflected, I resolved
+     not to follow the inclination of the foolish, which is to
+     persist in his course, but to take that of the discreet and the
+     wise: thus have I changed my purpose, coming to see in what it
+     is you will bid me serve you, within the farthermost limits of
+     my control.
+
+The Governor received him with much pleasure, thanking him for the
+proffers and gift. Being asked if he had any information of the sea,
+he said, none, nor of any other inhabited country below on that
+side of the river, except a town two leagues distant, belonging to
+a chief subject to him; nor on the other shore, save three leagues
+down, the province of Quigaltam, the lord of which was the greatest
+of that country. The Governor, suspecting that the cacique spoke
+untruthfully, to rid his towns of him, sent Juan de Añasco with
+eight of cavalry down the river, to discover what population might
+be there, and get what knowledge there was of the sea. He was gone
+eight days, and stated, when he got back, that in all that time he
+could not travel more than fourteen or fifteen leagues, on account
+of the great bogs that came out of the river, the canebrakes and
+thick scrubs there were along the margin, and that he had found no
+inhabited spot.
+
+The Governor sank into a deep despondency at sight of the
+difficulties that presented themselves to his reaching the sea;
+and, what was worse, from the way in which the men and horses were
+diminishing in numbers, he could not sustain himself in the country
+without succor. Of that reflection he pined: but, before he took
+to his pallet, he sent a messenger to the cacique of Quigaltam, to
+say that he was the child of the Sun, and whence he came all obeyed
+him, rendering their tribute; that he besought him to value his
+friendship, and to come where he was; that he would be rejoiced to
+see him; and in token of love and his obedience, he must bring him
+something from his country that was in most esteem there. By the same
+Indian, the chief returned this answer:
+
+     As to what you say of your being the son of the Sun, if you will
+     cause him to dry up the great river, I will believe you: as to
+     the rest, it is not my custom to visit any one, but rather all,
+     of whom I have ever heard, have come to visit me, to serve and
+     obey me, and pay me tribute, either voluntarily or by force.
+     If you desire to see me, come where I am; if for peace, I will
+     receive you with special good-will; if for war, I will await you
+     in my town; but neither for you, nor for any man, will I set
+     back one foot.
+
+When the messenger returned, the Governor was already low, being very
+ill of fevers. He grieved that he was not in a state to cross the
+river at once, and go in quest of the cacique, to see if he could
+not abate that pride; though the stream was already flowing very
+powerfully, was nearly half a league broad, sixteen fathoms in depth,
+rushing by in furious torrent, and on either shore were many Indians;
+nor was his power any longer so great that he might disregard
+advantages, relying on his strength alone.
+
+Every day the Indians of Guachoya brought fish, until they came to be
+in such plenty that the town was covered with them.
+
+The Governor having been told by the cacique, that on a certain
+night, the chief of Quigaltam would come to give him battle, he
+suspected it to be a fiction of his devising to get him out of his
+country, and he ordered him to be put under guard, and from that
+night forth the watch to be well kept. When asked why the chief did
+not come, he said that he had, but that, finding the Governor in
+readiness, he dared not adventure; and he greatly importuned him to
+send the captains over the river, offering to supply many men to
+go upon Quigaltam; to which the Governor said, that so soon as he
+got well he would himself go to seek that cacique. Observing how
+many Indians came every day to the town, and how populous was that
+country, the Governor fearing that they would plot together, and
+practise on him some perfidy, he permitted the gates in use, and
+some gaps in the palisade that had not yet been closed up, to remain
+open, that the Indians might not suppose he stood in fear, ordering
+the cavalry to be distributed there; and the night long they made
+the round, from each squadron going mounted men in couples to visit
+the scouts, outside the town, at points in the roads, and to the
+crossbowmen that guarded the canoes in the river.
+
+That the Indians might stand in terror of them, the Governor
+determined to send a captain to Nilco, which the people of Guachoya
+had told him was inhabited, and, treating the inhabitants there
+severely neither town would dare to attack him: so he commanded
+Captain Nuño de Tobar to march thither with fifteen horsemen, and
+Captain Juan de Guzman, with his company of foot, to ascend the river
+by water in canoes. The cacique of Guachoya ordered canoes to be
+brought, and many warriors to come, who went with the Christians. Two
+leagues from Nilco, the cavalry, having first arrived, waited for the
+foot, and thence together they crossed the river in the night. At
+dawn, in sight of the town, they came upon a scout, who, directly as
+he saw the Christians, set up loud yells, and fled to carry the news
+to those in the place. Nuño de Tobar, and those with him, hastened on
+so rapidly, that they were upon the inhabitants before they could all
+get out of town. The ground was open field; the part of it covered by
+the houses, which might be a quarter of a league in extent, contained
+five or six thousand souls. Coming out of them, the Indians ran from
+one to another habitation, numbers collecting in all parts, so that
+there was not a man on horseback who did not find himself amidst
+many; and when the captain ordered that the life of no male should be
+spared, the surprise was such, that there was not a man among them
+in readiness to draw a bow. The cries of the women and children were
+such as to deafen those who pursued them. About one hundred men were
+slain; many were allowed to get away badly wounded, that they might
+strike terror into those who were absent.
+
+Some persons were so cruel and butcher-like that they killed all
+before them, young and old, not one having resisted little nor
+much; while those who felt it their duty to be wherever there might
+be resistance, and were esteemed brave, broke through the crowds
+of Indians, bearing down many with their stirrups and the breasts
+of their horses, giving some a thrust and letting them go, but
+encountering a child or a woman would take and deliver it over to the
+footmen. To the ferocious and bloodthirsty, God permitted that their
+sin should rise up against them in the presence of all--when there
+was occasion for fighting showing extreme cowardice, and in the end
+paying for it with their lives.
+
+Eighty women and children were captured at Nilco, and much clothing.
+The Indians of Guachoya, before arriving at the town, had come to a
+stop, and from without watched the success of the Christians over the
+inhabitants; and when they saw that these were scattered, that the
+cavalry were following and lancing them, they went to the houses for
+plunder, filling the canoes with clothing; and lest the Christians
+might take away what they got, they returned to Guachoya, where they
+came greatly astonished at what they had seen done to the people of
+Nilco, which they, in great fear, recounted circumstantially to their
+cacique.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 30
+
+_The death of the Adelantado, Don Hernando de Soto, and how Luys
+Moscoso de Alvarado was chosen Governor._
+
+
+The Governor, conscious that the hour approached in which he should
+depart this life, commanded that all the King's officers should be
+called before him, the captains and the principal personages, to whom
+he made a speech. He said that he was about to go into the presence
+of God, to give account of all his past life; and since He had been
+pleased to take him away at such a time, and when he could recognize
+the moment of his death, he, His most unworthy servant, rendered
+Him hearty thanks. He confessed his deep obligations to them all,
+whether present or absent, for their great qualities, their love and
+loyalty to his person, well tried in the sufferance of hardship,
+which he ever wished to honor, and had designed to reward, when the
+Almighty should be pleased to give him repose from labor with greater
+prosperity to his fortune. He begged that they would pray for him,
+that through mercy he might be pardoned his sins, and his soul be
+received in glory: he asked that they would relieve him of the charge
+he held over them, as well of the indebtedness he was under to them
+all, as to forgive him any wrongs they might have received at his
+hands. To prevent any divisions that might arise, as to who should
+command, he asked that they would be pleased to elect a principal
+and able person to be governor, one with whom they should all be
+satisfied, and, being chosen, they would swear before him to obey:
+that this would greatly satisfy him, abate somewhat the pains he
+suffered, and moderate the anxiety of leaving them in a country, they
+knew not where.
+
+Baltasar de Gallegos responded in behalf of all, consoling him with
+remarks on the shortness of the life of this world, attended as it
+was by so many toils and afflictions, saying that whom God earliest
+called away, He showed particular favor; with many other things
+appropriate to such an occasion: And finally, since it pleased the
+Almighty to take him to Himself, amid the deep sorrow they not
+unreasonably felt, it was necessary and becoming in him, as in them,
+to conform to the Divine Will: that as respected the election of a
+governor, which he ordered, whomsoever his Excellency should name to
+the command, him would they obey. Thereupon the Governor nominated
+Luys Moscoso de Alvarado to be his captain-general; when by all those
+present was he straightway chosen and sworn Governor.
+
+The next day, the twenty-first of May, departed this life the
+magnanimous, the virtuous, the intrepid captain, Don Hernando de
+Soto, Governor of Cuba and Adelantado of Florida. He was advanced
+by fortune, in the way she is wont to lead others, that he might
+fall the greater depth: he died in a land, and at a time, that could
+afford him little comfort in his illness, when the danger of being no
+more heard from stared his companions in the face, each one himself
+having need of sympathy, which was the cause why they neither gave
+him their companionship nor visited him, as otherwise they would have
+done.
+
+Luys de Moscoso determined to conceal what had happened from the
+Indians; for Soto had given them to understand that the Christians
+were immortal; besides, they held him to be vigilant, sagacious,
+brave; and, although they were at peace, should they know him to be
+dead, they, being of their nature inconstant, might venture on making
+an attack; and they were credulous of all that he had told them,
+for he made them believe that some things which went on among them
+privately, he had discovered without their being able to see how,
+or by what means; and that the figure which appeared in a mirror he
+showed, told him whatsoever they might be about, or desired to do;
+whence neither by word nor deed did they dare undertake any thing to
+his injury.
+
+So soon as the death had taken place, Luys de Moscoso directed the
+body to be put secretly into a house, where it remained three days;
+and thence it was taken at night, by his order, to a gate of the
+town, and buried within. The Indians, who had seen him ill, finding
+him no longer, suspected the reason; and passing by where he lay,
+they observed the ground loose, and, looking about, talked among
+themselves. This coming to the knowledge of Luys de Moscoso, he
+ordered the corpse to be taken up at night, and among the shawls
+that enshrouded it having cast abundance of sand, it was taken out
+in a canoe and committed to the middle of the stream. The cacique
+of Guachoya asked for him, saying: "What has been done with my
+brother and lord, the Governor?" Luys de Moscoso told him that he
+had ascended into the skies, as he had done on many other occasions;
+but as he would have to be detained there some time, he had left him
+in his stead. The chief, thinking within himself that he was dead,
+ordered two well-proportioned young men to be brought, saying, that
+it was the usage of the country, when any lord died, to kill some
+persons, who should accompany and serve him on the way, on which
+account they were brought; and he told him to command their heads to
+be struck off, that they might go accordingly to attend his friend
+and master. Luys de Moscoso replied to him, that the Governor was
+not dead, but only gone into the heavens, having taken with him of
+his soldiers sufficient number for his need, and he besought him to
+let those Indians go, and from that time forward not to follow so
+evil a practice. They were presently ordered to be let loose, that
+they might return to their houses; but one of them refused to leave,
+alleging that he did not wish to remain in the power of one who,
+without cause, condemned him to die, and that he who had saved his
+life he desired to serve as long as he should live.
+
+Luys de Moscoso ordered the property of the Governor to be sold at
+public outcry. It consisted of two male and three female slaves,
+three horses, and seven hundred swine. For each slave, or horse, was
+given two or three thousand cruzados, to be paid at the first melting
+of gold or silver, or division of vassals and territory, with the
+obligation that should there be nothing found in the country, the
+payment should be made at the end of a year, those having no property
+to pledge to give their bond. A hog bought in the same way, trusted,
+two hundred cruzados. Those who had left anything at home bought more
+sparingly, and took less than others. From that time forward most
+of the people owned and raised hogs; they lived on pork, observed
+Fridays and Saturdays, and the vespers of holidays, which they had
+not done before; for, at times, they had passed two or three months
+without tasting any meat, and on the day they got any, it had been
+their custom to eat it.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 31
+
+_How the Governor Luys de Moscoso left Guachoya and went to Chaguete,
+and from thence to Aguacay._
+
+
+Some were glad of the death of Don Hernando de Soto, holding it
+certain that Luys de Moscoso, who was given to leading a gay life,
+preferred to see himself at ease in a land of Christians, rather than
+continue the toils of war, discovering and subduing, which the people
+had come to hate, finding the little recompense that followed. The
+Governor ordered that the captains and principal personages should
+come together, to consult and determine upon what they would do; and,
+informed of the population there was on all sides, he found that
+towards the west the country was most inhabited, and that descending
+the stream, after passing Quigaltam, it was desert and had little
+subsistence. He besought them all to give him their opinion in
+writing, signed with their names, that, having the views of every
+one, he might determine whether to follow down the river or enter the
+land.
+
+To every one it appeared well to march westwardly, because in that
+direction was New Spain, the voyage by sea being held more hazardous
+and of doubtful accomplishment, as a vessel of sufficient strength
+to weather a storm could not be built, nor was there captain nor
+pilot, needle nor chart, nor was it known how distant might be the
+sea; neither had they any tidings of it, or if the river did not take
+some great turn through the land, or might not have some fall over
+rocks where they might be lost. Some, who had seen the sea-card,
+found that by the shore, from the place where they were to New Spain,
+there should be about five hundred leagues; and they said that by
+land, though they might have to go round about sometimes, in looking
+for a peopled country, unless some great impassable wilderness
+should intervene, they could not be hindered from going forward that
+summer; and, finding provision for support in some peopled country
+where they might stop, the following summer they should arrive in a
+land of Christians; and that, going by land, it might be they should
+discover some rich country which would avail them. Moscoso, although
+it was his desire to get out of the land of Florida in the shortest
+time, seeing the difficulties that lay before him in a voyage by sea,
+determined to undertake that which should appear to be the best to
+all.
+
+Monday, the fifth of June, the Governor left Guachoya, receiving
+a guide from the cacique who remained in his town. They passed
+through a province called Catalte; and, going through a desert six
+days' journey in extent, on the twentieth of the month they came to
+Chaguate.[306] The cacique of the province had been to visit the
+Governor, Don Hernando de Soto, at Autiamque, where he took him
+presents of shawls, skins, and salt. The day before Luys de Moscoso
+arrived, a sick Christian becoming missed, whom the Indians were
+suspected to have killed, he sent word to the cacique to look for
+and return him--that in so doing he would continue to be his friend;
+if otherwise, the cacique should not hide from him anywhere, nor he
+nor his, and that he would leave his country in ashes. The chief
+directly came, and, bringing the Christian, with a large gift of
+shawls and skins, he made this speech:
+
+     EXCELLENT MASTER:
+
+     I would not deserve that opinion you have of me for all the
+     wealth of the world. Who impelled me to visit and serve that
+     excellent lord, the Governor, your father, in Autiamque, which
+     you should have remembered, where I offered myself, with all
+     loyalty, truth, and love, to serve and obey his lifetime: or
+     what could have been my purpose, having received favors of
+     him, and without either of you having done me any injury,
+     that I should be moved to do that which I should not? Believe
+     me, no outrage, nor worldly interest, could have been equal
+     to making me act thus, or could have so blinded me. Since,
+     however, in this life, the natural course is, after one pleasure
+     should succeed many pains, fortune has been pleased with your
+     indignation to moderate the joy I felt in my heart at your
+     coming, and have failed where I aimed to hit, in pleasing this
+     Christian, who remained behind lost, treating him in a manner of
+     which he shall himself speak, thinking that in this I should do
+     you service, and intending to come with and deliver him to you
+     at Chaguate, serving you in all things, to the extent possible
+     in my power. If for this I deserve punishment from your hand, I
+     shall receive it, as coming from my master's, as though it were
+     favor.
+
+  [306] This province was probably on Saline River, in Saline
+  County. From here they turned to the south-southeast.
+
+The Governor answered, that because he had not found him in Chaguete
+he was incensed, supposing that he had kept away, as others had
+done; but that, as he now knew his loyalty and love, he would ever
+consider him a brother, and would favor him in all matters. The
+cacique went with him to the town where he resided, the distance of
+a day's journey. They passed through a small town where was a lake,
+and the Indians made salt: the Christians made some on the day they
+rested there, from water that rose near by from springs in pools.
+The Governor was six days in Chaguete, where he informed himself of
+the people there were to the west. He heard that three days' journey
+distant, was a province called Aguacay.
+
+On leaving Chaguete, a Christian remained behind, named Francisco
+de Guzman, bastard son of a gentleman of Seville, who, in fear of
+being made to pay for gaming debts in the person of an Indian girl,
+his concubine, he took her away with him; and the Governor, having
+marched two days before he was missed, sent word to the cacique to
+seek for and send him to Aguacay, whither he was marching, but the
+chief never did. Before arriving at this province, they received five
+Indians, coming with a gift of skins, fish, and roasted venison,
+sent on the part of the cacique. The Governor reached his town on
+Wednesday, the fourth day of July,[307] and finding it unoccupied,
+lodged there. He remained in it a while, making some inroads, in
+which many Indians of both sexes were captured. There they heard of
+the South Sea. Much salt was got out of the sand, gathered in a vein
+of earth like slate, and was made as they make it in Cayas.
+
+  [307] The fourth of July was Tuesday.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 32
+
+     _How the Governor went from Aguacay to Naguatex, and what
+     happened to him._
+
+
+The day the Governor left Aguacay he went to sleep near a small town,
+subject to the lord of that province. He set the encampment very nigh
+a salt lake,[308] and that afternoon some salt was made. He marched
+the next day, and slept between two mountains, in an open grove; the
+next after, he arrived at a small town called Pato; and on the fourth
+day of his departure from Aguacay he came to the first inhabited
+place, in a province called Amaye. There they took an Indian, who
+said that thence to Naguatex was a day and a half's journey, all the
+way lying through an inhabited region.
+
+  [308] This town and lake were on the west side of Quachita River,
+  about two miles south of Arkadelphia, in Clark County.
+
+Having passed out of Amaye, on Saturday, the twentieth of July,[309]
+between that place and Naguatex, at mid-day, along a clump of
+luxuriant woods,[310] the camp was seated. From thence Indians being
+seen, who had come to espy them, those on horseback went in their
+pursuit, killed six, and captured two. The prisoners being asked by
+the Governor why they had come, they said, to discover the numbers
+he had, and their condition, having been sent by their lord, the
+chief of Naguatex; and that he, with other caciques, who came in his
+company and his cause, had determined on giving him battle that day.
+
+  [309] The twentieth of July was Thursday.
+
+  [310] Probably on Prairie de Roane, near Hope.
+
+While thus conferring, many Indians advanced, formed in two
+squadrons, who, so soon as they saw that they were descried, giving
+whoops, they assailed the Christians with great fury, each on a
+different quarter; but finding how firm was the resistance, they
+turned, and fleeing, many lost their lives; the greater part of
+the cavalry pursuing them, forgetful of the camp, when those that
+remained were attacked by other two squadrons, that had lain in
+concealment, who, in their turn, having been withstood, paid the
+penalty that the first had done.
+
+When the Christians came together, after the Indians fled, they
+heard loud shouting, at the distance of a crossbow-shot from where
+they were; and the Governor sent twelve cavalry to see what might be
+the cause. Six Christians were found amidst numerous Indians, two,
+that were mounted, defending four on foot, with great difficulty;
+and they, as well as those who went to their succor, finally ended
+by killing many. They had got lost from those who followed after
+the first squadrons, and, in returning to the camp, fell among
+them with whom they were found fighting. One Indian, brought back
+alive, being asked by the Governor who they were that had come to
+give him battle, said the cacique of Naguatex, the one of Maye, and
+another of a province called Hacanac, lord of great territories and
+numerous vassals, he of Naguatex being in command. The Governor,
+having ordered his right arm to be cut off, and his nose, sent him
+to the cacique, with word that he would march the next day into
+his territory to destroy it, and that if he wished to dispute his
+entrance to await him.
+
+The Governor stopped there that night, and the following day he
+came to the habitations of Naguatex, which were much scattered, and
+having asked for the town of the cacique, he was told that it stood
+on the opposite side of a river near by. He marched thitherward;
+and coming to the river,[311] on the other bank he saw many Indians
+awaiting him, set in order to defend the passage; but, as he did not
+know whether it might be forded or not, nor whereabouts it could be
+crossed, and having some wounded men and horses, he determined to
+repose for some time in the town where he was, until they should be
+healed.
+
+  [311] Little River, in Hempstead County.
+
+In consequence of the great heats that prevailed, he pitched his camp
+a quarter of a league from the river, in a fine open grove of high
+trees, near a brook, close to the town. Some Indians taken there,
+having been asked if the river was fordable, said yes, at times it
+was, in certain places; on the tenth day he sent two captains, each
+with fifteen cavalry, one up and the other down the stream, with
+guides to show where they might get over, to see what towns were to
+be found on the opposite side. They were both opposed by the Indians,
+who defended the passages the best they could; but these being taken
+notwithstanding, on the other shore they found many habitations, with
+much subsistence; and having seen this, the detachments went back to
+the camp.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 33
+
+     _How the cacique of Naguatex came to visit the Governor, and how
+     the Governor went thence, and arrived at Nondacao._
+
+
+From Naguatex, where the Governor was, he sent a message to the
+cacique, that, should he come to serve and obey him, he would pardon
+the past; and if he did not, he would go to look after him, and would
+inflict the chastisement he deserved for what he had done. At the
+end of two days the Indian got back, bringing word that to-morrow
+the cacique would come. The day before his arrival, the chief sent
+many Indians in advance of him, among whom were some principal men,
+to discover in what mood the Governor was, and determine whether
+he would himself come or not. They went back directly as they had
+announced his approach, the cacique arriving in a couple of hours
+afterward, well attended by his people. They came one before another,
+in double file, leaving an opening through the midst, where he
+walked. They arrived in the Governor's presence weeping, after the
+usage of Tula (thence to the eastward not very distant), when the
+chief, making his proper obeisance, thus spoke:
+
+     VERY HIGH AND POWERFUL LORD, WHOM ALL THE EARTH SHOULD SERVE AND
+     OBEY:
+
+     I venture to appear before you, after having been guilty of
+     so great and bad an act, that, for only having thought of it,
+     I merit punishment. Trusting in your greatness, although I do
+     not deserve pardon, yet for your own dignity you will show me
+     mercy, having regard to my inferiority in comparison with you,
+     forgetting my weakness, which to my sorrow, and for my greater
+     good, I have come to know.
+
+     I believe that you and yours must be immortal; that you are
+     master of the things of nature; since you subject them all,
+     and they obey you, even the very hearts of men. Witnessing the
+     slaughter and destruction of my men in battle, which came of my
+     ignorance, and the counsel of a brother of mine, who fell in the
+     action, from my heart did I repent the error that I committed,
+     and directly I desired to serve and obey you: wherefore have I
+     come, that you may chastise and command me as your own.
+
+The Governor replied, that the past would be forgiven; and that,
+should he thenceforward do his duty, he would be his friend, favoring
+him in all matters.
+
+At the end of four days Luys de Moscoso set forward, and arrived at a
+river he could not pass,[312] it ran so full, which to him appeared
+wonderful at the time, more than a month having gone by since there
+had been rain. The Indians said, that it often increased in that
+manner, without there being rain anywhere, in all the country. It was
+supposed to be caused by the sea entering in; but he learned that the
+water always flowed from above, and that the Indians nowhere had any
+information of the sea.
+
+  [312] Red River.
+
+The Governor returned back to where he had been the last days; and,
+at the end of eight more, understanding that the river might then be
+crossed, he left, and passed over to the other bank,[313] where he
+found houses, but no people. He lodged out in the fields, and sent
+word to the cacique to come where he was, and to give him a guide
+to go on with. After some days, finding that the cacique did not
+come, nor send any one, he despatched two captains, each of them
+in a different direction, to set fire to the towns, and seize the
+people that might be found. They burned much provision, and captured
+many Indians. The cacique, seeing the damage his territories were
+receiving, sent five principal men to Moscoso, with three guides, who
+understood the language farther on, whither he would go.
+
+  [313] This ford was located about three miles east of the line
+  between Texas and Arkansas, in the latter state, and is known as
+  White Oak Shoals.
+
+Directly the Governor set out from Naguatex, arriving, on the third
+day, at a hamlet of four or five houses, belonging to the cacique of
+the poor province named Nissohone, a thinly peopled country, having
+little maize. Two days' journey on the way, the Indians who guided
+the Governor, in place of taking him to the west, would lead him to
+the east, and at times they went through heavy thickets, out of the
+road: in consequence, he ordered that they should be hanged upon a
+tree. A woman, taken in Nissohone, served as the guide, who went back
+to find the road.
+
+In two days' time the Governor came to another miserable country,
+called Lacane. An Indian was taken, who said the land of Nondacao was
+very populous, the houses much scattered, as in mountainous regions,
+and there was plenty of maize. The cacique came with his Indians,
+weeping, as those of Naguatex had done, which is, according to their
+custom, significant of obedience; and he made a present of much
+fish, offering to do whatsoever might be required of him. He took his
+departure, leaving a guide for the province of Soacatino.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 34
+
+     _How the Governor marched from Nondacao to Soacatino and Guasco,
+     passing through a wilderness, whence, for want of a guide and
+     interpreter, he retired to Nilco._
+
+
+The Governor set out from Nondacao for Soacatino, and on the fifth
+day came to a province called Aays.[314] The inhabitants had never
+heard of the Christians. So soon as they observed them entering the
+territory the people were called out, who, as fast as they could get
+together, came by fifties and hundreds on the road, to give battle.
+While some encountered us, others fell upon our rear; and when we
+followed up those, these pursued us. The attack continued during the
+greater part of the day, until we arrived at their town. Some men
+were injured, and some horses, but nothing so as to hinder travel,
+there being not one dangerous wound among all. The Indians suffered
+great slaughter.
+
+  [314] This was apparently to the southward of Gainesville, Texas,
+  the town being located just west of the "Lower Cross Timbers," on
+  the prairie.
+
+The day on which the Governor departed, the guide told him he had
+heard it said in Nondacao, that the Indians of Soacatino had seen
+other Christians; at which we were all delighted, thinking it might
+be true, and that they could have come by the way of New Spain; for
+if it were so, finding nothing in Florida of value, we should be able
+to go out of it, there being fear we might perish in some wilderness.
+The Governor, having been led for two days out of the way, ordered
+that the Indian be put to the torture, when he confessed that his
+master, the cacique of Nondacao, had ordered him to take them in
+that manner, we being his enemies, and he, as his vassal, was bound
+to obey him. He was commanded to be cast to the dogs, and another
+Indian guided us to Soacatino,[315] where we came the following day.
+
+  [315] This place was apparently located in the "Upper Cross
+  Timbers." The Spaniards here turned to the southward.
+
+The country was very poor, and the want of maize was greatly
+felt. The natives being asked if they had any knowledge of other
+Christians, said they had heard that near there, towards the south,
+such men were moving about. For twenty days the march was through
+a very thinly peopled country, where great privation and toil were
+endured; the little maize there was, the Indians having buried in the
+scrub, where the Christians, at the close of the day's march, when
+they were well weary, went trailing, to seek for what they needed of
+it to eat.
+
+Arrived at a province called Guasco,[316] they found maize, with
+which they loaded the horses and the Indians; thence they went to
+another settlement, called Naquiscoça, the inhabitants of which said
+that they had no knowledge of any other Christians. The Governor
+ordered them put to torture, when they stated that farther on, in the
+territories of another chief, called Naçacahoz,[317] the Christians
+had arrived, and gone back toward the west, whence they came. He
+reached there in two days, and took some women, among whom was one
+who said that she had seen Christians, and, having been in their
+hands, had made her escape from them. The Governor sent a captain
+with fifteen cavalry to where she said they were seen, to discover
+if there were any marks of horses, or signs of any Christians having
+been there; and after travelling three or four leagues, she who
+was the guide declared that all she had said was false; and so it
+was deemed of everything else the Indians had told of having seen
+Christians in Florida.
+
+  [316] Waco. The town was evidently located on the Brazos River,
+  near old Fort Belknap, in Young County, Texas.
+
+  [317] These two provinces were to the southeast of Guasco, in the
+  Brazos valley.
+
+As the region thereabout was scarce of maize, and no information
+could be got of any inhabited country to the west, the Governor went
+back to Guasco. The residents stated, that ten days' journey from
+there, toward the sunset, was a river called Daycao,[318] whither
+they sometimes went to drive and kill deer, and whence they had seen
+persons on the other bank, but without knowing what people they were.
+The Christians took as much maize as they could find, to carry with
+them; and journeying ten days through a wilderness,[319] they arrived
+at the river of which the Indians had spoken. Ten horsemen sent in
+advance by the Governor had crossed; and, following a road leading up
+from the bank, they came upon an encampment of Indians living in very
+small huts, who, directly as they saw the Christians, took to flight,
+leaving what they had, indications only of poverty and misery.
+So wretched was the country, that what was found everywhere, put
+together, was not half an alqueire of maize.[320] Taking two natives,
+they went back to the river, where the Governor waited; and on coming
+to question the captives, to ascertain what towns there might be to
+the west, no Indian was found in the camp who knew their language.
+
+  [318] Probably the Double Mountain fork of Brazos River. The
+  crossing was probably made at the south angle of the river, in
+  the northwestern part of Fisher County, Texas.
+
+  [319] A continuous forest extends from old Fort Belknap to the
+  eastern slope of the "Staked Plains," and is the only one through
+  which they could have marched for ten days to the westward.
+
+  [320] _I.e._, less than a peck.
+
+The Governor commanded the captains and principal personages to be
+called together that he might determine now by their opinions what
+was best to do. The majority declared it their judgment to return
+to the River Grande of Guachoya, because in Anilco and thereabout
+was much maize; that during the winter they would build brigantines,
+and the following spring go down the river in them in quest of the
+sea, where having arrived, they would follow the coast thence along
+to New Spain,--an enterprise which, although it appeared to be one
+difficult to accomplish, yet from their experience it offered the
+only course to be pursued. They could not travel by land, for want of
+an interpreter; and they considered the country farther on, beyond
+the River Daycao, on which they were, to be that which Cabeça de Vaca
+had said in his narrative should have to be traversed, where the
+Indians wandered like Arabs, having no settled place of residence,
+living on prickly pears, the roots of plants, and game; and that
+if this should be so, and they, entering upon that tract, found no
+provision for sustenance during winter, they must inevitably perish,
+it being already the beginning of October; and if they remained any
+longer where they were, what with rains and snow, they should neither
+be able to fall back, nor, in a land so poor as that, to subsist.
+
+The Governor, who longed to be again where he could get his full
+measure of sleep, rather than govern and go conquering a country so
+beset for him with hardships, directly returned, getting back from
+whence he came.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 35
+
+     _How the Christians returned to Nilco, and thence went to
+     Minoya, where they prepared to build vessels in which to leave
+     Florida._
+
+
+When what had been determined on was proclaimed in the camp, many
+were greatly disheartened. They considered the voyage by sea to be
+very hazardous, because of their poor subsistence, and as perilous
+as was the journey by land, whereon they had looked to find a rich
+country, before coming to the soil of Christians. This was according
+to what Cabeça de Vaca told the Emperor, that after seeing cotton
+cloth, would be found gold, silver, and stones of much value, and
+they were not yet come to where he had wandered; for before arriving
+there, he had always travelled along the coast, and they were
+marching far within the land; hence by keeping toward the west they
+must unavoidably come to where he had been, as he said that he had
+gone about in a certain region a long time, and marched northward
+into the interior. Now, in Guasco, they had already found some
+turquoises, and shawls of cotton, which the Indians gave them to
+understand, by signs, were brought from the direction of the sunset;
+so that they who should take that course must approach the country of
+Christians.
+
+There was likewise much other discontent. Many grieved to go back,
+and would rather have continued to run the peril of their lives
+than leave Florida poor. They were not equal, however, to changing
+what was resolved on, as the persons of importance agreed with the
+Governor. There was one, nevertheless, who said afterwards that he
+would willingly pluck out an eye, to put out another for Luys de
+Moscoso, so greatly would he grieve to see him prosper; with such
+bitterness did he inveigh against him and some of his friends, which
+he would not have dared to do, only he knew that in a couple of days
+from that time the government would have to be relinquished.
+
+From Daycao, where they were, to the Rio Grande, was a distance of
+one hundred and fifty leagues, which they had marched, toward that
+place, always westwardly; and, as they returned over the way, with
+great difficulty could they find maize to eat; for, wheresoever they
+had passed, the country lay devastated, and the little that was left,
+the Indians had now hidden. The towns they had burned in Naguatex, of
+which they had repented, they found already rebuilt, and the houses
+full of maize. That country is populous and abundant. Pottery is made
+there of clay, little differing from that of Estremoz or Montemor.
+
+To Chaguete, by command of the cacique, the Indians came in peace,
+and said, that the Christian who had remained there would not come.
+The Governor wrote to him, sending ink and paper, that he might
+answer. The purport of the letter stated his determination to leave
+Florida, reminded him of his being a Christian, and that he was
+unwilling to leave him among heathen; that he would pardon the error
+he had committed in going to the Indians, should he return; and
+that if they should wish to detain him, to let the Governor know by
+writing. The Indian who took the letter came back, bringing no other
+response than the name and rubric of the person written on the back,
+to signify that he was alive. The Governor sent twelve mounted men
+after him; but, having his watchers, he so hid himself that he could
+not be found. For want of maize the Governor could not tarry longer
+to look for him; so he left Chaguete, crossed the river at Aays,[321]
+and following it down, he discovered a town which they had not seen
+before, called Chilano.
+
+  [321] This name should be Ayays,--the old crossing-place on the
+  Arkansas River, above Pine Bluff.
+
+They came to Nilco, where the Governor found so little maize, that
+there was not enough to last while they made the vessels; for during
+seed-time, while the Christians were in Guachoya, the Indians, in
+fear of them, had not dared to come and plant the grounds; and no
+other land about there was known to have maize, that being the most
+fertile region of the vicinity, and where they had the most hope of
+finding sustenance. Everybody was confounded.
+
+Many thought it bad counsel to have come back from the Daycao, and
+not to have taken the risk of continuing in the way they were going
+by land; as it seemed impossible they should escape by sea, unless a
+miracle might be wrought for them; for there was neither pilot nor
+sea-chart; they knew not where the river entered the sea, nor of the
+sea could they get any information; they had nothing out of which to
+make sails, nor for rope a sufficiency of enequen (a grass growing
+there, which is like hemp), and what they did find was saved for
+calk; nor was there wherewith to pitch them. Neither could they build
+vessels of such strength that any accident might not put them in
+jeopardy of life; and they greatly feared that what befell Narvaez,
+who was lost on the coast, might happen to them also. But the most of
+all they feared was the want of maize; for without that they could
+not support themselves, or do anything they would. All were in great
+dismay.
+
+The Christians chose to commend themselves to God for relief, and
+beseech Him to point them out a way by which they might be saved. By
+His Goodness He was pleased that the people of Anilco should come
+peacefully, and state that two days' journey thence, near the River
+Grande, were two towns of which the Christians had not heard, in a
+fertile country named Aminoya; but whether it then contained maize
+or not, they were unable to tell, as they were at war with those
+places; they would nevertheless be greatly pleased to go and destroy
+them, with the aid of the Christians. The Governor sent a captain
+thither, with horsemen and footmen, and the Indians of Anilco.
+Arriving at Aminoya,[322] he found two large towns in a level, open
+field, half a league apart, in sight of each other, where he captured
+many persons, and found a large quantity of maize. He took lodging
+in one of the towns, and directly sent a message to the Governor
+concerning what he had found, with which all were well content. They
+set out from Anilco in the beginning of December, and on that march,
+as well as before coming there from Chilano, they underwent great
+exposure; for they passed through much water, and rain fell many
+times, bringing a north wind, with severe cold, so that when in the
+field they had the water both above and below them; and if at the
+end of a day's journey they found dry ground to lie upon, they had
+occasion to be thankful. In these hardships nearly all the Indians in
+service died, and also many Christians, after coming to Aminoya; the
+greater number being sick of severe and dangerous diseases, marked
+with inclination to lethargy. André de Vasconcelos died there, and
+two Portuguese brothers of Elvas, near of kin to him, by the name of
+Soti.
+
+  [322] The town was located above the mouth of the Arkansas River,
+  in Desha County, Arkansas.
+
+The Christians chose for their quarters what appeared to be the best
+town: it was stockaded, and stood a quarter of a league distant from
+the Rio Grande. The maize that lay in the other town was brought
+there, and when together the quantity was estimated to be six
+thousand fanegas.[323] For the building of ships better timber was
+found than had been seen elsewhere in all Florida; on which account,
+all rendered many thanks to God for so signal mercy, encouraging the
+hope in them, that they should be successful in their wish to reach a
+shore of Christians.
+
+  [323] The fanega of Lisbon was somewhat more than a pint.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 36
+
+     _How seven brigantines were built, and the Christians took their
+     departure from Aminoya._
+
+
+So soon as the Christians arrived in Aminoya, the Governor commanded
+the chains to be collected which every one brought along for Indians,
+the iron in shot, and what was in the camp. He ordered a furnace
+to be set up for making spikes, and likewise timber to be cut down
+for the brigantines. A Portuguese, of Ceuta, had learned to saw
+lumber while a captive in Fez; and saws had been brought for that
+purpose, with which he taught others, who assisted him. A Genoese,
+whom God had been pleased to spare (as without him we could not have
+gone away, there being not another person who knew how to construct
+vessels), built the brigantines with the help of four or five
+Biscayan carpenters, who hewed the plank and ribs for him; and two
+calkers, one a Genoese, the other a Sardinian, closed them up with
+the oakum, got from a plant like hemp, called enequen, of which I
+have before spoken; but from its scarcity the flax of the country
+was likewise used, as well as the ravellings of shawls. The cooper
+sickened to the point of death, and there was not another workman;
+but God was pleased to give him health, and notwithstanding he was
+very thin, and unfit to labor, fifteen days before the vessels
+sailed, he had made for each of them two of the half-hogsheads
+sailors call quartos, four of them holding a pipe of water.
+
+The Indians of a province called Tagoanate, two days' journey up the
+river, likewise those of Anilco and Guachoya, and other neighboring
+people, seeing the vessels were building, thought, as their places of
+concealment were by the water's side, that it was the purpose to come
+in quest of them; and because the Governor had asked for shawls, as
+necessary out of which to make sails, they came often, and brought
+many, as likewise a great deal of fish.
+
+Of a verity, it did appear that God chose to favor the Christians
+in their extreme need, disposing the Indians to bring the garments;
+otherwise, there had been no way but to go and fetch them. Then the
+town where they were, as soon as the winter should set in, would
+become so surrounded by water, and isolated, that no one could travel
+from it by land farther than a league, or a league and a half, when
+the horses could no longer be used. Without them we were unable to
+contend, the Indians being so numerous; besides, man to man on foot,
+whether in the water or on dry ground, they were superior, being more
+skilful and active, and the conditions of the country more favorable
+to the practice of their warfare.
+
+They also brought us ropes; and the cables needed were made from the
+bark of the mulberry-trees. Anchors were made of stirrups, for which
+others of wood were substituted. In March, more than a month having
+passed since rain fell, the river became so enlarged that it reached
+Nilco, nine leagues off; and the Indians said, that on the opposite
+side it also extended an equal distance over the country.
+
+The ground whereon the town stood was higher, and where the going was
+best, the water reached to the stirrups. Rafts were made of trees,
+upon which were placed many boughs, whereon the horses stood; and
+in the houses were like arrangements; yet, even this not proving
+sufficient, the people ascended into the lofts; and when they went
+out of the houses it was in canoes, or, if on horseback, they went in
+places where the earth was highest.
+
+Such was our situation for two months, in which time the river did
+not fall, and no work could be done. The natives, coming in canoes,
+did not cease to visit the brigantines. The Governor, fearing they
+would attack him in that time, ordered one of those coming to the
+town to be secretly seized, and kept until the rest were gone; which
+being done, he directed that the prisoner should be tortured, in
+order to draw out from him any plotting of treason that might exist.
+The captive said, that the caciques of Nilco, Guachoya, Taguanate,
+and others, in all some twenty, had determined to come upon him,
+with a great body of people. Three days before they should do so,
+the better to veil their evil purpose and perfidy, they were to
+send a present of fish; and on the day itself, another present was
+to be sent in advance of them, by some Indians, who, with others in
+the conspiracy, that were serving, should set fire to the houses,
+after getting possession of the lances placed near the doors of the
+dwellings, when the caciques, with all their people, being concealed
+in the thicket nigh the town, on seeing the flame, should hasten to
+make an end of them.
+
+The Governor ordered the Indian to be put in a chain; and on the
+day that was stated, thirty men having come with fish, he commanded
+their right hands to be cut off, sending word by them to the cacique
+of Guachoya, whose they were, that he and his might come when they
+pleased, he desired nothing better, but they should learn that they
+could not think of a thing that he did not know their thought before
+them. At this they were all greatly terrified; the caciques of Nilco
+and Taguanate came to make excuses, and a few days after came the
+cacique of Guachoya, with a principal Indian, his vassal, stating
+that he had certain information of an agreement between the caciques
+of Nilco and Taguanate to come and give the Christians battle.
+
+So soon as some Indians arrived from Nilco, the Governor questioned
+them, and they confirming what was said, he delivered them at once to
+the principal Indian of Guachoya, who took them out of the town and
+killed them. The next day came others from Taguanate, who likewise
+having confessed, the Governor commanded that their right hands and
+their noses should be cut off, and he sent them to the cacique. With
+this procedure the people of Guachoya were well satisfied, and often
+came with presents of shawls and fish, and of hogs, which were the
+breeding of some sows lost there the year before. Having persuaded
+the Governor to send people to Taguanate, so soon as the waters fell,
+they brought canoes, in which infantry went down [up] the river, and
+a captain proceeded by land with cavalry; and having guided them
+until they came to Taguanate,[324] the Christians assaulted the
+town, took many men and women, and shawls, which, with what they had
+already, sufficed for their want.
+
+  [324] This province was on White River, and the town was probably
+  in the southern part of Monroe County, Arkansas, possibly at
+  Indian Bay.
+
+In the month of June the brigantines were finished, and the Indians
+having stated that the river rose but once in the year, which was
+with the melting of snow, that had already passed, it being now
+summer, and a long time since rain had fallen, God was pleased that
+the water should come up to the town, where the vessels were, whence
+they floated into the river; for had they been taken over ground,
+there would have been danger of tearing open the bottoms, thereby
+entirely wrecking them, the planks being thin, and the spikes made
+short for the lack of iron.
+
+In the time that the Christians were there, the people of Aminoya
+came to offer their service, being compelled by hunger to beg some
+ears of that corn which had been taken from them. As the country was
+fertile, they were accustomed to subsist on maize; and as all that
+they possessed had been seized, and the population was numerous, they
+could not exist. Those who came to the town were weak, and so lean
+that they had not flesh on their bones, and many died near by, of
+clear hunger and debility. The Governor ordered, under pain of heavy
+punishments, that maize should not be given to them; still, when it
+was seen that they were willing to work, and that the hogs had a
+plenty, the men, pitying their misery and destitution, would share
+their grain with them; so that when the time arrived for departure,
+there was not enough left to answer for what was needed. That which
+remained was put into the brigantines and the great canoes, which
+were tied together in couples. Twenty-two horses were taken on board,
+being the best there were in the camp; the flesh of the rest was
+jerked, as was also that of the hogs that remained. On the second day
+of July, of the year one thousand five hundred and forty-three, we
+took our departure from Aminoya.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 37
+
+     _How the Christians, on their voyage, were attacked in the
+     river, by the Indians of Quigualtam, and what happened._
+
+
+The day before the Christians left Aminoya, it was determined to
+dismiss the men and women that were serving, with the exception of
+some hundred slaves, more or less, put on board by the Governor,
+and by those he favored. As there were many persons of condition,
+whom he could not refuse what he allowed to others, he made use of
+an artifice, saying, that while they should be going down the river
+they might have the use of them; but on coming to the sea they would
+have to be left, because of the necessity for water, and there were
+but few casks; while he secretly told his friends to take the slaves,
+that they would carry them to New Spain. All those to whom he bore
+ill-will, the greater number, not suspecting his concealment from
+them, which after a while appeared, thought it inhuman for so short
+service, in return for so much as the natives had done, to take them
+away, to be left captives out of their territories, in the hands
+of other Indians, abandoning five hundred males and females, among
+whom were many boys and girls who understood and spoke Spanish. The
+most of them wept, which caused great compassion, as they were all
+Christians of their own free will, and were now to remain lost.
+
+In seven brigantines went three hundred and twenty-two Spaniards from
+Aminoya. The vessels were of good build, except that the planks were
+thin, on account of the shortness of the spikes; and they were not
+pitched, nor had they decks to shed the water that might enter them,
+but planks were placed instead, upon which the mariners might run to
+fasten the sails, and the people accommodate themselves above and
+below.
+
+The Governor appointed his captains, giving to each of them his
+brigantine, taking their word and oath to obey him until they should
+come to the land of Christians. He chose for himself the brigantine
+he liked best. On the day of his departure they passed by Guachoya,
+where the Indians, in canoes, were waiting for them in the river,
+having made a great arbor on the shore, to which they invited him,
+but he made excuse, and passed along. They accompanied him until
+arriving where an arm of the river extends to the right,[325] near
+which they said was Quigualtam; and they importuned him to go and
+make war upon it, offering their assistance. As they told him there
+were three days' journey down the river to that province, suspecting
+they had arranged some perfidy, he dismissed them there; then,
+submitting himself to where lay the full strength of the stream, went
+his voyage, driven on rapidly by the power of the current and aid of
+oars.
+
+  [325] This was a channel connecting the Mississippi River with
+  Bayou Macon, and was located in the northern part of Chicot
+  County, Arkansas.
+
+On the first day they came to land in a clump of trees, by the left
+bank, and at dark they retired to the vessels. The following day they
+came to a town, where they went on shore, but the occupants dared not
+tarry for them. A woman who was captured, being questioned, said the
+town was that of a chief named Huhasene, a subject of Quigualtam,
+who, with a great many people, was waiting for them. Mounted men went
+down the river, and finding some houses, in which was much maize,
+immediately the rest followed. They tarried there a day, in which
+they shelled and got ready as much maize as was needed. In this time
+many Indians came up the river in canoes; and, on the opposite side,
+in front, somewhat carelessly put themselves in order of battle.
+The Governor sent after them the crossbowmen he had with him, in
+two canoes, and as many other persons as they could hold, when the
+Indians fled; but, seeing the Spaniards were unable to overtake them,
+returning, they took courage, and, coming nearer, menaced them with
+loud yells. So soon as the Christians retired, they were followed by
+some in canoes, and others on land, along the river; and, getting
+before them, arrived at a town near the river's bluff,[326] where
+they united, as if to make a stand. Into each canoe, for every
+brigantine was towing one at the stern for its service, directly
+entered some men, who, causing the Indians to take flight, burned the
+town. Soon after, on the same day, they went on shore in a large open
+field, where the Indians dared not await their arrival.
+
+  [326] From the time and distance travelled, this place was at the
+  Vicksburg Bluffs.
+
+The next day a hundred canoes came together, having from sixty to
+seventy persons in them, those of the principal men having awnings,
+and themselves wearing white and colored plumes, for distinction.
+They came within two crossbow-shot of the brigantines, and sent a
+message in a small canoe, by three Indians, to the intent of learning
+the character of the vessels, and the weapons that we use. Arriving
+at the brigantine of the Governor, one of the messengers got in,
+and said that he had been sent by the cacique of Quigaltam, their
+lord, to commend him, and to make known that whatever the Indians of
+Guachoya had spoken of him was falsely said, they being his enemies;
+that the chief was his servant, and wished to be so considered. The
+Governor told him that he believed all that he had stated to be true;
+to say so to him, and that he greatly esteemed him for his friendship.
+
+With this the messengers went to where the others, in the canoes,
+were waiting for them; and thence they all came down yelling, and
+approached the Spaniards with threats. The Governor sent Juan de
+Guzman, captain of foot, in the canoes, with twenty-five men in
+armor, to drive them out of the way. So soon as they were seen
+coming, the Indians, formed in two parts, remained quietly until
+they were come up with, when, closing, they took Juan de Guzman, and
+those who came ahead with him, in their midst, and, with great fury,
+closed hand to hand with them. Their canoes were larger than his, and
+many leaped into the water--some to support them, others to lay hold
+of the canoes of the Spaniards, to cause them to capsize, which was
+presently accomplished, the Christians falling into the water, and,
+by the weight of their armor, going to the bottom; or when one by
+swimming, or clinging to a canoe, could sustain himself, they with
+paddles and clubs, striking him on the head, would send him below.
+
+When those in the brigantines who witnessed the defeat desired to
+render succor, the force of the stream would not allow them to
+return. One brigantine, which was that nighest to the canoes, saved
+four men, who were all of those that went after the Indians who
+escaped. Eleven lost their lives; among whom was Juan de Guzman and
+a son of Don Carlos, named Juan de Vargas. The greater number of
+the others were also men of consideration and of courage. Those who
+escaped by swimming said, that they saw the Indians get into the
+stern of one of their canoes with Juan de Guzman, but whether he was
+carried away dead or alive, no one could state.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 38
+
+     _How the Christians were pursued by the Indians._
+
+
+The natives, finding they had gained a victory, took so great
+encouragement that they proceeded to attack the brigantines, which
+they had not dared to before. They first came up with one in the
+rear-guard, commanded by Calderon, and at the first volley of arrows
+twenty-five men were wounded. There were only four on board in
+armor, who went to the side of the vessel for its defence. Those
+unprotected, finding how they were getting hurt, left the oars,
+placing themselves below under the cover; and the brigantine,
+beginning to swing about, was going where the current of water
+chanced to take her, when one of the men in armor, seeing this,
+without waiting the captain's order, made one of the infantry take
+the oar and steer, while he stood before to cover him with his
+shield. The Indians afterwards came no nearer than bow-shot, whence
+they could assail without being assaulted, or receiving injury, there
+being in each brigantine only a single crossbow much out of order; so
+that the Christians had little else to do than to stand as objects to
+be shot at, watching for the shafts. The natives, having left this
+brigantine, went to another, against which they fought for half an
+hour: and one after another, in this way they ran through with them
+all.
+
+The Christians had mats with them to lie upon of two thicknesses,
+very close and strong, so that no arrow could pierce them, and these,
+when safety required, were hung up; and the Indians, finding that
+these could not be traversed, directed their shafts upward, which,
+exhausted, fell on board, inflicting some wounds. Not satisfied
+with this, they strove to get at the men with the horses; but the
+brigantines were brought about the canoes in which they were, to
+give them protection, and in this position conducted them along.
+The Christians, finding themselves thus severely tried, and so worn
+out that they could bear up no longer, determined to continue their
+journey in the dark, thinking that they should be left alone on
+getting through the region of Quigualtam. While they proceeded and
+were least watchful, supposing themselves to be left, they would
+be roused with deafening yells near by; and thus were they annoyed
+through the night and until noon, when they got into another country,
+to the people of which they were recommended for a like treatment,
+and received it.
+
+Those Indians having gone back to their country, these followed the
+Christians in fifty canoes, fighting them all one day and night.
+They sprang on board a brigantine of the rear-guard, by the canoe
+that floated at the stern, whence they took out an Indian woman, and
+wounded from thence some men in the brigantines. The men with the
+horses in the canoes, becoming weary with rowing day and night, at
+times got left behind, when the Indians would directly set upon them,
+and those in the brigantines would wait until they should come up:
+so that in consequence of the slow way that was made, because of the
+beasts, the Governor determined to go on shore and slaughter them.
+So soon as any befitting ground for it was seen, a landing was made,
+the animals were butchered, and the meat cured and brought on board.
+Four or five horses having been let go alive, the Indians, after the
+Spaniards had embarked, went up to them, to whom being unused, they
+were alarmed, running up and down, neighing in such a way that the
+Indians took fright, plunging into the water; and thence entering
+their canoes, they went after the brigantines, shooting at the people
+without mercy, following them that evening and the night ensuing,
+until ten o'clock the next day, when they returned upstream.
+
+From a small town near the bank, there came out seven canoes that
+pursued the Christians a short distance, shooting at them; but
+finding, as they were few, that little harm was done, they went back.
+From that time forth the voyage, until near the end, was unattended
+by any misadventure; the Christians in seventeen days going down a
+distance of two hundred and fifty leagues,[327] a little more or
+less, by the river. When near the sea, it becomes divided into two
+arms, each of which may be a league and a half broad.
+
+  [327] The Inca gives the distance as being seven hundred and
+  fifty leagues. The real distance was about seven hundred and
+  twenty miles.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 39
+
+     _How the Christians came to the sea, what occurred then, and
+     what befell them on the voyage._
+
+
+Half a league before coming to the sea, the Christians cast anchor,
+in order to take rest for a time, as they were weary from rowing.
+They were disheartened also, many days having gone by since they had
+eaten other thing than maize, parched and then boiled, given out in
+daily rations of a casque by strike to a mess of three.
+
+While riding at anchor, seven canoes of natives came to attack those
+we had brought in the canoes along with us. The Governor ordered
+men to enter ours in armor, to go after the Indians and drive them
+away. There also came some by land, through thicket and bog, with
+staves, having very sharp heads of fish-bone, who fought valiantly
+those of us who went out to meet them. Such as were in the canoes,
+awaited with their arrows the approach of those sent against them;
+and presently, on the engaging of these, as well as those on land,
+they wounded some on our side in both contests. When we on shore drew
+nigh to them they would turn their backs, running like fleet steeds
+before infantry, making some turns without ever getting much beyond
+the flight of an arrow, and, returning again, they would shoot
+without receiving any injury from us, who, though we had some bows,
+were not skilled to use them; while the Indians on the water, finding
+their pursuers unable to do them harm, though straining at the oars
+to overtake them, leisurely kept within a circle, their canoes
+pausing and returning, as in a skirmish. The men discovered that the
+more successful their efforts to approach, the greater was their own
+injury; so, when they succeeded simply in driving them off, they went
+back to the brigantines.
+
+After remaining two days, the Christians went to where that branch of
+the river enters the sea; and having sounded there, they found forty
+fathoms depth of water. Pausing then, the Governor required that each
+should give his opinion respecting the voyage, whether they should
+sail to New Spain direct, by the high sea, or go thither keeping
+along from shore to shore. There were different opinions upon this,
+in which Juan de Añasco, who was very presumptuous, valuing himself
+much upon his knowledge of navigation, with other matters of the sea
+of which he had little experience, influenced the Governor; and his
+opinion, like that of some others, was, that it would be much better
+to put out to sea, and cross the Gulf by a passage three-fourths
+less far, than going from shore to shore, which was very circuitous,
+because of the bend made by the land. He said that he had seen the
+sea-chart; that whence they were the coast ran west to the River of
+Palmas, and thence south to New Spain; consequently, that keeping in
+sight of land, there would be wide compassing, with long detention,
+and risk of being overtaken by the winter before coming to the
+country of Christians; while, with a fair wind, in ten or twelve
+days' time they should arrive there, by keeping a straight course.
+
+The majority were not of that way of thinking, and said there was
+more safety in going along the coast, though it might take longer;
+the vessels being frail, and without decks, a light storm might
+suffice to wreck them; and in consequence of the little room they had
+for water, if calm or head wind should occur, or adverse weather,
+they would also run great hazard; but even were the vessels so
+substantial that they might venture in them, there being neither
+pilot nor sea-card to show the way, it was not wise to traverse the
+sea. This, the opinion of the greater number, was approved; and it
+was decided to go along from one to another shore.
+
+When they were about to depart, the brigantine of the Governor
+parted her cable, the anchor attached to it remaining in the river;
+and, notwithstanding she was near the shore, the depth was so great
+that, although it was industriously sought for by divers, it could
+not be found. This gave much anxiety to the Governor and the others
+on board. With a stone for crushing maize, and the bridles that
+remained, belonging to some of the fidalgos and gentlemen who rode,
+they made a weight that took the place of the anchor.
+
+On the eighteenth day of July the vessels got under way, with fair
+weather, and wind favorable for the voyage. The Governor, with Juan
+de Añasco, put to sea in their brigantines, and were followed by all
+the rest, who, at two or three leagues out, having come up with the
+two, the captains asked the Governor why he did not keep the land;
+and told him that if he meant to leave it he should say so, though
+he ought not to do that without having the consent of the rest,
+otherwise they would not follow his lead, but each would do as he
+thought best. The Governor replied that he would do nothing without
+consulting them; he desired to get away from the shore to sail the
+better, and with the greater safety at night; that in the morning,
+when time served, he would return. With a favorable wind they sailed
+all that day in fresh water, the next night, and the day following
+until vespers, at which they were greatly amazed; for they were very
+distant from the shore, and so great was the strength of the current
+of the river, the coast so shallow and gentle, that the fresh water
+entered far into the sea.[328]
+
+  [328] At that time the Atchafalaya probably formed the lower
+  course of Red River, the latter not having cut through to the
+  Mississippi, and it was its current that they encountered.
+
+That afternoon, on the starboard bow, they saw some kays, whither
+they went, and where they reposed at night. There Juan de Añasco,
+with his reasoning, concluded by getting all to consent, and deem
+it good, that they should go to sea, declaring, as he had before
+said, that it would be a great gain, and shorten their voyage. They
+navigated two days, and when they desired to get back in sight of
+land they could not, because the wind came off from it: and on
+the fourth day, finding that the water was giving out, fearing
+extremity and peril, they all complained of Juan de Añasco, and of
+the Governor, who had listened to his advice: and all the captains
+declared they would run no farther out, and that the Governor might
+go as he chose.
+
+It pleased God that the wind should change a little; and, at the
+end of four days from the time of their having gone out to sea, by
+strength of arm they arrived, in want of fresh water, in sight of
+the coast, and with great labor gained it on an open beach. That
+afternoon, the wind came round from the south, which on that coast
+is a side wind, and so stiff that it threw the brigantines on to the
+land, the anchors bending in their slenderness, and dragging. The
+Governor ordered all to leap into the water, on the larboard side,
+to hold them, and when each wave had passed they would launch the
+brigantines to seaward, sustaining them in this manner until the wind
+went down.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 40
+
+     _How the brigantines lost sight of each other in a storm, and
+     afterwards came together at a kay._
+
+
+The tempest having passed off from the beach where the brigantines
+were riding, the people went on shore. With mattocks they dug holes
+there, into which the water having flowed, they thence filled their
+pipkins. The next day they left; and sailing two days, they entered
+a basin, like a cove, which afforded shelter against a high wind
+that blew from the south. There they tarried, unable to leave, until
+the fourth day, when the sea subsided and they went out by rowing.
+They sailed until near evening; the wind then freshened, driving
+them in such manner upon the land, that they regretted having left
+the harbor; for no sooner was it nightfall than the storm began to
+rise on the sea, and with its approach the wind gradually increased.
+The brigantines separated. The two that were farthest out entered
+an arm of the sea, a couple of leagues beyond the place where the
+others found themselves at dark. The five that were astern remained
+from half a league to a league apart, along an exposed beach, upon
+which the winds and waves were casting them, without one vessel's
+knowing the fate of another. The anchors having yielded, the vessels
+were dragging them: the oars, at each of which seven and eight were
+pulling seaward, could not hold the vessels; the rest of the men,
+leaping into the water, with the utmost diligence, after the wave had
+passed that drove them to the shore, would launch the brigantine;
+while those on board, before another wave could come, baled out with
+bowls the water that came in upon them.
+
+While thus engaged, in great fear of being lost, from midnight
+forward they suffered the intolerable torment of a myriad of
+mosquitos. The flesh is directly inflamed from their sting, as though
+it had received venom. Towards morning the wind lulled, and the
+sea went down; but the insects continued none the less. The sails,
+which were white, appeared black with them at daylight; while the
+men could not pull at the oars without assistance to drive away the
+insects. Fear having passed off with the danger of the storm, the
+people observing the swollen condition of each other's faces, and
+the marks of the blows they had given and received to rid them of
+the mosquitos, they could but laugh. The vessels came together in a
+creek, where lay the two brigantines that preceded them. Finding a
+scum the sea casts up, called copee, which is like pitch, and used
+instead on shipping, where that is not to be had, they payed the
+bottoms of their vessels with it.
+
+After remaining two days they resumed their voyage; and having
+run likewise two days, they entered an arm of the sea and landed.
+Spending there a couple of days, they left; six men on the last day
+having gone up the bay in a canoe without finding its head. The
+brigantines went out in a head-wind blowing from the south, which
+being light, and the people having a strong desire to hasten the
+voyage, they pulled out by strength of arm to sea with great toil,
+and making little headway for two days, they entered by an arm of
+the sea behind an islet which it encircles, where followed such bad
+weather, that they were not unmindful to give thanks for that good
+shelter. Fish abounded there. They were taken in nets and with the
+line. A man having thrown out a cord made fast to his arm, a fish
+caught at the hook and drew him into the water up to the neck, when,
+remembering a knife that he had providentially kept, he cut himself
+loose.
+
+At the close of the fourteenth day of their stay, the Almighty having
+thought proper to send fair weather, the Christians very devoutly
+formed a procession for the return of thanks, in which, moving along
+the beach, they supplicated Him that He would take them to a land in
+which they might better do Him service.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 41
+
+     _How the Christians arrived at the river Panico._
+
+
+Wheresoever the people dug along the shore they found fresh water.
+The jars being filled, and the procession concluded, they embarked;
+and, going ever in sight of land, they navigated for six days. Juan
+de Añasco said it would be well to stand directly out to sea; for
+that he had seen the card, and remembered that, from Rio de Palmas
+onward, the coast ran south, and up to that time they had gone
+westwardly. According to his opinion, by the reckoning he kept, the
+river could not be distant from where they were.
+
+That night they ran out, and in the morning they saw palm-trees
+rising above the water, the coast trending southwardly; and from
+midday forward great mountains appeared, which had nowhere been seen
+until then; for to that place, from the port of Espiritu Santo, where
+they had entered Florida, was a low, level shore, not discoverable
+at sea until very near. From what they observed, they thought that
+during the night they had passed the Rio de Palmas, sixty leagues
+distant from Panico, in New Spain. So they consulted together.
+
+Some were of opinion that it would not be well to sail in the dark,
+lest they should overrun the Rio de Panico; others, that they could
+not be so near as to run by it that night, and that it would not be
+well to lose a favorable wind; so they agreed to spread half the
+sails and keep on their way. Two of the brigantines, which ran with
+all sail up, at daylight passed the river without seeing it: of
+the five that remained behind, the first that arrived was the one
+Calderon commanded, from which, when a quarter of a league off, and
+before the entrance had been discovered, the water was observed to
+be thick and found to be fresh. Coming opposite the river, they saw
+where the waves broke upon a shoal, at the entrance into the sea;
+and, not any one knowing the place, they were in doubt whether they
+should go in there or pass by; but finally, having agreed to enter,
+they approached the shore without getting into the current, and went
+in the port, where no sooner had they come, than they saw Indians
+of both sexes in the apparel of Spain. Asking in what country they
+were, they received the answer in their own language, that it was the
+Rio de Panico,[329] and that the town of the Christians was fifteen
+leagues inland. The pleasure that all received at this news cannot
+be sufficiently expressed: they felt as though a life had been newly
+given them. Many, leaping on shore, kissed the ground; and all, on
+bended knees, with hands raised above them, and their eyes to heaven,
+remained untiring in giving thanks to God.
+
+  [329] Or Pánuco. A Mexican river which flows into the Gulf about
+  a hundred and fifty miles north of Vera Cruz.
+
+Those who were coming astern, when they saw that Calderon with his
+brigantine had anchored in the river, directly steered to enter the
+port. The other two, which had gone by, tried to run to sea, that
+they might put about and join the rest, but could not, the wind
+being adverse and the sea fretful; so, fearing that they might be
+lost, they came nigh the land and cast anchor. A storm came up, and
+finding that they could not sustain themselves there, much less at
+sea, they determined to run on shore; and as the brigantines were
+small, drawing but little water, and the beach sandy, the force of
+the wind on the sails carried them up dry, without injury to any one.
+
+If those who gained the haven at that time were made happy, these
+were oppressed by a double weight of gloom, not knowing what had
+happened to their companions, nor in what country they were, fearing
+likewise that it might be one of a hostile people. They had come
+upon the coast two leagues below the port. So soon as they found
+themselves clear of the sea, each took on the back what he could
+carry of his things, and, travelling inland, they found Indians, who
+told whence they were, and changed what was sorrow into joy. The
+Christians rendered many thanks to God for having rescued them from
+those numberless perils.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 42
+
+     _How the Christians came to Panico, and of their reception by
+     the inhabitants._
+
+
+From the time the Christians left the River Grande, to come by sea
+from Florida to the River of Panico, were fifty-two days. On the
+tenth day of September, of the year 1543, they entered the Panico,
+going up with the brigantines. In the many windings taken by the
+stream, the light wind was often unfavorable, and the vessels in
+many places made slow headway, having to be towed with much labor
+against a strong current; so that, after having sailed four days, the
+people, discovering themselves greatly retarded in the desire to get
+among Christians, and of taking part in the divine offices, which
+for a long season had not been listened to by them, they gave up the
+brigantines to the sailors, and went on by land to Panico.
+
+Just as the Christians arrived at the town, in their clothing of
+deer-skin, dressed and dyed black, consisting of frock, hose, and
+shoes, they all went directly to the church, to pray and return
+thanks for their miraculous preservation. The townspeople, having
+already been informed of their coming by the Indians, and now knowing
+of the arrival, invited some to their houses, and entertained them
+for acquaintance sake, or for having heard of them, or because
+they came from the same parts of country with themselves. The
+alcalde-mayor took the Governor home with him: the rest, as they came
+up, he directed to be lodged by sixes and tens, according to the
+means of individuals, who provided their guests with abundance of
+fowls and maizen-bread, and with the fruits of the country, which are
+like those of Cuba, already described.
+
+The town of Panico might contain some seventy housekeepers. The
+dwellings were chiefly of stone and mortar; some were of poles, and
+all of them thatched with grass. The country is poor. No gold or
+silver is to be found. Residents have the fullest supply both of food
+and servants. The most wealthy have not an income above five hundred
+cruzados annually, which is tribute paid by their Indian vassals, in
+cotton clothing, fowls, and maize.
+
+Of the persons who got back from Florida, there landed at that port
+three hundred and eleven Christians. The alcalde-mayor directly sent
+a townsman by post to inform the Viceroy, who resided in Mexico,
+of the arrival of three hundred of the men who had gone with Don
+Hernando de Soto in the discovery and conquest of Florida; and, for
+their being in the service of the King, that he would make provision
+for their support. Don Antonio de Mendoza[330] was greatly amazed
+at this news, as were all others of that city; for the people
+having entered far into Florida, they had been considered lost,
+nothing being heard from them in a long while; and it appeared to
+him to be a thing impossible, that without a fortress to which they
+might betake themselves, or support of any sort, they should have
+sustained themselves for such a length of time among the heathen. He
+immediately gave an order, directing that subsistence should be given
+them wheresoever it might be needed, and the Indians found requisite
+for carrying their burdens; and, should there be refusal, to take by
+force, without incurring any penalty, whatsoever should be necessary.
+The mandate was so well obeyed, that on the road, before the people
+had arrived at the towns, the inhabitants went out to receive them,
+bringing fowls and provisions.
+
+  [330] The viceroy.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 43
+
+     _The favor the people found in the Viceroy and residents of
+     Mexico._
+
+
+From Panico to the great city of Mestitam (Mexico), there are sixty
+leagues, and as many leagues from each to the port of Vera Cruz,
+which is where the embarkations take place for Spain, and where those
+who go hence to New Spain arrive. These three towns, equidistant, are
+inhabited by Spaniards, and form a triangle: Vera Cruz on the south,
+Panico on the east, and Mexico, which is inland, on the west. The
+country is so populous, that the Indian towns farthest apart are not
+more than half a league to a league from each other.
+
+Some of the people who came from Florida remained in Panico, reposing
+a month, others fifteen days, or such time as each pleased; for no
+one turned a grudging face to his guest, but, on the contrary, gave
+him of every thing he had, and appeared sad at his leave-taking;
+which may well enough be believed, for the provision the natives
+brought in payment of their tribute more than sufficed for
+consumption, so that there was no one in that town to buy or to sell,
+and few Spaniards being there, the inhabitants were glad of company.
+All the clothing in the custody of the alcalde-mayor, paid to him
+there as the Emperor's tax, he divided among those that would go to
+receive any.
+
+He who had a coat of mail was happy, since for it a horse might be
+had in exchange. Some got mounted, and those not able to get beasts,
+who were the greater number, took up the journey on foot. They were
+well received by the Indians, and better served than they could have
+been at their own homes, particularly in respect of everything to
+eat; for, if an Indian was asked for a fowl, he would bring four; and
+if for any sort of fruit, though it might be a league off, some one
+would run to fetch it; and were a Christian ill, the people would
+carry him, in a chair, from their own to the next town. Wheresoever
+they came, the cacique of the place, through an Indian who bears a
+rod of justice in his hand they call tapile (which is equivalent to
+saying meirinho), ordered provisions to be brought, and men for the
+loads of such things as there were, and the others necessary to carry
+the invalids.
+
+The Viceroy sent a Portuguese to them, twenty leagues from Mexico,
+with quantity of confections, raisins, pomegranates, and other
+matters proper for the sick, should they need them; and, in advance,
+ordered that all should be clothed at the royal charge. The news of
+their approach being known to the citizens, they went out on the
+highway to receive them, and with great courtesy entreated for their
+companionship as favor, each one taking to his house as many as he
+dared, giving them for raiment all the best he could, the least well
+dressed wearing clothes worth thirty cruzados and upward. Clothing
+was given to those who chose to go for it to the residence of the
+Viceroy, and the persons of condition ate at his board: at his house
+was a table for all those of less rank that would eat there. Directly
+he informed himself of the quality of each one, that he might show
+him the consideration that was his due. Some of the conquistadores
+placed them all down to table together, fidalgos and boors,
+oftentimes seating the servant and his master shoulder to shoulder;
+which was done mostly by artisans and men of mean condition, those
+better bred asking who each one was, and making a difference in
+persons.
+
+Nevertheless, all did the best they could with good will, telling
+those they had under their roofs that they could bring no
+impoverishment, nor should they hesitate to receive whatsoever they
+offered; since they had found themselves in like condition when
+others had assisted them, such being the fortunes of the country.
+God reward them: and those whom He saw fit should escape, coming out
+of Florida to tread the soil of Christians, be He pleased that they
+live to serve Him; and to the dead, and to all those who believe
+in Him, and confess that in Him is their faith, grant, through His
+compassion, the glory of paradise. Amen.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 44
+
+     _Which sets forth some of the diversities and peculiarities of
+     Florida; and the fruit, birds, and beasts of the country._
+
+
+From the port of Espiritu Santo, where the Christians went on shore,
+to the province of Ocute, which may be a distance of four hundred
+leagues, a little more or less, the country is very level, having
+many ponds, dense thickets, and, in places, tall pine-trees: the soil
+is light, and there is not in it a mountain nor a hill.
+
+The land of Ocute is more strong and fertile than the rest, the
+forest more open; and it has very good fields along the margins
+of the rivers. From there to Cutifachiqui are about one hundred
+and thirty leagues, of which eighty leagues are of desert and pine
+forests, through which run great rivers. From Cutifachiqui to Xuala
+there may be two hundred and fifty leagues, and all a country of
+mountains: the places themselves are on high level ground, and have
+good fields upon the streams.
+
+Thence onward, through Chiaha, Coça, and Talise, the country of which
+is flat, dry, and strong, yielding abundance of maize, to Tascaluça,
+may be two hundred and fifty leagues; and thence to Rio Grande, a
+distance of about three hundred leagues, the land is low, abounding
+in lakes. The country afterward is higher, more open, and more
+populous than any other in Florida; and along the River Grande, from
+Aquixo to Pacaha and Coligoa, a distance of one hundred and fifty
+leagues, the land is level, the forest open, and in places the fields
+very fertile and inviting.
+
+From Coligoa to Autiamque may be two hundred and fifty leagues of
+mountainous country; thence to Guacay may be two hundred and thirty
+leagues of level ground; and the region to Daycao, a distance of one
+hundred and twenty leagues, is continuously of mountainous lands.
+
+From the port of Espiritu Santo to Apalache they marched west and
+northeast; from Cutifachiqui to Xuala, north; to Coça, westwardly;
+and thence to Tascaluça and the River Grande, as far as the provinces
+of Quizquiz and Aquixo, to the westward; from thence to Pacaha
+northwardly, to Tula westwardly, to Autiamque southwardly, as far as
+the province of Guachoya and Daycao.
+
+The bread that is eaten all through Florida is made of maize, which
+is like coarse millet; and in all the islands and Indias belonging
+to Castile, beginning with the Antillas, grows this grain. There
+are in the country many walnuts likewise, and plums (persimmons),
+mulberries, and grapes. The maize is planted and picked in, each
+person having his own field; fruit is common for all, because it
+grows abundantly in the woods, without any necessity of setting
+out trees or pruning them. Where there are mountains the chestnut
+is found, the fruit of which is somewhat smaller than the one of
+Spain. Westward of the Rio Grande the walnut differs from that which
+is found before coming there, being of tenderer shell, and in form
+like an acorn; while that behind, from the river back to the port
+of Espiritu Santo, is generally rather hard, the tree and the nut
+being in their appearance like those of Spain. There is everywhere
+in the country a fruit, the produce of a plant like _ligoacam_, that
+is propagated by the Indians, having the appearance of the royal
+pear, with an agreeable smell and taste; and likewise another plant,
+to be seen in the fields, bearing a fruit like strawberry, near to
+the ground, and is very agreeable. The plums (persimmons) are of two
+sorts, vermilion and gray, of the form and size of walnuts, having
+three or four stones in them. They are better than any plums that are
+raised in Spain, and make much better prunes. The grapes appear only
+to need dressing; for, although large, they have great stones; the
+other fruits are all in great perfection, and are less unhealthy than
+those of Spain.
+
+There are many lions and bears in Florida, wolves, deer, jackals,
+cats, and rabbits; numerous wild fowl, as large as pea-fowl; small
+partridges, like those of Africa, and cranes, ducks, pigeons,
+thrushes, and sparrows. There are blackbirds larger than sparrows and
+smaller than stares; hawks, goshawks, falcons, and all the birds of
+rapine to be found in Spain.
+
+The Indians are well proportioned: those of the level country are
+taller and better shaped of form than those of the mountains; those
+of the interior enjoy a greater abundance of maize and clothing than
+those of the coast, where the land is poor and thin, and the people
+along it more warlike.
+
+The direction from the port of Espiritu Santo to Apalache, and thence
+to Rio de las Palmas, is from east to west; from that river towards
+New Spain, it is southwardly; the sea-coast being gentle, having many
+shoals and high sand-hills.
+
+  DEO GRATIAS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+This Relation of the Discovery of Florida was printed in the house of
+Andree de Burgos, Printer and Cavalleiro of the house of the Senhor
+Cardinal Iffante.[331]
+
+  [331] Henry, cardinal archbishop of Evora, uncle of King John
+  III., great uncle of King Sebastian, and himself King of Portugal
+  from 1578 to 1580.
+
+It was finished the tenth day of February, of the year one thousand
+five hundred and fifty-seven, in the noble and ever loyal city of
+Evora.
+
+
+
+
+THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF CORONADO, BY PEDRO DE CASTAÑEDA
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+
+From the time of the appearance in Mexico, in 1536, of Alvar Nuñez
+Cabeza de Vaca of the ill-fated Narvaez expedition of nine years
+before, with definite news of the hitherto unknown north, there
+had been a strong desire to explore that region, but nothing of
+importance was accomplished until 1539. In that year Fray Marcos of
+Nice, the Father Provincial of the Franciscan order in New Spain,
+with Estévan, the negro companion of Cabeza de Vaca, as a guide,
+penetrated the country to the northwest as far as the Seven Cities of
+Cibola, the villages of the ancestors of the present Zuñi Indians in
+western New Mexico. Estévan, preceding Fray Marcos by a few days and
+accompanied by natives whom he gathered en route, reached Hawikuh,
+the southernmost of the seven towns, where he and all but three of
+his Indian followers were killed. The survivors of this massacre fled
+back to Fray Marcos, whose life was now threatened by those who had
+lost their kindred at the hands of the Zuñis; but the friar, fearful
+that the world would lose the knowledge of his discoveries, appeased
+the wrath of his Indians by dividing among them the goods he had
+brought and induced them to continue until he reached a mesa from
+which was gained a view of the village in which Estévan had met his
+fate. Here Fray Marcos erected a cross, took possession of the region
+in the name of Spain, and hastened back to Mexico "with more fear
+than victuals."
+
+The glowing accounts which the friar gave of what he had seen, and
+particularly of what he believed the Indians intended to communicate
+to him, resulted in another expedition in the following year (1540).
+This was planned by the Viceroy Don Antonio de Mendoza, and the
+command was given to Francisco Vazquez de Coronado.
+
+The elaborate expedition of Coronado is the subject of the narrative
+of a private soldier in his army, Pedro de Castañeda, a native of
+Nájera, in the province of Logroño, in the upper valley of the Ebro,
+in Old Castile. Of the narrator little is known beyond the fact that
+he was one of the colonists who settled at San Miguel Culiacan,
+founded by Nuño de Guzman in 1531, where he doubtless lived when
+Coronado's force reached that point in its northward journey, and
+where, more than twenty years later, he wrote his account of the
+expedition and its achievements. The dates of Castañeda's birth
+and death are not known, but he was born probably between 1510 and
+1518. In 1554, according to a document published in the _Coleccion
+de Documentos Inéditos del Archivo de Indias_ (XIV. 206), his wife,
+María de Acosta, with her four sons and four daughters, filed a claim
+against the treasury of New Spain for payment for the service the
+husband and father had rendered in behalf of the King.
+
+As a rhetorician and geographer Castañeda was not a paragon, as he
+himself confesses; but although his narration leaves the impression
+that its author was somewhat at odds with the world, it bears every
+evidence of honesty and a sincere desire to tell all he knew of the
+most remarkable expedition that ever traversed American soil--even
+of exploits in which the writer did not directly participate.
+Castañeda's narration is by far the most important of the several
+documents bearing on the expedition, and in some respects is one of
+the most noteworthy contributions to early American history.
+
+The accompanying translation, by Mr. George Parker Winship of the
+John Carter Brown Library, was first published, together with other
+documents pertaining to the expedition, in the _Fourteenth Annual
+Report of the Bureau of Ethnology_ (Washington, 1896), now out of
+print. Barring a few corrections, most of which were communicated to
+the present writer by Mr. Winship in 1899, the translation is here
+printed as it first appeared.
+
+Mr. Winship's translation of Castañeda, together with the letters and
+the other narratives pertaining to the expedition, was reprinted,
+with an introduction, under the title _The Journey of Coronado,
+1540-1542, from the City of Mexico to the Grand Cañon of the Colorado
+and the Buffalo Plains of Texas, Kansas, and Nebraska_, as a volume
+of the "Trail Makers" series (New York, 1904).
+
+The original manuscript of Castañeda is not known to exist, the
+Winship translation being that of a manuscript copy made at Seville
+in 1596. This copy, which is now in the Lenox branch of the New
+York Public Library, was first translated into French by Henri
+Ternaux-Compans, who found it in the Uguina collection in Paris and
+published it in Volume IX. of his _Voyages_ (Paris, 1838).
+
+In addition to Castañeda's narration there are several letters and
+reports that shed important light on the route traversed by the
+expedition, the aborigines encountered, and other noteworthy details
+which the student should consult. These are as follows:
+
+1. The Relation by Fray Marcos of his _entrada_ during the preceding
+year (1539), Coronado following the same route as far as the first of
+the Seven Cities of Cibola with Marcos as both guide and spiritual
+adviser. A brief bibliography of this narration is given in a note on
+p. 290.
+
+2. A letter from the viceroy, Don Antonio de Mendoza, to the King,
+dated Jacona (Mexico), April 17, 1540, in which is set forth the
+progress of Coronado's expedition from Culiacan, and containing
+extracts from a report by Melchior Diaz, who had been sent forward in
+November, 1539, to explore the route from Culiacan to Chichilticalli,
+in the valley of the present Gila River, Arizona, for the purpose
+of verifying the reports of Fray Marcos. This letter appears in the
+_Documentos Inéditos de Indias_, II. 356, and in English in Winship's
+memoir in the _Fourteenth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology_,
+p. 547, as well as in his _Journey of Coronado_, p. 149.
+
+3. An important and extended letter from Coronado to Mendoza, written
+at Granada (as Coronado called Hawikuh, the first of the Seven
+Cities of Cibola), August 3, 1540. This letter appears in Italian in
+Ramusio's _Terzo Volume delle Navigationi et Viaggi_ (ed. 1556),
+fol. 359, translated by Hakluyt, _Voyages_, IX. 145-169 (ed. 1904);
+reprinted in _Old South Leaflets,_ Gen. Ser., No. 20. A translation
+from Ramusio into English appears in both of Mr. Winship's works on
+the expedition. It should perhaps here be mentioned that the Hakluyt
+translations of the Coronado documents, at least, are so unreliable
+as to warrant careful use.
+
+4. The _Traslado de las Nuevas_, an anonymous "Copy of the Reports
+and Descriptions that have been received regarding the Discovery
+of a City which is called Cibola, situated in the New Country."
+This important document was written evidently by a member of the
+expedition while the Spaniards were at Cibola. It appears in Spanish
+in the _Documentos Inéditos de Indias_, XIX. 529, from which it was
+translated into English by Mr. Winship and printed in each of his
+memoirs.
+
+5. The important letter of Coronado to the King, dated Tiguex (the
+present Bernalillo, New Mexico), October 20, 1541, after the return
+of the expedition from Quivira. Printed in the _Documentos Inéditos
+de Indias_, III. 363; XIII. 261; in French in Ternaux-Compans'
+_Voyages_, IX. 355; translated into English by Mr. Winship and
+printed in each of his memoirs, as well as in _American History
+Leaflets_, No. 13.
+
+6. The _Relación Postrera de Síbola, y de mas de Cuatrocientas
+Leguas Adelante_ (the "Latest Account of Cibola, and of more than
+Four Hundred Leagues Beyond"). This important anonymous account,
+written apparently in New Mexico in 1541 by one of the Franciscans
+who accompanied the expedition, was published, both in Spanish and in
+English, for the first time, in Mr. Winship's _Coronado Expedition_
+(_Fourteenth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology_, pp. 566-571).
+In his _Journey of Coronado_ only the translation appears (pp.
+190-196).
+
+7. The anonymous _Relación del Suceso_, an "Account of what happened
+on the Journey which Francisco Vazquez made to discover Cibola."
+First printed, in Spanish, in Buckingham Smith's _Colección de Varios
+Documentos para la Historia de la Florida_ (1857), I. 147; it appears
+also, under the erroneous date 1531, in the _Documentos Inéditos
+de Indias_, XIV. 318, whereas the account was written apparently in
+1541 or early in 1542. An English translation appears in each of Mr.
+Winship's works, and also in _American History Leaflets_, No. 13.
+
+8. "Account given by Captain Juan Jaramillo of the Journey which he
+made to the New Country, on which Francisco Vazquez Coronado was the
+General." Next to Castañeda's narration this is the most important
+document pertaining to the expedition, inasmuch as it contains many
+references to directions, distances, streams, etc., that are not
+noted in the other accounts. The Jaramillo narration was written long
+after the events transpired, and is based on the keen memory of the
+writer. It is printed in Spanish in Buckingham Smith's _Coleccion_,
+I. 154, and in the _Documentos Inéditos_, XIV. 304. A French
+translation is given by Ternaux-Compans, IX. 364, and an English
+translation in both of Mr. Winship's works.
+
+9. "Account of what Hernando de Alvarado and Friar Juan de Padilla
+discovered going in Search of the South Sea." A brief account of the
+journey of Alvarado from Hawikuh (Coronado's Granada) to the Rio
+Grande pueblos in 1540. Printed in Spanish in Buckingham Smith's
+_Coleccion_, I. 65, and in the _Documentos Inéditos_, III. 511. An
+English translation by Mr. Winship is included in each of his works
+on the expedition, and was printed also in the _Boston Transcript_,
+October 14, 1893. The title of this document is a misnomer, as
+Alvarado did not go in search of the Pacific.
+
+10. "Testimony concerning those who went on the Expedition with
+Francisco Vazquez Coronado." This testimony is printed in the
+_Documentos Inéditos de Indias_, XIV. 373, and an abridgment, freely
+translated, is included in Mr. Winship's works.
+
+11. Although the account of the voyage of the fleet under Hernando
+de Alarcon does not directly concern us, reference should perhaps be
+made to the sources of information regarding it. These are: Herrera's
+_Historia General_, dec. VI., lib. IX., cap. XIII. (1601-1615), and
+in various subsequent editions; Ramusio's _Navigationi et Viaggi_
+(1556), III., fol. 363-370; Hakluyt's _Voyages_, IX. 279-318 (1904);
+Ternaux-Compans' Voyages, IX. 299-348; _Coleccion de Documentos
+Inéditos para la Historia de España_, IV. 218-219.
+
+The Coronado expedition was of far-reaching importance from a
+geographical point of view, for it combined with the journey of De
+Soto in giving to the world an insight into the hitherto unknown
+vast interior of the northern continent and formed the basis of
+the cartography of that region. It was the means also of making
+known the sedentary Pueblo tribes of our Southwest and the hunting
+tribes of the Great Plains, the Grand Cañon of the Colorado and the
+lower reaches of that stream, and the teeming herds of bison and
+the absolute dependence on them by the hunting Indians for every
+want. But alas for the Spaniards, the grand pageant resulted in
+disappointment for all, and its indefatigable leader ended his days
+practically forgotten by his country for which he had accomplished so
+much.
+
+  F. W. HODGE.
+
+
+
+
+THE NARRATIVE OF THE EXPEDITION OF CORONADO BY CASTAÑEDA
+
+     _Account of the Expedition to Cibola which took place in the
+     year 1540, in which all those settlements, their ceremonies
+     and customs, are described. Written by Pedro de Castañeda, of
+     Najera._[332]
+
+  [332] For information concerning the author of this narrative,
+  see the Introduction.
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+To me it seems very certain, my very noble lord, that it is a worthy
+ambition for great men to desire to know and wish to preserve for
+posterity correct information concerning the things that have
+happened in distant parts, about which little is known. I do not
+blame those inquisitive persons who, perchance with good intentions,
+have many times troubled me not a little with their requests that I
+clear up for them some doubts which they have had about different
+things that have been commonly related concerning the events and
+occurrences that took place during the expedition to Cibola, or
+the New Land, which the good viceroy--may he be with God in His
+glory--Don Antonio de Mendoza,[333] ordered and arranged, and on
+which he sent Francisco Vazquez de Coronado as captain-general. In
+truth, they have reason for wishing to know the truth, because most
+people very often make things of which they have heard, and about
+which they have perchance no knowledge, appear either greater or
+less than they are. They make nothing of those things that amount to
+something, and those that do not they make so remarkable that they
+appear to be something impossible to believe. This may very well have
+been caused by the fact that, as that country was not permanently
+occupied, there has not been any one who was willing to spend his
+time in writing about its peculiarities, because all knowledge was
+lost of that which it was not the pleasure of God--He alone knows
+the reason--that they should enjoy. In truth, he who wishes to
+employ himself thus in writing out the things that happened on the
+expedition, and the things that were seen in those lands, and the
+ceremonies and customs of the natives, will have matter enough to
+test his judgment, and I believe that the result can not fail to be
+an account which, describing only the truth, will be so remarkable
+that it will seem incredible.
+
+  [333] Mendoza was first viceroy of New Spain (Mexico), serving
+  from 1535 to 1550, when he was ordered to Peru as its second
+  viceroy. He reached Lima in September, 1551, and died July 21 of
+  the year following.
+
+And besides, I think that the twenty years and more since that
+expedition took place[334] have been the cause of some stories which
+are related. For example, some make it an uninhabitable country,
+others have it bordering on Florida, and still others on Greater
+India, which does not appear to be a slight difference. They are
+unable to give any basis upon which to found their statements.
+There are those who tell about some very peculiar animals, who are
+contradicted by others who were on the expedition, declaring that
+there was nothing of the sort seen. Others differ as to the limits
+of the provinces and even in regard to the ceremonies and customs,
+attributing what pertains to one people to others. All this has had
+a large part, my very noble lord, in making me wish to give now,
+although somewhat late, a short general account for all those who
+pride themselves on this noble curiosity, and to save myself the
+time taken up by these solicitations. Things enough will certainly
+be found here which are hard to believe. All or the most of these
+were seen with my own eyes, and the rest is from reliable information
+obtained by inquiry of the natives themselves. Understanding as I do
+that this little work would be nothing in itself, lacking authority,
+unless it were favored and protected by a person whose authority
+would protect it from the boldness of those who, without reverence,
+give their murmuring tongues liberty, and knowing as I do how great
+are the obligations under which I have always been, and am, to your
+grace, I humbly beg to submit this little work to your protection.
+May it be received as from a faithful retainer and servant. It will
+be divided into three parts, that it may be better understood. The
+first will tell of the discovery and the armament or army that was
+made ready, and of the whole journey, with the captains who were
+there; the second, of the villages and provinces which were found,
+and their limits, and ceremonies and customs, the animals, fruits,
+and vegetation, and in what parts of the country these are; the
+third, of the return of the army and the reasons for abandoning the
+country, although these were insufficient, because this is the best
+place there is for discoveries--the marrow of the land in these
+western parts, as will be seen. And after this has been made plain,
+some remarkable things which were seen will be described at the
+end, and the way by which one might more easily return to discover
+that better land which we did not see, since it would be no small
+advantage to enter the country through the land which the Marquis of
+the Valley, Don Fernando Cortes, went in search of under the Western
+star, and which cost him no small sea armament. May it please our
+Lord to so favor me that with my slight knowledge and small abilities
+I may be able by relating the truth to make my little work pleasing
+to the learned and wise readers, when it has been accepted by your
+grace. For my intention is not to gain the fame of a good composer or
+rhetorician, but I desire to give a faithful account and to do this
+slight service to your grace, who will, I hope, receive it as from a
+faithful servant and soldier, who took part in it. Although not in
+a polished style, I write that which happened--that which I heard,
+experienced, saw, and did.
+
+  [334] Castañeda is supposed to have been writing at Culiacan, in
+  western Mexico, about 1565.
+
+I always notice, and it is a fact, that for the most part when we
+have something valuable in our hands, and deal with it without
+hindrance, we do not value or prize it so highly as if we understood
+how much we should miss it after we had lost it, and the longer we
+continue to have it the less we value it; but after we have lost it
+and miss the advantages of it, we have a great pain in the heart, and
+we are all the time imagining and trying to find ways and means by
+which to get it back again. It seems to me that this has happened to
+all or most of those who went on the expedition which, in the year
+of our Savior Jesus Christ 1540, Francisco Vazquez Coronado led in
+search of the Seven Cities.[335] Granted that they did not find the
+riches of which they had been told, they found a place in which to
+search for them and the beginning of a good country to settle in, so
+as to go on farther from there. Since they came back from the country
+which they conquered and abandoned, time has given them a chance to
+understand the direction and locality in which they were, and the
+borders of the good country they had in their hands, and their hearts
+weep for having lost so favorable an opportunity. Just as men see
+more at the bullfight when they are upon the seats than when they are
+around in the ring, now when they know and understand the direction
+and situation in which they were, and see, indeed, that they can
+not enjoy it nor recover it, now when it is too late they enjoy
+telling about what they saw, and even of what they realize that they
+lost, especially those who are now as poor as when they went there.
+They have never ceased their labors and have spent their time to no
+advantage. I say this because I have known several of those who came
+back from there who amuse themselves now by talking of how it would
+be to go back and proceed to recover that which is lost, while others
+enjoy trying to find the reason why it was discovered at all. And now
+I will proceed to relate all that happened from the beginning.
+
+  [335] The Seven Cities of Cibola. See p. 287, note 1; p. 300,
+  note 1.
+
+
+
+
+FIRST PART
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 1
+
+     _Which treats of the way we first came to know about the Seven
+     Cities, and of how Nuño de Guzman made an expedition to discover
+     them._
+
+
+In the year 1530 Nuño de Guzman, who was President of New Spain,[336]
+had in his possession an Indian, a native of the valley or valleys of
+Oxitipar, who was called Tejo by the Spaniards. This Indian said he
+was the son of a trader who was dead, but that when he was a little
+boy his father had gone into the back country with fine feathers to
+trade for ornaments, and that when he came back he brought a large
+amount of gold and silver, of which there is a good deal in that
+country. He went with him once or twice, and saw some very large
+villages, which he compared to Mexico and its environs. He had seen
+seven very large towns which had streets of silver workers. It took
+forty days to go there from his country, through a wilderness in
+which nothing grew, except some very small plants about a span high.
+The way they went was up through the country between the two seas,
+following the northern direction. Acting on this information, Nuño
+de Guzman got together nearly 400 Spaniards and 20,000 friendly
+Indians of New Spain, and, as he happened to be in Mexico, he crossed
+Tarasca, which is in the province of Michoacan, so as to get into
+the region which the Indian said was to be crossed toward the North
+Sea, in this way getting to the country which they were looking for,
+which was already named "The Seven Cities." He thought, from the
+forty days of which the Tejo had spoken, that it would be found to
+be about 200 leagues, and that they would easily be able to cross
+the country. Omitting several things that occurred on this journey,
+as soon as they had reached the province of Culiacan, where his
+government ended, and where the New Kingdom of Galicia is now, they
+tried to cross the country, but found the difficulties very great,
+because the mountain chains which are near that sea are so rough that
+it was impossible, after great labor, to find a passageway in that
+region. His whole army had to stay in the district of Culiacan for
+so long on this account that some rich men who were with him, who
+had possessions in Mexico, changed their minds, and every day became
+more anxious to return. Besides this, Nuño de Guzman received word
+that the Marquis of the Valley, Don Fernando Cortes, had come from
+Spain with his new title,[337] and with great favors and estates, and
+as Nuño de Guzman had been a great rival of his at the time he was
+president, and had done much damage to his property and to that of
+his friends, he feared that Don Fernando Cortes would want to pay him
+back in the same way, or worse. So he decided to establish the town
+of Culiacan there and to go back with the other men, without doing
+anything more. After his return from this expedition, he founded
+Xalisco, where the city of Compostela is situated, and Tonala, which
+is called Guadalaxara, and now this is the New Kingdom of Galicia.
+The guide they had, who was called Tejo, died about this time, and
+thus the name of these Seven Cities and the search for them remains
+until now, since they have not been discovered.[338]
+
+  [336] Nuño Beltrán de Guzman was appointed governor of Pánuco,
+  Mexico, in 1526, assuming the office in May, 1527. In December
+  he became president of the Audiencia, the administrative and
+  judicial board which governed the province, and in the following
+  year participated in the trial of Cortés, his personal and
+  political enemy, for strangling his wife to death in 1522.
+  Guzman's barbarous cruelty, especially to the natives, whom
+  he enslaved and bartered for his personal gain, resulted in a
+  protest to the crown by Bishop Zumárraga, and in the hope of
+  finding new fields for the gratification of his avarice he raised
+  a large force, including 10,000 Aztecs and Tlascaltecs, and
+  started from Mexico late in 1529 to explore the northwest (later
+  known as Nueva Galicia), notwithstanding Cortés had already
+  penetrated the region.
+
+  He conquered the territory through which he passed, laying waste
+  the settlements and fields and inflicting unspeakable punishment
+  on the native inhabitants. Guzman built a chapel at Tonalá, which
+  formed the beginning of the settlement of the present city of
+  Guadalajara, named from his native town in Spain; he also founded
+  the towns of Santiago de Compostela and San Miguel Culiacan,
+  in Tepic and Sinaloa respectively, and started on his return
+  journey late in 1531. Meanwhile a new Audiencia had arrived in
+  New Spain, and Guzman was summoned to appear at the capital. This
+  he refused to do, and when Luis de Castilla was sent by Cortés,
+  the captain-general of the province, to subdue him, Guzman
+  captured him and his force of 100 men by a ruse. In May, 1533,
+  the king commanded him to submit to the provincial authorities;
+  many of his friends and adherents deserted him, and he was
+  stripped of his title as governor of Pánuco. In 1536 (March
+  17) the licentiate Diego Perez de la Torre was appointed _juez
+  de residencia_, an officer whose duty was to conduct a rigid
+  investigation of the accounts and administration of governmental
+  officials--this time with special reference to Guzman. By Torre's
+  order, Guzman was arrested and confined in jail until 1538, when
+  his case was appealed to Spain; but from this he received no
+  comfort. He was banished to Torrejon de Velasco, where he died in
+  1544, penniless and despised.
+
+  [337] Marqués del Valle de Oaxaca y Capitan General de la Nueva
+  España y de la Costa del Sur. He arrived at Vera Cruz in July,
+  1529.
+
+  [338] The best discussion of the stories of the Seven Caves and
+  the Seven Cities is in A. F. Bandelier's _Contributions to the
+  History of the Southwestern Portion of the United States_, in
+  _Papers of the Archaeological Institute of America_, American
+  Series, V. (Cambridge, 1890).
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 2
+
+     _Of how Francisco Vazquez Coronado came to be governor, and the
+     second account which Cabeza de Vaca gave._
+
+
+Eight years after Nuño de Guzman made this expedition, he was put
+in prison by a juez de residencia, named the licentiate Diego de la
+Torre, who came from Spain with sufficient powers to do this. After
+the death of the judge, who had also managed the government of that
+country himself, the good Don Antonio de Mendoza, viceroy of New
+Spain, appointed as governor of that province Francisco Vazquez de
+Coronado, a gentleman from Salamanca, who had married a lady in the
+city of Mexico, the daughter of Alonso de Estrada, the treasurer and
+at one time governor of Mexico, and the son, most people said, of His
+Catholic Majesty Don Ferdinand, and many stated it as certain. As I
+was saying, at the time Francisco Vazquez was appointed governor, he
+was travelling through New Spain as an official inspector, and in
+this way he gained the friendship of many worthy men who afterward
+went on his expedition with him. It happened that just at this time
+three Spaniards, named Cabeza de Vaca, Dorantes, and Castillo
+Maldonado, and a negro [Estévan], who had been lost on the expedition
+which Pamfilo de Narvaez led into Florida, reached Mexico. They came
+out through Culiacan, having crossed the country from sea to sea, as
+anyone who wishes may find out for himself by an account which this
+same Cabeza de Vaca wrote and dedicated to Prince Don Philip, who
+is now King of Spain and our sovereign.[339] They gave the good Don
+Antonio de Mendoza an account of some large and powerful villages,
+four and five stories high, of which they had heard a great deal
+in the countries they had crossed, and other things very different
+from what turned out to be the truth. The noble viceroy communicated
+this to the new governor, who gave up the visits he had in hand, on
+account of this, and hurried his departure for his government, taking
+with him the negro [Estévan] who had come [with Cabeza de Vaca] with
+the three friars of the order of Saint Francis, one of whom was named
+Friar Marcos of Nice, a regular priest, and another Friar Daniel,
+a lay brother, and the other Friar Antonio de Santa Maria. When he
+reached the province of Culiacan he sent the friars just mentioned
+and the negro, who was named Estevan, off in search of that country,
+because Friar Marcos offered to go and see it, because he had been in
+Peru at the time Don Pedro de Alvarado went there overland. It seems
+that, after the friars I have mentioned and the negro had started,
+the negro did not get on well with the friars, because he took the
+women that were given him and collected turquoises, and got together
+a stock of everything. Besides, the Indians in those places through
+which they went got along with the negro better, because they had
+seen him before. This was the reason he was sent on ahead to open up
+the way and pacify the Indians, so that when the others came along
+they had nothing to do except to keep an account of the things for
+which they were looking.
+
+  [339] See the narrative of Alvar Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca in the
+  present volume.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 3
+
+     _Of how they killed the negro Estevan at Cibola, and Friar
+     Marcos returned in flight._
+
+
+After Estevan had left the friars, he thought he could get all
+the reputation and honor himself, and that if he should discover
+those settlements with such famous high houses, alone, he would be
+considered bold and courageous. So he proceeded with the people
+who had followed him, and attempted to cross the wilderness which
+lies between the country he had passed through and Cibola. He was
+so far ahead of the friars that, when these reached Chichilticalli,
+which is on the edge of the wilderness, he was already at Cibola,
+which is eighty leagues beyond. It is 220 leagues from Culiacan to
+the edge of the wilderness, and eighty across the desert, which
+makes 300, or perhaps ten more or less. As I said, Estevan reached
+Cibola loaded with the large quantity of turquoises they had given
+him and some beautiful women whom the Indians who followed him and
+carried his things were taking with them and had given him. These
+had followed him from all the settlements he had passed, believing
+that under his protection they could traverse the whole world without
+any danger. But as the people in this country were more intelligent
+than those who followed Estevan, they lodged him in a little hut
+they had outside their village, and the older men and the governors
+heard his story and took steps to find out the reason he had come
+to that country. For three days they made inquiries about him and
+held a council. The account which the negro gave them of two white
+men who were following him, sent by a great lord, who knew about
+the things in the sky, and how these were coming to instruct them
+in divine matters, made them think that he must be a spy or a guide
+from some nations who wished to come and conquer them, because it
+seemed to them unreasonable to say that the people were white in the
+country from which he came and that he was sent by them, he being
+black. Besides these other reasons, they thought it was hard of him
+to ask them for turquoises and women, and so they decided to kill
+him. They did this, but they did not kill any of those who went with
+him, although they kept some young fellows and let the others, about
+sixty persons, return freely to their own country. As these, who were
+badly scared, were returning in flight, they happened to come upon
+the friars in the desert sixty leagues from Cibola, and told them
+the sad news, which frightened them so much that they would not even
+trust these folks who had been with the negro, but opened the packs
+they were carrying and gave away everything they had except the holy
+vestments for saying mass. They returned from here by double marches,
+prepared for anything, without seeing any more of the country except
+what the Indians told them.[340]
+
+  [340] See the account of this journey by Marcos de Niza in
+  _Coleccion de Documentos Inéditos de Indias_, III. 325-351;
+  Ramusio, _Terzo Volume delle Navigationi_ (Venice, 1556);
+  Hakluyt, _Voyages_, IX. 125-144 (1904); Ternaux-Compans,
+  _Voyages_, IX. 249-284 (1838); and an English translation by
+  Fanny Bandelier in _The Journey of Alvar Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca_
+  (1905). _Cf._ also A. F. Bandelier, "The Discovery of New Mexico
+  by Fray Marcos of Nizza," in _Magazine of Western History_, IV.
+  659-670 (Cleveland, 1886).
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 4
+
+     _Of how the noble Don Antonio de Mendoza made an expedition to
+     discover Cibola._
+
+
+After Francisco Vazquez Coronado had sent Friar Marcos of Nice and
+his party on the search already related, he was engaged in Culiacan
+about some business that related to his government, when he heard
+an account of a province called Topira,[341] which was to the north
+of the country of Culiacan. He started to explore this region with
+several of the conquerors and some friendly Indians, but he did not
+get very far, because the mountain chains which they had to cross
+were very difficult. He returned without finding the least signs of
+a good country, and when he got back, he found the friars who had
+just arrived, and who told such great things about what the negro
+Estevan had discovered and what they had heard from the Indians, and
+other things they had heard about the South Sea[342] and islands and
+other riches, that, without stopping for anything, the governor set
+off at once for the City of Mexico, taking Friar Marcos with him, to
+tell the viceroy about it. He made the things seem more important
+by not talking about them to anyone except his particular friends,
+under promise of the greatest secrecy, until after he had reached
+Mexico and seen Don Antonio de Mendoza. Then it began to be noised
+abroad that the Seven Cities for which Nuño de Guzman had searched
+had already been discovered, and a beginning was made in collecting
+an armed force and in bringing together people to go and conquer
+them. The noble viceroy arranged with the friars of the order of
+Saint Francis so that Friar Marcos was made father provincial, as
+a result of which the pulpits of that order were filled with such
+accounts of marvels and wonders that more than 300 Spaniards and
+about 800 natives of New Spain collected in a few days. There were so
+many men of such high quality among the Spaniards, that such a noble
+body was never collected in the Indies, nor so many men of quality in
+such a small body, there being 300 men. Francisco Vazquez Coronado,
+governor of New Galicia, was captain-general, because he had been the
+author of it all. The good viceroy Don Antonio did this because at
+this time Francisco Vazquez was his closest and most intimate friend,
+and because he considered him to be wise, skillful, and intelligent,
+besides being a gentleman. Had he paid more attention and regard to
+the position in which he was placed and the charge over which he was
+placed, and less to the estates he left behind in New Spain, or, at
+least, more to the honor he had and might secure from having such
+gentlemen under his command, things would not have turned out as they
+did. When this narrative is ended, it will be seen that he did not
+know how to keep his position nor the government that he held.
+
+  [341] Bandelier, _Papers of the Archaeological Institute of
+  America_, Am. ser., V. (1890), p. 104, says this was Topia, in
+  Durango, a locality since noted for its rich mines.
+
+  [342] The Pacific.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 5
+
+     _Concerning the captains who went to Cibola._
+
+
+When the viceroy, Don Antonio de Mendoza, saw what a noble company
+had come together, and the spirit and good will with which they had
+all presented themselves, knowing the worth of these men, he would
+have liked very well to make every one of them captain of an army;
+but as the whole number was small he could not do as he would have
+liked, and so he issued the commissions and captaincies as he saw
+fit, because it seemed to him that if they were appointed by him,
+as he was so well obeyed and beloved, nobody would find fault with
+his arrangements. After everybody had heard who the general was,
+he made Don Pedro de Tovar ensign-general, a young gentleman who
+was the son of Don Fernando de Tovar, the guardian and lord high
+steward of the Queen Doña Juana,[343] our demented mistress--may she
+be in glory--and Lope de Samaniego, the governor of the arsenal at
+Mexico,[344] a gentleman fully equal to the charge, army-master. The
+captains were Don Tristan de Arellano; Don Pedro de Guevara, the son
+of Don Juan de Guevara and nephew of the Count of Oñate; Don Garcia
+Lopez de Cardenas; Don Rodrigo Maldonado, brother-in-law of the
+Duke of the Infantado; Diego Lopez, alderman of Seville, and Diego
+Gutierres, for the cavalry. All the other gentlemen were placed under
+the flag of the general, as being distinguished persons, and some of
+them became captains later, and their appointments were confirmed
+by order of the viceroy and by the general, Francisco Vazquez. To
+name some of them whom I happen to remember, there were Francisco de
+Barrionuevo, a gentleman from Granada; Juan de Saldivar, Francisco
+de Ovando, Juan Gallego, and Melchior Diaz--a captain who had been
+mayor of Culiacan, who, although he was not a gentleman, merited the
+position he held. The other gentlemen who were prominent, were Don
+Alonso Manrique de Lara; Don Lope de Urrea, a gentleman from Aragon;
+Gomez Suarez de Figueroa, Luis Ramirez de Vargas, Juan de Sotomayor,
+Francisco Gorbalan, the commissioner Riberos, and other gentlemen,
+men of high quality, whom I do not now recall. The infantry captain
+was Pablo de Melgosa of Burgos, and of the artillery, Hernando de
+Alvarado of the mountain district. As I say, since then I have
+forgotten the names of many gentlemen. It would be well if I could
+name some of them, so that it might be clearly seen what cause I
+had for saying that they had on this expedition the most brilliant
+company ever collected in the Indies to go in search of new lands.
+But they were unfortunate in having a captain who left in New Spain
+estates and a pretty wife, a noble and excellent lady, which were not
+the least causes for what was to happen.
+
+  [343] Daughter of Ferdinand and Isabella, wife of Philip I., and
+  mother of Charles V.
+
+  [344] In a letter of the Viceroy Mendoza to the King, April 17,
+  1540, Samaniego is mentioned as the warden of a fortress.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 6
+
+     _Of how all the companies collected in Compostela and set off on
+     the journey in good order._
+
+
+When the viceroy Don Antonio de Mendoza had fixed and arranged
+everything as we have related, and the companies and captaincies had
+been arranged, he advanced a part of their salaries from the chest
+of His Majesty to those in the army who were in greatest need. And
+as it seemed to him that it would be rather hard for the friendly
+Indians in the country if the army should start from Mexico, he
+ordered them to assemble at the city of Compostela, the chief city
+in the New Kingdom of Galicia, 110 leagues from Mexico, so that they
+could begin their journey there with everything in good order. There
+is nothing to tell about what happened on this trip, since they all
+finally assembled at Compostela by Shrovetide, in the year (fifteen
+hundred and) forty-one.[345] After the whole force had left Mexico,
+he ordered Don Pedro de Alarcon[346] to set sail with two ships that
+were in the port of La Natividad on the South Sea coast, and go to
+the port of Xalisco[347] to take the baggage which the soldiers were
+unable to carry, and thence to sail along the coast near the army,
+because he had understood from the reports that they would have to
+go through the country near the seacoast, and that we could find the
+harbors by means of the rivers, and that the ships could always get
+news of the army, which turned out afterward to be false, and so
+all this stuff was lost, or, rather, those who owned it lost it, as
+will be told farther on.[348] After the viceroy had completed all
+his arrangements, he set off for Compostela, accompanied by many
+noble and rich men. He kept the New Year of (fifteen hundred and)
+forty-one at Pasquaro, which is the chief place in the bishopric of
+Michoacan, and from there he crossed the whole of New Spain, taking
+much pleasure in enjoying the festivals and great receptions which
+were given him, till he reached Compostela, which is, as I have said,
+110 leagues. There he found the whole company assembled, being well
+treated and entertained by Christobal de Oñate, who had the whole
+charge of that government[349] for the time being. He had had the
+management of it and was in command of all that region when Francisco
+Vazquez was made governor. All were very glad when he arrived, and
+he made an examination of the company and found all those whom we
+have mentioned. He assigned the captains to their companies, and
+after this was done, on the next day, after they had all heard mass,
+captains and soldiers together, the viceroy made them a very eloquent
+short speech, telling them of the fidelity they owed to their general
+and showing them clearly the benefits which this expedition might
+afford, from the conversion of those peoples as well as in the profit
+of those who should conquer the territory, and the advantage to His
+Majesty and the claim which they would thus have on his favor and
+aid at all times. After he had finished, they all, both captains and
+soldiers, gave him their oaths upon the Gospels in a missal that they
+would follow their general on this expedition and would obey him in
+everything he commanded them, which they faithfully performed, as
+will be seen. The next day after this was done, the army started off
+with its colors flying. The viceroy, Don Antonio, went with them for
+two days, and there he took leave of them, returning to New Spain
+with his friends.
+
+  [345] The correct date is 1540. Castañeda carries the error
+  throughout his narration, although he gives the year correctly in
+  the preface.
+
+  [346] An error for _Hernando_ de Alarcon.
+
+  [347] That is, from a point on the Pacific coast in latitude 19°
+  to another in latitude 21° 30´.
+
+  [348] See Alarcon's narrative translated by Hakluyt in his
+  _Voyages_, IX. 279-318 (ed. 1904), and also Buckingham Smith,
+  _Coleccion de Varios Documentos para la Historia de la Florida_
+  (1857), p. 1.
+
+  [349] The province of Nueva Galicia, explored under Guzman's
+  direction. See p. 285, note 1.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 7
+
+     _Of how the army reached Chiametla, and the killing of the
+     army-master, and the other things that happened up to the
+     arrival at Culiacan._
+
+
+After the viceroy Don Antonio left them, the army continued its
+march. As each one was obliged to transport his own baggage and all
+did not know how to fasten the packs, and as the horses started off
+fat and plump, they had a good deal of difficulty and labor during
+the first few days, and many left many valuable things, giving them
+to anyone who wanted them, in order to get rid of carrying them.
+In the end necessity, which is all powerful, made them skillful,
+so that one could see many gentlemen become carriers, and anybody
+who despised this work was not considered a man. With such labors,
+which they then thought severe, the army reached Chiametla, where
+it was obliged to delay several days to procure food. During this
+time the army-master, Lope de Samaniego, went off with some soldiers
+to find food, and at one village, a crossbowman having entered it
+indiscreetly in pursuit of the enemies, they shot him through the
+eye and it passed through his brain, so that he died on the spot.
+They also shot five or six of his companions before Diego Lopez, the
+alderman from Seville, since the commander was dead, collected the
+men and sent word to the general. He put a guard in the village and
+over the provisions. There was great confusion in the army when this
+news became known. He was buried here. Several sorties were made, by
+which food was obtained and several of the natives taken prisoners.
+They hanged those who seemed to belong to the district where the
+army-master was killed.
+
+It seems that when the general Francisco Vazquez left Culiacan with
+Friar Marcos to tell the viceroy Don Antonio de Mendoza the news, as
+already related, he left orders for Captain Melchior Diaz and Juan
+de Saldivar to start off with a dozen good men from Culiacan and
+verify what Friar Marcos had seen and heard. They started and went
+as far as Chichilticalli,[350] which is where the wilderness begins,
+220 leagues from Culiacan, and there they turned back, not finding
+anything important. They reached Chiametla just as the army was ready
+to leave, and reported to the general. Although it was kept secret,
+the bad news leaked out, and there were some reports which, although
+they were exaggerated, did not fail to give an indication of what the
+facts were. Friar Marcos, noticing that some were feeling disturbed,
+cleared away these clouds, promising that what they would see should
+be good, and that he would place the army in a country where their
+hands would be filled, and in this way he quieted them so that they
+appeared well satisfied. From there the army marched to Culiacan,
+making some detours into the country to seize provisions. They were
+two leagues from the town of Culiacan at Easter vespers, when the
+inhabitants came out to welcome their governor and begged him not to
+enter the town till the day after Easter.[351]
+
+  [350] For this locality see p. 299, note 1.
+
+  [351] Culiacan, or San Miguel Culiacan, as it was named by
+  Guzman, is in central Sinaloa. Castañeda was a resident of this
+  town and evidently joined the expedition there.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 8
+
+     _Of how the army entered the town of Culiacan and the reception
+     it received, and other things which happened before the
+     departure._
+
+
+When the day after Easter came, the army started in the morning to
+go to the town and, as they approached, the inhabitants of the town
+came out on to an open plain with foot and horse drawn up in ranks
+as if for a battle, and having its seven bronze pieces of artillery
+in position, making a show of defending their town. Some of our
+soldiers were with them. Our army drew up in the same way and began
+a skirmish with them, and after the artillery on both sides had been
+fired they were driven back, just as if the town had been taken by
+force of arms, which was a pleasant demonstration of welcome, except
+for the artilleryman who lost a hand by a shot, from having ordered
+them to fire before he had finished drawing out the ramrod. After
+the town was taken, the army was well lodged and entertained by the
+townspeople, who, as they were all very well-to-do people, took all
+the gentlemen and people of quality who were with the army into their
+own apartments, although they had lodgings prepared for them all
+just outside the town. Some of the townspeople were not ill repaid
+for this hospitality, because all had started with fine clothes and
+accoutrements, and as they had to carry provisions on their animals
+after this, they were obliged to leave their fine stuff, so that
+many preferred giving it to their hosts instead of risking it on the
+sea by putting it in the ship that had followed the army along the
+coast to take the extra baggage, as I have said. After they arrived
+and were being entertained in the town, the general, by order of
+the viceroy Don Antonio, left Fernandarias de Saabedra, uncle of
+Hernandarias de Saabedra, count of Castellar, formerly mayor of
+Seville, as his lieutenant and captain in this town. The army rested
+here several days, because the inhabitants had gathered a good
+stock of provisions that year and each one shared his stock very
+gladly with his guests from our army. They not only had plenty to
+eat here, but they also had plenty to take away with them, so that
+when the departure came they started off with more than six hundred
+loaded animals, besides the friendly Indians and the servants--more
+than a thousand persons. After a fortnight had passed, the general
+started ahead with about fifty horsemen and a few foot soldiers and
+most of the Indian allies, leaving the army, which was to follow him
+a fortnight later, with Don Tristan de Arellano in command as his
+lieutenant.
+
+At this time, before his departure, a pretty sort of thing happened
+to the general, which I will tell for what it is worth. A young
+soldier named Trugillo (Truxillo) pretended that he had seen a vision
+while he was bathing in the river. Feigning that he did not want to,
+he was brought before the general, whom he gave to understand that
+the devil had told him that if he would kill the general, he could
+marry his wife, Doña Beatris, and would receive great wealth and
+other very fine things. Friar Marcos of Nice preached several sermons
+on this, laying it all to the fact that the devil was jealous of the
+good which must result from this journey and so wished to break it
+up in this way. It did not end here, but the friars who were in the
+expedition wrote to their monasteries about it, and this was the
+reason the pulpits of Mexico proclaimed strange rumors about this
+affair.
+
+The general ordered Truxillo to stay in that town and not to go on
+the expedition, which was what he was after when he made up that
+falsehood, judging from what afterward appeared to be the truth. The
+general started off with the force already described to continue his
+journey, and the army followed him, as will be related.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 9
+
+     _Of how the army started from Culiacan and the arrival of the
+     general at Cibola, and of the army at Señora and of other things
+     that happened._
+
+
+The general, as has been said, started to continue his journey from
+the valley of Culiacan somewhat lightly equipped, taking with him
+the friars, since none of them wished to stay behind with the army.
+After they had gone three days, a regular friar who could say mass,
+named Friar Antonio Victoria, broke his leg, and they brought him
+back from the camp to have it treated. He stayed with the army
+after this, which was no slight consolation for all. The general
+and his force crossed the country without trouble, as they found
+everything peaceful, because the Indians knew Friar Marcos and some
+of the others who had been with Melchior Diaz when he went with
+Juan de Saldibar to investigate. After the general had crossed the
+inhabited region and came to Chichilticalli, where the wilderness
+begins, and saw nothing favorable, he could not help feeling somewhat
+downhearted, for, although the reports were very fine about what
+was ahead, there was nobody who had seen it except the Indians who
+went with the negro, and these had already been caught in some lies.
+Besides all this, he was much affected by seeing that the fame of
+Chichilticalli was summed up in one tumbledown house without any
+roof, although it appeared to have been a strong place at some former
+time when it was inhabited, and it was very plain that it had been
+built by a civilized and warlike race of strangers who had come from
+a distance. This building was made of red earth.[352] From here they
+went on through the wilderness, and in fifteen days came to a river
+about eight leagues from Cibola which they called Red River,[353]
+because its waters were muddy and reddish. In this river they found
+mullets like those of Spain. The first Indians from that country were
+seen here--two of them, who ran away to give the news. During the
+night following the next day, about two leagues from the village,
+some Indians in a safe place yelled so that, although the men were
+ready for anything, some were so excited that they put their saddles
+on hind-side before; but these were the new fellows. When the
+veterans had mounted and ridden round the camp, the Indians fled.
+None of them could be caught because they knew the country.
+
+  [352] Chichilticalli, or the "Red House," was so named by the
+  Aztec Indians on account of its color. It was doubtless situated
+  on or near the Rio Gila, east of the mouth of the San Pedro,
+  probably not far from the present Solomonsville in southern
+  Arizona.
+
+  [353] The Zuñi River, within the present Arizona. Its waters are
+  very muddy in springtime, which is the only time of the year that
+  it flows into the Little Colorado.
+
+The next day they entered the settled country in good order, and when
+they saw the first village, which was Cibola, such were the curses
+that some hurled at Friar Marcos that I pray God may protect him from
+them.
+
+It is a little, crowded village,[354] looking as if it had been
+crumpled all up together. There are haciendas in New Spain which
+make a better appearance at a distance. It is a village of about
+two hundred warriors, is three and four stories high, with the
+houses small and having only a few rooms, and without a courtyard.
+One yard serves for each section.[355] The people of the whole
+district had collected here, for there are seven villages in the
+province, and some of the others are even larger and stronger than
+Cibola. These folks waited for the army, drawn up by divisions
+in front of the village. When they refused to have peace on the
+terms the interpreters extended to them, but appeared defiant, the
+Santiago[356] was given, and they were at once put to flight. The
+Spaniards then attacked the village, which was taken with not a
+little difficulty, since they held the narrow and crooked entrance.
+During the attack they knocked the general down with a large stone,
+and would have killed him but for Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas and
+Hernando de Alvarado, who threw themselves above him and drew him
+away, receiving the blows of the stones, which were not few. But the
+first fury of the Spaniards could not be resisted, and in less than
+an hour they entered the village and captured it. They discovered
+food there, which was the thing they were most in need of. After this
+the whole province was at peace.
+
+  [354] This was the Zuñi Indian pueblo of Hawikuh, one of their
+  seven villages, from which Coronado wrote to the Viceroy Mendoza,
+  dating his letter "from the province of Cevola, and this city of
+  Granada, the 3d of August, 1540." (See Winship's translation in
+  _Fourteenth Report of the Bureau of Ethnology_, pp. 552-563.)
+  Hawikuh, or "Granada," was situated about fifteen miles southwest
+  of the present Zuñi, near the Zuñi River, in New Mexico, and its
+  ruins are still to be seen. This was the pueblo in which Estévan
+  doubtless lost his life the year before, and which was viewed
+  from an adjacent height by Fray Marcos. Hawikuh was the seat of a
+  mission established by the Franciscans in 1629; it was abandoned
+  in 1670 after having been raided by the Apaches and its priest
+  killed. The name "Cibola," now and later applied to Hawikuh, is
+  believed to be a Spanish form of _Shiwina_, the Zuñi name for
+  their tribal range. _Cibolo_ later became the term by which the
+  Spaniards of Mexico designated the bison.
+
+  [355] The houses were built in terrace fashion, one above the
+  other, the roof of one tier forming a sort of front yard for the
+  tier of houses next above it.
+
+  [356] The war cry or "loud invocation addressed to Saint James
+  before engaging in battle with the Infidels."--Captain John
+  Stevens's _Dictionary_.
+
+The army which had stayed with Don Tristan de Arellano started to
+follow their general, all loaded with provisions, with lances on
+their shoulders, and all on foot, so as to have the horses loaded.
+With no slight labor from day to day, they reached a province which
+Cabeza de Vaca had named Hearts (Corazones), because the people here
+offered him many hearts of animals.[357] He founded a town here and
+named it San Hieronimo de los Corazones (Saint Jerome of the Hearts).
+After it had been started, it was seen that it could not be kept up
+here, and so it was afterward transferred to a valley which had been
+called Señora. The Spaniards call it Señora,[358] and so it will be
+known by this name.
+
+  [357] See Cabeza de Vaca's narrative in the present volume. The
+  place was at or near the present Ures, on the Rio Sonora in
+  Sonora, Mexico.
+
+  [358] Whence the name of the present state of Sonora.
+
+From here a force went down the river to the seacoast to find the
+harbor and to find out about the ships. Don Rodrigo Maldonado, who
+was captain of those who went in search of the ships, did not find
+them, but he brought back with him an Indian so large and tall that
+the best man in the army reached only to his chest.[359] It was said
+that other Indians were even taller on that coast. After the rains
+ceased the army went on to where the town of Señora was afterward
+located,[360] because there were provisions in that region, so that
+they were able to wait there for orders from the general.
+
+  [359] Evidently a Seri Indian. The Seri are a wild tribe speaking
+  an independent language and occupying the island of Tiburon and
+  the adjacent Sonora coast of the Gulf of California. They are
+  noted for their stature. For an account of this people, see McGee
+  in _Seventeenth Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology_, pt.
+  1 (1898).
+
+  [360] Believed to be in the present Sonora valley, where it opens
+  out into a broader plain a number of miles above Ures.
+
+About the middle of the month of October,[361] Captains Melchior Diaz
+and Juan Gallego came from Cibola, Juan Gallego[362] on his way to
+New Spain and Melchior Diaz to stay in the new town of Hearts, in
+command of the men who remained there. He was to go along the coast
+in search of the ships.
+
+  [361] This should be September.
+
+  [362] It is not without interest to record here the finding, in
+  1886, in western Kansas, of a sword-blade, greatly corroded,
+  but still bearing sufficient trace of the name "Juan Gallego"
+  to enable its determination, as well as the inscription "_No me
+  saques sin razon. No me embaines sin honor_." See W. E. Ritchey
+  in _Mail and Breeze_, Topeka, Kansas, July 26, 1902.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 10
+
+     _Of how the army started from the town of Señora, leaving it
+     inhabited, and how it reached Cibola, and of what happened to
+     Captain Melchior Diaz on his expedition in search of the ships
+     and how he discovered the Tison (Firebrand) River._
+
+
+After Melchior Diaz and Juan Gallego had arrived in the town of
+Señora, it was announced that the army was to depart for Cibola;
+that Melchior Diaz was to remain in charge of that town with eighty
+men; that Juan Gallego was going to New Spain with messages for the
+viceroy, and that Friar Marcos was going back with him, because he
+did not think it was safe for him to stay in Cibola, seeing that his
+report had turned out to be entirely false, because the kingdoms that
+he had told about had not been found, nor the populous cities, nor
+the wealth of gold, nor the precious stones which he had reported,
+nor the fine clothes, nor other things that had been proclaimed
+from the pulpits. When this had been announced, those who were to
+remain were selected and the rest loaded their provisions and set off
+in good order about the middle of September on the way to Cibola,
+following their general.
+
+Don Tristan de Arellano stayed in this new town with the weakest
+men, and from this time on there was nothing but mutinies and
+strife, because after the army had gone Captain Melchior Diaz took
+twenty-five of the most efficient men, leaving in his place one Diego
+de Alcaraz, a man unfitted to have people under his command. He took
+guides and went toward the north and west in search of the seacoast.
+After going about 150 leagues, they came to a province of exceedingly
+tall and strong men--like giants. They are naked and live in large
+straw cabins built underground like smoke-houses, with only the
+straw roof above ground. They enter these at one end and come out at
+the other. More than a hundred persons, old and young, sleep in one
+cabin. When they carry anything, they can take a load of more than
+three or four hundred weight on their heads. Once when our men wished
+to fetch a log for the fire, and six men were unable to carry it, one
+of these Indians is reported to have come and raised it in his arms,
+put it on his head alone, and carried it very easily. They eat bread
+cooked in the ashes, as big as the large two-pound loaves of Castile.
+On account of the great cold, they carry a firebrand (_tison_) in
+the hand when they go from one place to another, with which they
+warm the other hand and the body as well, and in this way they keep
+shifting it every now and then.[363] On this account the large river
+which is in that country was called Rio del Tison (Firebrand River).
+It is a very great river and is more than two leagues wide at its
+mouth; here it is half a league across. Here the captain heard that
+there had been ships at a point three days down toward the sea. When
+he reached the place where the ships had been, which was more than
+fifteen leagues up the river from the mouth of the harbor, they found
+written on a tree: "Alarcon reached this place; there are letters at
+the foot of this tree." He dug up the letters and learned from them
+how long Alarcon had waited for news of the army and that he had gone
+back with the ships to New Spain, because he was unable to proceed
+farther, since this sea was a bay, which was formed by the Isle of
+the Marquis, which is called California, and it was explained that
+California was not an island, but a point of the mainland forming the
+other side of that gulf.[364]
+
+  [363] These were evidently the Cocopa, a Yuman tribe, whose
+  descendants still inhabit the lower Rio Colorado, which is the
+  Rio del Tison of this narrative. The Cocopa now number perhaps
+  800.
+
+  [364] It had been supposed that Lower California, the "Isle of
+  the Marquis" (Cortés), was an island, yet notwithstanding its
+  determination as a peninsula it appeared as an island on maps of
+  a much later period.
+
+After he had seen this, the captain turned back to go up the river,
+without going down to the sea, to find a ford by which to cross to
+the other side, so as to follow the other bank. After they had gone
+five or six days, it seemed to them as if they could cross on rafts.
+For this purpose they called together a large number of the natives,
+who were waiting for a favorable opportunity to make an attack on
+our men, and when they saw that the strangers wanted to cross, they
+helped make the rafts with all zeal and diligence, so as to catch
+them in this way on the water and drown them or else so divide them
+that they could not help one another. While the rafts were being
+made, a soldier who had been out around the camp saw a large number
+of armed men go across to a mountain, where they were waiting till
+the soldiers should cross the river. He reported this, and an Indian
+was quietly shut up, in order to find out the truth, and when they
+tortured him he told all the arrangements that had been made. These
+were, that when our men were crossing and part of them had got over
+and part were on the river and part were waiting to cross, those who
+were on the rafts should drown those they were taking across and the
+rest of their force should make an attack on both sides of the river.
+If they had had as much discretion and courage as they had strength
+and power, the attempt would have succeeded.[365]
+
+  [365] The rafts, or _balsas_, referred to, were made by tying
+  together a large number of reeds. The vessel was wide at the
+  middle and pointed at the ends, and was very buoyant.
+
+When he knew their plan, the captain had the Indian who had confessed
+the affair killed secretly, and that night he was thrown into the
+river with a weight, so that the Indians would not suspect that they
+were found out. The next day they noticed that our men suspected
+them, and so they made an attack, shooting showers of arrows, but
+when the horses began to catch up with them and the lances wounded
+them without mercy and the musketeers likewise made good shots, they
+had to leave the plain and take to the mountain, until not a man of
+them was to be seen. The force then came back and crossed all right,
+the Indian allies and the Spaniards going across on the rafts and
+the horses swimming alongside the rafts, where we will leave them to
+continue their journey.
+
+To relate how the army that was on its way to Cibola got on:
+Everything went along in good shape, since the general had left
+everything peaceful, because he wished the people in that region
+to be contented and without fear and willing to do what they were
+ordered. In a province called Vacapan there was a large quantity
+of prickly pears, of which the natives make a great deal of
+preserves.[366] They gave this preserve away freely, and as the men
+of the army ate much of it, they all fell sick with a headache and
+fever, so that the natives might have done much harm to the force if
+they had wished. This lasted regularly twenty-four hours. After this
+they continued their march until they reached Chichilticalli. The
+men in the advance guard saw a flock of sheep one day after leaving
+this place. I myself saw and followed them. They had extremely large
+bodies and long wool; their horns were very thick and large, and when
+they run they throw back their heads and put their horns on the ridge
+of their back. They are used to the rough country, so that we could
+not catch them and had to leave them.[367]
+
+  [366] Vacapan was apparently an Opata pueblo, or rather two
+  pueblos, on a branch of the Rio Yaqui, which the Spaniards passed
+  through shortly before reaching Corazones (Ures) on the Rio
+  Sonora. The preserved cactus fruit is regarded highly by all the
+  Indians of the general region even to-day, and in season they
+  subsist largely upon it. The saguara (_Cereus giganteus_), or
+  great columnar cactus, furnishes the chief supply.
+
+  [367] The well-known Rocky Mountain sheep. As late as twenty
+  years ago some of the mountain ranges of southeastern Arizona,
+  especially the Catalina Mountains, were noted for this animal.
+
+Three days after we entered the wilderness we found a horn on the
+bank of a river that flows in the bottom of a very steep, deep gully,
+which the general had noticed and left there for his army to see,
+for it was six feet long and as thick at the base as a man's thigh.
+It seemed to be more like the horn of a goat than of any other
+animal. It was something worth seeing. The army proceeded and was
+about a day's march from Cibola when a very cold tornado came up in
+the afternoon, followed by a great fall of snow, which was a bad
+combination for the carriers. The army went on till it reached some
+caves in a rocky ridge, late in the evening. The Indian allies, who
+were from New Spain, and for the most part from warm countries, were
+in great danger. They felt the coldness of that day so much that it
+was hard work the next day taking care of them, for they suffered
+much pain and had to be carried on the horses, the soldiers walking.
+After this labor the army reached Cibola, where their general was
+waiting for them, with their quarters all ready, and here they were
+reunited, except some captains and men who had gone off to discover
+other provinces.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 11
+
+     _Of how Don Pedro de Tovar discovered Tusayan or Tutahaco[368]
+     and Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas saw the Firebrand River, and
+     the other things that had happened._
+
+  [368] Compare Chapter 13. These two groups of pueblos were not
+  the same.
+
+
+While the things already described were taking place, Cibola being
+at peace, the general, Francisco Vazquez, found out from the people
+of the province about the provinces that lay around it, and got them
+to tell their friends and neighbors that Christians had come into
+the country, whose only desire was to be their friends, and to find
+out about good lands to live in, and for them to come to see the
+strangers and talk with them. They did this, since they know how to
+communicate with one another in these regions, and they informed him
+about a province with seven villages of the same sort as theirs,
+although somewhat different. They had nothing to do with these
+people. This province is called Tusayan. It is twenty-five leagues
+from Cibola. The villages are high and the people are warlike.
+
+The general had sent Don Pedro de Tovar to these villages with
+seventeen horsemen and three or four foot-soldiers.[369] Juan de
+Padilla, a Franciscan friar, who had been a fighting man in his
+youth, went with them. When they reached the region, they entered the
+country so quietly that nobody observed them, because there were no
+settlements or farms between one village and another and the people
+do not leave the villages except to go to their farms, especially
+at this time, when they had heard that Cibola had been captured
+by very fierce people, who travelled on animals which ate people.
+This information was generally believed by those who had never seen
+horses, although it was so strange as to cause much wonder. Our men
+arrived after nightfall and were able to conceal themselves under
+the edge of the village, where they heard the natives talking in
+their houses. But in the morning they were discovered and drew up
+in regular order, while the natives came out to meet them, with
+bows, and shields, and wooden clubs, drawn up in lines without any
+confusion. The interpreter was given a chance to speak to them and
+give them due warning, for they were very intelligent people, but
+nevertheless they drew lines and insisted that our men should not
+go across these lines toward their village.[370] While they were
+talking, some men acted as if they would cross the lines, and one of
+the natives lost control of himself and struck a horse a blow on the
+cheek of the bridle with his club. Friar Juan, fretted by the time
+that was being wasted in talking with them, said to the captain:
+"To tell the truth, I do not know why we came here." When the men
+heard this, they gave the Santiago so suddenly that they ran down
+many Indians and the others fled to the town in confusion. Some
+indeed did not have a chance to do this, so quickly did the people
+in the village come out with presents, asking for peace. The captain
+ordered his force to collect, and, as the natives did not do any
+more harm, he and those who were with him found a place to establish
+their headquarters near the village. They had dismounted here when
+the natives came peacefully, saying that they had come to give in
+the submission of the whole province and that they wanted him to be
+friends with them and to accept the presents which they gave him.
+This was some cotton cloth, although not much, because they do not
+make it in that district.[371] They also gave him some dressed skins
+and cornmeal, and pine nuts[372] and corn and birds of the country.
+Afterward they presented some turquoises,[373] but not many. The
+people of the whole district came together that day and submitted
+themselves, and they allowed him to enter their villages freely to
+visit, buy, sell, and barter with them.
+
+  [369] Castañeda speaks as a member of the "army," not of the
+  advance guard. See the preceding chapter.
+
+  [370] These lines were drawn in corn meal and must not be
+  crossed. To this day similar lines of meal are made across a
+  trail when certain ceremonies are being performed. The Spaniards
+  were now at the pueblo of Awatobi, the first village of the Hopi
+  (Moqui) people of Tusayan, in northeastern Arizona, reached
+  in coming from the southward. It was destroyed by the other
+  Hopi villagers in 1700, because the Awatobi people favored the
+  re-establishment of the Spanish mission that had been destroyed
+  in the great Pueblo revolt of 1680.
+
+  [371] Castañeda, speaking from hearsay with respect to the
+  Tovar expedition, errs in this statement, as the Hopi were the
+  principal cotton growers and weavers of all the Pueblos. Later
+  Spanish accounts all agree on this point. Indeed, even now the
+  Hopi cotton kilts, sashes, and ceremonial robes are bartered
+  throughout the Pueblo region.
+
+  [372] Piñon nuts.
+
+  [373] Obtained by trade with the Rio Grande Pueblos, who mined
+  them in the Cerillos, southeast of Santa Fé, New Mexico. It is
+  from the same deposits that much of the "matrix turquoise" of our
+  present-day commerce is derived.
+
+It is governed like Cibola, by an assembly of the oldest men. They
+have their governors and generals. This was where they obtained the
+information about a large river, and that several days down the river
+there were some people with very large bodies.[374]
+
+  [374] See the reference to the Cocopa Indians met by Melchior
+  Diaz, in Chapter 10.
+
+As Don Pedro de Tovar was not commissioned to go farther, he returned
+from there and gave this information to the general, who dispatched
+Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas with about twelve companions to go to
+see this river. He was well received when he reached Tusayan and was
+entertained by the natives, who gave him guides for his journey.
+They started from here loaded with provisions, for they had to go
+through a desert country before reaching the inhabited region, which
+the Indians said was more than twenty days' journey. After they had
+gone twenty days they came to the banks of the river, which seemed
+to be more than three or four leagues in an air line across to the
+other bank of the stream which flowed between them.[375] This country
+was elevated and full of low twisted pines, very cold, and lying
+open toward the north, so that, this being the warm season, no one
+could live there on account of the cold. They spent three days on
+this bank looking for a passage down to the river, which looked from
+above as if the water was six feet across, although the Indians said
+it was half a league wide. It was impossible to descend, for after
+these three days Captain Melgosa and one Juan Galeras and another
+companion, who were the three lightest and most agile men, made an
+attempt to go down at the least difficult place, and went down until
+those who were above were unable to keep sight of them. They returned
+about four o'clock in the afternoon, not having succeeded in reaching
+the bottom on account of the great difficulties which they found,
+because what seemed to be easy from above was not so, but instead
+very hard and difficult. They said that they had been down about a
+third of the way and that the river seemed very large from the place
+which they reached, and that from what they saw they thought the
+Indians had given the width correctly. Those who stayed above had
+estimated that some huge rocks on the sides of the cliffs seemed to
+be about as tall as a man, but those who went down swore that when
+they reached these rocks they were bigger than the great tower of
+Seville.[376] They did not go farther up the river, because they
+could not get water. Before this they had had to go a league or two
+inland every day late in the evening in order to find water, and the
+guides said that if they should go four days farther it would not be
+possible to go on, because there was no water within three or four
+days, for when they travel across this region themselves they take
+with them women loaded with water in gourds, and bury the gourds of
+water along the way, to use when they return, and besides this, they
+travel in one day over what it takes us two days to accomplish.
+
+  [375] The Grand Cañon of the Colorado, now visited and described
+  by white men for the first time.
+
+  [376] The Giralda, or celebrated bell-tower of the Cathedral of
+  Seville, which is 275 feet high.
+
+This was the Tison (Firebrand) River, much nearer its source than
+where Melchior Diaz and his company crossed it. These were the same
+kind of Indians, judging from what was afterward learned. They came
+back from this point and the expedition did not have any other
+result. On the way they saw some water falling over a rock and
+learned from the guides that some bunches of crystals which were
+hanging there were salt. They went and gathered a quantity of this
+and brought it back to Cibola, dividing it among those who were
+there. They gave the general a written account of what they had seen,
+because one Pedro de Sotomayor had gone with Don Garcia Lopez [de
+Cardenas] as chronicler for the army. The villages of that province
+[of Tusayan] remained peaceful, since they were never visited again,
+nor was any attempt made to find other peoples in that direction.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 12
+
+     _Of how people came from Cicuye to Cibola to see the Christians,
+     and how Hernando de Alvarado went to see the cows._
+
+
+While they were making these discoveries, some Indians came to Cibola
+from a village which was seventy leagues east of this province,
+called Cicuye. Among them was a captain who was called Bigotes
+(Whiskers) by our men, because he wore a long mustache. He was a
+tall, well-built young fellow, with a fine figure. He told the
+general that they had come in response to the notice which had been
+given, to offer themselves as friends, and that if we wanted to go
+through their country they would consider us as their friends. They
+brought a present of tanned hides and shields and head-pieces, which
+were very gladly received, and the general gave them some glass
+dishes and a number of pearls and little bells which they prized
+highly, because these were things they had never seen. They described
+some cows which, from a picture that one of them had painted on his
+skin, seemed to be cows, although from the hides this did not seem
+possible, because the hair was woolly and snarled so that we could
+not tell what sort of skins they had. The general ordered Hernando de
+Alvarado to take twenty companions and go with them, and gave him a
+commission for eighty days, after which he should return to give an
+account of what he had found.[377]
+
+  [377] The report of Alvarado, translated by George Parker
+  Winship, is published in the _Fourteenth Annual Report of the
+  Bureau of Ethnology_ (Washington, 1896).
+
+Captain Alvarado started on this journey and in five days reached a
+village which was on a rock called Acuco[378] having a population of
+about two hundred men. These people were robbers, feared by the whole
+country round about. The village was very strong, because it was up
+on a rock out of reach, having steep sides in every direction, and so
+high that it was a very good musket that could throw a ball as high.
+There was only one entrance by a stairway built by hand, which began
+at the top of a slope which is around the foot of the rock.[379]
+There was a broad stairway for about two hundred steps, then a
+stretch of about one hundred narrower steps, and at the top they had
+to go up about three times as high as a man by means of holes in the
+rock, in which they put the points of their feet, holding on at the
+same time by their hands. There was a wall of large and small stones
+at the top, which they could roll down without showing themselves, so
+that no army could possibly be strong enough to capture the village.
+On the top they had room to sow and store a large amount of corn,
+and cisterns to collect snow and water.[380] These people came down
+to the plain ready to fight, and would not listen to any arguments.
+They drew lines on the ground and determined to prevent our men from
+crossing these, but when they saw that they would have to fight
+they offered to make peace before any harm had been done. They went
+through their forms of making peace, which is to touch the horses and
+take their sweat and rub themselves with it, and to make crosses with
+the fingers of the hands. But to make the most secure peace they put
+their hands across each other, and they keep this peace inviolably.
+They made a present of a large number of [turkey-] cocks with very
+big wattles, much bread, tanned deerskins, pine [piñon] nuts, flour
+[cornmeal], and corn.
+
+  [378] This is the pueblo of Acoma, about fifty miles east of
+  Zuñi. It occupies the summit of the same rocky mesa, 357 feet
+  high, that it did in Coronado's time. The name here given is
+  doubtless an attempt to give the Zuñi designation, _Hákukia_,
+  from _Ako_, the name by which it is known to the Acoma people.
+  The present population is 650. Acoma has the distinction of being
+  the oldest continuously occupied settlement in the United States.
+
+  [379] The slope referred to is an immense sand-dune. The horse
+  trail did not exist in Coronado's time, having been built by Fray
+  Juan Ramirez, who established a mission at Acoma in 1629.
+
+  [380] The Acomas still obtain their water supply from this source.
+
+From here they went to a province called Triguex,[381] three days
+distant. The people all came out peacefully, seeing that Whiskers
+was with them. These men are feared throughout all those provinces.
+Alvarado sent messengers back from here to advise the general to come
+and winter in this country. The general was not a little relieved to
+hear that the country was growing better. Five days from here he came
+to Cicuye,[382] a very strong village four stories high. The people
+came out from the village with signs of joy to welcome Hernando de
+Alvarado and their captain, and brought them into the town with drums
+and pipes something like flutes, of which they have a great many.
+They made many presents of cloth and turquoises, of which there are
+quantities in that region.[383] The Spaniards enjoyed themselves
+here for several days and talked with an Indian slave, a native of
+the country toward Florida, which is the region Don Fernando de
+Soto discovered. This fellow said that there were large settlements
+in the farther part of that country. Hernando de Alvarado took him
+to guide them to the cows; but he told them so many and such great
+things about the wealth of gold and silver in his country that they
+did not care about looking for cows, but returned after they had
+seen some few, to report the rich news to the general. They called
+the Indian "Turk," because he looked like one. Meanwhile the general
+had sent Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas to Tiguex with men to get
+lodgings ready for the army, which had arrived from Señora about this
+time, before taking them there for the winter; and when Hernando de
+Alvarado reached Tiguex, on his way back from Cicuye, he found Don
+Garcia Lopez de Cardenas there, and so there was no need for him to
+go farther. As it was necessary that the natives should give the
+Spaniards lodging places, the people in one village had to abandon
+it and go to others belonging to their friends, and they took with
+them nothing but themselves and the clothes they had on. Information
+was obtained here about many towns up toward the north, and I believe
+that it would have been much better to follow this direction than
+that of the Turk, who was the cause of all the misfortunes which
+followed.
+
+  [381] Tiguex. See p. 317, note.
+
+  [382] Pecos. See p. 329, note 2.
+
+  [383] See p. 308, note 3.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 13
+
+     _Of how the general went toward Tutahaco with a few men and left
+     the army with Don Tristan, who took it to Tiguex._
+
+
+Everything already related had happened when Don Tristan de Arellano
+reached Cibola from Señora. Soon after he arrived, the general,
+who had received notice of a province containing eight villages,
+took thirty of the men who were most fully rested and went to see
+it, going from there directly to Tiguex with the skilled guides
+who conducted him. He left orders for Don Tristan de Arellano to
+proceed to Tiguex by the direct road, after the men had rested twenty
+days. On this journey, between one day when they left the camping
+place and mid-day of the third day, when they saw some snow-covered
+mountains, toward which they went in search of water, neither the
+Spaniards nor the horses nor the servants drank anything. They were
+able to stand it because of the severe cold, although with great
+difficulty. In eight days they reached Tutahaco,[384] where they
+learned that there were other towns down the river. These people
+were peaceful. The villages are terraced, like those at Tiguex, and
+of the same style. The general went up the river from here, visiting
+the whole province, until he reached Tiguex, where he found Hernando
+de Alvarado and the Turk. He felt no slight joy at such good news,
+because the Turk said that in his country there was a river in the
+level country which was two leagues wide, in which there were fishes
+as big as horses, and large numbers of very big canoes, with more
+than twenty rowers on a side, and that they carried sails, and that
+their lords sat on the poop under awnings, and on the prow they had
+a great golden eagle. He said also that the lord of that country
+took his afternoon nap under a great tree on which were hung a great
+number of little gold bells, which put him to sleep as they swung in
+the air. He said also that everyone had their ordinary dishes made of
+wrought plate, and the jugs and bowls were of gold. He called gold
+_acochis_. For the present he was believed, on account of the ease
+with which he told it and because they showed him metal ornaments and
+he recognized them and said they were not gold, and he knew gold and
+silver very well and did not care anything about other metals.[385]
+
+  [384] This name has always been a problem to students of the
+  expedition, and various attempts have been made to determine
+  its application. Jaramillo, one of Coronado's captains, applies
+  the name to Acoma, and indeed its final syllables are the same
+  as the native name of Acoma. In the heading to Chapter 11
+  Castañeda erroneously makes Tutahaco synonymous with Tusayan. The
+  description indicates that the Tigua village of Isleta and others
+  in its vicinity on the Rio Grande in the sixteenth century were
+  intended.
+
+  [385] This Eldorado is seemingly a combination of falsehood and
+  misinterpretation. The Turk's only means of communication were
+  signs; and we shall see later on that he deliberately deceived
+  the Spaniards for the purpose of leading them astray. The name
+  _acochis_ here given is an aid in the identification of the
+  mysterious province of Quivira. See p. 337, note 1.
+
+The general sent Hernando de Alvarado back to Cicuye to demand some
+gold bracelets which this Turk said they had taken from him at the
+time they captured him. Alvarado went, and was received as a friend
+at the village, and when he demanded the bracelets they said they
+knew nothing at all about them, saying the Turk was deceiving him and
+was lying. Captain Alvarado, seeing that there were no other means,
+got the captain Whiskers and the governor to come to his tent, and
+when they had come he put them in chains. The villagers prepared to
+fight, and let fly their arrows, denouncing Hernando de Alvarado, and
+saying that he was a man who had no respect for peace and friendship.
+Hernando de Alvarado started back to Tiguex, where the general
+kept them prisoners more than six months. This began the want of
+confidence in the word of the Spaniards whenever there was talk of
+peace from this time on, as will be seen by what happened afterward.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 14
+
+     _Of how the army went from Cibola to Tiguex and what happened to
+     them on the way, on account of the snow._
+
+
+We have already said that when the general started from Cibola,
+he left orders for Don Tristan de Arellano to start twenty days
+later. He did so as soon as he saw that the men were well rested and
+provided with food and eager to start off to find their general. He
+set off with his force toward Tiguex, and the first day they made
+their camp in the best, largest, and finest village of that (Cibola)
+province.[386] This is the only village that has houses with seven
+stories. In this village certain houses are used as fortresses; they
+are higher than the others and set up above them like towers, and
+there are embrasures and loopholes in them for defending the roofs
+of the different stories, because, like the other villages, they
+do not have streets, and the flat roofs are all of a height and are
+used in common. The roofs have to be reached first, and these upper
+houses are the means of defending them. It began to snow on us there,
+and the force took refuge under the wings of the village, which
+extend out like balconies, with wooden pillars beneath, because they
+generally use ladders to go up to those balconies, since they do not
+have any doors below.[387]
+
+  [386] This was Matsaki, at the northwestern base of Thunder
+  Mountain, about three miles east of the present Zuñi and eighteen
+  miles northeast of Hawikuh, where the advance force had encamped.
+  The ruins may still be seen, but no standing walls are visible.
+
+  [387] The first-story rooms were entered by means of hatchways
+  through the roof. As the necessity for defence no longer exists,
+  the rooms of the lower stories of Zuñi houses are provided with
+  doors and windows.
+
+The army continued its march from here after it stopped snowing, and
+as the season had already advanced into December, during the ten
+days that the army was delayed, it did not fail to snow during the
+evenings and nearly every night, so that they had to clear away a
+large amount of snow when they came to where they wanted to make a
+camp. The road could not be seen, but the guides managed to find it,
+as they knew the country. There are junipers and pines all over the
+country, which they used in making large brushwood fires, the smoke
+and heat of which melted the snow from two to four yards all around
+the fire. It was a dry snow, so that although it fell on the baggage,
+and covered it for half a man's height, it did not hurt it. It fell
+all night long, covering the baggage and the soldiers and their beds,
+piling up in the air, so that if anyone had suddenly come upon the
+army nothing would have been seen but mountains of snow. The horses
+stood half buried in it. It kept those who were underneath warm
+instead of cold. The army passed by the great rock of Acuco,[388] and
+the natives, who were peaceful, entertained our men well, giving them
+provisions and birds, although there are not many people here, as I
+have said. Many of the gentlemen went up to the top to see it, and
+they had great difficulty in going up the steps in the rock, because
+they were not used to them, for the natives go up and down so easily
+that they carry loads and the women carry water, and they do not seem
+even to touch their hands, although our men had to pass their weapons
+up from one to another.
+
+  [388] The army passed from Cibola by way of the present farming
+  village of Pescado, Inscription Rock or El Morro (thirty miles
+  east of Zuñi), and over the Zuñi Mountains to Acoma. Alvarado
+  followed an almost impassable trail eastward from Hawikuh, across
+  a great lava flow, to reach Acoma.
+
+From here they went on to Tiguex, where they were well received and
+taken care of, and the great good news of the Turk gave no little joy
+and helped lighten their hard labors, although when the army arrived
+we found the whole country or province in revolt, for reasons which
+were not slight in themselves, as will be shown, and our men had also
+burnt a village the day before the army arrived, and returned to the
+camp.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 15
+
+     _Of why Tiguex revolted, and how they were punished, without
+     being to blame for it._
+
+
+It has been related how the general reached Tiguex,[389] where he
+found Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas and Hernando de Alvarado, and how
+he sent the latter back to Cicuye, where he took the captain Whiskers
+and the governor of the village, who was an old man, prisoners. The
+people of Tiguex did not feel well about this seizure. In addition
+to this, the general wished to obtain some clothing to divide among
+his soldiers, and for this purpose he summoned one of the chief
+Indians of Tiguex, with whom he had already had much intercourse
+and with whom he was on good terms, who was called Juan Aleman by
+our men, after a Juan Aleman who lived in Mexico, whom he was said
+to resemble. The general told him that he must furnish about three
+hundred or more pieces of cloth, which he needed to give his people.
+He said that he was not able to do this, but that it pertained to
+the governors; and that besides this, they would have to consult
+together and divide it among the villages, and that it was necessary
+to make the demand of each town separately. The general did this, and
+ordered certain of the gentlemen who were with him to go and make the
+demand; and as there were twelve villages, some of them went on one
+side of the river and some on the other. As they were in very great
+need, they did not give the natives a chance to consult about it, but
+when they came to a village they demanded what they had to give, so
+that they could proceed at once. Thus these people could do nothing
+except take off their own cloaks and give them to make up the number
+demanded of them. And some of the soldiers who were in these parties,
+when the collectors gave them some blankets or cloaks which were not
+such as they wanted, if they saw any Indian with a better one on,
+they exchanged with him without more ado, not stopping to find out
+the rank of the man they were stripping, which caused not a little
+hard feeling.
+
+  [389] Tiguex (pronounced Tee-guaysh') is the name of a group
+  of Pueblo tribes, now consisting of Isleta, Sandia, Taos, and
+  Picuris, speaking the Tigua language, as it is now designated.
+  Their principal village in Coronado's time was also called Tiguex
+  by the Spaniards; this was the Puaray of forty years later
+  (1583), the first time the native name was recorded. It was
+  situated at the site of Bernalillo, on the Rio Grande, and was
+  inhabited up to the time of the Pueblo rebellion of 1680, when it
+  contained two hundred Tiguas and Spaniards.
+
+Besides what I have just said, one whom I will not name, out of
+regard for him, left the village where the camp was and went to
+another village about a league distant, and seeing a pretty woman
+there he called her husband down to hold his horse by the bridle
+while he went up; and as the village was entered by the upper story,
+the Indian supposed he was going to some other part of it. While he
+was there the Indian heard some slight noise, and then the Spaniard
+came down, took his horse, and went away. The Indian went up and
+learned that he had violated, or tried to violate, his wife, and so
+he came with the important men of the town to complain that a man had
+violated his wife, and he told how it happened. When the general made
+all the soldiers and the persons who were with him come together, the
+Indian did not recognize the man, either because he had changed his
+clothes or for whatever other reason there may have been, but he said
+that he could tell the horse, because he had held his bridle, and
+so he was taken to the stables, and found the horse, and said that
+the master of the horse must be the man. He denied doing it, seeing
+that he had not been recognized, and it may be that the Indian
+was mistaken in the horse; anyway, he went off without getting any
+satisfaction. The next day one of the Indians, who was guarding the
+horses of the army, came running in, saying that a companion of his
+had been killed, and that the Indians of the country were driving
+off the horses toward their villages. The Spaniards tried to collect
+the horses again, but many were lost, besides seven of the general's
+mules.[390]
+
+  [390] Antonio de Espejo learned of this occurrence at "Puala"
+  (Puaray) when the place was visited by him in 1583 (see
+  _Documentos Inéditos de Indias_, XV. 175).
+
+The next day Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas went to see the villages
+and talk with the natives. He found the villages closed by palisades
+and a great noise inside, the horses being chased as in a bull fight
+and shot with arrows. They were all ready for fighting. Nothing could
+be done, because they would not come down on to the plain and the
+villages are so strong that the Spaniards could not dislodge them.
+The general then ordered Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas to go and
+surround one village with all the rest of the force. This village was
+the one where the greatest injury had been done and where the affair
+with the Indian woman occurred. Several captains who had gone on in
+advance with the general, Juan de Saldivar and Barrionuevo and Diego
+Lopez and Melgosa, took the Indians so much by surprise that they
+gained the upper story, with great danger, for they wounded many of
+our men from within the houses. Our men were on top of the houses
+in great danger for a day and a night and part of the next day, and
+they made some good shots with their crossbows and muskets. The
+horsemen on the plain with many of the Indian allies from New Spain
+smoked them out from the cellars[391] into which they had broken, so
+that they begged for peace. Pablo de Melgosa and Diego Lopez, the
+alderman from Seville, were left on the roof and answered the Indians
+with the same signs they were making for peace, which was to make a
+cross. They then put down their arms and received pardon. They were
+taken to the tent of Don Garcia, who, according to what he said, did
+not know about the peace and thought that they had given themselves
+up of their own accord because they had been conquered. As he had
+been ordered by the general not to take them alive, but to make an
+example of them so that the other natives would fear the Spaniards,
+he ordered two hundred stakes to be prepared at once to burn them
+alive. Nobody told him about the peace that had been granted them,
+for the soldiers knew as little as he, and those who should have
+told him about it remained silent, not thinking that it was any of
+their business. Then when the enemies saw that the Spaniards were
+binding them and beginning to roast them, about a hundred men who
+were in the tent began to struggle and defend themselves with what
+there was there and with the stakes they could seize. Our men who
+were on foot attacked the tent on all sides, so that there was great
+confusion around it, and then the horsemen chased those who escaped.
+As the country was level, not a man of them remained alive, unless it
+was some who remained hidden in the village and escaped that night
+to spread throughout the country the news that the strangers did
+not respect the peace they had made, which afterward proved a great
+misfortune. After this was over, it began to snow, and they abandoned
+the village and returned to the camp just as the army came from
+Cibola.
+
+  [391] The pueblos are not provided with cellars. The underground
+  ceremonial chambers, or _kivas_, are doubtless here meant.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 16
+
+     _Of how they besieged Tiguex and took it and of what happened
+     during the siege._
+
+
+As I have already related, it began to snow in that country just
+after they captured the village, and it snowed so much that for the
+next two months[392] it was impossible to do anything except to go
+along the roads to advise them to make peace and tell them that
+they would be pardoned and might consider themselves safe, to which
+they replied that they did not trust those who did not know how to
+keep good faith after they had once given it, and that the Spaniards
+should remember that they were keeping Whiskers prisoner and that
+they did not keep their word when they burned those who surrendered
+in the village. Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas was one of those who
+went to give this notice. He started out with about thirty companions
+and went to the village of Tiguex to talk with Juan Aleman. Although
+they were hostile, they talked with him and said that if he wished
+to talk with them he must dismount and they would come out and talk
+with him about a peace, and that if he would send away the horsemen
+and make his men keep away, Juan Aleman and another captain would
+come out of the village and meet him. Everything was done as they
+required, and then when they approached they said that they had no
+arms and that he must take his off. Don Garcia Lopez did this in
+order to give them confidence, on account of his great desire to get
+them to make peace. When he met them, Juan Aleman approached and
+embraced him vigorously, while the other two who had come with him
+drew two mallets[393] which they had hidden behind their backs and
+gave him two such blows over his helmet that they almost knocked him
+senseless. Two of the soldiers on horseback had been unwilling to go
+very far off, even when he ordered them, and so they were near by and
+rode up so quickly that they rescued him from their hands, although
+they were unable to catch the enemies because the meeting was so near
+the village that of the great shower of arrows which were shot at
+them one arrow hit a horse and went through his nose. The horsemen
+all rode up together and hurriedly carried off their captain, without
+being able to harm the enemy, while many of our men were dangerously
+wounded. They then withdrew, leaving a number of men to continue the
+attack. Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas went on with a part of the force
+to another village about half a league distant, because almost all
+the people in this region had collected into these two villages. As
+they paid no attention to the demands made on them except by shooting
+arrows from the upper stories with loud yells, and would not hear of
+peace, he returned to his companions whom he had left to keep up the
+attack on Tiguex. A large number of those in the village came out and
+our men rode off slowly, pretending to flee, so that they drew the
+enemy on to the plain, and then turned on them and caught several of
+their leaders. The rest collected on the roofs of the village and the
+captain returned to his camp.
+
+  [392] The altitude of Bernalillo is 5260 feet, and snowstorms are
+  sometimes severe.
+
+  [393] Wooden war-clubs.
+
+After this affair the general ordered the army to go and surround
+the village. He set out with his men in good order, one day, with
+several scaling ladders. When he reached the village, he encamped his
+force near by, and then began the siege; but as the enemy had had
+several days to provide themselves with stores, they threw down such
+quantities of rocks upon our men that many of them were laid out, and
+they wounded nearly a hundred with arrows, several of whom afterward
+died on account of the bad treatment by an unskillful surgeon who was
+with the army. The siege lasted fifty days, during which time several
+assaults were made. The lack of water was what troubled the Indians
+most. They dug a very deep well inside the village, but were not able
+to get water, and while they were making it, it fell in and killed
+thirty persons. Two hundred of the besieged died in the fights. One
+day when there was a hard fight, they killed Francisco de Obando, a
+captain who had been army-master all the time that Don Garcia Lopez
+de Cardenas was away making the discoveries already described, and
+also Francisco Pobares, a fine gentleman. Our men were unable to
+prevent them from carrying Francisco de Obando inside the village,
+which was regretted not a little, because he was a distinguished
+person, besides being honored on his own account, affable and much
+beloved, which was noticeable. One day, before the capture was
+completed, they asked to speak to us, and said that, since they knew
+we would not harm the women and children, they wished to surrender
+their women and sons, because they were using up their water. It
+was impossible to persuade them to make peace, as they said that
+the Spaniards would not keep an agreement made with them. So they
+gave up about a hundred persons, women and boys, who did not want to
+leave them. Don Lope de Urrea rode up in front of the town without
+his helmet and received the boys and girls in his arms, and when all
+of these had been surrendered, Don Lope begged them to make peace,
+giving them the strongest promises for their safety. They told him to
+go away, as they did not wish to trust themselves to people who had
+no regard for friendship or their own word which they had pledged. As
+he seemed unwilling to go away, one of them put an arrow in his bow
+ready to shoot, and threatened to shoot him with it unless he went
+off, and they warned him to put on his helmet, but he was unwilling
+to do so, saying that they would not hurt him as long as he stayed
+there. When the Indian saw that he did not want to go away, he shot
+and planted his arrow between the fore feet of the horse, and then
+put another arrow in his bow and repeated that if he did not go away
+he would really shoot him. Don Lope put on his helmet and slowly rode
+back to where the horsemen were, without receiving any harm from
+them. When they saw that he was really in safety, they began to shoot
+arrows in showers, with loud yells and cries. The general did not
+want to make an assault that day, in order to see if they could be
+brought in some way to make peace, which they would not consider.
+
+Fifteen days later they decided to leave the village one night,
+and did so, taking the women in their midst. They started about
+the fourth watch, in the very early morning, on the side where the
+cavalry was. The alarm was given by those in the camp of Don Rodrigo
+Maldonado. The enemy attacked them and killed one Spaniard and a
+horse and wounded others, but they were driven back with great
+slaughter until they came to the river,[394] where the water flowed
+swiftly and very cold. They threw themselves into this, and as the
+men had come quickly from the whole camp to assist the cavalry,
+there were few who escaped being killed or wounded. Some men from the
+camp went across the river next day and found many of them who had
+been overcome by the great cold. They brought these back, cured them,
+and made servants of them. This ended that siege, and the town was
+captured, although there were a few who remained in one part of the
+town and were captured a few days later.
+
+  [394] The Rio Grande, which is near by.
+
+Two captains, Don Diego de Guevara and Juan de Saldivar, had captured
+the other large village after a siege. Having started out very early
+one morning to make an ambuscade in which to catch some warriors
+who used to come out every morning to try to frighten our camp,
+the spies, who had been placed where they could see when they were
+coming, saw the people come out and proceed toward the country. The
+soldiers left the ambuscade and went to the village and saw the
+people fleeing. They pursued and killed large numbers of them. At the
+same time those in the camp were ordered to go over the town, and
+they plundered it, making prisoners of all the people who were found
+in it, amounting to about a hundred women and children. This siege
+ended the last of March, in the year '42 [1541]. Other things had
+happened in the meantime, which would have been noticed, but that it
+would have cut the thread. I have omitted them, but will relate them
+now, so that it will be possible to understand what follows.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 17
+
+     _Of how messengers reached the army from the valley of Señora,
+     and how Captain Melchior Diaz died on the expedition to the
+     Firebrand River._
+
+
+We have already related how Captain Melchior Diaz crossed the
+Firebrand River [Rio Colorado] on rafts, in order to continue his
+discoveries farther in that direction. About the time the siege
+ended, messengers reached the army from the city of San Hieronimo
+with letters from Diego de Alarcon,[395] who had remained there in
+the place of Melchior Diaz. These contained the news that Melchior
+Diaz had died while he was conducting his search, and that the force
+had returned without finding any of the things they were after. It
+all happened in this fashion:
+
+After they had crossed the river they continued their search for the
+coast, which here turned back toward the south,[396] or between south
+and east, because that arm of the sea enters the land due north, and
+this river, which brings its waters down from the north, flowing
+toward the south, enters the head of the gulf.[397] Continuing in
+the direction they had been going, they came to some sandbanks of
+hot ashes which it was impossible to cross without being drowned as
+in the sea. The ground they were standing on trembled like a sheet
+of paper, so that it seemed as if there were lakes underneath them.
+It seemed wonderful and like something infernal, for the ashes to
+bubble up here in several places. After they had gone away from this
+place, on account of the danger they seemed to be in and of the
+lack of water, one day a greyhound belonging to one of the soldiers
+chased some sheep which they were taking along for food. When the
+captain noticed this, he threw his lance at the dog while his horse
+was running, so that it stuck up in the ground, and not being able to
+stop his horse he went over the lance so that it nailed him through
+the thighs and the iron came out behind, rupturing his bladder.
+After this the soldiers turned back with their captain, having to
+fight every day with the Indians, who had remained hostile. He lived
+about twenty days, during which they proceeded with great difficulty
+on account of the necessity of carrying him. They returned in good
+order without losing a man, until he died, and after that they were
+relieved of the greatest difficulty. When they reached Señora,
+Alcaraz despatched the messengers already referred to, so that the
+general might know of this and also that some of the soldiers
+were ill-disposed and had caused several mutinies, and that he had
+sentenced two of them to the gallows, but they had afterward escaped
+from the prison.
+
+  [395] Should be Alcaraz. See Chapter 10.
+
+  [396] That is, the west coast of the Gulf of California.
+
+  [397] During 1905 the waters of the Rio Colorado were diverted
+  westward below Yuma and are now (1906) flowing into the Salton
+  Sink, or Imperial Valley, in southern California, forming an
+  immense lake.
+
+When the general learned this, he sent Don Pedro de Tovar to that
+city to sift out some of the men. He was accompanied by messengers
+whom the general sent to Don Antonio de Mendoza the viceroy, with
+an account of what had occurred and with the good news given by
+the Turk. When Don Pedro de Tovar arrived there, he found that the
+natives of that province had killed a soldier with a poisoned arrow,
+which had made only a very little wound in one hand.[398] Several
+soldiers went to the place where this happened to see about it, and
+they were not very well received. Don Pedro de Tovar sent Diego de
+Alcaraz with a force to seize the chiefs and lords of a village in
+what they call the Valley of Knaves (_de los Vellacos_), which is in
+the hills. After getting there and getting these men prisoners, Diego
+de Alcaraz decided to let them go in exchange for some thread and
+cloth and other things which the soldiers needed. Finding themselves
+free, they renewed the war and attacked them, and as they were strong
+and had poison, they killed several Spaniards and wounded others so
+that they died on the way back. They retired toward the town, and if
+they had not had Indian allies from the country of the Hearts, it
+would have gone worse with them. They got back to the town, leaving
+seventeen soldiers dead from the poison. They would die in agony from
+only a small wound, the bodies breaking out with an insupportable
+pestilential stench. When Don Pedro de Tovar saw the harm done, and
+as it seemed to them that they could not safely stay in that city, he
+moved forty leagues toward Cibola into the valley of Suya,[399] where
+we will leave them, in order to relate what happened to the general
+and his army after the siege of Tiguex.
+
+  [398] Doubtless the Opatas, whose poisoned arrows are often
+  alluded to by later Spanish writers. See, for example, the
+  _Rudo Ensayo_ (ca. 1762), (San Augustin, 1863); also Guiteras's
+  translation in _Records of the American Catholic Historical
+  Society_, V. No. 2 (Philadelphia, June, 1894).
+
+  [399] The upper part of the Rio San Pedro (which rises in
+  northern Sonora), according to recent studies by Mr. James Newton
+  Baskett.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 18
+
+     _Of how the general managed to leave the country in peace so as
+     to go in search of Quivira, where the Turk said there was the
+     most wealth._
+
+
+During the siege of Tiguex the general decided to go to Cicuye and
+take the governor with him, in order to give him his liberty and
+to promise them that he would give Whiskers his liberty and leave
+him in the village, as soon as he should start for Quivira. He was
+received peacefully when he reached Cicuye, and entered the village
+with several soldiers. They received their governor with much joy
+and gratitude. After looking over the village and speaking with the
+natives he returned to his army, leaving Cicuye at peace, in the hope
+of getting back their captain Whiskers.
+
+After the siege was ended, as we have already related, he sent a
+captain to Chia,[400] a fine village with many people, which had sent
+to offer its submission. It was four leagues distant to the west
+of the river.[401] They found it peaceful and gave it four bronze
+cannon, which were in poor condition, to take care of. Six gentlemen
+also went to Quirix, a province with seven villages.[402] At the
+first village, which had about a hundred inhabitants, the natives
+fled, not daring to wait for our men; but they headed them off by
+a short cut, riding at full speed, and then they returned to their
+houses in the village in perfect safety, and then told the other
+villagers about it and reassured them. In this way the entire region
+was reassured, little by little, by the time the ice in the river
+was broken up and it became possible to ford the river and so to
+continue the journey. The twelve villages of Tiguex, however, were
+not repopulated at all during the time the army was there, in spite
+of every promise of security that could possibly be given to them.
+
+  [400] The present Sia, a small pueblo on the Rio Jemez. In 1583
+  Sia was one of a group of five pueblos which Antonio de Espejo
+  called Cunames or Punames. It suffered severely by the Pueblo
+  revolt a century later, and is now reduced to about a hundred
+  people who have great difficulty in gaining a livelihood, owing
+  to lack of water for irrigation.
+
+  [401] That is, the Rio Grande.
+
+  [402] The "province" occupied by the Queres or Keresan Indians,
+  consisting of the pueblos of Cochiti, San Felipe, and Santo
+  Domingo, of to-day--all on the Rio Grande. Sia and Santa Ana are
+  and were also Queres villages in Coronado's time, but as these
+  were not on the Rio Grande, they may not have been included in
+  Castañeda's group. When Espejo visited the Queres in 1583, they
+  occupied only five pueblos on the Rio Grande; now only the three
+  above mentioned are inhabited.
+
+And when the river, which for almost four months had been frozen over
+so that they crossed the ice on horseback, had thawed out, orders
+were given for the start for Quivira,[403] where the Turk said there
+was some gold and silver, although not so much as in Arche[404] and
+the Guaes.[405] There were already some in the army who suspected
+the Turk, because a Spaniard named Servantes, who had charge of him
+during the siege, solemnly swore that he had seen the Turk talking
+with the devil in a pitcher of water, and also that while he had him
+under lock so that no one could speak to him, the Turk had asked him
+what Christians had been killed by the people at Tiguex. He told him
+"nobody," and then the Turk answered: "You lie; five Christians are
+dead, including a captain." And as Cervantes knew that he told the
+truth, he confessed it so as to find out who had told him about it,
+and the Turk said he knew it all by himself and that he did not need
+to have anyone tell him in order to know it. And it was on account
+of this that he watched him and saw him speaking to the devil in the
+pitcher, as I have said.
+
+  [403] See p. 337, note 1.
+
+  [404] Evidently the Harahey of other chroniclers, which has been
+  identified with the Pawnee country of southern Nebraska.
+
+  [405] Possibly the Kansa or Kaw tribe, after whom the state of
+  Kansas is named.
+
+While all this was going on, preparations were being made to start
+from Tiguex. At this time people came from Cibola to see the general,
+and he charged them to take good care of the Spaniards who were
+coming from Señora with Don Pedro de Tovar. He gave them letters to
+give to Don Pedro, informing him what he ought to do and how he
+should go to find the army, and that he would find letters under the
+crosses which the army would put up along the way. The army left
+Tiguex on the fifth of May[406] and returned to Cicuye, which, as I
+have said, is twenty-five marches, which means leagues, from there,
+taking Whiskers with them.[407] Arrived there, he gave them their
+captain, who already went about freely with a guard. The village was
+very glad to see him, and the people were peaceful and offered food.
+The governor and Whiskers gave the general a young fellow called
+Xabe, a native of Quivira, who could give them information about the
+country. This fellow said that there was gold and silver, but not
+so much of it as the Turk had said. The Turk, however, continued to
+declare that it was as he had said. He went as a guide, and thus the
+army started off from here.
+
+  [406] In his letter to the King, dated Tiguex October 20, 1541,
+  Coronado says that he started April 23. See Winship's translation
+  in _Fourteenth Report of the Bureau of Ethnology_ (1896), p. 580.
+
+  [407] Cicuye is Pecos, as above mentioned. The direction is north
+  of east and the distance forty miles in an air line, or fifteen
+  Spanish judicial leagues. By rail, which follows almost exactly
+  the old trail, the distance is sixty-five miles, or almost
+  precisely twenty-five leagues.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 19
+
+     _Of how they started in search of Quivira and of what happened
+     on the way._
+
+
+The army started from Cicuye, leaving the village at peace and, as it
+seemed, contented, and under obligations to maintain the friendship
+because their governor and captain had been restored to them.
+Proceeding toward the plains, which are all on the other side of
+the mountains, after four days' journey they came to a river with a
+large, deep current, which flowed from toward Cicuyc, and they named
+this the Cicuyc river. They had to stop here to make a bridge so as
+to cross it.[408] It was finished in four days, by much diligence
+and rapid work, and as soon as it was done the whole army and the
+animals crossed. After ten days more they came to some settlements of
+people who lived like Arabs and who are called Querechos[409] in that
+region. They had seen the cows[410] for two days. These folks live
+in tents made of the tanned skins of the cows. They travel around
+near the cows, killing them for food. They did nothing unusual when
+they saw our army, except to come out of their tents to look at us,
+after which they came to talk with the advance guard, and asked who
+we were. The general talked with them, but as they had already talked
+with the Turk, who was with the advance guard, they agreed with what
+he had said. That they were very intelligent is evident from the fact
+that although they conversed by means of signs they made themselves
+understood so well that there was no need of an interpreter.[411]
+They said that there was a very large river over toward where the
+sun came from, and that one could go along this river through an
+inhabited region for ninety days without a break from settlement to
+settlement. They said that the first of these settlements was called
+Haxa,[412] and that the river was more than a league wide and that
+there were many canoes on it.[413] These folks started off from here
+next day with a lot of dogs which dragged their possessions. For two
+days, during which the army marched in the same direction as that in
+which they had come from the settlements--that is, between north and
+east, but more toward the north--they saw other roaming Querechos
+and such great numbers of cows that it already seemed something
+incredible. These people gave a great deal of information about
+settlements, all toward the east from where we were. Here Don Garcia
+broke his arm and a Spaniard got lost who went off hunting so far
+that he was unable to return to the camp, because the country is very
+level. The Turk said it was one or two days to Haya (Haxa).[414] The
+general sent Captain Diego Lopez with ten companions lightly equipped
+and a guide to go at full speed toward the sunrise for two days and
+discover Haxa, and then return to meet the army, which set out in the
+same direction next day. They came across so many animals that those
+who were on the advance guard killed a large number of bulls. As
+these fled they trampled one another in their haste until they came
+to a ravine. So many of the animals fell into this that they filled
+it up, and the rest went across on top of them. The men who were
+chasing them on horseback fell in among the animals without noticing
+where they were going. Three of the horses that fell in among the
+cows, all saddled and bridled, were lost sight of completely.
+
+  [408] The Rio Pecos. The bridge was doubtless built across the
+  stream somewhere near Puerto de Luna. The Ms. here reads Cicuyc
+  for Cicuye.
+
+  [409] The name by which the eastern Apaches, or Apaches Vaqueros
+  of later times, were known to the Pecos Indians. The first
+  Querechos were met near the eastern boundary of New Mexico.
+
+  [410] Wherever "cows" are mentioned, bison are of course meant.
+  Herds of these animals ranged as far as the Pecos, which was
+  known as the Rio de las Vacas later in the century.
+
+  [411] All the Indians of the great plains were expert in the sign
+  language, as their spoken languages were many and diverse.
+
+  [412] The place has not been identified with certainty.
+
+  [413] This river, if it existed at all, was in all probability
+  the lower Arkansas or the Mississippi, hundreds of miles away.
+
+  [414] The Turk was evidently lying, at least so far as the
+  distance was concerned. The Texas Indians were not canoeists. The
+  army was now in the western part of the staked plains of Texas,
+  but had changed its course from northeasterly to south of east.
+  The country is greatly broken by the cañons of the streams which
+  take their rise in these parts.
+
+As it seemed to the general that Diego Lopez ought to be on his way
+back, he sent six of his companions to follow up the banks of the
+little river, and as many more down the banks, to look for traces of
+the horses at the trails to and from the river. It was impossible to
+find tracks in this country, because the grass straightened up again
+as soon as it was trodden down. They were found by some Indians from
+the army who had gone to look for fruit. These got track of them a
+good league off, and soon came up with them. They followed the river
+down to the camp, and told the general that in the twenty leagues
+they had been over they had seen nothing but cows and the sky. There
+was another native of Quivira with the army, a painted Indian named
+Ysopete. This Indian had always declared that the Turk was lying, and
+on account of this the army paid no attention to him, and even now,
+although he said that the Querechos had consulted with him, Ysopete
+was not believed.
+
+The general sent Don Rodrigo Maldonado, with his company, forward
+from here. He travelled four days and reached a large ravine like
+those of Colima, in the bottom of which he found a large settlement
+of people. Cabeza de Vaca and Dorantes had passed through this
+place,[415] so that they presented Don Rodrigo with a pile of tanned
+skins and other things, and a tent as big as a house, which he
+directed them to keep until the army came up. He sent some of his
+companions to guide the army to that place, so that they should not
+get lost, although he had been making piles of stones and cow-dung
+for the army to follow. This was the way in which the army was guided
+by the advance guard.
+
+  [415] See Cabeza de Vaca's narration in this volume, p. 97.
+
+When the general came up with the army and saw the great quantity
+of skins, he thought he would divide them among the men, and placed
+guards so that they could look at them. But when the men arrived and
+saw that the general was sending some of his companions with orders
+for the guards to give them some of the skins, and that these were
+going to select the best, they were angry because they were not going
+to be divided evenly, and made a rush, and in less than a quarter of
+an hour nothing was left but the empty ground.
+
+The natives who happened to see this also took a hand in it. The
+women and some others were left crying, because they thought that
+the strangers were not going to take anything, but would bless them
+as Cabeza de Vaca and Dorantes had done when they passed through
+here. They found an Indian girl here who was as white as a Castilian
+lady,[416] except that she had her chin painted like a Moorish woman.
+In general they all paint themselves in this way here, and they
+decorate their eyes.
+
+  [416] Probably an albino is here referred to.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 20
+
+     _Of how great stones fell in the camp, and how they discovered
+     another ravine, where the army was divided into two parts._
+
+
+While the army was resting in this ravine, as we have related, a
+tempest came up one afternoon with a very high wind and hail, and in
+a very short space of time a great quantity of hailstones, as big
+as bowls, or bigger, fell as thick as raindrops, so that in places
+they covered the ground two or three spans or more deep. And one hit
+the horse--or I should say, there was not a horse that did not break
+away, except two or three which the negroes protected by holding
+large sea nets over them, with the helmets and shields which all the
+rest wore; and some of them dashed up on to the sides of the ravine
+so that they got them down with great difficulty. If this had struck
+them while they were upon the plain, the army would have been in
+great danger of being left without its horses, as there were many
+which they were not able to cover. The hail broke many tents, and
+battered many helmets, and wounded many of the horses, and broke all
+the crockery of the army, and the gourds, which was no small loss,
+because they do not have any crockery in this region. They do not
+make gourds, nor sow corn, nor eat bread, but instead raw meat--or
+only half cooked--and fruit.[417]
+
+  [417] Castañeda here refers to the buffalo-hunting Indians in
+  contrast to the Pueblo tribes which the Spaniards had left.
+
+From here the general sent out to explore the country, and they
+found another settlement four days from there[418].... The country
+was well inhabited, and they had plenty of kidney beans and prunes
+like those of Castile, and tall vineyards. These village settlements
+extended for three days. This was called Cona. Some Teyas,[419] as
+these people are called, went with the army from here and travelled
+as far as the end of the other settlements with their packs of dogs
+and women and children, and then they gave them guides to proceed
+to a large ravine where the army was. They did not let these guides
+speak with the Turk, and did not receive the same statements from
+these as they had from the others. These said that Quivira was toward
+the north, and that we should not find any good road thither. After
+this they began to believe Ysopete. The ravine which the army had
+now reached was a league wide from one side to the other, with a
+little bit of a river at the bottom, and there were many groves of
+mulberry trees near it, and rosebushes with the same sort of fruit
+that they have in France. They made verjuice from the unripe grapes
+at this ravine, although there were ripe ones. There were walnuts
+and the same kind of fowls as in New Spain, and large quantities of
+prunes like those of Castile. During this journey a Teya was seen
+to shoot a bull right through both shoulders with an arrow, which
+would be a good shot for a musket. These people are very intelligent;
+the women are well made and modest. They cover their whole body.
+They wear shoes and buskins made of tanned skin. The women wear
+cloaks over their small under petticoats, with sleeves gathered up
+at the shoulders, all of skin, and some wore something like little
+_san-benitos_[420] with a fringe, which reached half-way down the
+thigh over the petticoat.
+
+  [418] "_A manera de alixares._" The margin reads _Alexeres_, a
+  word meaning "threshing floor."
+
+  [419] These were evidently the Indians later called Tejas,
+  or Texas, from which the state took its name. The name was
+  indiscriminately applied by various later writers, but always to
+  one of the Caddoan tribes or group of tribes.
+
+  [420] "We were brought into the Church, every one with a S.
+  Benito upon his backe, which is a halfe a yard of yellow cloth,
+  with a hole to put in a mans head in the middest, and cast over
+  a mans head: both flaps hang one before, and another behinde,
+  and in the middest of every flap, a S. Andrewes crosse, made
+  of red cloth, sowed on upon the same, and that is called S.
+  Benito."--Robert Tomson, "Voyage into Nova Hispania," 1555, in
+  Hakluyt, _Voyages_, IX. 348 (1904).
+
+The army rested several days in this ravine and explored the country.
+Up to this point they had made thirty-seven days' marches, travelling
+six or seven leagues a day.[421] It had been the duty of one man to
+measure and count his steps. They found that it was 250 leagues to
+the settlements.[422] When the general Francisco Vazquez realized
+this, and saw that they had been deceived by the Turk heretofore, and
+as the provisions were giving out and there was no country around
+here where they could procure more, he called the captains and
+ensigns together to decide on what they thought ought to be done.
+They all agreed that the general should go in search of Quivira with
+thirty horsemen and half a dozen foot-soldiers, and that Don Tristan
+de Arellano should go back to Tiguex with all the army. When the men
+in the army learned of this decision, they begged their general not
+to leave them to conduct the further search, but declared that they
+all wanted to die with him and did not want to go back. This did not
+do any good, although the general agreed to send messengers to them
+within eight days saying whether it was best for them to follow him
+or not, and with this he set off with the guides he had and with
+Ysopete. The Turk was taken along in chains.
+
+  [421] The league is equivalent to 2.63 English miles. This
+  Spanish judicial league is still used in Mexico.
+
+  [422] The Tiguex villages on the Rio Grande are often referred to
+  as the region where the settlements were.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 21
+
+     _Of how the army returned to Tiguex and the general reached
+     Quivira._
+
+
+The general started from the ravine with the guides that the Teyas
+had given him. He appointed the alderman Diego Lopez his army-master,
+and took with him the men who seemed to him to be most efficient, and
+the best horses. The army still had some hope that the general would
+send for them, and sent two horsemen, lightly equipped and riding
+post, to repeat their petition.
+
+The general arrived--I mean, the guides ran away during the first few
+days and Diego Lopez had to return to the army for guides, bringing
+orders for the army to return to Tiguex to find food and wait there
+for the general. The Teyas, as before, willingly furnished him with
+new guides. The army waited for its messengers and spent a fortnight
+here, preparing jerked beef to take with them. It was estimated that
+during this fortnight they killed 500 bulls. The number of these that
+were there without any cows was something incredible. Many fellows
+were lost at this time who went out hunting and did not get back to
+the army for two or three days, wandering about the country as if
+they were crazy, in one direction or another, not knowing how to get
+back where they started from, although this ravine extended in either
+direction so that they could find it. Every night they took account
+of who was missing, fired guns and blew trumpets and beat drums and
+built great fires, but yet some of them went off so far and wandered
+about so much that all this did not give them any help, although it
+helped others. The only way was to go back where they had killed an
+animal and start from there in one direction and another until they
+struck the ravine or fell in with somebody who could put them on the
+right road. It is worth noting that the country there is so level
+that at midday, after one has wandered about in one direction and
+another in pursuit of game, the only thing to do is to stay near the
+game quietly until sunset, so as to see where it goes down, and even
+then they have to be men who are practised to do it. Those who are
+not, had to trust themselves to others.[423]
+
+  [423] The point of separation of the army was in all probability
+  the upper waters of the Rio Colorado in Texas. See the narration
+  of Cabeza de Vaca, p. 97, note 2.
+
+The general followed his guides until he reached Quivira, which took
+forty-eight days' marching, on account of the great detour they had
+made toward Florida.[424] He was received peacefully on account of
+the guides whom he had. They asked the Turk why he had lied and had
+guided them so far out of their way. He said that his country was
+in that direction and that, besides this, the people at Cicuye had
+asked him to lead them off on to the plains and lose them, so that
+the horses would die when their provisions gave out, and they would
+be so weak if they ever returned that they could be killed without
+any trouble, and thus they could take revenge for what had been done
+to them. This was the reason why he had led them astray, supposing
+that they did not know how to hunt or to live without corn, while
+as for the gold, he did not know where there was any of it. He said
+this like one who had given up hope and who found that he was being
+persecuted, since they had begun to believe Ysopete, who had guided
+them better than he had, and fearing lest those who were there might
+give some advice by which some harm would come to him. They garroted
+him, which pleased Ysopete very much, because he had always said that
+Ysopete was a rascal and that he did not know what he was talking
+about and had always hindered his talking with anybody. Neither gold
+nor silver nor any trace of either was found among these people.
+Their lord wore a copper plate on his neck and prized it highly.[425]
+
+  [424] That is, toward the southeast. At a somewhat later period
+  Florida included everything from the peninsula northward.
+
+  [425] For additional details respecting the route pursued
+  by Coronado after the main army was sent back, consult the
+  narrative of Jaramillo, the _Relacion del Suceso_, and other
+  documents pertaining to the expedition, in Winship's _Coronado
+  Expedition_ (1896) and _Journey of Coronado_ (1904), and in
+  connection therewith a discussion of the route by F. W. Hodge,
+  in J. V. Brower's _Memoirs of Explorations in the Basin of the
+  Mississippi_, II. (St. Paul, 1899). Continuing due north from the
+  upper waters of the Rio Colorado of Texas, Coronado's immediate
+  force in thirty days' march, according to the _Relacion del
+  Suceso_ (or "more than thirty days' march, although not long
+  marches," according to Jaramillo), reached the river of St. Peter
+  and St. Paul the last of June, 1541. This was the "river of
+  Quivira" of the _Relacion del Suceso_, the present Arkansas River
+  in Kansas, which was crossed at its southern bend, just east of
+  the present Dodge City. The party continued thence northeast,
+  downstream, and in thirty leagues, or six or seven days' march,
+  reached the first of the Quivira settlements. This was at or
+  near the present Great Bend, Kansas, before reaching the site of
+  which the Turk was "made an example of." That the inhabitants
+  of Quivira were the Wichita Indians there can be no reasonable
+  doubt. The Quivira people lived in grass or straw lodges,
+  according to the Spaniards, a fact that was true of the Wichitas
+  only of all the northern plains tribes. The habitations of their
+  congeners and northern neighbors, the Pawnee (who may be regarded
+  as the inhabitants of the province of Harahey), were earth
+  lodges. The word _acochis_, mentioned by Castañeda as the Quivira
+  term for "gold," is merely the Spanish adaptation of _hakwichis_,
+  which signifies "metal," for of gold our Indians knew nothing
+  until after the advent of the white man. After exploring Quivira
+  for twenty-five leagues, Coronado sent "captains and men in many
+  directions," but they failed to find that of which they went in
+  search. There is no reason to suppose that Coronado's party went
+  beyond the limits of the present state of Kansas.
+
+The messengers whom the army had sent to the general returned, as
+I said, and then, as they brought no news except what the alderman
+had delivered, the army left the ravine and returned to the Teyas,
+where they took guides who led them back by a more direct road. They
+readily furnished these, because these people are always roaming over
+this country in pursuit of the animals and so know it thoroughly.
+They keep their road in this way: In the morning they notice where
+the sun rises and observe the direction they are going to take,
+and then shoot an arrow in this direction. Before reaching this
+they shoot another over it, and in this way they go all day toward
+the water where they are to end the day. In this way they covered
+in twenty-five days what had taken them thirty-seven days going,
+besides stopping to hunt cows on the way. They found many salt
+lakes on this road, and there was a great quantity of salt. There
+were thick pieces of it on top of the water bigger than tables, as
+thick as four or five fingers. Two or three spans down under water
+there was salt which tasted better than that in the floating pieces,
+because this was rather bitter. It was crystalline. All over these
+plains there were large numbers of animals like squirrels[426] and
+a great number of their holes. On its return the army reached the
+Cicuye river more than thirty leagues below there--I mean below the
+bridge they had made when they crossed it, and they followed it up
+to that place.[427] In general, its banks are covered with a sort
+of rose bushes, the fruit of which tastes like muscatel grapes.
+They grow on little twigs about as high up as a man. It has the
+parsley leaf. There were unripe grapes and currants(?) and wild
+marjoram. The guides said this river joined that of Tiguex more
+than twenty days from here, and that its course turned toward the
+east. It is believed that it flows into the mighty river of the Holy
+Spirit (Espiritu Santo), which the men with Don Hernando de Soto
+discovered in Florida.[428] A painted Indian woman ran away from
+Juan de Saldibar and hid in the ravines about this time, because she
+recognized the country of Tiguex where she had been a slave. She fell
+into the hands of some Spaniards who had entered the country from
+Florida to explore it in this direction.[429] After I got back to New
+Spain I heard them say that the Indian told them that she had run
+away from other men like them nine days, and that she gave the names
+of some captains; from which we ought to believe that we were not far
+from the region they discovered, although they said they were more
+than 200 leagues inland. I believe the land at that point is more
+than 600 leagues across from sea to sea.
+
+  [426] Prairie-dogs.
+
+  [427] This would make the point at which the army reached Pecos
+  River about eighty miles below Puerto de Luna, or not far from
+  the present town of Roswell.
+
+  [428] Castañeda is writing about twenty years later. De Soto's
+  army was exploring the eastern country as Coronado was traversing
+  the buffalo plains. The Espiritu Santo is the Mississippi.
+
+  [429] See the Gentleman of Elvas in the second part of the
+  present volume.
+
+As I said, the army followed the river up as far as Cicuye, which it
+found ready for war and unwilling to make any advances toward peace
+or to give any food to the army. From there they went on to Tiguex
+where several villages had been reinhabited, but the people were
+afraid and left them again.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 22
+
+     _Of how the general returned from Quivira and of other
+     expeditions toward the North._
+
+
+After Don Tristan de Arellano reached Tiguex, about the middle of
+July, in the year '42,[430] he had provisions collected for the
+coming winter. Captain Francisco de Barrionuevo was sent up the river
+toward the north with several men. He saw two provinces, one of
+which was called Hemes[431] and had seven villages, and the other
+Yuqueyunque.[432] The inhabitants of Hemes came out peaceably and
+furnished provisions. At Yuqueyunque the whole nation left two very
+fine villages which they had on either side of the river entirely
+vacant, and went into the mountains, where they had four very strong
+villages in a rough country, where it was impossible for horses to
+go.[433] In the two villages there was a great deal of food and some
+very beautiful glazed earthenware with many figures and different
+shapes.[434] Here they also found many bowls full of a carefully
+selected shining metal with which they glazed the earthenware. This
+shows that mines of silver would be found in that country if they
+should hunt for them.
+
+  [430] As usual Castañeda gives a date a year later than the
+  actual one.
+
+  [431] The pueblos occupied by the Jemez people. Only one of these
+  now exists; this is on the Rio Jemez, a western tributary of the
+  Rio Grande, which enters the latter stream above Bernalillo, New
+  Mexico. See p. 359, note 2.
+
+  [432] This was Yukiwingge, on the site of the present small
+  village of Chamita, at the mouth of the Rio Chama, opposite San
+  Juan pueblo. The other one of the two villages was doubtless San
+  Juan. Both of these were occupied by Tewa Indians. At Yukiwingge
+  was established, in 1598, by Juan de Oñate, the colonizer of New
+  Mexico, the settlement of San Gabriel de los Españoles, which
+  was occupied until the spring of 1605, when the seat of the
+  provincial government was moved to Santa Fé, founded for the
+  purpose in that year. See p. 359, note 4.
+
+  [433] These may have been the pueblos, now in ruins, in and north
+  of the Pajarito Park, one of which, called Puye, gives evidence
+  of occupancy in post-Spanish times.
+
+  [434] It is not known definitely whether actually glazed pottery
+  or merely the black, highly polished earthenware characteristic
+  of the Tewa Indians of the neighborhood is here meant. The
+  ancient Pueblos manufactured a ware with decoration in what
+  appears to be a salt glaze. Specimens of this have been gathered
+  in the Pajarito Park, at Zuñi, among the Hopi of Arizona, and
+  from ancient ruins around Acoma, but the art seems to have been
+  lost. There is abundant evidence that this form of decoration was
+  prehistoric. The finding of the "shining metal" (called antimony
+  in Pt. 2, chap. 4) would seem to indicate that the polished
+  rather than the glazed ware was here meant.
+
+There was a large and powerful river, I mean village, which was
+called Braba, twenty leagues farther up the river, which our men
+called Valladolid.[435] The river flowed through the middle of it.
+The natives crossed it by wooden bridges, made of very long, large,
+squared pines. At this village they saw the largest and finest hot
+rooms or estufas that there were in the entire country, for they had
+a dozen pillars, each one of which was twice as large around as one
+could reach and twice as tall as a man. Hernando de Alvarado visited
+this village when he discovered Cicuye. The country is very high and
+very cold.[436] The river is deep and very swift, without any ford.
+Captain Barrionuevo returned from here, leaving the province at peace.
+
+  [435] This was the pueblo of Taos, which stood near the site of
+  the present village of the same name, on both sides of the little
+  stream (Taos River). The present Taos has 425 inhabitants. The
+  swift and deep river without the ford, here referred to, must
+  have been the Rio Grande in the neighborhood of Taos, rather than
+  the Rio de Taos, which is insignificant except in seasons of
+  freshet. Castañeda was evidently not one of Barrionuevo's party.
+
+  [436] The altitude of Taos is 6983 feet; of Taos Peak, 13,145
+  feet.
+
+Another captain went down the river in search of the settlements
+which the people at Tutahaco had said were several days distant
+from there. This captain went down eighty leagues and found four
+large villages which he left at peace.[437] He proceeded until he
+found that the river sank into the earth, like the Guadiana in
+Estremadura.[438] He did not go on to where the Indians said that it
+came out much larger, because his commission did not extend for more
+than eighty leagues' march. After this captain got back, as the time
+had arrived which the captain had set for his return from Quivira,
+and as he had not come back, Don Tristan selected forty companions
+and, leaving the army to Francisco de Barrionuevo, he started with
+them in search of the general. When he reached Cicuye the people came
+out of the village to fight, which detained him there four days,
+while he punished them, which he did by firing some volleys into the
+village. These killed several men, so that they did not come out
+against the army, since two of their principal men had been killed
+on the first day. Just then word was brought that the general was
+coming, and so Don Tristan had to stay there on this account also,
+to keep the road open. Everybody welcomed the general on his arrival,
+with great joy. The Indian Xabe, who was the young fellow who had
+been given to the general at Cicuye when he started off in search of
+Quivira, was with Don Tristan de Arellano and when he learned that
+the general was coming he acted as if he was greatly pleased, and
+said, "Now when the general comes, you will see that there are gold
+and silver in Quivira, although not so much as the Turk said." When
+the general arrived, and Xabe saw that they had not found anything,
+he was sad and silent, and kept declaring that there was some. He
+made many believe that it was so, because the general had not dared
+to enter into the country on account of its being thickly settled
+and his force not very strong, and that he had returned to lead
+his army there after the rains, because it had begun to rain there
+already, as it was early in August when he left. It took him forty
+days to return, travelling lightly equipped. The Turk had said when
+they left Tiguex that they ought not to load the horses with too much
+provisions, which would tire them so that they could not afterward
+carry the gold and silver, from which it is very evident that he was
+deceiving them.
+
+  [437] Seemingly the Piros villages on the Rio Grande south of
+  Isleta. They are now extinct, having been finally abandoned
+  during the revolt in 1680, the inhabitants fleeing with Governor
+  Otermin to El Paso. Senecu and Socorro (taking their names from
+  former villages) were afterward established below El Paso, where
+  the few survivors of the Piros, almost entirely Mexicanized,
+  still reside.
+
+  [438] This rendering, doubtless correct, is due to Ternaux.
+  The Guadiana, however, reappears above ground some time before
+  it begins to mark the boundary of the Spanish province of
+  Estremadura. The Castañeda family had its seat in quite the other
+  end of the peninsula. (Winship.)
+
+The general reached Cicuye with his force and at once set off
+for Tiguex, leaving the village more quiet, for they had met him
+peaceably and had talked with him. When he reached Tiguex, he made
+his plans to pass the winter there, so as to return with the whole
+army, because it was said that he brought information regarding large
+settlements and very large rivers, and that the country was very much
+like that of Spain in the fruits and vegetation and seasons. They
+were not ready to believe that there was no gold there, but instead
+had suspicions that there was some farther back in the country,
+because, although this was denied, they knew what the thing was and
+had a name for it among themselves--_acochis_.[439] With this we end
+this first part, and now we will give an account of the provinces.
+
+  [439] See p. 337, note 1.
+
+
+
+
+SECOND PART
+
+     _Which treats of the high villages and provinces and of their
+     habits and customs, as collected by Pedro de Castañeda, native
+     of the city of Najara._
+
+_Laus Deo_
+
+
+It does not seem to me that the reader will be satisfied with having
+seen and understood what I have already related about the expedition,
+although that has made it easy to see the difference between the
+report which told about vast treasures, and the places where nothing
+like this was either found or known. It is to be noted that in place
+of settlements great deserts were found, and instead of populous
+cities villages of 200 inhabitants and only 800 or 1000 people in
+the largest. I do not know whether this will furnish grounds for
+pondering and considering the uncertainty of this life. To please
+these, I wish to give a detailed account of all the inhabited region
+seen and discovered by this expedition, and some of their ceremonies
+and habits, in accordance with what we came to know about them, and
+the limits within which each province falls, so that hereafter it may
+be possible to understand in what direction Florida lies and in what
+direction Greater India; and this land of New Spain is part of the
+mainland with Peru, and with greater India or China as well, there
+not being any strait between to separate them. On the other hand,
+the country is so wide that there is room for these vast deserts
+which lie between the two seas, for the coast of the North sea beyond
+Florida stretches toward the Bacallaos[440] and then turns toward
+Norway, while that of the South sea turns toward the west, making
+another bend down toward the south almost like a bow and stretches
+away toward India, leaving room for the lands that border on the
+mountains on both sides to stretch out in such a way as to have
+between them these great plains which are full of cattle and many
+other animals of different sorts, since they are not inhabited, as I
+will relate farther on. There is every sort of game and fowl there,
+but no snakes, for they are free from these. I will leave the account
+of the return of the army to New Spain until I have shown what
+slight occasion there was for this. We will begin our account with
+the city of Culiacan, and point out the differences between the one
+country and the other, on account of which one ought to be settled by
+Spaniards and the other not. It should be the reverse, however, with
+Christians, since there are intelligent men in one, and in the other
+wild animals and worse than beasts.
+
+  [440] The Newfoundland region.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter I
+
+     _Of the province of Culiacan and of its habits and customs._
+
+
+Culiacan is the last place in the New Kingdom of Galicia, and was
+the first settlement made by Nuño de Guzman when he conquered this
+kingdom.[441] It is 210 leagues west of Mexico.[442] In this province
+there are three chief languages, besides other related dialects. The
+first is that of the Tahus, who are the best and most intelligent
+race. They are now the most settled and have received the most light
+from the faith. They worship idols and make presents to the devil of
+their goods and riches, consisting of cloth and turquoises. They do
+not eat human flesh nor sacrifice it. They are accustomed to keep
+very large snakes, which they venerate. Among them there are men
+dressed like women who marry other men and serve as their wives.
+At a great festival they consecrate the women who wish to live
+unmarried, with much singing and dancing, at which all the chiefs of
+the locality gather and dance naked, and after all have danced with
+her they put her in a hut that has been decorated for this event and
+the chiefs adorn her with clothes and bracelets of fine turquoises,
+and then the chiefs go in one by one to lie with her, and all the
+others who wish, follow them. From this time on these women can not
+refuse anyone who pays them a certain amount agreed on for this.
+Even if they take husbands, this does not exempt them from obliging
+anyone who pays them. The greatest festivals are on market days.
+The custom is for the husbands to buy the women whom they marry, of
+their fathers and relatives at a high price, and then to take them
+to a chief, who is considered to be a priest, to deflower them and
+see if she is a virgin; and if she is not, they have to return the
+whole price, and he can keep her for his wife or not, or let her be
+consecrated, as he chooses. At these times they all get drunk.
+
+  [441] See p. 285, note 1.
+
+  [442] Castañeda, like many other early Spanish chroniclers,
+  is careless in his directions. It will be observed that he
+  frequently says west, east, etc., when he means westwardly,
+  eastwardly. This has led one writer on the Coronado expedition
+  seriously astray. Culiacan is decidedly _northwest_ of Mexico
+  City.
+
+The second language is that of the Pacaxes, the people who live in
+the country between the plains and the mountains. These people are
+more barbarous. Some of them who live near the mountains eat human
+flesh. They are great sodomites, and have many wives, even when these
+are sisters. They worship painted and sculptured stones, and are much
+given to witchcraft and sorcery.
+
+The third language is that of the Acaxes, who are in possession of
+a large part of the hilly country and all of the mountains. They
+go hunting for men just as they hunt animals. They all eat human
+flesh, and he who has the most human bones and skulls hung up around
+his house is most feared and respected. They live in settlements
+and in very rough country, avoiding the plains. In passing from one
+settlement to another, there is always a ravine in the way which
+they can not cross, although they can talk together across it. At
+the slightest call 500 men collect, and on any pretext kill and eat
+one another. Thus it has been very hard to subdue these people, on
+account of the roughness of the country, which is very great.
+
+Many rich silver mines have been found in this country. They do not
+run deep, but soon give out. The gulf of the sea[443] begins on the
+coast of this province, entering the land 250 leagues toward the
+north and ending at the mouth of the Firebrand (Tizon) River. This
+country forms its eastern limit, and California[444] the western.
+From what I have been told by men who had navigated it, it is thirty
+leagues across from point to point, because they lose sight of this
+country when they see the other. They say the gulf is over 150
+leagues broad (or deep), from shore to shore. The coast makes a turn
+toward the south at the Firebrand River, bending down to California,
+which turns toward the west, forming that peninsula which was
+formerly held to be an island, because it was a low sandy country.
+It is inhabited by brutish, bestial, naked people who eat their own
+offal. The men and women couple like animals, the female openly
+getting down on all fours.[445]
+
+  [443] The Gulf of California.
+
+  [444] Lower California is of course meant.
+
+  [445] For an account of the Indians of Lower California in the
+  eighteenth century, see the translation of Father Jacob Baegert's
+  narrative, by Charles Rau, in the _Report of the Smithsonian
+  Institution_ for 1863 and 1864.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 2
+
+     _Of the province of Petlatlan and all the inhabited country as
+     far as Chichilticalli._
+
+
+Petlatlan is a settlement of houses covered with a sort of mats made
+of plants. These are collected into villages, extending along a river
+from the mountains to the sea.[446] The people are of the same race
+and habits as the Culuacanian Tahues. There is much sodomy among
+them. In the mountain district there is a large population and more
+settlements. These people have a somewhat different language from the
+Tahues, although they understand each other. It is called Petlatlan
+because the houses are made of petates or palm-leaf mats. Houses
+of this sort are found for more than 240 leagues in this region,
+to the beginning of the Cibola wilderness.[447] The nature of the
+country changes here very greatly, because from this point on there
+are no trees except the pine, nor are there any fruits except a few
+tunas,[448] mesquites, and pitahayas.[449]
+
+  [446] The Rio Petlatlan is the present Rio Sinaloa. The name
+  Sinaloa is synonymous in application with Cahita, a group of
+  tribes including the present Yaqui and Mayo.
+
+  [447] That is, as far northward as the Rio Gila.
+
+  [448] The fruit of the prickly-pear cactus.
+
+  [449] The giant cactus. See p. 305, note 1.
+
+Petlatlan is twenty leagues from Culiacan, and it is 130 leagues from
+here to the valley of Señora. There are many rivers between the two,
+with settlements of the same sort of people--for example, Sinoloa,
+Boyomo, Teocomo, Yaquimi, and other smaller ones. There is also the
+Corazones (Hearts), which is in our possession, down the valley of
+Señora.[450]
+
+  [450] Sonora. See p. 301, notes 1 and 2.
+
+Señora is a river and valley thickly settled by able-bodied people.
+The women wear petticoats of tanned deerskin, and little san benitos
+reaching half way down the body.[451] The chiefs of the villages
+go up on some little heights they have made for this purpose, like
+public criers, and there make proclamations for the space of an
+hour, regulating those things they have to attend to. They have some
+little huts for shrines, all over the outside of which they stick
+many arrows, like a hedgehog. They do this when they are eager for
+war. All about this province toward the mountains there is a large
+population in separate little provinces containing ten or twelve
+villages. Seven or eight of them, of which I know the names, are
+Comupatrico, Mochilagua, Arispa,[452] and the Little Valley. There
+are others which we did not see.
+
+  [451] See p. 334, note 1.
+
+  [452] This was Arizpe, on the upper waters of the Rio Sonora.
+  Jaramillo calls it Ispa.
+
+It is forty leagues from Señora to the valley of Suya.[453] The town
+of San Hieronimo was established in this valley, where there was a
+rebellion later, and part of the people who had settled there were
+killed, as will be seen in the third part. There are many villages in
+the neighborhood of this valley. The people are the same as those in
+Señora and have the same dress and language, habits, and customs,
+like all the rest as far as the desert of Chichilticalli. The women
+paint their chins and eyes like the Moorish women of Barbary. They
+are great sodomites.[454] They drink wine made of the pitahaya, which
+is the fruit of a great thistle which opens like the pomegranate. The
+wine makes them stupid. They make a great quantity of preserves from
+the tuna; they preserve it in a large amount of its sap without other
+honey. They make bread of the mesquite, like cheese, which keeps good
+for a whole year. There are native melons in this country so large
+that a person can carry only one of them. They cut these into slices
+and dry them in the sun. They are good to eat, and taste like figs,
+and are better than dried meat; they are very good and sweet, keeping
+for a whole year when prepared in this way.[455]
+
+  [453] See p. 326, note 2.
+
+  [454] These are, from the south northward, the Pimas Bajos or
+  Nevome, Opatas, Papagos, and Pimas. The older Pima women still
+  paint their faces in fine lines and also are tattooed, but the
+  custom is becoming a thing of the past. The Opatas are almost
+  entirely Mexicanized.
+
+  [455] These were doubtless cantaloupes The southwestern Indians
+  still slice and dry them in a manner similar to that here
+  described.
+
+In this country there were also tame eagles, which the chiefs
+esteemed to be something fine.[456] No fowls of any sort were seen
+in any of these villages except in this valley of Suya, where fowls
+like those of Castile were found. Nobody could find out how they came
+to be so far inland, the people being all at war with one another.
+Between Suya and Chichilticalli there are many sheep and mountain
+goats with very large bodies and horns. Some Spaniards declare that
+they have seen flocks of more than a hundred together, which ran so
+fast that they disappeared very quickly.
+
+  [456] The Pueblo Indians, particularly the Zuñi and the Hopi,
+  keep eagles for their feathers, which are highly prized because
+  regarded as sacred and are much used in their ceremonies.
+
+At Chichilticalli the country changes its character again and the
+spiky vegetation ceases. The reason is that the gulf reaches as far
+up as this place, and the mountain chain changes its direction at
+the same time that the coast does. Here they had to cross and pass
+through the mountains in order to get into the level country.[457]
+
+  [457] Probably Dragoon Pass, through the Dragoon and Galiuro
+  Mountains of southeastern Arizona, thence between the Pinaleño
+  and Chiricahua mountains to the plains of San Simon.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 3
+
+     _Of Chichilticalli and the desert, of Cibola, its customs and
+     habits, and of other things._
+
+
+Chichilticalli is so called because the friars found a house at this
+place which was formerly inhabited by people who separated from
+Cibola. It was made of colored or reddish earth.[458] The house
+was large and appeared to have been a fortress. It must have been
+destroyed by the people of the district, who are the most barbarous
+people that have yet been seen. They live in separate cabins and not
+in settlements.[459] They live by hunting. The rest of the country
+is all wilderness, covered with pine forests. There are great
+quantities of the pine nuts. The pines are two or three times as high
+as a man before they send out branches. There is a sort of oak with
+sweet acorns, of which they make cakes like sugar plums with dried
+coriander seeds. It is very sweet, like sugar. Watercress grows in
+many springs, and there are rosebushes, and pennyroyal, and wild
+marjoram.
+
+  [458] This ruin is supposed to have been in the vicinity of
+  the present Solomonsville, Graham County. The name is Aztec
+  (_chichiltic_ "red," _calli_ "house"). Writers have endeavored
+  to identify it with the celebrated Casa Grande farther to the
+  northwest, but this is inconsistent with the directions recorded
+  in the narratives, and all students of the subject have now
+  abandoned this theory.
+
+  [459] These people are not identifiable with certainty. If
+  the Apaches of Arizona, it is the only mention of them and is
+  contrary to all other testimony. The Sobaipuris lived on the
+  upper Rio San Pedro and on the Gila near the mouth of the former
+  stream, until the latter part of the eighteenth century.
+
+There are barbels and picones,[460] like those of Spain, in the
+rivers of this wilderness.[461] Gray lions and leopards were
+seen.[462] The country rises continually from the beginning of the
+wilderness until Cibola is reached, which is eighty leagues, going
+north. From Culiacan to the edge of the wilderness the route had kept
+the north on the left hand.
+
+  [460] Picones are catfish.
+
+  [461] The "wilderness," or uninhabited region, extended from the
+  Gila in central Graham County to the crossing of the New Mexico
+  boundary by Zuñi River, where Cibola began.
+
+  [462] These are the mountain lion and the wildcat.
+
+
+Cibola[463] is seven villages. The largest is called Maçaque.[464]
+The houses are ordinarily three or four stories high, but in Maçaque
+there are houses with four and seven stories. These people are very
+intelligent. They cover their privy parts and all the immodest parts
+with cloths made like a sort of table napkin, with fringed edges and
+a tassel at each corner, which they tie over the hips. They wear long
+robes of feathers and of the skins of hares, and cotton blankets. The
+women wear blankets, which they tie or knot over the left shoulder,
+leaving the right arm out.[465] These serve to cover the body. They
+wear a neat well-shaped outer garment of skin. They gather their hair
+over the two ears, making a frame which looks like an old-fashioned
+headdress.[466]
+
+  [463] See p. 300, note 1.
+
+  [464] See p. 315, note 1.
+
+  [465] Identical with the dress of the Zuñi women of to-day.
+  Rabbit-skin robes have been replaced by woollen blankets, like
+  those woven by the Navaho, who learned the art from the Pueblos.
+  The rabbit-skin robes are now manufactured chiefly by the
+  Paiutes, the Pueblos having almost ceased to make them.
+
+  [466] This custom has been abandoned except by the Hopi maidens,
+  who still wear their hair in picturesque whorls, one on each side
+  of the head, until married.
+
+The country is a valley between ridges resembling rocky mountains.
+They plant in holes. Maize does not grow high; ears from a stalk
+three or four to each cane, thick and large, of eight hundred grains,
+a thing not seen in these parts. There are large numbers of bears in
+this province, and lions, wildcats, deer, and otter. There are very
+fine turquoises, although not so many as was reported.[467] They
+collect the pine nuts[468] each year, and store them up in advance.
+A man does not have more than one wife. There are estufas or hot
+rooms[469] in the villages, which are the courtyards or places
+where they gather for consultation. They do not have chiefs as in
+New Spain, but are ruled by a council of the oldest men. They have
+priests who preach to them, whom they call papas.[470] These are the
+elders. They go up on the highest roof of the village and preach to
+the village from there, like public criers, in the morning while the
+sun is rising, the whole village being silent and sitting in the
+galleries to listen.[471] They tell them how they are to live, and
+I believe that they give certain commandments for them to keep, for
+there is no drunkenness among them nor sodomy nor sacrifices, neither
+do they eat human flesh nor steal, but they are usually at work. The
+estufas belong to the whole village.[472] It is a sacrilege for the
+women to go into the estufas to sleep. They make the cross as a sign
+of peace. They burn their dead, and throw the implements used in
+their work into the fire with the bodies.[473]
+
+  [467] See p. 308, note 3. This entire description is
+  characteristic of the present Zuñi country, except that game is
+  not so abundant.
+
+  [468] Piñon nuts, which are still gathered in large quantities.
+
+  [469] The _kivas_, or ceremonial chambers, of which there are
+  usually several in each pueblo. It is in these that most of the
+  secret rites are performed.
+
+  [470] _Pápa_ is a true Zuñi word, signifying "elder brother," as
+  distinguished from sú-e, "younger brother." These terms allude
+  both to age and to rank.
+
+  [471] All public announcements are still made in this way.
+
+  [472] Rather to the religious societies. Some of them belong
+  exclusively to the women.
+
+  [473] Excavations made at Halona, one of the Seven Cities of
+  Cibola, yielded only skeletons that had been interred within the
+  houses, beneath the floors. In the Salt River and Gila valleys,
+  southern Arizona, this method was also practised, but in addition
+  remains were cremated and deposited in earthen vessels in mounds
+  near by.
+
+It is twenty leagues to Tusayan,[474] going northwest. This is a
+province with seven villages, of the same sort, dress, habits, and
+ceremonies as at Cibola. There may be as many as 3,000 or 4,000 men
+in the fourteen villages of these two provinces.[475] It is forty
+leagues or more to Tiguex, the road trending toward the north. The
+rock of Acuco, which we described in the first part, is between these.
+
+  [474] See p. 307, note 1; p. 358, note 3.
+
+  [475] This would indicate a population of 10,500 to 14,000, which
+  is doubtless an excessive estimate for the sixteenth century. The
+  present population of Zuñi is 1514; of the Hopi villages, about
+  2000.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 4
+
+     _Of how they live at Tiguex, and of the province of Tiguex and
+     its neighborhood._
+
+
+Tiguex is a province with twelve villages on the banks of a large,
+mighty river; some villages on one side and some on the other.[476]
+It is a spacious valley two leagues wide, and a very high, rough,
+snow-covered mountain chain lies east of it.[477] There are seven
+villages in the ridges at the foot of this--four on the plain and
+three situated on the skirts of the mountain.
+
+  [476] The Rio Grande, as previously described.
+
+  [477] The Sandia Mountains.
+
+There are seven villages seven leagues to the north, at Quirix,
+and the seven villages of the province of Hemes are forty leagues
+northeast [northwest]. It is forty leagues north or east to
+Acha,[478] and four leagues southeast[479] to Tutahaco, a province
+with eight villages. In general, these villages all have the same
+habits and customs, although some have some things in particular
+which the others have not. They are governed by the opinions of the
+elders. They all work together to build the villages, the women being
+engaged in making the mixture and the walls, while the men bring
+the wood and put it in place. They have no lime, but they make a
+mixture of ashes, coals, and dirt which is almost as good as mortar,
+for when the house is to have four stories, they do not make the
+walls more than half a yard thick. They gather a great pile of twigs
+of thyme [sagebrush] and sedge grass and set it afire, and when it
+is half coals and ashes they throw a quantity of dirt and water on
+it and mix it all together. They make round balls of this, which
+they use instead of stones after they are dry, fixing them with the
+same mixture, which comes to be like a stiff clay. Before they
+are married the young men serve the whole village in general, and
+fetch the wood that is needed for use, putting it in a pile in the
+courtyard of the villages, from which the women take it to carry to
+their houses.[480]
+
+  [478] The pueblo of Picuris, about twenty miles south of Taos.
+  This is a Tigua village of about 125 inhabitants.
+
+  [479] Compare the previous reference to Tutahaco (p. 314). Both
+  the distance and the direction here given seem to be erroneous.
+
+  [480] This would indicate the existence of a true communal system
+  that does not prevail at the present time.
+
+The young men live in the estufas, which are in the yards of the
+village. They are underground, square or round, with pine pillars.
+Some were seen with twelve pillars and with four in the centre as
+large as two men could stretch around. They usually had three or four
+pillars. The floor was made of large, smooth stones, like the baths
+which they have in Europe. They have a hearth made like the binnacle
+or compass box of a ship, in which they burn a handful of thyme at
+a time to keep up the heat, and they can stay in there just as in a
+bath. The top was on a level with the ground. Some that were seen
+were large enough for a game of ball. When any man wishes to marry,
+it has to be arranged by those who govern. The man has to spin and
+weave a blanket and place it before the woman, who covers herself
+with it and becomes his wife.[481] The houses belong to the women,
+the estufas to the men. If a man repudiates his woman, he has to go
+to the estufa. It is forbidden for women to sleep in the estufas,
+or to enter these for any purpose except to give their husbands or
+sons something to eat. The men spin and weave. The women bring up the
+children and prepare the food. The country is so fertile that they
+do not have to break up the ground the year round, but only have to
+sow the seed, which is presently covered by the fall of snow, and
+the ears come up under the snow. In one year they gather enough for
+seven. A very large number of cranes and wild geese and crows and
+starlings live on what is sown, and for all this, when they come to
+sow for another year, the fields are covered with corn which they
+have not been able to finish gathering.
+
+  [481] See Voth, "Oraibi Marriage Customs," _American
+  Anthropologist_, II. 238 (1900).
+
+There are a great many native fowl in these provinces, and cocks
+with great hanging chins.[482] When dead, these keep for sixty days,
+and longer in winter, without losing their feathers or opening, and
+without any bad smell, and the same is true of dead men.
+
+  [482] The American turkey cocks.
+
+The villages are free from nuisances, because they go outside to
+excrete, and they pass their water into clay vessels, which they
+empty at a distance from the village.[483] They keep the separate
+houses where they prepare the food for eating and where they grind
+the meal, very clean. This is a separate room or closet, where they
+have a trough with three stones fixed in stiff clay. Three women
+go in here, each one having a stone, with which one of them breaks
+the corn, the next grinds it, and the third grinds it again.[484]
+They take off their shoes, do up their hair, shake their clothes,
+and cover their heads before they enter the door. A man sits at the
+door playing on a fife while they grind, moving the stones to the
+music and singing together. They grind a large quantity at one time,
+because they make all their bread of meal soaked in warm water, like
+wafers. They gather a great quantity of brushwood and dry it to use
+for cooking all through the year. There are no fruits good to eat
+in the country, except the pine nuts. They have their preachers.
+Sodomy is not found among them. They do not eat human flesh nor make
+sacrifices of it. The people are not cruel, for they had Francisco
+de Ovando in Tiguex about forty days, after he was dead, and when
+the village was captured, he was found among their dead, whole and
+without any other wound except the one which killed him, white as
+snow, without any bad smell. I found out several things about them
+from one of our Indians, who had been a captive among them for a
+whole year. I asked him especially for the reason why the young
+women in that province went entirely naked, however cold it might be,
+and he told me that the virgins had to go around this way until they
+took a husband, and that they covered themselves after they had known
+man. The men here wear little shirts of tanned deerskin and their
+long robes over this. In all these provinces they have earthenware
+glazed with antimony and jars of extraordinary labor and workmanship,
+which were worth seeing.[485]
+
+  [483] A custom still common at Zuñi and other pueblos. Before the
+  introduction of manufactured dyes the Pueblos used urine as a
+  mordant.
+
+  [484] See Mindeleff's "Pueblo Architecture," in the _Eighth
+  Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology_, p. 208; also Cushing,
+  "Zuñi Breadstuff," in _The Millstone_ (Indianapolis, 1884-1885).
+
+  [485] A number of memoirs on the pottery of the ancient Pueblos
+  may be consulted in the _Annual Reports_ of the Bureau of
+  American Ethnology.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 5
+
+     _Of Cicuye and the villages in its neighborhood, and of how some
+     people came to conquer this country._
+
+
+We have already said that the people of Tiguex and of all the
+provinces on the banks of that river were all alike, having the same
+ways of living and the same customs. It will not be necessary to say
+anything particular about them. I wish merely to give an account of
+Cicuye and some depopulated villages which the army saw on the direct
+road which it followed thither, and of others that were across the
+snowy mountains near Tiguex, which also lay in that region above the
+river.
+
+Cicuye[486] is a village of nearly five hundred warriors, who are
+feared throughout that country. It is square, situated on a rock,
+with a large court or yard in the middle, containing the estufas.
+The houses are all alike, four stories high. One can go over the
+top of the whole village without there being a street to hinder.
+There are corridors going all around it at the first two stories, by
+which one can go around the whole village. These are like outside
+balconies, and they are able to protect themselves under these. The
+houses do not have doors below, but they use ladders, which can be
+lifted up like a drawbridge, and so go up to the corridors which
+are on the inside of the village. As the doors of the houses open
+on the corridor of that story, the corridor serves as a street. The
+houses that open on the plain are right back of those that open on
+the court, and in time of war they go through those behind them. The
+village is enclosed by a low wall of stone. There is a spring of
+water inside, which they are able to divert.[487] The people of this
+village boast that no one has been able to conquer them and that they
+conquer whatever villages they wish. The people and their customs are
+like those of the other villages. Their virgins also go nude until
+they take husbands, because they say that if they do anything wrong
+then it will be seen, and so they do not do it. They do not need to
+be ashamed because they go around as they were born.
+
+  [486] This is Pecos, the largest pueblo of New Mexico in the
+  sixteenth century and for a long time after. Its people belonged
+  to the Tanoan family, although their language was understood only
+  by the Jemez villagers, their nearest kindred. It was the scene
+  of the missionary labors of Fray Luis Descalona, who remained
+  behind when Coronado returned to Mexico in 1542, but he was
+  probably killed before the close of that year. Pecos became the
+  seat of an important Franciscan mission early in the seventeenth
+  century, but it began to decline after the revolt of 1680-1692,
+  and in 1838 the half-dozen survivors removed to Jemez, where
+  one of them still (1906) lives. Cicuye is the Isleta, or Tigua,
+  name for Pecos, while "Pecos" itself is the Keresan, or Queres,
+  appellation, with the Spanish-English plural. The ruins of the
+  town are plainly visible from the Santa Fé Railway. See Bandelier
+  in _Papers of the Archaeological Institute of America_, Amer.
+  ser., I. (1881); Hewett in _American Anthropologist_, n. s., VI.
+  No. 4, 1904.
+
+  [487] The spring was "still trickling out beneath a massive ledge
+  of rocks on the west sill" when Bandelier (_op. cit._) sketched
+  it in 1880.
+
+There is a village, small and strong, between Cicuye and the province
+of Quirix, which the Spaniards named Ximena,[488] and another village
+almost deserted, only one part of which is inhabited.[489] This
+was a large village, and judging from its condition and newness it
+appeared to have been destroyed. They called this the village of the
+granaries (_silos_), because large underground cellars were found
+here stored with corn. There was another large village farther on,
+entirely destroyed and pulled down, in the yards of which there were
+many stone balls, as big as twelve-quart bowls, which seemed to have
+been thrown by engines or catapults, which had destroyed the village.
+All that I was able to find out about them was that, sixteen years
+before, some people called Teyas[490] had come to this country in
+great numbers and had destroyed these villages. They had besieged
+Cicuye but had not been able to capture it, because it was strong,
+and when they left the region, they had made peace with the whole
+country. It seems as if they must have been a powerful people, and
+that they must have had engines to knock down the villages. The only
+thing they could tell about the direction these people came from was
+by pointing toward the north. They usually call these people Teyas
+or brave men, just as the Mexicans say chichimecas or braves,[491]
+for the Teyas whom the army saw were brave. These knew the people
+in the settlements, and were friendly with them, and they (the
+Teyas of the plains) went there to spend the winter under the wings
+of the settlements. The inhabitants do not dare to let them come
+inside, because they can not trust them. Although they are received
+as friends, and trade with them, they do not stay in the villages
+over night, but outside under the wings. The villages are guarded
+by sentinels with trumpets, who call to one another just as in the
+fortresses of Spain.
+
+  [488] The former Tanos pueblo of Galisteo, a mile and a half
+  northeast of the present town of the same name.
+
+  [489] According to Mota Padilla, _Historia de la Conquista_, 1742
+  (Mexico, 1870), this was called Coquite.
+
+  [490] These Indians were seen by Coronado during his journey
+  across the plains. See p. 333, note 3.
+
+  [491] The name applied in Mexico at the time to any warlike,
+  unsubdued tribe.
+
+There are seven other villages along this route, toward the snowy
+mountains,[492] one of which has been half destroyed by the people
+already referred to. These were under the rule of Cicuye. Cicuye is
+in a little valley between mountain chains and mountains covered with
+large pine forests. There is a little stream[493] which contains
+very good trout and otters, and there are very large bears and good
+falcons hereabouts.
+
+  [492] The mountains to the north, in which the Rio Pecos has its
+  source.
+
+  [493] The Rio Pecos, still noted for trout.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 6
+
+     _Which gives the number of villages which were seen in the
+     country of the terraced houses, and their population._
+
+
+Before I proceed to speak of the plains, with the cows and
+settlements and tribes there, it seems to me that it will be well for
+the reader to know how large the settlements were, where the houses
+with stories, gathered into villages, were seen, and how great an
+extent of country they occupied.[494] As I say, Cibola is the first:
+
+  Cibola, seven villages.[495]
+  Tusayan, seven villages.[496]
+  The rock of Acuco, one.[497]
+  Tiguex, twelve villages.[498]
+  Tutahaco, eight villages.[499]
+  These villages were below the river.[500]
+  Quirix, seven villages.[501]
+  In the snowy mountains, seven villages.[502]
+  Ximena, three villages.[503]
+  Cicuye, one village.[504]
+  Hemes, seven villages.[505]
+  Aguas Calientes, or Boiling Springs, three villages.[506]
+  Yuqueyunque, in the mountains, six villages.[507]
+  Valladolid, called Braba, one village.[508]
+  Chia, one village.[509]
+
+  [494] Only the pueblos of Acoma and Isleta occupy their
+  sixteenth-century sites, all the other villages having shifted
+  their locations after the great revolt of 1680-1692, when the
+  Spaniards granted specific tracts of land, usually a league
+  square, later confirmed to the Indians by Congress under the
+  provisions of the treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo.
+
+  [495] Zuñi, including the pueblos of Halona, Matsaki, Kiakima,
+  Hawiku, Kyanawe, and two others which have not been identified
+  with certainty.
+
+  [496] The Hopi villages, among them being Awatobi (destroyed
+  at the beginning of the eighteenth century), Oraibi, Walpi,
+  Mishongnovi, Shongopovi, and Shupaulovi. The remaining pueblo
+  has not been determined absolutely. Sichomovi and Hano are
+  comparatively modern.
+
+  [497] Acoma. See p. 311, note 2.
+
+  [498] The Tigua pueblos; see p. 312, note 2.
+
+  [499] See p. 314, note 1.
+
+  [500] Meaning that the provinces of Tiguex and Tutahaco were
+  those farthest down the valley.
+
+  [501] The pueblos of the Queres, or Keresan, family. See p. 327,
+  note 3.
+
+  [502] Toward the north, in the direction of Santa Fé.
+
+  [503] Ximena itself was Galisteo. The others were "Coquite" and
+  the "Pueblo de los Silos." See p. 356, notes 2 and 3.
+
+  [504] Pecos. See p. 355, note 2.
+
+  [505] Jemez, including Giusiwá, Amushungkwá, Patoqua, and
+  Astyalakwá. There are many ruins in the vicinity, including those
+  of a large Spanish church at Giusiwá. Evidently some of the Sia
+  villages are here included.
+
+  [506] The Jemez villages about the Jemez Hot Springs, above the
+  present Jemez pueblo. Castañeda here duplicates his provinces
+  somewhat, as the Aguas Calientes pueblos were Jemez, Giusiwá
+  being one of the most prominent.
+
+  [507] See p. 340, note 1. This group of Tewa villages doubtless
+  included San Juan, Santa Clara, San Ildefonso, Tesuque, Nambe,
+  Pojoaque, and Yukiwingge. Jacona, Cuyamunque, and others were
+  also occupied by the Tewas during this period, no doubt, but
+  these may have been included in Castañeda's province of the Snowy
+  Mountains.
+
+  [508] Taos. See p. 340, note 4.
+
+  [509] Sia, a Queres pueblo, probably included, with Santa Ana, in
+  his "Quirix" group, above.
+
+In all, there are sixty-six villages.[510] Tiguex appears to be in
+the centre of the villages. Valladolid is the farthest up the river
+toward the northeast. The four villages down the river are toward the
+southeast, because the river turns toward the east.[511] It is 130
+leagues--ten more or less--from the farthest point that was seen down
+the river to the farthest point up the river, and all the settlements
+are within this region. Including those at a distance, there are
+sixty-six villages in all, as I have said, and in all of them there
+may be some 20,000 men, which may be taken to be a fair estimate of
+the population of the villages.[512] There are no houses or other
+buildings between one village and another, but where we went it is
+entirely uninhabited. These people, since they are few, and their
+manners, government, and habits are so different from all the nations
+that have been seen and discovered in these western regions, must
+come from that part of Greater India, the coast of which lies to
+the west of this country, for they could have come down from that
+country, crossing the mountain chains and following down the river,
+settling in what seemed to them the best place. As they multiplied,
+they have kept on making settlements until they lost the river when
+it buried itself underground, its course being in the direction
+of Florida. It [the Rio Grande] comes down from the northeast,
+where they [Coronado's army] could certainly have found signs of
+villages. He [Coronado] preferred, however, to follow the reports
+of the Turk, but it would have been better to cross the mountains
+where this river rises. I believe they would have found traces of
+riches and would have reached the lands from which these people
+started, which from its location is on the edge of Greater India,
+although the region is neither known nor understood, because from the
+trend of the coast it appears that the land between Norway and China
+is very far up. The country from sea to sea is very wide, judging
+from the location of both coasts, as well as from what Captain
+Villalobos discovered when he went in search of China by the sea to
+the west,[513] and from what has been discovered on the North Sea
+concerning the trend of the coast of Florida toward the Bacallaos, up
+toward Norway.[514]
+
+  [510] Castañeda lists seventy-one, probably having added others
+  without altering the total here given.
+
+  [511] The trend of the Rio Grande is really southwestward until
+  after the southern limit of the old Pueblo settlements is passed.
+  Perhaps Castañeda had in mind the southeastward course of the
+  stream farther south "toward Florida," as mentioned later in this
+  paragraph. He is probably here speaking from hearsay, as the
+  exploration downstream was not made by the main body.
+
+  [512] This would give a total Pueblo population of about 70,000,
+  whereas it could scarcely have much exceeded Castañeda's
+  estimated number of men alone.
+
+  [513] Ruy Lopez de Villalobos sailed from Acapulco, Mexico, in
+  command of four vessels, in 1542, discovered the Caroline and
+  Pelew archipelagos and sighted Caesarea Caroli, believed to be
+  Luzon, of the Philippine group. Later he established a colony on
+  an island which he called Antonio or Saragan. Supplies failing,
+  he despatched three of the vessels to Mexico, but these were
+  wrecked. Forced by hunger to flee to Amboina, Villalobos was
+  imprisoned by the Portuguese. One of his men, escaping, carried
+  the news to Mexico in 1549.
+
+  [514] "The Spanish text," remarks Mr. Winship, "fully justifies
+  Castañeda's statement that he was not skilled in the arts of
+  rhetoric and geography."
+
+To return then to the proposition with which I began, I say that the
+settlements and people already named were all that were seen in a
+region seventy leagues wide and 130 long, in the settled country
+along the river Tiguex.[515] In New Spain there are not one but
+many establishments containing a larger number of people. Silver
+metals[516] were found in many of their villages, which they use for
+glazing and painting their earthenware.
+
+  [515] Castañeda here contradicts himself, as Pecos, Acoma, and
+  the Zuñi and Tusayan groups of pueblos are not in the valley of
+  the Rio Grande.
+
+  [516] Previously called antimony. See p. 355, note 1.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 7
+
+     _Which treats of the plains that were crossed, of the cows, and
+     of the people who inhabit them._
+
+
+We have spoken of the settlements of high houses which are situated
+in what seems to be the most level and open part of the mountains,
+since it is 150 leagues across before entering the level country
+between the two mountain chains which I said were near the North
+Sea and the South Sea, which might better be called the Western Sea
+along this coast. This mountain series is the one which is near
+the South Sea. In order to show that the settlements are in the
+middle of the mountains, I will state that it is eighty leagues from
+Chichilticalli, where we began to cross this country, to Cibola; from
+Cibola, which is the first village, to Cicuye, which is the last on
+the way across, is seventy leagues; it is thirty leagues from Cicuye
+to where the plains begin. It may be we went across in an indirect or
+roundabout way, which would make it seem as if there was more country
+than if it had been crossed in a direct line,[517] and it may be more
+difficult and rougher. This can not be known certainly, because the
+mountains change their direction above the bay at the mouth of the
+Firebrand (Tizon) River.[518]
+
+  [517] After leaving Cicuye (Pecos) the army marched down the
+  river for four days, crossed the stream over a bridge that
+  they had built, and then reached the Staked Plain of Texas by
+  travelling first a northeasterly then a southeasterly course. See
+  Pt. 1, chap. 19.
+
+  [518] The Rio Colorado.
+
+Now we will speak of the plains. The country is spacious and level,
+and is more than 400 leagues wide in the part between the two
+mountain ranges--one, that which Francisco Vazquez Coronado crossed,
+and the other that which the force under Don Fernando de Soto
+crossed, near the North Sea, entering the country from Florida. No
+settlements were seen anywhere on these plains.[519]
+
+  [519] That is, if the writer overlooks the settlements (one of
+  them called Cona) in the ravines of the headwaters of the Texas
+  streams, about the eastern escarpment of the Staked Plain,
+  previously mentioned.
+
+In traversing 250 leagues, the other mountain range was not seen, nor
+a hill nor a hillock which was three times as high as a man. Several
+lakes were found at intervals; they were round as plates, a stone's
+throw or more across, some fresh and some salt.[520] The grass grows
+tall near these lakes; away from them it is very short, a span or
+less. The country is like a bowl, so that when a man sits down, the
+horizon surrounds him all around at the distance of a musket shot.
+There are no groves of trees except at the rivers, which flow at the
+bottom of some ravines where the trees grow so thick that they were
+not noticed until one was right on the edge of them. They are of dead
+earth. There are paths down into these, made by the cows when they
+go to the water, which is essential throughout these plains. As I
+have related in the first part, people follow the cows, hunting them
+and tanning the skins to take to the settlements in the winter to
+sell, since they go there to pass the winter, each company going to
+those which are nearest, some to the settlements at Cicuye, others
+toward Quivira, and others to the settlements which are situated
+in the direction of Florida. These people are called Querechos and
+Teyas. They described some large settlements, and judging from what
+was seen of these people and from the accounts they gave of other
+places, there are a good many more of these people than there are
+of those at the settlements. They have better figures, are better
+warriors, and are more feared. They travel like the Arabs, with their
+tents and troops of dogs loaded with poles[521] and having Moorish
+pack-saddles with girths. When the load gets disarranged, the dogs
+howl, calling some one to fix them right. These people eat raw flesh
+and drink blood. They do not eat human flesh.[522] They are a kind
+people and not cruel. They are faithful friends. They are able to
+make themselves very well understood by means of signs.[523] They dry
+the flesh in the sun, cutting it thin like a leaf,[524] and when dry
+they grind it like meal to keep it and make a sort of sea soup of
+it to eat. A handful thrown into a pot swells up so as to increase
+very much. They season it with fat, which they always try to secure
+when they kill a cow.[525] They empty a large gut and fill it with
+blood, and carry this around the neck to drink when they are thirsty.
+When they open the belly of a cow, they squeeze out the chewed grass
+and drink the juice that remains behind, because they say that this
+contains the essence of the stomach. They cut the hide open at the
+back and pull it off at the joints, using a flint as large as a
+finger, tied in a little stick, with as much ease as if working
+with a good iron tool. They give it an edge with their own teeth.
+The quickness with which they do this is something worth seeing and
+noting.
+
+  [520] The salt lakes near the Texas-New Mexico boundary. Further
+  allusion to these salt lakes is made in Pt. 1, chap. 21.
+
+  [521] The well-known travois of the plains tribes. The poles were
+  those used to support the tents, or tipis, and were usually of
+  cedar.
+
+  [522] Some of the tribes of Texas, however, especially the
+  Attacapa and the Tonkawa, were noted as cannibals.
+
+  [523] The sign language was in general use among the tribes
+  of the great plains, rendered necessary by the diversity of
+  languages. See Mallery, _Introduction to the Study of Sign
+  Language_ (Washington, 1880); Clark, _Indian Sign Language_
+  (1885).
+
+  [524] The "jerked beef" of the later frontiersmen.
+
+  [525] The _pemmican_ of the Indians.
+
+There are very great numbers of wolves on these plains, which go
+around with the cows. They have white skins. The deer are pied with
+white. Their skin is loose, so that when they are killed it can
+be pulled off with the hand while warm, coming off like pigskin.
+The rabbits, which are very numerous, are so foolish that those
+on horseback killed them with their lances. This is when they are
+mounted among the cows. They fly from a person on foot.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 8
+
+     _Of Quivira, of where it is and some information about it._
+
+
+Quivira is to the west[526] of those ravines, in the midst of the
+country, somewhat nearer the mountains toward the sea, for the
+country is level as far as Quivira, and there they began to see some
+mountain chains. The country is well settled. Judging from what was
+seen on the borders of it, this country is very similar to that of
+Spain in the varieties of vegetation and fruits. There are plums like
+those of Castile, grapes, nuts, mulberries, oats, pennyroyal, wild
+marjoram, and large quantities of flax, but this does not do them any
+good, because they do not know how to use it.[527] The people are of
+almost the same sort and appearance as the Teyas. They have villages
+like those in New Spain. The houses are round, without a wall, and
+they have one story like a loft, under the roof, where they sleep and
+keep their belongings. The roofs are of straw.[528] There are other
+thickly settled provinces around it containing large numbers of men.
+A friar named Juan de Padilla remained in this province, together
+with a Spanish-Portuguese and a negro and a half-blood and some
+Indians from the province of Capothan,[529] in New Spain. They killed
+the friar because he wanted to go to the province of the Guas,[530]
+who were their enemies. The Spaniard escaped by taking flight on a
+mare, and afterward reached New Spain, coming out by way of Panuco.
+The Indians from New Spain who accompanied the friar were allowed by
+the murderers to bury him, and then they followed the Spaniard and
+overtook him. This Spaniard was a Portuguese, named Campo.[531]
+
+  [526] Castañeda is sometimes confused in his directions. In
+  this instance unless "west" (_poniente_) is a slip of the pen,
+  he evidently forgot that the army travelled for weeks to the
+  north, "by the needle," after journeying for some distance toward
+  sunrise from the ravines of western Texas.
+
+  [527] This flora is characteristic of the upper plains generally,
+  and the passage has been quoted by students of the route to show
+  that Quivira lay both in Kansas and in Nebraska.
+
+  [528] Note the character of the houses as one of the chief means
+  of determining the inhabitants of Quivira. See p. 337, note 1.
+
+  [529] The Jaramillo narrative says Capottan or Capotean.
+
+  [530] Possibly the Kaw or Kansa Indians. See Pt. 3, chap. 4.
+
+  [531] Compare Herrera, _Historia General_, dec. vi., lib. ix.,
+  cap. xii., Vol. III., p. 207 (ed. 1730); Gomara, _Historia
+  General_, cap. CCXIIII. (1553); Mota Padilla, _Historia de la
+  Conquista_, 1742, p. 167 (1870); and specially Bandelier in
+  _American Catholic Quarterly Review_, XV. 551-565 (Philadelphia,
+  July, 1890).
+
+The great river of the Holy Spirit (Espiritu Santo),[532] which Don
+Fernando de Soto discovered in the country of Florida, flows through
+this country. It passes through a province called Arache,[533]
+according to the reliable accounts which were obtained here. The
+sources were not visited, because, according to what they said, it
+comes from a very distant country in the mountains of the South
+Sea, from the part that sheds its waters onto the plains. It flows
+across all the level country and breaks through the mountains of the
+North Sea, and comes out where the people with Don Fernando de Soto
+navigated it. This is more than 300 leagues from where it enters
+the sea.[534] On account of this, and also because it has large
+tributaries, it is so mighty when it enters the sea that they lost
+sight of the land before the water ceased to be fresh.[535]
+
+  [532] The Missouri-Mississippi.
+
+  [533] The Harahey of Jaramillo's account--evidently the Pawnee
+  country, about the Platte River, Nebraska. The "Relacion
+  del Suceso," _Fourteenth Report of the Bureau of Ethnology_
+  (Washington, 1896), spells it Harale.
+
+  [534] The North and the South seas are the Atlantic and the
+  Pacific oceans respectively.
+
+  [535] See Cabeza de Vaca's narrative in the present volume.
+
+This country of Quivira was the last that was seen, of which I am
+able to give any description or information. Now it is proper for
+me to return and speak of the army, which I left in Tiguex, resting
+for the winter, so that it would be able to proceed or return in
+search of these settlements of Quivira, which was not accomplished
+after all, because it was God's pleasure that these discoveries
+should remain for other peoples and that we who had been there should
+content ourselves with saying that we were the first who discovered
+it and obtained any information concerning it, just as Hercules knew
+the site where Julius Cæsar was to found Seville or Hispales. May
+the all-powerful Lord grant that His will be done in everything.
+It is certain that if this had not been His will Francisco Vazquez
+[Coronado] would not have returned to New Spain without cause or
+reason, as he did, and that it would not have been left for those
+with Don Fernando de Soto to settle such a good country, as they
+have done, and besides settling it to increase its extent, after
+obtaining, as they did, information from our army.[536]
+
+  [536] Mr. Winship calls attention to Mota Padilla's reasons
+  for the failure of the expedition: "It was most likely the
+  chastisement of God that riches were not found on this
+  expedition, because, when this ought to have been the secondary
+  object of the expedition, and the conversion of all those heathen
+  their first aim, they bartered with fate and struggled after the
+  secondary; and thus the misfortune is not so much that all those
+  labors were without fruit, but the worst is that such a number
+  of souls have remained in their blindness." _Historia de la
+  Conquista_, 1742, p. 166 (repr. 1870).
+
+
+
+
+THIRD PART
+
+     _Which describes what happened to Francisco Vazquez Coronado
+     during the winter, and how he gave up the expedition and
+     returned to New Spain._
+
+_Laus Deo_
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 1
+
+     _Of how Don Pedro de Tovar came from Señora with some men, and
+     Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas started back to New Spain._
+
+
+At the end of the first part of this book, we told how Francisco
+Vazquez Coronado, when he got back from Quivira, gave orders to
+winter at Tiguex, in order to return, when the winter was over, with
+his whole army to discover all the settlements in those regions. Don
+Pedro de Tovar, who had gone, as we related, to conduct a force from
+the city of San Hieronimo, arrived in the meantime with the men whom
+he had brought. He had not selected the rebels and seditious men
+there, but the most experienced ones and the best soldiers--men whom
+he could trust--wisely considering that he ought to have good men in
+order to go in search of his general in the country of the Indian
+called Turk. Although they found the army at Tiguex when they arrived
+there, this did not please them much, because they had come with
+great expectations, believing that they would find their general in
+the rich country of the Indian called Turk. They consoled themselves
+with the hope of going back there, and lived in anticipation of
+the pleasure of undertaking this return expedition which the army
+would soon make to Quivira. Don Pedro de Tovar brought letters from
+New Spain, both from the viceroy, Don Antonio de Mendoza, and from
+individuals. Among these was one for Don Garcia Lopez de Cardenas,
+which informed him of the death of his brother, the heir, and
+summoned him to Spain to receive the inheritance. On this account
+he was given permission, and left Tiguex with several other persons
+who received permission to go and settle their affairs.[537] There
+were many others who would have liked to go, but did not, in order
+not to appear fainthearted. During this time the general endeavored
+to pacify several villages in the neighborhood which were not well
+disposed, and to make peace with the people at Tiguex. He tried also
+to procure some of the cloth of the country, because the soldiers
+were almost naked and poorly clothed, full of lice, which they were
+unable to get rid of or avoid.
+
+  [537] According to the _Relacion del Suceso_: "Don Garcia Lopez
+  de Cardenas started off for Mexico, who, besides the fact
+  that his arm was very bad, had permission from the viceroy on
+  account of the death of his brother. Ten or twelve who were sick
+  went with him, and not a man among them all who could fight."
+  Cardenas, it will be recalled, had broken his arm. See Pt. 1,
+  chap. 19.
+
+The general, Francisco Vazquez Coronado, had been beloved and obeyed
+by his captains and soldiers as heartily as any of those who have
+ever started out in the Indies. Necessity knows no law, and the
+captains who collected the cloth divided it badly, taking the best
+for themselves and their friends and soldiers, and leaving the rest
+for the soldiers, and so there began to be some angry murmuring on
+account of this. Others also complained because they noticed that
+some favored ones were spared in the work and in the watches and
+received better portions of what was divided, both of cloth and food.
+On this account it is thought that they began to say that there was
+nothing in the country of Quivira which was worth returning for,
+which was no slight cause of what afterward happened, as will be seen.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 2
+
+     _Of the general's fall, and of how the return to New Spain was
+     ordered._
+
+
+After the winter[538] was over, the return to Quivira was announced,
+and the men began to prepare the things needed. Since nothing in this
+life is at the disposition of men, but all is under the ordination
+of Almighty God, it was His will that we should not accomplish
+this, and so it happened that one feast day the general went out on
+horseback to amuse himself, as usual, riding with the captain Don
+Rodrigo Maldonado. He was on a powerful horse, and his servants had
+put on a new girth, which must have been rotten at the time, for it
+broke during the race and he fell over on the side where Don Rodrigo
+was, and as his horse passed over him it hit his head with its hoof,
+which laid him at the point of death, and his recovery was slow and
+doubtful.
+
+  [538] Of 1541-1542.
+
+During this time, while he was in his bed, Don Garcia Lopez de
+Cardenas, who had started to go to New Spain, came back in flight
+from Suya, because he had found that town deserted and the people and
+horses and cattle all dead.[539] When he reached Tiguex and learned
+the sad news that the general was near his end, as already related,
+they did not dare to tell him until he had recovered, and when he
+finally got up and learned of it, it affected him so much that he
+had to go back to bed again. He may have done this in order to bring
+about what he afterward accomplished, as was believed later. It was
+while he was in this condition that he recollected what a scientific
+friend of his in Salamanca had told him, that he would become a
+powerful lord in distant lands, and that he would have a fall from
+which he would never be able to recover. This expectation of death
+made him desire to return and die where he had a wife and children.
+As the physician and surgeon who was doctoring him, and also acted as
+a talebearer, suppressed the murmurings that were going about among
+the soldiers, he treated secretly and underhandedly with several
+gentlemen who agreed with him. They set the soldiers to talking
+about going back to New Spain, in little knots and gatherings, and
+induced them to hold consultations about it, and had them send papers
+to the general, signed by all the soldiers, through their ensigns,
+asking for this. They all entered into it readily, and not much
+time needed to be spent, since many desired it already. When they
+asked him, the general acted as if he did not want to do it, but all
+the gentlemen and captains supported them, giving him their signed
+opinions, and as some were in this, they could give it at once,
+and they even persuaded others to do the same. Thus they made it
+seem as if they ought to return to New Spain, because they had not
+found any riches, nor had they discovered any settled country out of
+which estates could be formed for all the army. When he had obtained
+their signatures, the return to New Spain was at once announced, and
+since nothing can ever be concealed, the double dealing began to
+be understood, and many of the gentlemen found that they had been
+deceived and had made a mistake. They tried in every way to get
+their signatures back again from the general, who guarded them so
+carefully that he did not go out of one room, making his sickness
+seem very much worse, and putting guards about his person and room,
+and at night about the floor on which he slept. In spite of all this,
+they stole his chest, and it is said that they did not find their
+signatures in it, because he kept them in his mattress; on the
+other hand, it is said that they did recover them. They asked the
+general to give them sixty picked men, with whom they would remain
+and hold the country until the viceroy could send them support, or
+recall them, or else that the general would leave them the army and
+pick out sixty men to go back with him. But the soldiers did not
+want to remain either way, some because they had turned their prow
+toward New Spain, and others because they saw clearly the trouble
+that would arise over who should have the command. The gentlemen, I
+do not know whether because they had sworn fidelity or because they
+feared that the soldiers would not support them, did what had been
+decided on, although with an ill-will, and from this time on they did
+not obey the general as readily as formerly, and they did not show
+any affection for him. He made much of the soldiers and humored them,
+with the result that he did what he desired and secured the return of
+the whole army.
+
+  [539] Cardenas had "reached the town of the Spaniards and found
+  it burned and two Spaniards and many Indians and horses dead,
+  and he returned to the river on this account." (_Relacion del
+  Suceso._)
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 3
+
+     _Of the rebellion at Suya and the reasons the settlers gave for
+     it._
+
+
+We have already stated in the last chapter that Don Garcia Lopez de
+Cardenas came back from Suya in flight, having found that country
+risen in rebellion. He told how and why that town was deserted,
+which occurred as I will relate. The entirely worthless fellows were
+all who had been left in that town, the mutinous and seditious men,
+besides a few who were honored with the charge of public affairs
+and who were left to govern the others. Thus the bad dispositions
+of the worthless secured the power, and they held daily meetings
+and councils and declared that they had been betrayed and were not
+going to be rescued, since the others had been directed to go through
+another part of the country, where there was a more convenient route
+to New Spain, which was not so, because they were still almost on the
+direct road. This talk led some of them to revolt, and they chose one
+Pedro de Avila as their captain. They went back to Culiacan, leaving
+the captain, Diego de Alcaraz, sick in the town of San Hieronimo,
+with only a small force. He did not have anyone whom he could send
+after them to compel them to return. They killed a number of people
+at several villages along the way. Finally they reached Culiacan,
+where Hernando Arias de Saabedra,[540] who was waiting for Juan
+Gallego to come back from New Spain with a force, detained them by
+means of promises, so that Gallego could take them back. Some who
+feared what might happen to them ran away one night to New Spain.
+Diego de Alcaraz, who had remained at Suya with a small force, sick,
+was not able to hold his position, although he would have liked to,
+on account of the poisonous herb which the natives use.[541] When
+these noticed how weak the Spaniards were, they did not continue to
+trade with them as they formerly had done. Veins of gold had already
+been discovered before this, but they were unable to work these,
+because the country was at war. The disturbance was so great that
+they did not cease to keep watch and to be more than usually careful.
+
+  [540] Compare the spelling of this name on p. 297.
+
+  [541] That is, to poison their arrows.
+
+The town was situated on a little river.[542] One night they suddenly
+saw fires which they were not accustomed to, and on this account
+they doubled the watches, but not having noticed anything during
+the whole night, they grew careless along toward morning, and the
+enemy entered the village so silently that they were not seen until
+they began to kill and plunder. A number of men reached the plain as
+well as they could, but while they were getting out the captain was
+mortally wounded. Several Spaniards came back on some horses after
+they had recovered themselves and attacked the enemy, rescuing some,
+though only a few. The enemy went off with the booty, leaving three
+Spaniards killed[543] besides many of the servants and more than
+twenty horses.
+
+  [542] The San Pedro, in Sonora near the Arizona boundary. The
+  Indians who made this attack may have been the Sobaipuri.
+
+  [543] See p. 368, note 2.
+
+The Spaniards who survived started off the same day on foot, not
+having any horses. They went toward Culiacan, keeping away from the
+roads, and did not find any food until they reached Corazones where
+the Indians, like the good friends they have always been, provided
+them with food. From here they continued to Culiacan, undergoing
+great hardships. Hernandarias de Saabedra, the mayor, received them
+and entertained them as well as he could until Juan Gallego arrived
+with the reinforcements which he was conducting, on his way to find
+the army. He was not a little troubled at finding that post deserted,
+when he expected that the army would be in the rich country which had
+been described by the Indian called Turk, because he looked like one.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 4
+
+     _Of how Friar Juan de Padilla and Friar Luis remained in the
+     country and the army prepared to return to Mexico._
+
+
+When the general, Francisco Vasquez, saw that everything was now
+quiet, and that his schemes had gone as he wished, he ordered that
+everything should be ready to start on the return to New Spain by the
+beginning of the month of April, in the year 1543 [1542].
+
+Seeing this, Friar Juan de Padilla, a regular brother of the lesser
+order, and another, Friar Luis,[544] a lay brother, told the general
+that they wanted to remain in that country--Friar Juan de Padilla in
+Quivira, because his teachings seemed to promise fruit there, and
+Friar Luis at Cicuye. On this account, as it was Lent at the time,
+the father made this the subject of his sermon to the companies one
+Sunday, establishing his proposition on the authority of the Holy
+Scriptures. He declared his zeal for the conversion of these peoples
+and his desire to draw them to the faith, and stated that he had
+received permission to do it, although this was not necessary. The
+general sent a company to escort them as far as Cicuye, where Friar
+Luis stopped, while Friar Juan went on back to Quivira with the
+guides who had conducted the general, taking with him the Portuguese,
+as we related, and the half-blood, and the Indians from New Spain.
+He was martyred a short time after he arrived there, as we related
+in the second part, Chapter 8. Thus we may be sure that he died a
+martyr, because his zeal was holy and earnest.
+
+  [544] Fray Luis Descalona, or De Escalona, or De Ubeda. For
+  references on these friars, see p. 365, note 1. See also p. 355,
+  note 2.
+
+Friar Luis remained at Cicuye. Nothing more has been heard about him
+since, but before the army left Tiguex some men who went to take him
+a number of sheep that were left for him to keep, met him as he was
+on his way to visit some other villages, which were fifteen or twenty
+leagues from Cicuye, accompanied by some followers. He felt very
+hopeful that he was liked at the village and that his teaching would
+bear fruit, although he complained that the old men were falling away
+from him. I, for my part, believe that they finally killed him. He
+was a man of good and holy life, and may Our Lord protect him and
+grant that he may convert many of those peoples, and end his days in
+guiding them in the faith. We do not need to believe otherwise, for
+the people in those parts are pious and not at all cruel. They are
+friends, or rather, enemies of cruelty, and they remained faithful
+and loyal friends.[545]
+
+  [545] Gen. W. W. H. Davis, in his _Spanish Conquest of New
+  Mexico_, p. 231, gives the following extract, translated from an
+  old Spanish MS. at Santa Fé: "When Coronado returned to Mexico,
+  he left behind him, among the Indians of Cibola, the father Fray
+  Francisco Juan de Padilla, the father Fray Juan de la Cruz, and
+  a Portuguese named Andres del Campo. Soon after the Spaniards
+  departed, Padilla and the Portuguese set off in search of the
+  country of the Grand Quivira, where the former understood there
+  were innumerable souls to be saved. After travelling several
+  days, they reached a large settlement in the Quivira country. The
+  Indians came out to receive them in battle array, when the friar,
+  knowing their intentions, told the Portuguese and his attendants
+  to take to flight, while he would await their coming, in order
+  that they might vent their fury on him as they ran. The former
+  took to flight, and, placing themselves on a height within view,
+  saw what happened to the friar. Padilla awaited their coming upon
+  his knees, and when they arrived where he was they immediately
+  put him to death. The same happened to Juan de la Cruz, who was
+  left behind at Cibola, which people killed him. The Portuguese
+  and his attendants made their escape, and ultimately arrived
+  safely in Mexico, where he told what had occurred." In reply to
+  a request for further information regarding this manuscript,
+  General Davis stated that when he revisited Santa Fé, a few
+  years ago, he learned that one of his successors in the post
+  of governor of the territory, having despaired of disposing of
+  the immense mass of old documents and records deposited in his
+  office, by the slow process of using them to kindle fires, had
+  sold the entire lot--an invaluable collection of material bearing
+  on the history of the Southwest and its early European and native
+  inhabitants--as junk. (Winship.) The governor referred to was
+  Rev. William A. Pile, appointed by President Grant and serving in
+  1869-1870.
+
+After the friars had gone, the general, fearing that they might be
+injured if people were carried away from that country to New Spain,
+ordered the soldiers to let any of the natives who were held as
+servants go free to their villages whenever they might wish. In my
+opinion, though I am not sure, it would have been better if they had
+been kept and taught among Christians.
+
+The general was very happy and contented when the time arrived and
+everything needed for the journey was ready, and the army started
+from Tiguex on its way back to Cibola. One thing of no small note
+happened during this part of the trip. The horses were in good
+condition for their work when they started, fat and sleek, but more
+than thirty died during the ten days which it took to reach Cibola,
+and there was not a day in which two or three or more did not die. A
+large number of them also died afterward before reaching Culiacan, a
+thing that did not happen during all the rest of the journey.
+
+After the army reached Cibola, it rested before starting across the
+wilderness, because this was the last of the settlements in that
+country. The whole country was left well disposed and at peace, and
+several of our Indian allies remained there.[546]
+
+  [546] When Antonio de Espejo visited Cibola, or Zuñi, in 1583,
+  he found three Indians, natives of Mexico, who had been left by
+  Coronado but who had forgotten their mother tongue. He also found
+  crosses that had been erected by Coronado.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 5
+
+     _Of how the army left the settlements and marched to Culiacan,
+     and of what happened on the way._
+
+
+Leaving astern, as we might say, the settlements that had been
+discovered in the new land, of which, as I have said, the seven
+villages of Cibola were the first to be seen and the last that were
+left, the army started off, marching across the wilderness. The
+natives kept following the rear of the army for two or three days,
+to pick up any baggage or servants, for although they were still at
+peace and had always been loyal friends, when they saw that we were
+going to leave the country entirely, they were glad to get some of
+our people in their power, although I do not think that they wanted
+to injure them, from what I was told by some who were not willing to
+go back with them when they teased and asked them to. Altogether,
+they carried off several people besides those who had remained of
+their own accord, among whom good interpreters could be found to-day.
+The wilderness was crossed without opposition, and on the second
+day before reaching Chichilticalli Juan Gallego met the army, as he
+was coming from New Spain with reenforcements of men and necessary
+supplies for the army, expecting that he would find the army in the
+country of the Indian called Turk. When Juan Gallego saw that the
+army was returning, the first thing he said was not, "I am glad you
+are coming back," and he did not like it any better after he had
+talked with the general. After he had reached the army, or rather
+the quarters, there was quite a little movement among the gentlemen
+toward going back with the new force which had made no slight
+exertions in coming thus far, having encounters every day with the
+Indians of these regions who had risen in revolt, as will be related.
+There was talk of making a settlement somewhere in that region
+until the viceroy could receive an account of what had occurred.
+Those soldiers who had come from the new lands would not agree to
+anything except the return to New Spain, so that nothing came of
+the proposals made at the consultations, and although there was some
+opposition, they were finally quieted. Several of the mutineers who
+had deserted the town of Corazones came with Juan Gallego, who had
+given them his word as surety for their safety, and even if the
+general had wanted to punish them, his power was slight, for he had
+been disobeyed already and was not much respected. He began to be
+afraid again after this, and made himself sick, and kept a guard. In
+several places yells were heard and Indians seen, and some of the
+horses were wounded and killed, before Batuco[547] was reached, where
+the friendly Indians from Corazones came to meet the army and see the
+general. They were always friendly and had treated all the Spaniards
+who passed through their country well, furnishing them with what
+food they needed, and men, if they needed these. Our men had always
+treated them well and repaid them for these things. During this
+journey the juice of the quince was proved to be a good protection
+against the poison of the natives, because at one place, several days
+before reaching Señora, the hostile Indians wounded a Spaniard called
+Mesa, and he did not die, although the wound of the fresh poison is
+fatal, and there was a delay of over two hours before curing him with
+the juice. The poison, however, had left its mark upon him. The skin
+rotted and fell off until it left the bones and sinews bare, with
+a horrible smell. The wound was in the wrist, and the poison had
+reached as far as the shoulder when he was cured. The skin on all
+this fell off.
+
+  [547] There were two settlements in Sonora bearing this name, one
+  occupied by the Eudeve and the other by the Tegui division of the
+  Opata. The latter village, which was probably the one referred
+  to by Castañeda, was situated on the Rio de Oposura, a western
+  tributary of the Yaqui, eight leagues east of San José Matape. It
+  became the seat of the Jesuit mission of Santa María in 1629.
+
+The army proceeded without taking any rest, because the provisions
+had begun to fail by this time. These districts were in rebellion,
+and so there were not any victuals where the soldiers could get them
+until they reached Petlatlan, although they made several forays into
+the cross country in search of provisions. Petlatlan is in the
+province of Culiacan, and on this account was at peace, although they
+had several surprises after this.[548] The army rested here several
+days to get provisions. After leaving here they were able to travel
+more quickly than before, for the thirty leagues of the valley of
+Culiacan, where they were welcomed back again as people who came with
+their governor, who had suffered ill treatment.
+
+  [548] See pp. 346, 347. Petatlan is an Aztec word signifying
+  "place of the petates," or mats, referring to the character of
+  the native dwellings.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 6
+
+     _Of how the general started from Culiacan to give the viceroy an
+     account of the army with which he had been intrusted._
+
+
+It seemed, indeed, as if the arrival in the valley of Culiacan had
+ended the labors of this journey, partly because the general was
+governor there and partly because it was inhabited by Christians.
+On this account some began to disregard their superiors and the
+authority which their captains had over them, and some captains even
+forgot the obedience due to their general. Each one played his own
+game, so that while the general was marching toward the town, which
+was still ten leagues away, many of the men, or most of them, left
+him in order to rest in the valley, and some even proposed not to
+follow him. The general understood that he was not strong enough
+to compel them, although his position as governor gave him fresh
+authority. He determined to accomplish it by a better method, which
+was to order all the captains to provide food and meat from the
+stores of several villages that were under his control as governor.
+He pretended to be sick, keeping his bed, so that those who had any
+business with him could speak to him or he with them more freely,
+without hindrance or observation, and he kept sending for his
+particular friends in order to ask them to be sure to speak to the
+soldiers and encourage them to accompany him back to New Spain, and
+to tell them that he would request the viceroy, Don Antonio de
+Mendoza, to show them especial favor, and that he would do so himself
+for those who might wish to remain in his government. After this
+had been done, he started with his army at a very bad time, when
+the rains were beginning, for it was about Saint John's day,[549]
+at which season it rains continuously. In the uninhabited country
+which they passed through as far as Compostela there are numerous
+very dangerous rivers, full of large and fierce alligators. While the
+army was halting at one of these rivers, a soldier who was crossing
+from one side to the other was seized, in sight of everybody, and
+carried off by an alligator without its being possible to help him.
+The general proceeded, leaving the men who did not want to follow
+him all along the way, and reached Mexico with less than 100 men.
+He made his report to the viceroy, Don Antonio de Mendoza, who did
+not receive him very graciously, although he gave him his discharge.
+His reputation was gone from this time on. He kept the government of
+New Galicia, which had been entrusted to him, for only a short time,
+when the viceroy took it himself, until the arrival of the court,
+or audiencia, which still governs it. And this was the end of those
+discoveries and of the expedition which was made to these new lands.
+
+  [549] June 24, 1542.
+
+It now remains for us to describe the way in which to enter the
+country by a more direct route, although there is never a short cut
+without hard work. It is always best to find out what those know
+who have prepared the way, who know what will be needed. This can
+be found elsewhere, and I will now tell where Quivira lies, what
+direction the army took, and the direction in which Greater India
+lies, which was what they pretended to be in search of, when the army
+started thither. Today, since Villalobos[550] has discovered that
+this part of the coast of the South Sea trends toward the west, it
+is clearly seen and acknowledged that, since we were in the north,
+we ought to have turned to the west instead of toward the east, as
+we did. With this, we will leave this subject and will proceed to
+finish this treatise, since there are several noteworthy things of
+which I must give an account, which I have left to be treated more
+extensively in the two following chapters.
+
+  [550] See p. 360, note 2.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 7
+
+     _Of the adventures of Captain Juan Gallego while he was bringing
+     reenforcements through the revolted country._
+
+
+One might well have complained when in the last chapter I passed in
+silence over the exploits of Captain Juan Gallego with his twenty
+companions. I will relate them in the present chapter, so that in
+times to come those who read about it or tell of it may have a
+reliable authority on whom to rely. I am not writing fables, like
+some of the things which we read about nowadays in the books of
+chivalry. If it were not that those stories contained enchantments,
+there are some things which our Spaniards have done in our own day
+in these parts, in their conquests and encounters with the Indians,
+which, for deeds worthy of admiration, surpass not only the books
+already mentioned, but also those which have been written about the
+twelve peers of France, because, if the deadly strength which the
+authors of those times attributed to their heroes and the brilliant
+and resplendent arms with which they adorned them, are fully
+considered, and compared with the small stature of the men of our
+time and the few and poor weapons which they have in these parts, the
+remarkable things which our people have undertaken and accomplished
+with such weapons are more to be wondered at to-day than those of
+which the ancients write, and just because, too, they fought with
+barbarous naked people, as ours have with Indians, among whom there
+are always men who are brave and valiant and very sure bowmen, for
+we have seen them pierce the wings while flying, and hit hares while
+running after them. I have said all this in order to show that some
+things which we consider fables may be true, because we see greater
+things every day in our own times, just as in future times people
+will greatly wonder at the deeds of Don Fernando Cortes, who dared
+to go into the midst of New Spain with 300 men against the vast
+number of people in Mexico, and who with 500 Spaniards succeeded in
+subduing it, and made himself lord over it in two years.
+
+The deeds of Don Pedro de Alvarado in the conquest of Guatemala, and
+those of Montejo in Tabasco, the conquests of the mainland and of
+Peru, were all such as to make me remain silent concerning what I now
+wish to relate; but since I have promised to give an account of what
+happened on this journey, I want the things I am now going to relate
+to be known as well as those others of which I have spoken.
+
+The captain Juan Gallego, then, reached the town of Culiacan with a
+very small force. There he collected as many as he could of those who
+had escaped from the town of Hearts, or, more correctly, from Suya,
+which made in all twenty-two men, and with these he marched through
+all of the settled country, across which he travelled 200 leagues
+with the country in a state of war and the people in rebellion,
+although they had formerly been friendly toward the Spaniards, having
+encounters with the enemy almost every day. He always marched with
+the advance guard, leaving two-thirds of his force behind with the
+baggage. With six or seven Spaniards, and without any of the Indian
+allies whom he had with him, he forced his way into their villages,
+killing and destroying and setting them on fire, coming upon the
+enemy so suddenly and with such quickness and boldness that they did
+not have a chance to collect or even to do anything at all, until
+they became so afraid of him that there was not a town which dared
+wait for him, but they fled before him as from a powerful army;
+so much so, that for ten days, while he was passing through the
+settlements, they did not have an hour's rest. He did all this with
+his seven companions, so that when the rest of the force came up
+with the baggage there was nothing for them to do except to pillage,
+since the others had already killed and captured all the people they
+could lay their hands on and the rest had fled. They did not pause
+anywhere, so that although the villages ahead of him received some
+warning, they were upon them so quickly that they did not have a
+chance to collect. Especially in the region where the town of Hearts
+had been, he killed and hung a large number of people to punish them
+for their rebellion. He did not lose a companion during all this,
+nor was anyone wounded, except one soldier, who was wounded in the
+eyelid by an Indian who was almost dead, whom he was stripping. The
+weapon broke the skin and, as it was poisoned, he would have had to
+die if he had not been saved by the quince juice; he lost his eye
+as it was. These deeds of theirs were such that I know those people
+will remember them as long as they live, and especially four or five
+friendly Indians who went with them from Corazones, who thought that
+they were so wonderful that they held them to be something divine
+rather than human.[551] If he had not fallen in with our army as he
+did, they would have reached the country of the Indian called Turk,
+which they expected to march to, and they would have arrived there
+without danger on account of their good order and the skill with
+which he was leading them, and their knowledge and ample practice in
+war. Several of these men are still in this town of Culiacan, where I
+am now writing this account and narrative, where they, as well as I
+and the others who have remained in this province, have never lacked
+for labor in keeping this country quiet, in capturing rebels, and
+increasing in poverty and need, and more than ever at the present
+hour, because the country is poorer and more in debt than ever before.
+
+  [551] The Indians of this vicinity had a similar regard for
+  Cabeza de Vaca and his companions. See the narrative in the
+  present volume.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 8
+
+     _Which describes some remarkable things that were seen on the
+     plains, with a description of the bulls._
+
+
+My silence was not without mystery and dissimulation when, in Chapter
+7 of the second part of this book, I spoke of the plains and of
+the things of which I will give a detailed account in this chapter,
+where all these things may be found together; for these things were
+remarkable and something not seen in other parts. I dare to write of
+them because I am writing at a time when many men are still living
+who saw them and who will vouch for my account. Who could believe
+that 1,000 horses and 500 of our cows and more than 5,000 rams and
+ewes and more than 1,500 friendly Indians and servants, in travelling
+over those plains, would leave no more trace where they had passed
+than if nothing had been there--nothing--so that it was necessary to
+make piles of bones and cow-dung now and then, so that the rear guard
+could follow the army. The grass never failed to become erect after
+it had been trodden down, and, although it was short, it was as fresh
+and straight as before.
+
+Another thing was a heap of cow bones, a crossbow shot long, or a
+very little less, almost twice a man's height in places, and some
+eighteen feet or more wide, which was found on the edge of a salt
+lake in the southern part, and this in a region where there are no
+people who could have made it. The only explanation of this which
+could be suggested was that the waves which the north winds must make
+in the lake had piled up the bones of the cattle which had died in
+the lake, when the old and weak ones who went into the water were
+unable to get out. The noticeable thing is the number of cattle that
+would be necessary to make such a pile of bones.
+
+Now that I wish to describe the appearance of the bulls, it is to
+be noticed first that there was not one of the horses that did not
+take flight when he saw them first, for they have a narrow, short
+face, the brow two palms across from eye to eye, the eyes sticking
+out at the side, so that, when they are running, they can see who is
+following them. They have very long beards, like goats, and when they
+are running they throw their heads back with the beard dragging on
+the ground. There is a sort of girdle round the middle of the body.
+The hair is very woolly, like a sheep's, very fine, and in front of
+the girdle the hair is very long and rough like a lion's. They have
+a great hump, larger than a camel's. The horns are short and thick,
+so that they are not seen much above the hair. In May they change the
+hair in the middle of the body for a down, which makes perfect lions
+of them. They rub against the small trees in the little ravines to
+shed their hair, and they continue this until only the down is left,
+as a snake changes his skin. They have a short tail, with a bunch of
+hair at the end. When they run, they carry it erect like a scorpion.
+It is worth noticing that the little calves are red and just like
+ours, but they change their color and appearance with time and age.
+
+Another strange thing was that all the bulls that were killed had
+their left ears slit, although these were whole when young. The
+reason for this was a puzzle that could not be guessed. The wool
+ought to make good cloth on account of its fineness, although the
+color is not good, because it is the color of buriel.[552]
+
+  [552] The kersey, or coarse woollen cloth out of which the habits
+  of the Franciscan friars were made. Hence the name Grey Friars.
+  (Winship.) Various attempts were made to manufacture the hair
+  into garments, especially stockings, but the ventures did not
+  prove profitable. See Hornaday, "The Extinction of the American
+  Bison," _Report of the United States National Museum_ for
+  1886-1887.
+
+Another thing worth noticing is that the bulls travelled without cows
+in such large numbers that nobody could have counted them, and so far
+away from the cows that it was more than forty leagues from where we
+began to see the bulls to the place where we began to see the cows.
+The country they travelled over was so level and smooth that if one
+looked at them the sky could be seen between their legs, so that if
+some of them were at a distance they looked like smooth-trunked pines
+whose tops joined, and if there was only one bull it looked as if
+there were four pines. When one was near them, it was impossible to
+see the ground on the other side of them. The reason for all this was
+that the country seemed as round as if a man should imagine himself
+in a three-pint measure, and could see the sky at the edge of it,
+about a crossbow shot from him, and even if a man only lay down on
+his back he lost sight of the ground.
+
+I have not written about other things which were seen nor made
+any mention of them, because they were not of so much importance,
+although it does not seem right for me to remain silent concerning
+the fact that they venerate the sign of the cross in the region where
+the settlements have high houses. For at a spring which was in the
+plain near Acuco they had a cross two palms high and as thick as
+a finger, made of wood with a square twig for its crosspiece, and
+many little sticks decorated with feathers around it, and numerous
+withered flowers, which were the offerings.[553] In a graveyard
+outside the village at Tutahaco there appeared to have been a recent
+burial. Near the head there was another cross made of two little
+sticks tied with cotton thread, and dry withered flowers.[554] It
+certainly seems to me that in some way they must have received some
+light from the cross of Our Redeemer, Christ, and it may have come by
+way of India, from whence they proceeded.
+
+  [553] The cross is common to the Indians and always has been. It
+  often is symbolic of the morning and the evening stars. Those
+  referred to as having been seen by Coronado's men at Acoma were
+  characteristic prayer-sticks, the downy feathers representing
+  the breath of life. Such are still in common use by the Pueblo
+  Indians.
+
+  [554] Probably dried corn-husk.
+
+
+
+
+Chapter 9
+
+     _Which treats of the direction which the army took, and of how
+     another more direct way might be found, if anyone was to return
+     to that country._
+
+
+I very much wish that I possessed some knowledge of cosmography or
+geography, so as to render what I wish to say intelligible, and so
+that I could reckon up or measure the advantage those people who
+might go in search of that country would have if they went directly
+through the centre of the country, instead of following the road the
+army took. However, with the help of the favor of the Lord, I will
+state it as well as I can, making it as plain as possible.
+
+It is, I think, already understood that the Portuguese, Campo, was
+the soldier who escaped when Friar Juan de Padilla was killed at
+Quivira, and that he finally reached New Spain from Panuco,[555]
+having travelled across the plains country until he came to cross the
+North Sea mountain chain, keeping the country that Don Hernando de
+Soto discovered all the time on his left hand, since he did not see
+the river of the Holy Spirit (Espiritu Santo) at all.[556] After he
+had crossed the North Sea mountains, he found that he was in Panuco,
+so that if he had not tried to go to the North Sea, he would have
+come out in the neighborhood of the border land, or the country of
+the Sacatecas,[557] of which we now have some knowledge.
+
+  [555] The northeastern province of New Spain.
+
+  [556] That is, he travelled from the Quivira province, in the
+  present Kansas, southwestwardly to Mexico.
+
+  [557] Zacatecas.
+
+This way would be somewhat better and more direct for anyone going
+back there in search of Quivira, since some of those who came
+with the Portuguese are still in New Spain to serve as guides.
+Nevertheless, I think it would be best to go through the country of
+the Guachichules,[558] keeping near the South Sea mountains all the
+time, for there are more settlements and a food supply, for it would
+be suicide to launch out on to the plains country, because it is so
+vast and is barren of anything to eat, although, it is true, there
+would not be much need of this after coming to the cows. This is
+only when one goes in search of Quivira, and of the villages which
+were described by the Indian called Turk, for the army of Francisco
+Vazquez Coronado went the very farthest way round to get there, since
+they started from Mexico and went 110 leagues to the west, and then
+100 leagues to the northeast, and 250 to the north, and all this
+brought them as far as the ravines where the cows were, and after
+travelling 850 leagues they were not more than 400 leagues distant
+from Mexico by a direct route. If one desires to go to the country
+of Tiguex, so as to turn from there toward the west in search of the
+country of India, he ought to follow the road taken by the army,
+for there is no other, even if one wished to go by a different way,
+because the arm of the sea which reaches into this coast toward the
+north does not leave room for any. But what might be done is to have
+a fleet and cross this gulf and disembark in the neighborhood of the
+Island of Negroes[559] and enter the country from there, crossing the
+mountain chains in search of the country from which the people at
+Tiguex came, or other peoples of the same sort. As for entering from
+the country of Florida and from the North Sea, it has already been
+observed that the many expeditions which have been undertaken from
+that side have been unfortunate and not very successful, because that
+part of the country is full of bogs and poisonous fruits, barren,
+and the very worst country that is warmed by the sun. But they might
+disembark after passing the river of the Holy Spirit, as Don Hernando
+de Soto did. Nevertheless, despite the fact that I underwent much
+labor, I still think that the way I went to that country is the best.
+There ought to be river courses, because the necessary supplies can
+be carried on these more easily in large quantities. Horses are the
+most necessary things in the new countries, and they frighten the
+enemy most.... Artillery is also much feared by those who do not know
+how to use it. A piece of heavy artillery would be very good for
+settlements like those which Francisco Vazquez Coronado discovered,
+in order to knock them down, because he had nothing but some small
+machines for slinging and nobody skilful enough to make a catapult
+or some other machine which would frighten them, which is very
+necessary.[560]
+
+  [558] This wild tribe inhabited chiefly the region of the present
+  state of San Luis Potosí, Mexico. They were known also as
+  Cuachichiles and Quachichiles.
+
+  [559] The dictionary of Dominguez says: "Isla de negros; ó isla
+  del Almirantazgo, en el grande Océano equinoccial; grande isla
+  de la América del Norte, sobre la costa oeste." Apparently the
+  location of this island gradually drifted westward with the
+  increase of geographical knowledge, until it was finally located
+  in the Philippine group. (Winship.)
+
+  [560] This would indicate that the bronze cannon which Coronado
+  left at Sia pueblo were worthless.
+
+I say, then, that with what we now know about the trend of the coast
+of the South Sea, which has been followed by the ships which explored
+the western part, and what is known of the North Sea toward Norway,
+the coast of which extends up from Florida, those who now go to
+discover the country which Francisco Vasquez entered, and reach the
+country of Cibola or of Tiguex, will know the direction in which
+they ought to go in order to discover the true direction of the
+country which the Marquis of the Valley, Don Hernando Cortes, tried
+to find, following the direction of the gulf of the Firebrand (Tizon)
+River.[561]
+
+  [561] The Gulf of California (which had been navigated by Cortés)
+  and the Rio Colorado.
+
+This will suffice for the conclusion of our narrative. Everything
+else rests on the powerful Lord of all things, God Omnipotent, who
+knows how and when these lands will be discovered and for whom He has
+guarded this good fortune.
+
+
+                             _Laus Deo._
+
+Finished copying, Saturday the 26th of October, 1596, in Seville.
+
+
+
+
+INDEX
+
+
+
+
+INDEX
+
+
+  Aays, not to be confounded with Ayas, 225 n.;
+    Moscoso at, 243;
+    Indians of, give battle, 243.
+    _See also_ Ayas.
+
+  Açamor, mentioned, 126.
+
+  Acaxes, Indians of Culiacan, 345.
+
+  Acela, town of, 155.
+
+  Acha, _see_ Picuris.
+
+  Achese, cacique of, addresses De Soto, 166-167.
+
+  Acochis, Indian name for gold, 314, 337 n., 342.
+
+  Acoma, identification of Acuco with, 311 n.;
+    visit of Alvarado to, 311;
+    description of, 311-312;
+    visited by Arellano, 316;
+    route to, 316;
+    mentioned, 358;
+    worship of cross at, 384.
+
+  Acoma Indians, water supply of, 312.
+
+  Acosta, Maria de, wife of Pedro Castañeda, 276.
+
+  Acoste, cacique of, comes to De Soto, 180.
+
+  Acubadaos Indians, 87.
+
+  Acuco, _see_ Acoma.
+
+  Adai Indians, 76 n.
+
+  Adobe, making of, described, 352.
+
+  Aguacay, mentioned, 237;
+    Moscoso at, 238.
+
+  Aguar, Indian deity, 118.
+
+  Aguas Calientes, pueblos of, 359;
+    identification of, 359 n.
+
+  Aguenes Indians, 84, 85.
+
+  Alabama, 183 n.
+
+  Alaniz, Hieronymo, notary, with Narvaez, 22;
+    objects to abandonment of ships, 23;
+    death of, 57.
+
+  Alarcon, Diego de, confusion of, with Alcaraz, 324 n.
+
+  Alarcon, Hernando de, expedition of by sea, 294;
+    narrative of, 279, 294 n.;
+    message of, found by Diaz, 303.
+
+  Alarcon, Pedro de, 294 n.
+
+  Albino, Indian, 332 n.
+
+  Alcaraz, Diego de, meeting with Cabeza de Vaca, 112-113;
+    his need of food, 113;
+    returns from incursion, 119;
+    lieutenant of Diaz, 303, 324;
+    inefficiency of, 326;
+    death of, 371.
+
+  Aleman, Juan, name given Indian of Tiguex, 317, 321.
+
+  Alimamos, overtakes De Soto, 177.
+
+  Alimamu, an Indian chief, 195, 200.
+
+  Alligators, do harm to Indians, 143;
+    in rivers of New Galicia, 378.
+
+  Almirantazgo, or Isle of Negroes, 386 n.
+
+  Altamaca, _see_ Altamaha.
+
+  Altamaha, 167 n.
+
+  Altamaha River, 167 n.
+
+  Alvarado, Hernando de, appointed captain, 293;
+    protects Coronado at Cibola, 301;
+    expedition of, to Rio Grande, 311;
+    report of, 279, 311 n.;
+    visits Acoma, 311;
+    imprisons Pecos chiefs, 315;
+    route of, 316 n.;
+    at Braba, 341.
+
+  Alvarado, Pedro de, expedition of, to Peru, 288;
+    deeds of, 380.
+
+  Alvarez, death of, 6.
+
+  Amaye, Moscoso at, 238.
+
+  Aminoya, Spaniards hear of, 248;
+    take quarters at, 249;
+    brigantines built at, 250.
+
+  Amushungkwa, a Jemez pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  Anagados Indians, 71 n.
+
+  Anane, a fruit, 140.
+
+  Añasco, Juan de, 135;
+    sent by De Soto to explore harbor in Florida, 145;
+    goes to Espiritu Santo, 162;
+    sent in quest of habitations, 171;
+    finds a town twelve leagues off, 171;
+    makes road through the woods, 172;
+    sent on a reconnoissance, 200, 228, 229;
+    advises Moscoso to put out to sea, 260;
+    and does so with him, 261;
+    meets with opposition from those with him, 261-262;
+    again advises putting out to sea, 264.
+
+  Anguille River, 215 n.
+
+  Anhayca Apalache, De Soto at, 161, 162, 164.
+
+  Anhocan, Cabeza de Vaca at, 116.
+
+  Anilco, 227, 228, 245, 248, 249.
+    _See also_ Nilco.
+
+  Animals, of Apalachen, 29;
+    of Florida, mentioned by the Gentleman of Elvas, 271-272.
+
+  Anoixi, De Soto takes many inhabitants of, 222.
+
+  Antonio de Santa Maria, Franciscan friar, 288.
+
+  Antonio Victoria, friar, accident of, 299.
+
+  Apalache, mentioned, 161;
+    has much maize, 156, 226;
+    distance from, to Cutifachiqui, 188;
+    direction and distance of, from Espiritu Santo, 271, 272.
+    _See also_ Apalachen.
+
+  Apalachee Indians, war against, by Creeks, 21 n.;
+    by English, 21 n.;
+    overcome by Cabeza de Vaca, 28;
+    attack the Spaniards, 30, 31;
+    eastern tribes of, 330 n.;
+    mentioned, 349 n.
+
+  Apalachen, indicated to Narvaez as source of gold, 21-22;
+    taken by the Spanish, 28;
+    region of, described, 29-30;
+    climate of, is cold, 29;
+    animals of, 29.
+
+  Apalachicola, town on Savannah River, 21 n.
+
+  Appalachian Mountains, origin of name of, 21 n.
+
+  Appalachee Bay, origin of name of, 21 n.
+
+  Aquiguate, largest town seen by De Soto in Florida, 214;
+    De Soto returns to, 215;
+    country of, described, 215.
+
+  Aquixo, 227, 270;
+    direction of, 271.
+
+  Aquixo, cacique of, comes to De Soto, 203;
+    loses five or six of his men, shot by crossbowmen, 203;
+    and ten, killed by De Soto's cavalry, 205.
+
+  Arache, province of, 365.
+
+  Arawakan Indians, 21;
+    dance ceremony of, 52 n.
+
+  Arbadaos Indians, 80.
+
+  Arche, _see_ Harahey.
+
+  Areitos, among Indians of Malhado,
+    held in honor of Cabeza de Vaca, 89.
+
+  Arellano, Tristan de, appointment of, as captain, 292;
+    lieutenant to Coronado, 298, 335;
+    at Corazones, 301, 303;
+    arrives at Cibola, 313;
+    route of, 315 n.;
+    at Tiguex, 317, 339;
+    attacks Cicuye, 341.
+
+  Arispe, _see_ Arizpe.
+
+  Aristotle, quoted, 134.
+
+  Arizpe, 347 n.
+
+  Arkadelphia, 238 n.
+
+  Arkansas city, 227 n.
+
+  Arkansas Post, 226 n.
+
+  Arkansas River, 222 n., 248 n., 249 n.
+
+  Artillery, at Culiacan, 297;
+    used by Indians, 357;
+    usefulness of, in exploration, 386.
+
+  Astorga, Marquis of, learns what Cabeza de Vaca relates
+        to the Emperor regarding New Spain, 137.
+
+  Astudillo, a native of Çafra, to seek Panuco, 49.
+
+  Asturian, the, with Figueroa, 61, 64;
+    seen by the Avavares, 79.
+
+  Asturiano, a clergyman, 68, 69.
+
+  Astyalakwa, a Jemez pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  Atabalipa, lord of Peru, 135, 175.
+
+  Atayos Indians, 76, 87.
+
+  Atchafalaya, lower course of Red River, 261 n.
+
+  Attacapan Indians, 51 n., 363 n.
+
+  Audiencia, definition of, 285 n.
+
+  Audiencia of Española, report to, 8;
+    edition of report by Oviedo, 8, 10.
+
+  Auia, island of, 49;
+    probably not Malhado Island, 49 n.
+
+  Aute, town south of Apalachen, 30, 31;
+    reached by Narvaez, 32.
+
+  Autiamque, mentioned, 221, 225, 227, 237;
+    De Soto winters at, 222-224;
+    distance to Guacay, 270;
+    direction of, 271.
+
+  Avavares Indians, receive Cabeza de Vaca, 73;
+    healed by him, 6-7, 78;
+    ignorant of time, 79.
+
+  Avellaneda, killed by an Indian, 32.
+
+  Avila, Pedro de, leader in rebellion at Suya, 370.
+
+  Awatobi, Hopi pueblo, 307 n., 358 n.
+
+  Axille, De Soto at, 161.
+
+  Ayas, Moscoso crosses river at, 248.
+
+  Ayays, not to be confounded with Aays, 225 n.;
+    De Soto at, 225.
+
+  Ayllon, Governor-licentiate, death of, 174.
+
+  Aymay, named Socorro, 171;
+    De Soto at, 172;
+    location of, 172 n.
+
+  Azores, mentioned, 122.
+
+
+  Bacallaos, Spanish name for Newfoundland, 343 n., 360.
+
+  Badthing, story of, 78-79.
+
+  Baegert, Father Jacob, on Indians of lower California, 346 n.
+
+  Bahíos, 108.
+    _See also_ Buhíos.
+
+  Baldwyn, Mississippi, 212 n.
+
+  Bandelier, A. F., researches on the Seven Cities, 287 n.;
+    on Topira, 290 n.;
+    on Cicuye, 355 n.
+
+  Bandelier, A. F. and Fanny, _Journey of Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca_,
+        cited, 22 n., 59, 87 n., 102 n., 103 n.
+
+  Baracoa, town in Cuba, 142.
+
+  Barbacoa, a store house for maize, 165.
+
+  Barbels, native American fish, 349.
+
+  Barrionuevo, Francisco de, companion of Coronado, 292;
+    at Tiguex, 319;
+    explorations of, 339-340.
+
+  Baskett, James Newton, investigations of, 326 n.
+
+  Bastian, Francisco, drowning of, 225.
+
+  Batuco, identification of, 376 n.
+
+  Báyamo, town in Cuba, 142, 143.
+
+  Bayou de Vue, 215 n.
+
+  Bayou Macon, 255 n.
+
+  Bears, in pueblo region, 357.
+
+  Béjar, mentioned, 125.
+
+  Bermuda, Cabeza de Vaca at, 121.
+
+  Bernalillo, settlement on site of Tiguex, 278, 317 n.
+
+  Bidai Indians, 80 n.
+
+  Biedma, narrative of, cited, 40 n.;
+    referred to, 130 n.
+
+  Big Bayou Meto, 225.
+
+  Big Creek, 21, 215 n.
+
+  Bigotes, _see_ Whiskers.
+
+  Birds, mentioned, 29-30, 272.
+
+  Biscayan Indians, 115 n.
+
+  Bison, first printed reference to, 68 n.;
+    described by Cicuye Indians, 311;
+    hunted by plains Indians, 330, 362, 363;
+    stampede of, 331;
+    Coronado's army supplied with meat of, 336;
+    piles of bones of, 382;
+    Castañeda's description of, 382-383.
+
+  Black Warrior River, 188 n., 189 n.
+
+  Blankets, of cotton, 350.
+
+  Blizzard, experienced by Coronado, 333.
+
+  Bog of Pia, breeds mosquitos, 144.
+
+  Boston Mountains, 221 n.;
+    crossed by De Soto, 221.
+
+  Boyomo, settlement of, 347.
+
+  Braba, _see_ Taos.
+
+  Brazos River, 58 n., 244 n., 245 n.
+
+  Bread, maize, 271;
+    Indian, 303, 340, 340 n.
+
+  Bridge, built by Spaniards across Cicuye River, 329;
+    Indian, across Rio Grande, 340.
+
+  Brigantines, built by Spaniards at Aminoya, 250;
+    become separated in the Gulf of Mexico, 263.
+
+  Buffalo, _see_ Bison.
+
+  Buhíos, Arawak word, 19, 79.
+    _See also_ Bahíos.
+
+  Burgos, André de, printer, 134, 272.
+
+  Buriel, cloth used by Franciscan friars, 383 n.
+
+  Burning of Indians at stake by Spaniards, 320.
+
+
+  Caballos, Bahia de, 37, 162 n.
+    _See also_ Horses, Bay of.
+
+  Cabeza de Vaca, Alvar Nuñez, narrative of, 1-126;
+    birth and parentage, 3;
+    significance of name, 3;
+    trades and heals among the Indians, 6-7;
+    line of travel, 7;
+    character of his chronicle, 7;
+    his accomplishment, 8;
+    report to Audiencia of Española, 8;
+    appointed governor of provinces of Rio de la Plata, 8;
+    dies, 9;
+    bibliography of the _Relacion_, 10-11;
+    salutation to Charles V., 12;
+    duration of his wandering, 13;
+    his idea of the value of his narrative, 13;
+    leaves San Lúcar de Barrameda, 4, 14;
+    is treasurer and high-sheriff, 4, 14;
+    reaches Santo Domingo, 14;
+    proceeds to Trinidad and is overtaken by a terrible
+          storm, 15-17;
+    passes winter at Jagua, 17;
+    explores mainland of Florida, with Narvaez, 4, 20;
+    believes it wiser to return to vessels, 22-23;
+    refuses to sail in charge of them, preferring to share
+          risks of march into the country, 24;
+    goes with forty men to seek a harbor, 25-26;
+    enters Apalachen, 28;
+    goes from Aute to find the sea, 33;
+    embarks in open boat, 36;
+    sufferings of his men, 38-40;
+    is assaulted by Indians, 41;
+    deserted by Narvaez, 42;
+    lands on an island among friendly Indians, 5, 44-45;
+    loses three men, in endeavor to re-embark, 46;
+    destitute condition of the survivors, 46;
+    aid given by Indians, 47-48;
+    is overtaken by Dorantes and Alonzo del Castillo, 48;
+    agrees that four of the party shall try to reach Panuco, 49;
+    learns Indians believe the Christians are sorcerers, 50;
+    names island Malhado, 50;
+    heals the sick by breathing on them, and by prayer, 53;
+    on the mainland, 52, 55;
+    his party now numbers fourteen, 55;
+    suffers great hardships, 56;
+    trafficks among the Indians, 56-57;
+    rescues Oviedo from Malhado, 57;
+    is left by him, 59;
+    finds Dorantes, Castillo, and Estevanico, 59-60;
+    waits six months before attempting to escape, 60, 61, 70;
+    is made a slave, 61;
+    is forced to postpone escape another year, 71;
+    succeeds at last, 73;
+    works more cures among the Indians, 74, 77, 78;
+    goes naked, 80, 81;
+    goes among the Maliacones, 80;
+    eats dogs, 80, 81;
+    barters with Indians, 81;
+    performs more cures, 91;
+    reaches a mountainous country, 92;
+    receives presents from the Indians, 92-93;
+    cuts an arrow head out of a wounded native, 96-97;
+    reaches the Rio Grande, 99;
+    is feared by the Indians because of deaths among them, 101;
+    heals the sick, 101;
+    goes among the Jumanos, 102;
+    calls them the Cow nation, 103;
+    starts in search of maize, 105;
+    touches and blesses both sick and well, 106-107;
+    teaches Christian religion, 107;
+    finds news of Christians, 109;
+    checks fear among his Indian companions, 111;
+    is taken to Diego de Alcaraz, 112;
+    joins party of Diego and dismisses his Indian
+          followers, 114-115;
+    is received by Melchior Diaz, 116;
+    arrives at Mexico, 120;
+    at Havana, 121;
+    at Lisbon, 123;
+    mentioned as a survivor of Narvaez's party, 125;
+    disagrees with De Soto, 136;
+    mentioned by the Gentleman of Elvas, 136, 221, 246;
+    returns from expedition, 288;
+    narrative of, 288;
+    in Corazones valley, 301;
+    traces of, found by Coronado, 332;
+    regard of Indians for, 381 n.
+
+  Cabeza de Vaca, Teresa, mother of Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca, 3, 125.
+
+  Cabo Cruz, 15 n.
+
+  Cabo de Santa Cruz, 15.
+
+  Cabusto, 194.
+
+  Caçabe bread, _see_ Cassava bread.
+
+  Cache River, 215 n.
+
+  Cactus belt, northern limit of, 70 n.
+
+  Cahita, synonymous with Sinaloa, 346 n.
+
+  Cahoques Indians, 87.
+
+  Calahuchi, 161 n.
+
+  Calderon, Captain, 155;
+    at Espiritu Santo, 162;
+    commands a brigantine, 265.
+
+  Cale, province of, reported to be abundant in gold, 154;
+    mentioned, 162.
+
+  California, Gulf of, 109 n.;
+    explored, 304, 346;
+    natives of peninsula of, 346, 346 n.
+
+  Caliquen, reached by De Soto, 157.
+
+  Calpista, mentioned by Ranjel, 216 n.
+
+  Caluça, in northeastern part of Mississippi, 212.
+
+  Camolas Indians, 87 n.
+
+  Camones Indians, are reported to have killed Peñalosa and
+        Tellez, 72.
+
+  Campo, Andres del, Portuguese companion of Padilla, 365, 373, 385;
+    returns to New Spain, 385.
+
+  Canarreo shoals, 18.
+
+  Canasagua, De Soto at, 178.
+
+  Caney creek, 58 n.
+
+  Cannibalism in Culiacan, 345.
+
+  Cannouchee River, 170 n.
+
+  Cantaloupes, as food of Indians, 348.
+
+  Capachiqui, De Soto at, 165.
+
+  Capoques Indians, 54 n., 55 n., 65 n., 66 n., 87 n.
+
+  Capothan, province of New Spain, 364.
+
+  Caravallo, appointed lieutenant to sail with ships of Narvaez, 24;
+    mentioned, 124.
+
+  Cardenas, Garcia Lopez, appointed captain, 292;
+    protects Coronado at Cibola, 301;
+    visit of, to Colorado River, 309;
+    attacks Indian village, 319;
+    treachery of Indians towards, 321;
+    accident to, 331;
+    summoned to Spain, 367;
+    flight of, from Suya, 369, 370.
+
+  Carlos, leaves his wife at Havana, 145;
+    is killed at Manilla, 193.
+
+  Carmona, Alonzo de, 131.
+
+  Casa de Contratación, at Seville, 135 n.
+
+  Cases, with dead bodies, burned by Xuarez, 21.
+
+  Casiste, De Soto at, 187.
+
+  Casqui, cacique of, 205;
+    speeches of, to De Soto, 206-207;
+    kneels before the cross, 208;
+    directs De Soto to Pacaha, 208;
+    makes many presents to De Soto, 210;
+    gives his daughter to the governor, 211;
+    begs forgiveness for absenting himself without permission, 212;
+    accepts friendship of the cacique of Pacaha, 212.
+
+  Cassava bread, 144, 145.
+
+  Castañeda, Pedro de, narrative of Coronado's expedition by,
+        276, 281-387;
+    facts of life of, 276;
+    value of narrative of, 276;
+    manuscript of, in Lenox library, 277;
+    translations of, 276-277;
+    date of narrative, 282 n.;
+    joins expedition at Culiacan, 296 n.
+
+  Castile, mentioned, 124.
+
+  Castillo, Doctor, father of Alonzo de Castillo Maldonado, 125.
+
+  Castillo Maldonado, Alonzo del, with Cabeza de Vaca, 4, 6;
+    joins in report to Audiencia of Española, 8;
+    returns to New Spain, 9;
+    goes with Cabeza de Vaca to find a harbor, 26;
+    again goes on the same errand, 33;
+    embarks in open boat, 36;
+    loses his boat and overtakes Cabeza de Vaca, 48;
+    on the mainland, 54;
+    returns to Malhado, 55;
+    accompanies Indians to find walnuts, and meets with Cabeza
+          de Vaca, 59-60;
+    stay of, with the Yguazes, 65;
+    mentioned, 72;
+    mentioned by Oviedo, 69, 70;
+    among Lanegados, 71;
+    escapes, 73;
+    cures afflicted Indians, 74, 76, 77;
+    goes to the Maliacones, 80;
+    makes reconnoissance towards Rio Grande, 102;
+    finds evidence of visit by Europeans, 109;
+    rejoins Cabeza de Vaca and attaches himself to a Spanish
+          exploring party, 113;
+    returns to Spain, 125;
+    mentioned by Castañeda, 288.
+
+  Catalte, 236.
+
+  Catamaya, De Soto at, 222.
+
+  Caya River, 216.
+
+  Cayas, De Soto at, 217, 219;
+    mentioned, 225, 227, 238;
+    cacique of, is dismissed, 221.
+
+  Cebreros, _see_ Zebreros.
+
+  Cedar Lake, 58 n.
+
+  Cerda, Alvaro de la, left by Narvaez in charge of a vessel,
+        18, 20.
+
+  Cervantes, Spanish soldier, 328.
+
+  Chacan, a fruit, 104.
+
+  Chaguate, province of, mentioned, 223 n., 236;
+    cacique of, addresses Moscoso, 237.
+
+  Chaguete, 237;
+    Indians come to, in peace, 247;
+    Moscoso leaves, 248.
+    _See also_ Chaguate.
+
+  Chalaque, province of, 176.
+
+  Charles V, emperor, 12 n.
+
+  Charruco, Cabeza de Vaca determines to seek, 56.
+
+  Charrucos Indians, 87 n.
+
+  Chattahuchi, 161 n.
+
+  Chattanooga, 181 n., 182 n.
+
+  Chauauares Indians, 87 n.
+   _See_ Chavavares Indians.
+
+  Chavavares Indians, 73 n., 80 n., 87.
+
+  Chia, _see_ Sia.
+
+  Chiaha, province of, 175, 177, 178;
+    nature of the country of, 270;
+    speech of cacique of, 178;
+    cacique of, surrenders himself to De Soto, 180.
+
+  Chiametla, death of Samaniego at, 295.
+
+  Chicaça, De Soto at, 195, 212 n.;
+    Indians of, make an attack, 197-199.
+
+  Chicacilla, 199 n.
+
+  Chichilticalli, visited by Fray Marcos, 289;
+    by Diaz, 298;
+    location of, 299 n., 349 n.;
+    Coronado's first view of, 299;
+    description of, 349.
+
+  Chichimecas, Mexican name for braves, 357.
+
+  Chicot County, Arkansas, 255 n.
+
+  Chihuahua, 105 n.
+
+  Chilano, mentioned, 249.
+
+  Childersburg, 183 n.
+
+  Children of sun, Spaniards called, 94.
+
+  China, belief in its connection with America, 343, 360.
+
+  Chisca, a gold-bearing country, 180, 181, 212;
+    mentioned, 205.
+
+  Choctaw Indians, 38 n.
+
+  Cholupaha, town of, 157;
+    called Villafarta, 157.
+
+  Choualla, _see_ Xualla.
+
+  Christianity, taught to the Indians, 107, 117;
+    churches to be built by them, 119.
+
+  Churches, to be built by Indians, 119.
+
+  Chuse, Bay of, 40 n.
+
+  Cibola, reached by expedition of Fray Marcos, 275, 289;
+    Guzman's expedition to, 286;
+    description of, 300;
+    captured by Coronado, 301;
+    army arrives at, 306;
+    Castañeda's description of, 350;
+    pueblos of, 358.
+
+  Cicuyc, _see_ Cicuye.
+
+  Cicuye, synonymous with Pecos, 329 n.
+    _See_ Pecos.
+
+  Cienfuegos, Bay of, 17 n.
+
+  Civet-marten skins described by Cabeza de Vaca, 39.
+
+  Clark, on Indian sign language, 363 n.
+
+  Clark County, 238 n.
+
+  Cleburne County, 216 n.
+
+  Clothing of Indians, 318, 334, 347, 350, 355.
+
+  Coahuiltecan affinities, 61 n.
+
+  Coayos Indians, 76.
+
+  Coça, province of, 170, 175, 228;
+    speech of cacique of, 183-184;
+    inhabitants of, seized by De Soto, 184;
+    cacique of, taken, 185;
+    is dismissed, 187;
+    distance to Tastaluça, 189;
+    has more maize than Nilco, 226;
+    nature of the country, 270;
+    direction of, 271.
+
+  Cocopa Indians, a Yuman tribe, 303 n.
+
+  Cocos Indians, 54 n.
+
+  Cofaqui, 168.
+
+  Cofitachequi, _see_ Cutifachiqui.
+
+  Cohani Indians, 59 n.
+
+  Coké Indians, 54 n.
+
+  Coles, Juan, 131.
+
+  Coligoa, De Soto at, 215-216; distance to Autiamque, 270;
+    nature of the country, 270.
+
+  Colima, ravines of, 332.
+
+  Colorado River, 58 n., 90 n.;
+    visited by Diaz, 303;
+    by Cardenas, 309.
+
+  Comos Indians, 80 n., 87.
+
+  Compostela, in a hostile country, 120;
+    mentioned, 285 n., 287;
+    rendezvous of Coronado's army, 293;
+    departure of Coronado from, 295.
+
+  Comupatrico, settlement of, 347.
+
+  Cona, settlement of plains Indians, 333.
+
+  Coosa, 183 n.
+
+  Copee, used in paying the bottoms of Moscoso's vessels, 263.
+
+  Copper, found at Quivira, 337.
+
+  Coquite, pueblo of, 356 n., 358 n.
+
+  Corazones, Pueblo de los, 108, 115 n.;
+    Coronado's army at, 301;
+    valley of, 347;
+    friendliness of Indians of, 372, 376.
+    _See_ Hearts, town of.
+
+  Corn, description of, 350;
+    method of grinding, 354;
+    stores of, kept by Indians, 356.
+    _See also_ Maize.
+
+  Coronado, Francisco Vazquez de, on Stake Plains, 7;
+    expedition inspired by journey of Cabeza de Vaca, 8;
+    memoirs of George P. Winship on, 276-277;
+    bibliography of accounts of expedition of, 277-279;
+    Castañeda's narrative of expedition of, 276, 281-387;
+    testimony of companions of, 279;
+    expedition of, mentioned, 97 n., 284, 362 n.;
+    appointed governor of New Galicia, 287;
+    marriage of, 287;
+    accompanies Fray Marcos to Culiacan, 288;
+    makes expedition to Topira, 290;
+    returns to Mexico, 291;
+    friendship of Mendoza for, 291;
+    receives command from Mendoza, 275, 281, 291;
+    Castañeda's criticism of, 291, 293;
+    appointments confirmed by, 292;
+    departure of, from Compostela, 295;
+    receives report of Diaz, at Chiametla, 296;
+    at Culiacan, 297-298;
+    Truxillo brought before, 298;
+    arrives at Chichilticalli, 299;
+    discouragement of, 299;
+    reaches Cibola, 300;
+    letter to Mendoza, 277, 300 n.;
+    attacks Cibola, 300;
+    wounded at Cibola, 301;
+    mention of, 294, 302, 305, 319;
+    finds horn of mountain goat, 306;
+    joined by Arellano, 306;
+    sends Tovar to Tusayan, 307;
+    sends Cardenas to Colorado River, 308;
+    receives report of Cardenas, 310;
+    gifts to, from Cicuye Indians, 311;
+    sends Alvarado to Cicuye, 311;
+    receives message from Alvarado, 312;
+    departure of, for Tiguex, 313;
+    arrives at Tutahaco, 314;
+    at Tiguex, 314;
+    sends Alvarado to Cicuye, 315;
+    joined by army, 317;
+    demands cloth of Indians, 317-318;
+    gives Cardenas orders to attack Indians, 319;
+    orders of, concerning prisoners, 320;
+    besieges Tiguex, 322;
+    attempts of, to make peace, 323;
+    receives news of death of Diaz, 325;
+    sends Tovar to San Hieronimo, 326;
+    messengers from, to Mendoza, 326;
+    letter of, to king, 278, 329 n.;
+    pacifies Cicuye, 329;
+    departure of, for Quivira, 329;
+    bison seen by, 330, 331;
+    experiences blizzard, 333;
+    divides army, 335;
+    arrives at Quivira, 336;
+    route of, 337 n.;
+    returns from Quivira, 338;
+    crosses route of De Soto, 339;
+    reaches Cicuye and Tiguex, 342;
+    winters at Tiguex, 342, 366;
+    receives letters from Mendoza, 367;
+    accident to, 368;
+    schemes of, to return home, 369;
+    request of soldiers to, 370;
+    preparations of, for return, 372, 373;
+    arrives at Cibola, 374;
+    meets Gallego with re-enforcements, 375;
+    feigns illness, 376, 377;
+    at Culiacan, 377;
+    promises of, 378;
+    returns to Mexico, 378;
+    reports to Mendoza, 378;
+    coolness of Mendoza towards, 378;
+    deprived of governorship of New Galicia, 378;
+    route of, 385;
+    inadequacy of equipment of, 386.
+
+  Coronado expedition, memoirs of George Parker Winship on, 276-277;
+    Castañeda's narrative of, 276, 281-387;
+    bibliography of other accounts of, 277-280;
+    importance of, 280;
+    date of, 293 n.;
+    reasons given by Mota Padilla for failure of, 366 n.
+
+  Corral, death of, 49.
+
+  Corrientes, Cape, storm at, 18.
+
+  Cortes, Hernando, receives Cabeza de Vaca, 121;
+    mentioned, 283;
+    trial for murder of wife 285 n.;
+    given new title, 286 n.;
+    feats of, 380.
+
+  Corvo, mentioned, 122 n.
+
+  Coste, speech of cacique of, 182.
+
+  Cotton, garments of, presented to Cabeza de Vaca, 104;
+    noted by him, 106;
+    cloth of, made at Tusayan, 308;
+    blankets of, 350.
+
+  Council Bend, suggested as the place of De Soto's crossing of
+        the Mississippi, 204 n.
+
+  Cow nation, Indians so named by Cabeza de Vaca, 103.
+    _See_ Jumanos Indians.
+
+  Cows, _see_ Bison.
+
+  Creek Indians, 21 n.
+
+  Cremation among Zuñi, 351.
+
+  Cross, raised at Casqui, 208;
+    sign of, among the Zuñis, 351;
+    venerated by Indians, 384.
+
+  Cruz, Bahia de la, 36.
+    _See also_ Tampa Bay.
+
+  Cuachichiles, _see_ Guachichules.
+
+  Cuba, De Soto in, 141-145.
+
+  Cuchendados Indians, 86.
+
+  Cuenca de Huete, mentioned, 124.
+
+  Culiacan, mentioned, 115 n.;
+    Cabeza de Vaca at, 116.
+
+  Culiacan, San Miguel de, foundation of, by Guzman, 276,
+        286, 344;
+    arrival of Cabeza de Vaca at, 288;
+    location of, 296 n.;
+    Castañeda's description of, 344;
+    return of Coronado to, 377.
+
+  Cultalchulches Indians, 76, 78, 80 n., 87.
+
+  Cures among Indians wrought by Cabeza de Vaca, 6-7, 53, 73,
+        74, 76, 77, 78, 91, 101, 106-107, 117;
+    by Alonzo del Castillo, 74, 76, 77.
+
+  Cushing, F. H., on Zuñi breadstuff, 354 n.
+
+  Cutifachiqui, 172 n., 178, 180;
+    Indians of, 173-174;
+    speech of kinswoman of the cacica of, 172-173;
+    speech of cacica of, 173;
+    cacica of, furnishes pearls, 174;
+    cacica of, is made a slave, 176;
+    escape of cacica of, 177;
+    distance of, to Xualla, 188, 270;
+    lad of, acts as interpreter, 224;
+    nature of the country of, 270;
+    direction of, 271.
+
+  Cuyamunque, a Tewa pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  Cuzco, city of, 135.
+
+
+  Dances of the Tahus, 344.
+
+  Daniel, Franciscan friar, 288.
+
+  Dávila, Pedrárias, governor, 135, 136.
+
+  Davis, W. W. H., on the fate of Padilla, 373 n.
+
+  Daycao, distance of, to Rio Grande, 247;
+    direction of, 271.
+
+  Daycao River, 245, 246.
+
+  Dead bodies, eaten by members of party with Cabeza de Vaca, 49;
+    Soto-Mayor eaten by Esquivel, 63.
+
+  Deaguanes Indians, 59.
+
+  Decubadaos Indians, 87 n.
+
+  Deer, 350, 363.
+
+  Deer-suet, 105.
+
+  Deguenes Indians, 87 n.
+
+  Descalona, Fray Luis, settles at Cicuye, 365 n., 373.
+
+  Desha County, 227 n., 249 n.
+
+  Diaz, Melchior, 116 n.;
+    explains to the natives the coming of Cabeza de Vaca, 117;
+    reports of Fray Marcos investigated by, 277, 296;
+    companion of Coronado, 292;
+    position of, 292;
+    reference to, 299;
+    in command at Corazones, 302;
+    exploration of, 303, 324;
+    death of, 325.
+
+  Divorce among Indians, 353.
+
+  Dogs, eaten by De Soto's men, 167;
+    used by Indians, 330, 334, 362.
+
+  Doguenes Indians, 59 n., 84, 87.
+
+  Dorantes, Pablo, father of Andrés Dorantes, 125.
+
+  Dorantes de Carrança, Andrés, with Cabeza de Vaca, 4, 6;
+    joins in report to Audiencia of Española, 8;
+    later years and death of, 9;
+    goes to find the sea, 33;
+    embarks in open boat, 36;
+    repulses Indians, 39;
+    loses his boat and overtakes Cabeza de Vaca, 48;
+    on the mainland, 54, 55;
+    returns to Malhado, 55;
+    accompanies Indians to find walnuts and meets with Cabeza
+          de Vaca, 59-60;
+    escapes from slavery, 64;
+    escapes from the Yguazes, 65;
+    mentioned by Oviedo, 69, 70;
+    joins Cabeza de Vaca in escape from Indians, 71, 73;
+    mentioned, 72;
+    performs cures among Avavares, 78;
+    goes to the Maliacones, 80;
+    receives a hawk-bell of copper, 95;
+    is presented with over six hundred open hearts of deer, 108;
+    rejoins Cabeza de Vaca and attaches himself to a Spanish
+          exploring party, 113;
+    returns to Spain, 121, 125;
+    swears not to divulge certain things he has seen in New
+          Spain, 136;
+    a survivor of Narvaez's expedition, 288;
+    traces of, found by Coronado, 332.
+
+  Dorantes, Diego, killed by Indians, 58, 64, 69.
+
+  Double Mountain fork, 245 n.
+
+  Dragoon pass, location of, 349 n.
+
+  Dreams, respected by the Indians, 64;
+    citation from Oviedo regarding, 70.
+
+  Dulchanchellin, Indian chief, 27.
+
+
+  Eagles, tame, kept by Indians, 348, 348 n.
+
+  Earthquakes, near Colorado River, 325.
+
+  Elvas, Gentleman of, narrative by, 127-272;
+    may have been Alvaro Fernandez, 130;
+    related narratives, 130-131;
+    bibliography of the Narrative, 131-132.
+
+  Emeralds presented to Cabeza de Vaca, 106, 108.
+
+  Enequen, used in making rope, 248.
+
+  Enriquez, Alonso, comptroller of Narvaez's fleet, 14;
+    lands on island off Florida coast, 19;
+    joins conferences regarding inland exploration, 22;
+    embarks with Xuarez in open boat, 36;
+    boat of, found bottom up, 61;
+    rescued by Narvaez and loses his commission, 62;
+    is cast away on the coast, 72;
+    is mentioned by Oviedo, 70.
+
+  Espejo, Antonio de, on the Rio Grande, 7;
+    cited, 102 n.;
+    Mexican Indians at Cibola found by, 374 n.
+
+  Espíritu Santo, Bay, 58 n.;
+    mentioned by Oviedo, 70.
+
+  Espiritu Santo, port, 153;
+    adjacent country described, 169;
+    distance to Palache, 188;
+    direction from Apalache, 271;
+    distance to Ocute, 270;
+    land between the two places, 270;
+    direction to Apalache and Rio de las Palmas, 272.
+
+  Espiritu Santo River identified with Mississippi, 339 n.
+
+  Esquivel, Hernando de, among Indians, 62;
+    informs Figueroa of fate of Narvaez and the others, 62-63;
+    feeds on flesh of Soto-Mayor, 63;
+    is slain because of a dream, 58, 64, 68;
+    mentioned, 72;
+    mentioned by Oviedo, 70.
+
+  Estévanico, with Cabeza de Vaca, 4, 6;
+    with Fray Marcos de Niza, 9;
+    put to death by Zuñis, 9;
+    brought by Indians, with Dorantes and Castillo, and meets
+          with Cabeza de Vaca, 59;
+    stay of, with the Yguazes, 65;
+    escapes from Indians, 71, 73;
+    performs cures among Avavares, 78;
+    goes to the Maliacones, 80;
+    cause of death of, 95 n.;
+    accompanies Alonzo de Castillo on reconnoissance towards
+          Rio Grande, 102;
+    is useful in securing information from the Indians, 107;
+    accompanies Cabeza de Vaca in search of Spanish exploring
+          party, 112;
+    acts as guide, 113;
+    mentioned as a survivor of Narvaez's party, 126, 288;
+    guide for Fray Marcos, 275, 288-289;
+    death of, 275, 290.
+
+  Estrada, Alonzo de, treasurer for New Spain, 287.
+
+  Estremadura, 216, 341.
+
+  Estufas, at Braba, 341;
+    at Cibola, 350, 350 n.;
+    description of, 353.
+
+  Evora, 272.
+
+
+  Feathers, trade in, 286;
+    use of, in dress, 350;
+    symbolism of, 384 n.
+
+  Ferdinand, king of Spain, 287.
+
+  Fernandes, Benito, drowned, 166.
+
+  Fernandez, Alvaro, a Portuguese sailor to seek Panuco, 49.
+
+  Fernandez, Alvaro, may have been the Gentleman of Elvas, 130.
+
+  Fernandez, Bartolomé, sailor, 22.
+
+  Fewkes, _Aborigines of Porto Rico_, cited, 19 n.
+
+  Fifteen-Mile Bayou, 205 n.
+
+  Figueroa, a native of Toledo, to seek Panuco, 49;
+    found by the fugitives from Malhado, 58 n., 61;
+    relates his experiences, 62-63, 68;
+    escapes by flight, 64;
+    seen by the Avavares, 79.
+
+  Figueroa, Gomez Suarez de, companion of Coronado, 293.
+
+  Figueroa, Vasco Porcallo de, _see_ Porcallo de Figueroa, Vasco.
+
+  Firebrand, use of, by Indians in travelling, 303.
+
+  Firebrand River, _see_ Colorado.
+
+  Fish, taken by De Soto, 209-210.
+
+  Fisher County, Texas, 245 n.
+
+  Fleet of Narvaez, size of, 14;
+    visited by hurricane on southern coast of Cuba, 3-4, 15-17;
+    brigantine bought in Trinidad, 18;
+    another vessel purchased, 18.
+
+  Flint River, 164 n.
+
+  Florida, eastern limit of grant to Narvaez, 3, 14;
+    fleet of Narvaez sights, 18;
+    grains, fruits, and nuts of, 271;
+    bad character of country of, 386.
+
+  Flowers, use of, in Indian ceremonials, 384.
+
+  Food of Indians, 312, 333, 348, 354.
+
+  Fort Belknap, 244 n., 245 n.
+
+  Fort Prince George, 176 n.
+
+  Fort Smith, 222 n.
+
+  Fowls, domestic, among the Indians, 348, 354.
+
+  Franciscans, with Narvaez, 14;
+    in Cuba, 142;
+    in New Spain, 288;
+    elect Marcos de Niza father provincial, 291.
+
+  Fruits of Florida, 271;
+    of the great plains, 364.
+
+  Fuentes, De Soto's chamberlain, condemned to death, 197.
+
+
+  Galena, 96 n.
+
+  Galeras, Juan, explores Grand Cañon, 309.
+
+  Galicia, New Kingdom of, in New Spain, 285 n., 286.
+
+  Galisteo, pueblo of, 356, 358 n.
+
+  Gallego, Juan, companion of Coronado, 292;
+    messenger from Coronado to Mendoza, 302;
+    sword of, found in Kansas, 302 n.;
+    messenger to Coronado, 371, 372;
+    meets Coronado on his return, 375;
+    exploits of, 380.
+
+  Gallegos, Baltasar de, is chief castellan, 138;
+    leaves his wife at Havana, 146;
+    at the town of Ucita, 147;
+    sent into the country, 148;
+    returns with a survivor of the party of Narvaez, 149;
+    is sent to the province of Paracoxi, 154;
+    hears speech on part of the absent cacique, asks where
+          gold may be found, 154;
+    sent in quest of habitations, 171;
+    in affray with Indians at Mauilla, 190;
+    responds to De Soto's dying speech, 233.
+
+  Galveston Island, resembles Malhado, in certain particulars, 57 n.
+
+  Gamez, Juan de, killed at Mauilla, 193.
+
+  Gaytan, Juan, takes an Indian boy of Yupaha, 164.
+
+  Giant Indians, 302, 304.
+
+  Gibraleon, mentioned, 125.
+
+  Gifts, exchange of, on Cabeza de Vaca's line of march, 97 n.
+
+  Giralda, great tower of Seville, 309 n.
+
+  Giusiwá, a Jemez pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  Goat, mountain, seen by Spaniards, 304, 305, 348.
+
+  Gold, sought by the Spaniards, 21-22, 145, 154, 164, 180, 181,
+        205, 212;
+    traces of, found, 19, 21, 111;
+    tales of, at Quivira, 328, 329;
+    discovered at Suya, 371.
+
+  Gomera, one of the Canary Islands, 139.
+
+  Gorbalan, Francisco, companion of Coronado, 293.
+
+  Government of Indians, 308, 347, 351.
+
+  Granada, Coronado's name for Hawikuh, 277, 300 n.
+
+  Grand or Neosho River, 217 n.
+
+  Grand Cañon, discovery of, 309.
+
+  Grande River, 201, 202, 205, 208, 209, 215, 224, 227, 245,
+        246, 247, 248, 249, 270, 271.
+    _See also_ Mississippi River.
+
+  Grapes, wild, found by Coronado, 334, 338.
+
+  Graves, at Tutahaco, 384.
+
+  Great plains, Spaniards lost on, 336;
+    description of, 362.
+
+  Great River, the, 202.
+    _See_ Mississippi River and Grande River.
+
+  Greene County, Alabama, 189 n.
+
+  Grey Friars, origin of name, 385 n.
+
+  Guacay, distance of, to Daycao, 270-271;
+    nature of the country, 271.
+
+  Guachichules, Indians, 385.
+
+  Guachoya, De Soto reaches, 227;
+    cacique of, comes to him, 227;
+    makes an address, 228;
+    and assists in attack of Nilco, 231;
+    death of De Soto at, 233;
+    Spaniards leave, 236;
+    mentioned, 245, 248;
+    cacique of, plots against Moscoso, 251;
+    exposes plot of caciques of Nilco and Taguanate, 252;
+    and kills Indians of Nilco, 252;
+    direction of, 271.
+
+  Guadalajara, beginning of, 285 n., 287.
+
+  Guadalaxara, _see_ Guadalajara.
+
+  Guadiana, Spanish river, 341.
+
+  Guaes, province near Quivira, 328, 328 n., 364.
+
+  Guahate, province, mentioned, 222.
+
+  Guaniguanico, storm at, 18.
+
+  Guasco, _see_ Waco.
+
+  Guatemala, conquered by Alvarado, 380.
+
+  Guaxulle, De Soto at, 177;
+    mentioned, 178.
+
+  Guayaba tree, 141.
+
+  Guaycones Indians, 87.
+
+  Guaymas Indians, 108 n.
+
+  Guevara, Diego de, captures Indian village, 324.
+
+  Guevara, Juan de, appointment of son of, 292.
+
+  Guevara, Pedro de, appointed captain, 292.
+
+  Guevenes Indians, 59 n.
+
+  Gutierres, Diego, appointed captain, 292.
+
+  Gutierrez, Juan, _see_ Xuarez, Juan, and 14 n.
+
+  Guzman, Diego de, 111.
+
+  Guzman, Francisco de, goes away with his Indian concubine, 238.
+
+  Guzman, Juan de, made captain of infantry, 164;
+    crosses Mississippi with infantry, 204;
+    sent against Indians, 231, 256;
+    is taken by them, 257.
+
+  Guzman, Nuño de, position of, in New Spain, 285;
+    career of, 285 n.;
+    cruelty to natives, 285 n.;
+    expedition of, to the Seven Cities, 286;
+    Culiacan settled by, 276, 287;
+    imprisonment of, 287.
+
+
+  Hacanac, cacique of, gives battle, 239.
+
+  Hailstones, in Coronado's camp, 333.
+
+  Hair dress, of pueblo women, 350.
+
+  Halona, Zuñi pueblo, 358 n.;
+    excavations at, 351 n.
+
+  Hano, Hopi pueblo, 358 n.
+
+  Hans Indians, 54, 87.
+
+  Hapaluya, De Soto passes, 160.
+
+  Harahey, identification of, 328 n., 365 n.
+
+  Havana, fleet of Narvaez nears, 18;
+    Miruelo to return to, if harbor is not found, 20;
+    Cabeza de Vaca at, 121, 122;
+    mentioned, 125, 142.
+
+  Hawikuh, scene of Estévan's death, 275;
+    called Granada by Coronado, 277, 300 n.;
+    history of, 300 n., 358 n.
+
+  Haxa or Haya, settlement near Mississippi River, 330, 331.
+
+  Hearts, town of, 7, 108 n.
+    _See_ Corazones, Pueblo de los.
+
+  Hearts of animals, as food, 301.
+
+  Hearts Valley, _see_ Corazones.
+
+  Hemes, _see_ Jemez.
+
+  Hempstead County, 240 n.
+
+  Henry, cardinal, archbishop of Evora, 272.
+
+  Hermosillo, 109 n.
+
+  Hewett, on Pecos, 355 n.
+
+  Hirriga, town of Ucita, 147 n.
+
+  Hodge, F. W., 11, 280;
+    on route of Coronado, 337 n.
+
+  Hope, camp near, 239 n.
+
+  Hopi, tribal name of Indians at Tusayan, 307 n.;
+    as cotton growers, 308 n.;
+    pottery of, 340 n.;
+    tame eagles of, 348 n.;
+    hair dress of women, 350 n.;
+    population of pueblos of, 351 n.;
+    pueblos of, 358 n.
+
+  Hornachos, mentioned, 124.
+
+  Hornaday, W. T., on wool of bison, 383 n.
+
+  Horseflesh, eaten by Spaniards, 27, 35, 36, 253.
+
+  Horses, Bay of, 37 n., 162 n.
+    _See also_ Caballeros, Bahia de.
+
+  Horses, fear of Indians of, 386.
+
+  Houses of Indians, 165, 346, 350, 356, 364.
+
+  Huelva, Diego de, killed by Indians, 58, 64.
+
+  Huhasene, an Indian chief, 255.
+
+
+  Iguaces Indians, 61 n.
+
+  Inca, the, _see_ Vega, Garcilaso de la.
+
+  India, believed to be connected with America, 343, 360.
+
+  Indian Bay, 253 n.
+
+  "Indian giving," 100 n.
+
+  Indians, stature and proportions of, 32;
+    fine archery of, 32;
+    customs of, at Malhado, 54;
+    weeping of, 54 n.;
+    as a sign of obedience, 241, 242-243;
+    barter among, 56-57;
+    subsist on walnuts, 59-60;
+    eat prickly pears three months of the year, 60-61;
+    kill even their male children, 64, 70;
+    have great reverence for dreams, 70;
+    call Spaniards children of the sun, 78;
+    marriage relations of, 83;
+    methods of warfare of, 84-86;
+    nations and tongues of, beyond Malhado, 86;
+    peculiar customs of, in drinking a tea of certain leaves, 87-88;
+    method of, in preparing flour of mesquite, 89;
+    plunder those who welcome Cabeza de Vaca, 91, 92;
+    and plunder one another, 97;
+    rabbit hunts of, 98;
+    eat spiders and worms, 98;
+    offer all they have to Cabeza de Vaca, 99;
+    women of, may negotiate in war, 100, 102;
+    chastise children for weeping, 101;
+    have fixed dwellings, 102;
+    go naked, 103;
+    eat powder of straw, 106;
+    languages of, 107;
+    believe Spaniards are from heaven, 107;
+    women of, wear grass and straw, 108;
+    worship the sun, 107-108;
+    promise to be Christians, 118;
+    and to build churches, 119;
+    worship the devil with blood sacrifices, 151;
+    approach, playing on flutes, 158, 183, 189;
+    costumes of, 166;
+    have abundance of meat at Ocute, 168;
+    description of, at Cutifachiqui, 173-174;
+    mortuary customs of, 234, 351;
+    described by the Gentleman of Elvas, 272;
+    use poisoned arrows, 326, 371.
+
+  Intoxication, among Indians, 66.
+
+  Iron, 93 n., 95 n.
+
+  Isleta, 358 n.
+
+
+  Jacona, 359 n.
+
+  Jagua, Cabeza de Vaca at, 17 n.;
+    Narvaez reaches with a pilot, 18.
+
+  Jaramillo, Juan, narrative of, 279, 337 n., 365 n.
+
+  Jefferson County, 225 n.
+
+  Jemez, pueblos of, 339 n., 352, 359 n.;
+    visited by Barrionuevo, 339.
+
+  Jeréz de la Frontera, 3.
+
+  John III., king, 272 n.
+
+  Juamanos Indians, 102 n., 103 n.;
+    know something of Christianity, 102 n.;
+    the Cow nation, 103;
+    method of cooking among, 104-105;
+    have fixed residences, 112.
+
+  Juana, Queen of Spain, 292.
+
+
+  Kansas, description of, 364.
+
+  Karankawan Indians, 51 n., 57 n., 61 n.
+
+  Kaw or Kansa Indians, 328 n., 364 n.
+
+  Kiakima, Zuñi pueblo, 358 n.
+
+  Kyanawe, Zuñi pueblo, 358 n.
+
+
+  Lacane, Moscoso at, 242.
+
+  Lake Michigamia, 214 n.
+
+  Lakes, near Apalachen, 29.
+
+  Lanegados Indians, hold Castillo captive, 71.
+
+  Lara, Alonso Manrique de, companion of Coronado, 293.
+
+  Las Navas de Tolosa, battle of, 3.
+
+  La Vaca, Bay, 58 n.
+
+  League, Spanish, 22 n.
+
+  Lee County, Arkansas, 214 n.
+
+  Lenox Library, manuscript of Castañeda in, 277.
+
+  Leopard, _see_ Wildcat.
+
+  Lewis, T. Hayes, 132.
+
+  Lions, _see_ Mountain lions.
+
+  Lisbon, 123.
+
+  Little Red River, 216 n.
+
+  Little River, 240 n.
+
+  Little Tennessee River, 177 n.
+
+  Little Valley, settlement of, 347.
+
+  Llano River, 95 n.
+
+  Lobillo, Juan Rodriguez, at court, 135;
+    sent by De Soto into the country, 148;
+    returns with four Indian women, 149;
+    sent in quest of habitations, 171;
+    overtakes De Soto, 172.
+
+  Lopez, Diego, death of, 49.
+
+  Lopez, Diego, appointed captain, 292;
+    succeeds Samaniego, 296;
+    adventure of, at Tiguex, 319;
+    visits Haxa, 331.
+
+  Lopez de Cardenas, G., _see_ Cardenas.
+
+  Lowery, Woodbury, _Spanish Settlements_, 1513-1561, cited, 19 n.
+
+  Luis, Friar, _see_ Descalona.
+
+  Lusitanians, characterized, 134.
+
+
+  Mabila, _see_ Mauilla.
+
+  Macaco, 150 n.
+
+  Macanoche, presented to De Soto, 213.
+
+  Maçaque, _see_ Matsaki.
+
+  McGee, W. J., account of Seri Indians, 301 n.
+
+  Magdalena River, 33.
+
+  Mago, a poisonous tree, 108 n.
+
+  Maize, shown by Indians to Narvaez, 21;
+    found under cultivation, 22, 25;
+    little seen by Cabeza de Vaca on march to Apalachen, 28;
+    is found growing in that place, 28, 29;
+    secured with difficulty from Indians, 35;
+    mentioned, 94, 96, 102, 103, 104, 105, 108, 110, 113, 114,
+          247, 248, 271.
+    _See also_ Corn.
+
+  Malapaz, town, 156.
+
+  Maldonado, Doña Aldonça, 125.
+
+  Maldonado, Alonzo del Castillo, _see_ Castillo Maldonado, Alonzo del.
+
+  Maldonado, Francisco, ordered to the coast, 163;
+    sent to Havana, 163;
+    at Ochuse, 193;
+    mentioned, 175, 204.
+
+  Maldonado, Rodrigo, appointed captain, 292;
+    visits seacoast, 301;
+    Indians attack camp of, 323;
+    receives gift of buffalo skins, 332;
+    horse of, injures Coronado, 368.
+
+  Malhado Island, Spaniards at, 5-6;
+    named by Cabeza de Vaca, 50;
+    identification of, 57 n.;
+    Christians leave, losing a part of their number, 61;
+    mentioned, 72.
+
+  Maliacones Indians, 80, 87.
+    _See also_ Malicones Indians.
+
+  Malicones Indians, 76 n.
+    _See also_ Maliacones Indians.
+
+  Mallery, Garrick, on sign language, 363 n.
+
+  Mallets, use of, as weapons by Indians, 321.
+
+  Mamei, a fruit, 141.
+
+  Mançano, is lost, 186.
+
+  Mantelets of thread, found at Apalachen, 28.
+
+  Marcos, Fray, _see_ Niza.
+
+  Margaridetos, a kind of bead, 226.
+
+  Mariames Indians, kill even their male children and cast
+        away their daughters, 64;
+    mentioned, 87.
+
+  Marian Indians, 61.
+
+  Marjoram, wild, 338, 349, 364.
+
+  Marquis, Isle of the, name of, given to lower California,
+        304, 304 n.
+
+  Marriage, among the Tahus, 344;
+    at Cibola, 350;
+    at Tiguex, 353.
+
+  Mats, used in building houses, 346, 357 n.
+
+  Matsaki, Zuñi pueblo, 315 n.;
+    description of, 315-316, 350;
+    mentioned, 358 n.
+
+  Mauilla, De Soto at, 189;
+    encounter with the Indians at, 190-193;
+    mentioned, 195.
+
+  Mayayes Indians, 54 n.
+
+  Maye, cacique of, gives battle, 239.
+
+  Mayo Indians, 346 n.
+
+  Meal, sacred, use of, 307 n.
+
+  Meat, scarcity of, among De Soto's men, 167-168.
+
+  Meirinho, _see_ Tapile.
+
+  Melgosa, Pablo de, appointed captain, 293;
+    explores Colorado River Cañons, 309;
+    at Tiguex, 319.
+
+  Melons, native American, 348.
+
+  Memphis, near place of De Soto's crossing of the Mississippi, 204 n.
+
+  Mendez, to seek Panuco, 49;
+    taken by Indians, 58, 62.
+
+  Mendica Indians, 87.
+
+  Mendoza, Antonio de, first viceroy of New Spain, 121 n., 281 n.;
+    learns of the arrival of De Soto's men at Panuco, 267;
+    receives them at Mexico, 269;
+    appoints Coronado governor of New Galicia, 287;
+    plans expedition to Cibola, 275, 281;
+    gives command to Coronado, 275, 281, 291;
+    names Compostela as rendezvous, 293;
+    addresses soldiers at Compostela, 294;
+    returns to New Spain, 295;
+    mentioned, 296, 297, 302, 326;
+    letter of, relating progress of expedition, 277;
+    Coronado receives messages from, 367;
+    mentioned, 377;
+    disappointment of, over failure of expedition, 378.
+
+  Mesa, Spanish soldier, 538.
+
+  Mesquite flour, 89.
+
+  Mestitam, Mexico, 268.
+
+  Mexico, 97 n.;
+    Cabeza de Vaca at, 120, 121;
+    Moscoso at, 269.
+
+  Miakka River, 150 n.
+
+  Michoacan, province in New Spain, 286;
+    journey of Mendoza through, 294.
+
+  Mico River, 228.
+
+  Mills, at Tiguex, 354.
+
+  Mindeleff, V., on pueblo architecture, 354 n.
+
+  Miruelo, pilot, 18, 20.
+
+  Mishongnovi, Hopi pueblo, 358 n.
+
+  Mississippi River, reached by Narvaez and Cabeza de Vaca, 41;
+    the Great River, 202;
+    De Soto crosses, 204;
+    nature of country of, from Aquixo to Pacaha and Coligoa, 270;
+    described by Indians, 330;
+    reference to, 339;
+    description of, 365;
+    mentioned, 385, 386.
+    _See also_ Grande River, Great River, and Espiritu Santo River.
+
+  Mobile, 40 n.
+
+  Mochilagua, settlement of, 347.
+
+  Mochilla, presented to De Soto, 213.
+
+  Mocoço, town of, 150 n.;
+    speech of cacique of, to De Soto, 153.
+
+  Moçulixa, 194 n.
+
+  Monroe County, Arkansas, 253 n.
+
+  Monroe County, Mississippi, 195.
+
+  Montejo, feats of, in Tabasco, 380.
+
+  Mortar, substitute for, among Indians, 352.
+
+  Moscoso de Alvarado, Luis, direction pursued by, 131;
+    mentioned, 135;
+    joins De Soto at Seville, 137;
+    is master of the camp, 146;
+    lodges with Ucita, 147;
+    at Cale, 156;
+    overtakes De Soto, 157;
+    sent forward to Tastaluça, 187;
+    advises a halt, 189;
+    fails to keep a careful watch over the Indians at Chicaça, 197;
+    succeeds De Soto as governor, 233;
+    holds a conference, 235-236;
+    leaves Guachoya, 236;
+    at Chaguate, 236-237;
+    at Aguacay, 238;
+    at Naguatex, 240-242;
+    reaches the Red River, 241;
+    hangs his Indian guides, 242;
+    marches from Nondaco, 243;
+    encounter with Indians at Aays, 243;
+    hears of other Europeans seen by the Indians of Soacatino, 243;
+    decides that reports are false, 244;
+    holds a council and decides to return to Nilco, 245-246;
+    causes resentment among his followers, 247;
+    reaches Nilco, 248;
+    goes to Aminoya, 249;
+    directs the building of brigantines, 250;
+    learns of Indian plot, 251;
+    commands that right hands of thirty Indians be cut off, 252;
+    mutilates other Indians, 252;
+    proceeds against Taguanate, 253;
+    embarks with his followers, 253-254;
+    is attacked by Indians, 255-259;
+    puts out to sea, 261;
+    is separated from the other brigantines, 263;
+    after fifty-two days reaches the river Panico, 265-266;
+    is received at the town of the same name, 267;
+    and at Mexico, 269.
+
+  Mosquitos, 67, 263.
+
+  Meta Padilla, M. de la, cited, 356 n., 365 n., 366 n.
+
+  Mountain lions, in Chichilticalli, 349;
+    in Cibola, 350.
+
+  Mountains seen by Cabeza de Vaca, 92 n.
+
+  Mud Island, 57 n.
+
+  Mulberries, wild, 334, 364.
+
+  Musetti, Juan Pedro, book merchant, 126.
+
+  Musical instruments of Indians, 312, 354.
+
+  Muskhogean tribes, 21 n.
+
+
+  Naçacahoz, Moscoso at, 244.
+
+  Naguatex, mentioned, 238;
+    Indian advance at, 239;
+    cacique of, addresses Moscoso, 241;
+    found full of maize, 247;
+    pottery made at, 247.
+
+  Najera, birthplace of Castañeda, 276.
+
+  Nambe, Tewa pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  Napetaca, engagement at, between De Soto and the Indians, 158.
+
+  Naquiscoça, Moscoso at, 244.
+
+  Narvaez, Pámfilo de, receives grant, 3;
+    sets sail, 3, 14;
+    failure of his expedition, 7;
+    size of his fleet, 14;
+    reaches Santo Domingo where one hundred and forty men desert, 14;
+    arrives at Santiago de Cuba, 15;
+    loses ten of his ships and sixty men in storm at Trinidad, 3-4, 15-17;
+    major portion of his fleet reach Trinidad and winter there, 17;
+    at Xagua, 17;
+    sights Florida, 18;
+    reaches the mainland, 19;
+    takes possession of country in the royal name, 4, 19-20;
+    explores inland, 20, 21;
+    holds conference regarding further penetration of interior, 22;
+    takes up march into country, with three hundred men, 4, 25;
+    accepts Indian allies against the Apalachees, 26-27;
+    takes Apalachen, 28;
+    departs for Aute, 31;
+    attacked by Indians, 31;
+    reaches Aute, 32;
+    departs from Aute, 33;
+    calls a council, which decides to build vessels in which to get
+          away, 34-36;
+    loses ten men killed by Indians, and forty, who die of
+          disease, 36;
+    leaves Bay of Horses, and meets with many privations, 37-38;
+    lands and is wounded by Indians, 38-39;
+    embarks once more and proceeds along the coast, 39-41;
+    reaches the Mississippi, 41;
+    exhibits selfishness in saving his life, 42;
+    fate of, narrated by Esquivel, 62;
+    mentioned by Oviedo, 70;
+    is carried out to sea, 72;
+    fate of his voyage foretold, 124;
+    his Panuco fleet, 124-125;
+    mentioned, 157, 288;
+    skulls of his horses found at Ochete, 162;
+    his disaster frightens the followers of Moscoso, 248;
+    survivors of his expedition return to New Spain, 288.
+
+  Natividad, departure of Alarcon from, 294.
+
+  Nebraska, description of, 364.
+
+  Negroes, island of, 386.
+
+  Negroes, with Coronado, 333.
+
+  Neosho River, 217 n.
+
+  New Albany, 200 n.
+
+  Newfoundland, Spanish name for, 343 n., 360.
+
+  New Galicia, province of New Spain, 113, 285 n., 286, 344;
+    Coronado appointed governor of, 287;
+    Coronado deprived of governorship of, 378.
+
+  New Spain, mentioned, 124, 254;
+    direction from Rio de las Palmas, 272.
+
+  Nicalasa, an Indian chief, 195 n.
+
+  Nilco, mentioned, 224, 225, 228, 230, 231;
+    De Soto at, 226;
+    most populous town that was seen in Florida, 226;
+    attacked, by orders of De Soto, 230-232;
+    cacique of, plots against Moscoso, 251;
+    and comes to make excuses, 252.
+
+  Nilco, river of, De Soto crosses, 227.
+
+  Nissohone, a poor province, 242;
+    a woman of, acts as guide to Moscoso, 242.
+
+  Niza, Marcos de, expedition of, to Cibola, 9, 275, 288-290;
+    narrative of, 277, 290 n.;
+    reports of, verified by Diaz, 277, 296;
+    made father provincial of Franciscans, 291;
+    sermon of, 298;
+    mentioned, 300;
+    return of, to Mexico, 302.
+
+  Nondacao, reported to have plenty of maize, 242;
+    mentioned, 243.
+
+  North Carolina, 176 n.
+
+  Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca, Alvar. _See_ Cabeza de Vaca, Alvar Nuñez.
+
+  Nuño de Guzman, 116, 119, 120.
+
+  Nut pine, 96.
+
+  Nuts, 271.
+
+
+  Oaxaca, Marqués del Valle de, title given to Cortes, 286 n.
+
+  Ochete, skulls of horses found at, 162.
+
+  Ochus, province, 163;
+    mentioned, 175.
+
+  Ochuse, Maldonado at, 193.
+
+  Ocilla River, boundary of Muskhogean territory, 21 n.
+
+  Oçita, _see_ Ucita.
+
+  Ocmulgee River, 166 n.
+
+  Oconna-Luftee River, 176 n., 177 n.
+
+  Oconee River, 167 n.
+
+  Ocute, described to De Soto, 167;
+    De Soto at, 167, 168;
+    mentioned, 179;
+    land is fertile, 270;
+    distance to Cutifachiqui, 270.
+
+  Ogechee River, 170 n.
+
+  Ohoopee River, 170 n.
+
+  Oñate, Christobal de, governor of New Galicia, entertains
+        Coronado, 294.
+
+  Oñate, Count of, nephew of, appointed captain, 292.
+
+  Oñate, Juan de, settlement made at Yukiwingge by, 340 n.
+
+  Opata Indians, 305 n., 348 n.;
+    poisoned arrows of, 326 n.;
+    mentioned, 376 n.
+
+  Opossum, first allusion to, 29 n.
+
+  Oraibi, Hopi pueblo, 358 n.
+
+  Ortiz, Juan, rescued by De Soto, 10;
+    found by De Gallegos, 149;
+    his adventures among the Indians, 149-152;
+    reports Indian plan to attack De Soto, 158;
+    acts as interpreter, 170;
+    not to speak of Maldonado's proximity, 193;
+    secures release of Osorio and Fuentes, 197;
+    dies at Autiamque, 224.
+
+  Osorio, Antonio, ascends river at Pacaha with five men, 210, 211.
+
+  Osorio, Francisco, condemned to death by De Soto, 197.
+
+  Otter, 350, 357.
+
+  Ovando, Francisco de, companion of Coronado, 292;
+    treatment of, by Indians, 354.
+
+  Oviedo, Gonzalo Fernández de, edits report to Audiencia of
+        Española, 8, 10;
+    edition cited, 21 n., 25 n., 31 n., 39 n., 68-70, 92 n., 112 n.
+
+  Oviedo, Lope de, at Malhado, 6;
+    deserts, 6;
+    among the Indians, 44-45;
+    rescued by Cabeza de Vaca, 57;
+    returns, through fear, 59.
+
+  Oxitipar, district of, in New Spain, 285.
+
+  Oyster creek, 57 n.
+
+  Oysters, found by Cabeza de Vaca, 33.
+
+
+  Pacaha, sought by De Soto for its gold, 205, 208;
+    probably to be located in the vicinity of Osceola, in
+          Arkansas, 209 n.;
+    De Soto at, 209-213;
+    cacique of, flees from De Soto, 210;
+    is brought to the governor and submits to him, 211;
+    and accepts friendship of the cacique of Casqui, 212;
+    distance to Aquiguate, 215;
+    mentioned, 227, 270;
+    direction of, 271.
+
+  Pacaxes, a tribe in Culiacan, 345.
+
+  Padilla, Juan de, companion of Alvarado, 279;
+    accompanies Tovar to Tusayan, 307;
+    remains in Quivira, 372;
+    death of, 364, 373, 385.
+
+  Pafalya, 194.
+
+  Pajarito Park, 340 n.
+
+  Palachen, 22 n.
+
+  Palacios, death of, 49.
+
+  Palisema, De Soto in, 216.
+
+  Palmas, Rio de las, western limit of grant to Narvaez, 3, 14;
+    mentioned, 22, 260, 264, 265, 266;
+    direction from, to New Spain, 272;
+    direction of, from Espiritu Santo, 272.
+
+  Palmitos, sustenance of Narvaez and his men, 25.
+
+  Palos, Juan de, friar, with Narvaez, 25.
+
+  Panico, 268.
+    _See also_ Panuco.
+
+  Pantoja, Juan, ordered by Narvaez to proceed to Trinidad, 15;
+    possibly the Pantoja killed by Soto-Mayor, 15 n.;
+    advises Narvaez, 42;
+    made lieutenant, 62;
+    killed by Soto-Mayor, 63.
+
+  Pánuco, Narvaez orders ships to find, 4;
+    mentioned, 63;
+    to be sought by four men of Cabeza de Vaca's party, 49;
+    Guzman, governor of, 285 n.;
+    mention of, 385.
+    _See also_ Panico.
+
+  Pánuco River, 265 n.
+
+  Papa, title given priests at Zuñi, 351.
+
+  Papagos, tribe of Sonora, 348 n.
+
+  Paracoxi, province, 153, 154, 155.
+
+  Partidos, seduce one hundred and forty men from Narvaez, 14.
+
+  Pasquaro, visited by Mendoza, 294.
+
+  Patent, to Narvaez, 3.
+
+  Pato, Moscoso at, 238.
+
+  Patofa, speech of, 168-169.
+
+  Patoqua, Jemez pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  Pawnee Indians, mention of, 328 n., 337 n., 365 n.
+
+  Paz, Augustin de, printer, 126.
+
+  Peace, form of making, at Acoma, 312;
+    at Tiguex, 319.
+
+  Pearls, found by De Soto, 174;
+    burned at Mauilla, 193.
+
+  Pecos, identification of Cicuye with, 329 n.;
+    visit of Indians from, 310;
+    visited by Alvarado, 312;
+    visit of Coronado to, 327;
+    siege of, 341;
+    route of army to, 361 n.;
+    description of, 355-356;
+    history of, 355 n.;
+    mention of, 359.
+
+  Pecos River, crossed by Spaniards, 99 n., 329, 338.
+
+  Pedro, Don, lord of Tescuco, killed, 31.
+
+  Pedro, Indian guide, is baptized, 174;
+    regarded with suspicion, 176.
+
+  Pemmican, used by Indians, 363.
+
+  Peñalosa, embarks in open boat, 36;
+    repulses Indians, 39;
+    overtaken by Cabeza de Vaca, 43;
+    reported killed by the Camones, 72.
+
+  Pensacola, Muskhogean territory, 21 n.
+
+  Pensacola Bay, 38 n., 40 n.
+    _See also_ Chuse, Bay of.
+
+  People of the Figs, 79, 87.
+
+  Peru, exploration of, 380.
+
+  Petachan River, _see_ Petlatlan.
+
+  Petates, or mats used for houses, 346, 377 n.
+
+  Petlatlan, description of Indian settlement of, 346;
+    houses at, 346, 377 n.;
+    mention of, 376.
+
+  Petlatlan, Rio, identification of, with Rio Sinaloa, 346 n.
+
+  Petutan River, 111, 117 n.
+
+  Philip II., king of Spain, 288.
+
+  Philippine Islands, location of isle of negroes in, 386 n.
+
+  Piache, _see_ Piachi.
+
+  Piache River, 188, 189.
+
+  Piachi, 188 n.
+
+  Picardo, Juan, printer, 126.
+
+  Picones, catfish, 349 n.
+
+  Picuris, pueblo of, 352 n.
+
+  Pima Indians, 115 n., 348 n.
+
+  Pimahaitu Indians, 115 n.
+
+  Pine Bluff, 225 n., 248 n.
+
+  Pine nuts, used as food, 96, 349, 350.
+
+  Piraguas, built by De Soto, 225.
+
+  Piros Indians, 104 n.;
+    villages of, 341 n.
+
+  Pizarro, Hernando, mentioned, 135.
+
+  Plot, against Narvaez, 34.
+
+  Pobares, Francisco, death of, 322.
+
+  Pojoaque, Tewa pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  Pontotoc county, Mississippi, 195.
+
+  Porcallo de Figueroa, Vasco, offers provisions to Narvaez, 15;
+    keeps his slaves from hanging themselves, 142;
+    mentioned, 143;
+    is made captain-general, by De Soto, 145;
+    is resisted by Indians, 146;
+    lodges with Ucita, 147;
+    is unable to make seizures of Indians, as slaves, 154;
+    and returns to Cuba, 154.
+
+  Pork, allowance of, to De Soto's men, 171.
+
+  Portuguese, with Hernando de Soto, leave Elvas, 138;
+    Spanish seek to get among the Portuguese, 139.
+
+  Potano, town, 156, 162.
+
+  Pottery, glazed, of Indians, 340;
+    where found, 340 n.;
+    made by
+    Indians, 355, 361.
+
+  Prairie de Roane, 239 n.
+
+  Prairie dogs, seen by Coronado on great plains, 338.
+
+  Prentiss County, Mississippi, 212 n.
+
+  Prickly pears, 61 n., 66-67, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75-76, 77,
+        78, 80, 81, 93, 94, 96, 246.
+    _See also_ Tuna.
+
+  Primahaitu Indians, 114.
+
+  Prostitution among the Tahus, 344-345.
+
+  Puaray, settlement upon site of Tiguex, 317 n.
+
+  Pueblo Indians, 90 n., 104 n.;
+    rabbit hunts among, 98 n.;
+    ceremonials of, 384.
+
+  Pueblos, method of building, 352.
+
+  Puerto de Luna, 338 n.
+
+  Puerto Principe, town in Cuba, 142, 143, 144.
+
+  Puje, ruin of pueblo of, 340 n.
+
+
+  Quachichiles, _see_ Guachichules.
+
+  Quachita River, 238 n.
+
+  Qualla, _see_ Xualla.
+
+  Querechos Indians, mode of life of, 330;
+    description of, 362-363.
+
+  Queres, pueblos of, 327 n., 352, 358 n.
+
+  Quevenes Indians, 59, 62, 85, 87.
+
+  Quigaltam, 227;
+    cacique of, sends message to De Soto, 229;
+    arouses the latter's suspicions, 230;
+    mentioned, 235.
+
+  Quigualtam, Indians of, attack Moscoso, 255.
+
+  Quiguate, 213, 215, 216.
+    _See_ Aquiguate.
+
+  Quince juice, use of, as poison antidote, 376, 381.
+
+  Quipana, near plains, 222 n.
+
+  Quirex, province of, visited by Spaniards, 327.
+
+  Quitok Indians, 80 n., 87 n.
+
+  Quitoles Indians, 87 n.
+
+  Quivira, stories of, told by Turk, 313, 314;
+    mention of, 327;
+    departure of Coronado for, 328;
+    stories of Xabe of, 329;
+    arrival of Coronado at, 336;
+    route to, 337 n.;
+    Indians of, identified with Wichita Indians, 337 n.;
+    Coronado returns from, 341, 342;
+    description of, reference to, 362, 365, 366, 367;
+    return to, planned, 368;
+    Padilla remains in, 372, 373 n.;
+    death of Padilla at, 385;
+    route to, 378, 385.
+
+  Quizquiz, De Soto at, 202;
+    Indians of, present skins and shawls, 202;
+    direction of, 271.
+
+
+  Rabbits, on the great plains, 363;
+    skins of, used for garments, 350.
+
+  Rafts, use of, in crossing Colorado River, 304;
+    method of making, 304.
+
+  Ramirez, Fray Juan, establishes mission at Acoma, 311 n.
+
+  Ranjel, Narrative by, 130;
+    cited, 161 n., 165 n., 166 n., 167 n., 172 n., 175 n., 177 n.,
+          178 n., 185 n., 188 n., 189 n., 194 n., 215 n., 216 n.,
+          217 n., 222 n.
+
+  Rau, Charles, translator of Baegert's narrative, 346 n.
+
+  Redland, 195.
+
+  Red River, 225 n., 261 n.;
+    Moscoso at, 241 n.;
+    identification of, with Zuñi River, 299 n.
+
+  _Relación del Suceso_, 278;
+    cited, 337 n., 365 n., 367 n.
+
+  _Relación Postrera de Síbola_, 278.
+
+  Riberos, el Factor, companion of Coronado, 293.
+
+  Rio Grande, 99 n., 102, 103 n., 104 n.;
+    Indians attempt to cross, 323;
+    pueblos near, 327 n., 335 n.;
+    disappearance underground of, 341;
+    mention of, 339 n., 340 n.;
+    direction of, 359 n., 360.
+
+  Ritchey, W. E., cited, 302.
+
+  River, the, 228.
+
+  River Grande, _see_ Grande River.
+
+  Rodriguez, Men., killed at Mauilla, 193.
+
+  Rojas, Juan de, made governor's lieutenant of Cuba, 146.
+
+  Romo, Alfonso, sent in quest of habitations, 171;
+    overtakes De Soto, 172.
+
+  Ruiz, Gonçalo, death of, 49.
+
+
+  Saabedra, Fernandarias de, appointment of, 297.
+
+  Saabedra, H. de, mayor of Culiacan, 297, 371, 372.
+
+  Sacatecas, _see_ Zacatecas.
+
+  St. Clement's Point, landing of Narvaez at, 19 n.
+
+  St. Francis County, Arkansas, 205 n., 214 n.
+
+  St. Francis River, 213 n., 214 n.
+
+  St. Marks, seat of the Apalachee, 21 n., 30 n.
+
+  St. Marks Bay, 33 n., 37 n.
+
+  St. Marks River, 33 n.
+
+  Saline County, 236 n.
+
+  Saline River, 236 n.
+
+  Salt, made by Spaniards, 218, 238;
+    natural crystals of, in Arizona, 310;
+    lakes of, on great plains, 338, 362.
+
+  Salvidar, Juan de, companion of Coronado, 292;
+    explorations of, 296;
+    mentioned, 299;
+    at Tiguex, 319;
+    captures Indian village, 324;
+    escape of Indian woman from, 339.
+
+  Samaniego, Lope de, appointed army-master, 292;
+    death of, 295.
+
+  San Antonio Bay, 58 n.
+
+  San Antonio Cape, 143.
+
+  San Antonio River, 74 n.
+
+  San Bernardo River, 58 n.
+
+  Sanbenitos, described, 334 n., 347.
+
+  Sancti Spiritus, town in Cuba, 142, 144.
+
+  Sandia Mountains, 352.
+
+  San Gabriel de los Españoles, settlement of, 340 n.
+
+  San Hieronimo de los Corazones, founding of, 301;
+    dispatches from, 324;
+    disturbance in, 326;
+    transferred to Suya, 301, 326.
+
+  San Ildefonso, Tewa pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  San Juan, Tewa pueblo, 340 n., 359 n.
+
+  Sanlúcar, Bay of, 139.
+
+  Sanlúcar, muster of De Soto's forces at, 139.
+
+  San Lúcar de Barrameda, port in Spain, 3, 14 n.
+
+  San Luis, island, 57 n.
+
+  San Marcos-Guadalupe River, 74 n.
+
+  San Miguel, village, 120.
+
+  San Miguel Culiacan, 113 n.
+
+  San Pedro, river in Sonora, 371 n.
+
+  Sant Anton, Cape, westernmost point of Cuba, 18 n.
+
+  Santa Clara, Tewa pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  Santa Fé, seat of provincial government, 340 n.
+
+  Santa Maria, Rio, 105 n.
+
+  Santander River, called Rio de los Palmas, 14 n.
+
+  Santiago, use of, as war cry, 300 n., 308.
+
+  Santiago de Cuba, described by the Gentleman of Elvas, 140-141;
+    bread there made of a root, 141;
+    natural products of, 141.
+
+  Sant Miguel, strait, 37.
+
+  Santo Domingo, Narvaez reaches, 14;
+    mentioned, 19 n.
+
+  Saquechuma, burned by Indians to deceive De Soto, 196.
+
+  Savannah River, 21 n., 172 n.
+
+  Sebastian, king, 272 n.
+
+  Seminole Indians, 19 n.
+
+  Senora, _see_ Sonora.
+
+  Seri Indians, 108 n., 301 n.
+
+  Seven Cities, _see_ Cibola.
+
+  Sheep, Rocky Mountain, 305, 348.
+
+  Shongopovi, Hopi pueblo, 358 n.
+
+  Shupaulovi, Hopi pueblo, 358 n.
+
+  Sia, identification of, 327 n., 359 n.;
+    mention of, 359.
+
+  Sichomovi, Hopi pueblo, 358 n.
+
+  Sierra, dies, 49.
+
+  Sierra Madre Mountains, 106 n.
+
+  Sign language, used by Querechos, 330;
+    by plains Indians, 363, 363 n.
+
+  Silos, Pueblo de los, 356, 358 n.
+
+  Silveira, Fernando da, epigram by, 133.
+
+  Silver, reports of, at Quivira, 313, 314, 329;
+    use of, in glazing, 340, 355, 361;
+    mine of, at Culiacan, 345.
+
+  Silver Bluff, 172 n.
+
+  Sinaloa, settlement of, 347.
+
+  Sinaloa River, 113, 117 n., 346.
+
+  Sipsey River, 194 n.
+
+  Slavery, Spanish, among the Indians, 64;
+    Indian, among the Spaniards, 110, 114, 116, 312, 329, 339;
+    Indians sought by Vasco Porcallo de Figueroa, 154;
+    taken by De Soto, 160, 181, 184-185, 186, 195, 205, 206, 208,
+          209, 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 222, 223, 225, 227, 232;
+    by Moscoso, 238, 239, 242, 254;
+    five hundred men and women abandoned, 254.
+
+  Smith, Buckingham, _Relation of Alvar Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca_, cited,
+        19 n., 24 n., 25 n., 30 n., 31 n., 71 n., 79 n., 90 n., 92 n.;
+    translation of Oviedo's _Letter_, 68-70;
+    _Coleccion de varios Documentos para la Historia de la Florida_,
+          edited by, 130.
+
+  Snakes, worship of, 344.
+
+  Soacatino, guide to, furnished to Moscoso, 243;
+    Indians of, report seeing Europeans, 243;
+    Moscoso at, 244.
+
+  Sobaipuri, 349 n., 371 n.
+
+  Socorro, _see_ Aymay.
+
+  Sodomy, among Pacaxes, 345;
+    at Petlatlan, 346;
+    at Suya, 348;
+    absence of, at Cibola, 351.
+
+  Solis, Alonso de, distributor and assessor, with Narvaez, 14;
+    enters Apalachen, 28;
+    embarks in open boat, 36;
+    is drowned, 46.
+
+  Sonora, Spanish settlement in valley of, 301, 302;
+    San Hieronimo abandoned for, 301, 326;
+    description of, 347;
+    rebellion at, 370-371.
+
+  Sonora Indians, 106 n.
+
+  Sorcery, among Pacaxes, 345.
+
+  Soti, brothers, die at Aminoya, 249.
+
+  Soto, Hernando de, wishes services of Cabeza de Vaca, 8, 136;
+    Narrative of expedition of, by the Gentleman of Elvas, 127-272;
+    geographical knowledge afforded by the Narrative, 129;
+    Indian tribes described, 129;
+    places mentioned, 129;
+    parentage of, 135;
+    captain of horse in Peru, 135;
+    marries Doña Ysabel de Bobadilla, 136;
+    is made governor of Cuba, and Adelantado of Florida, 136;
+    members of his company, 136-138;
+    sails with six hundred men and seven ships, 139;
+    reaches Santiago de Cuba, 140;
+    goes to Havana by land, 143;
+    lands in Florida, 146;
+    lodges with Ucita, 147;
+    loses his Indian interpreters, 147;
+    sends vessels to Cuba for provisions, 154;
+    moves toward Cale, in search of gold, 155;
+    finds the town abandoned, 155;
+    orders all the ripe grain in the fields to be secured, 156;
+    loses three men, 156;
+    reaches Caliquen and hears of the distress that overtook Narvaez
+          at Apalache, but decides to go onward, 157;
+    takes cacique, and is attacked by Indians at Napetaca, 158;
+    divides some of the captives among his men and orders execution of
+          the rest, 160;
+    seizes a hundred Indian men and women, 160;
+    starts in search of gold, reported to be at Yupaha, 164;
+    tells the cacique of Achese that he is the child of the Sun, 167;
+    plants a cross, 167;
+    receives four hundred tamemes from the cacique of Ocute, 168;
+    leaves the province of Patofa, 169;
+    an exorcism cures his guide, 169;
+    receives seven hundred tamemes, 170;
+    suffers many privations, 171-172;
+    orders an Indian burned, 172;
+    hears speech of a kinswoman of the cacica of Cutifachiqui,
+          172-173;
+    hears speech of the cacica, 173;
+    leaves Cutifachiqui, 175;
+    takes the cacica as a slave, 176;
+    distances traversed, 177;
+    begs maize of the cacique of Chiaha, 178;
+    hears speech of cacique of that place, 178;
+    sends men to see if there is gold at Chisca, 181;
+    hears speech of cacique of Coste, 182-183;
+    and speech of cacique of Coça, 183-184;
+    rests at Coça twenty-five days, 185;
+    hears speech at Tallisi, 186-187;
+    hears speech of cacique of Tastaluça, 188;
+    distances traversed to Tastaluça, 188-189;
+    wounded in encounter with Indians at Mauilla, 191;
+    hears that Maldonado is at Ochuse, 193;
+    his losses in the Florida expedition, 194;
+    leaves Mauilla, 194;
+    reaches Chicaça and takes some Indians, 195;
+    cuts off an Indian's hands for theft, 196;
+    repulses Indians, 197-199;
+    leaves Chicaça and sustains two more attacks made by the natives,
+          199-201;
+    sets out for Quizquiz, 202;
+    crosses the Mississippi, 204;
+    hears speeches of the cacique of Casqui, 206-207;
+    preaches Christianity to the Indians, 207-208;
+    finds many shawls and skins at Pacaha, 209;
+    makes friendship between the caciques of Casqui and Pacaha, 212;
+    burns part of Aquiguate, 214;
+    takes one hundred and forty-one Indians, 215;
+    makes other captures at Coligoa, 216;
+    at Tanico, 217;
+    subdues cacique of Tulla, 218-220;
+    has now been gone three years, 221;
+    has lost two hundred and fifty men, 221;
+    winters at Autiamque, 222-224;
+    goes to Nilco, 226;
+    and thence to Guachoya, 227;
+    sends a message to cacique of Quigaltam, 229;
+    is taken ill, 230;
+    sends expedition against Nilco, 230-231;
+    farewell speech to his men, 232-233;
+    names Moscoso to be his successor, 233;
+    dies, 233;
+    and is secretly buried, 234;
+    sale of his property, 235;
+    reference to discoveries of, 313, 339, 365;
+    crosses route of Coronado, 339;
+    mentioned, 362, 366;
+    route of, 386.
+
+  Soto-Mayor, Juan de, companion of Coronado, 293.
+
+  Soto-Mayor, kills Juan Pantoja, 15 n., 63;
+    dies and is eaten by Esquivel, 63.
+
+  Soto-Mayor, Pedro de, chronicler of Cardenas' expedition, 310.
+
+  South Carolina, 176 n.
+
+  South Sea, 105, 108, 111, 238.
+    _See also_ California, Gulf of.
+
+  Staked Plains, 7, 97 n., 245 n., 361 n., 362 n.
+
+  Stevens, John, dictionary of, 300 n.
+
+  Susola Indians, 76, 80 n., 87.
+
+  Suwannee, river, crossed by Narvaez, 27 n.
+
+  Suya, _see_ Sonora.
+
+  Swain County, 176 n.
+
+
+  Tabasco, mention of, 380.
+
+  Tabu, among Indians of Malhado, 51-52.
+
+  Taguanate, cacique of, plots against Moscoso, 251;
+    comes to make excuses, 252;
+    town assaulted by Moscoso, 252-253.
+
+  Tahu Indians, a tribe in Culiacan, 344.
+
+  Tali, De Soto at, 182;
+    speech of cacique of, 182-183.
+
+  Taliepataua, 194.
+
+  Talise, nature of the country, 270.
+    _See also_ Tallise.
+
+  Talladega County, 183 n.
+
+  Tallahassee, seat of the Apalachee, 21 n.
+
+  Tallahatchie River, 200 n.
+
+  Tallapoosa County, 186.
+
+  Tallapoosa River, 186.
+
+  Tallimuchose, without inhabitants, 185.
+
+  Tallise, 186;
+    cacique of, lends forty men to De Soto, 186;
+    presents the tamemes needed, 187.
+    _See also_ Talise.
+
+  Tamemes, Indians who carry burdens, 168, 170, 176, 182, 184, 186,
+        187, 213.
+
+  Tampas Bay, reached by Narvaez, 20;
+    mentioned, 36 n., 125 n.
+
+  Tanico, De Soto at, 217.
+
+  Tanto River, 143.
+
+  Taos, identification with Braba, 340 n.;
+    visit of Spaniards to, 340;
+    Valladolid Spanish name for, 340;
+    mention of, 359.
+
+  Tapatu River, 228.
+
+  Tapile, equivalent of meirinho, 269.
+
+  Tarasca, a district in Michoacan, 286.
+
+  Tascaluça, De Soto seeks, 185;
+    cacique of, addresses De Soto, 186-187;
+    distance to Mississippi, 215;
+    nature of the country, 270;
+    direction of, 271.
+    _See also_ Tastaluça.
+
+  Tastaluça, cacique of, sends a chief to De Soto, 186-187;
+    dwelling of, 187;
+    speech to De Soto, 188;
+    is taken by De Soto, 188;
+    asks to be allowed to remain, 189;
+    at Mauilla, 189.
+    _See also_ Tascaluça.
+
+  Tatalicoya, De Soto at, 217.
+
+  Tattooing, among Indians, 348 n.
+
+  Tavera, one of Cabeza de Vaca's party, death of, 48-49.
+
+  Tejas, _see_ Teyas.
+
+  Tejo, stories told by, 285-286;
+    death of, 287.
+
+  Tellez, captain, embarks in open boat, 36;
+    repulses Indians, 39;
+    overtaken by Cabeza de Vaca, 43;
+    reported killed by the Camones, 72.
+
+  Tennessee River, 181 n., 212 n.
+
+  Teocomo, settlement of, 347.
+
+  Tepoca Indians, 108 n.
+
+  Terceira, island, 123;
+    produces batata, 141.
+
+  Ternaux-Compans, Henri, translation of Castañeda by, 277,
+        290 n., 341 n.
+
+  Tesuque, Tewa pueblo, 359 n.
+
+  Tewa Indians, pottery of, 340 n.;
+    pueblos of, 359 n.
+
+  Teyas, tribe of plains Indians, 333;
+    identification with Tejas, or Texas, 333 n.;
+    guides of Coronado to Quivira, 335, 338;
+    Cicuye besieged by, 357;
+    name of, synonymous with braves, 357;
+    mentioned, 362;
+    cannibalism among, 363 n.
+
+  Theodoro, a Greek, makes resin, 35;
+    deserts, 40.
+
+  Tietiquaquo, chief of, comes to De Soto, 223.
+
+  Tiguas, 317 n.;
+    pueblos of, 358 n.
+
+  Tiguex, visited by Alvarado, 312;
+    identification of, 317 n.;
+    demands of Spaniards at, 318;
+    revolt of Indians of, 319;
+    Indians of, distrust Spaniards, 321, 328;
+    siege of, 322;
+    description of, 352;
+    pueblos of, 358.
+
+  Timucuan Indians, 19 n., 25 n.
+
+  Timuquanan or Timucuan Indians, 19 n., 25 n.
+
+  Tishomingo County, Mississippi, 212 n.
+
+  Tison, Rio del, reason for name of, 301.
+    _See_ Colorado River.
+
+  Toalli, De Soto at, 165, 166;
+    houses made of grass, 165.
+
+  Toasi, 185 n.;
+    De Soto at, 186.
+
+  Tobar, Nuño de, at court, 135;
+    accompanies De Soto, 137;
+    is deprived of his rank as captain-general, 145;
+    leaves his wife at Havana, 146;
+    sent against Nilco, 231.
+
+  Tobosos Indians, 103 n.
+
+  Tocaste, town, 155 n.
+
+  Tombigbee River, 189 n., 194 n., 195 n.
+
+  Tomson, Robert, cited, 334 n.
+
+  Tonala, settlement of, 287.
+
+  Tonkawa Indians, Texas tribe, 363 n.
+
+  Topia or Tapira in Durango, 290 n.
+
+  Topira, expedition of Coronado to, 290.
+
+  Torre, Diego Perez de la, replaces Guzman, 287.
+
+  Torrejon de Velasco, death of Guzman at, 285 n.
+
+  Tovar, Fernando de, position of, 292.
+
+  Tovar, Pedro de, appointed ensign-general, 292;
+    visits Tusayan, 307;
+    sent to San Hieronimo, 326;
+    joins Coronado at Tiguex, 367.
+
+  _Traslado de las Nuevas_, 278.
+
+  Travois, dog saddles used by plains Indians, 362.
+
+  Trees, near Apalachen, 29;
+    of Santiago de Cuba, 140-141;
+    named by Gentleman of Elvas, 206.
+
+  Trigeux, _see_ Tiguex.
+
+  Trinidad, storm at, 15-17;
+    town in Cuba, 144, 145.
+
+  Truxillo, adventure of, 298.
+
+  Tuasi, _see_ Toasi.
+
+  Tuckaseegee River, 176 n.
+
+  Tula, direction of, 271.
+
+  Tulla, De Soto's encounter with Indians at, 218-219;
+    cacique of, offers presents, 220;
+    is dismissed, 221.
+
+  Tuna, native American fruit, 347;
+    preserves made from, by Indians, 305 n., 348.
+
+  Tunica County, Mississippi, 204 n.
+
+  Turk, Indian slave at Pecos, 313, 372;
+    stories of, 314;
+    bracelets of, 315;
+    mentioned, 326, 329, 330, 331;
+    Spaniards grow suspicious of, 328, 334;
+    put in chains, 335;
+    motive of, in misleading Spaniards, 336-337.
+
+  Turkeys in pueblo regions, 354.
+
+  Turquoises, presented to Cabeza de Vaca, 106,117;
+    found at Waco, 246;
+    collected by Estevanico, 288, 289:
+    how obtained by Indians, 308 n.;
+    gifts of, made by Indians, 308, 312;
+    of pueblo Indians, 350.
+
+  Tusayan, description of, by Zuñi Indians, 307;
+    visited by Tovar, 307;
+    cotton cultivated at, 308 n.;
+    description of, 351;
+    names of pueblos of, 358 n.
+
+  Tutahaco, visit of Coronado to, 314;
+    problem of name of, 314 n.;
+    eight pueblos of, 358.
+
+  Tutelpinco, De Soto at, 225.
+
+  Tyronza River, 206 n., 208 n.
+
+
+  Ucita, an Indian chief, 146 n.;
+    town of, 146, 147;
+    temple thrown down, 147.
+
+  Uitachuco, burned by Indians, 161.
+
+  Ullibahali, chiefs of, approach De Soto, 185;
+    a fenced town, 185;
+    cacique of, offers tamemes to De Soto, 186.
+
+  Union County, Mississippi, 200 n.
+
+  Upanguayma Indians, 108.
+
+  "Upper Cross Timbers," 244 n.
+
+  Urine, use of, as a mordant, 354 n.
+
+  Urrea, Lope de, companion of Coronado, 293;
+    envoy of peace to Indians, 323.
+
+  Utinama, town, 156.
+
+  Uzachil, much food found at, 160.
+
+  Uzachil, cacique of, sends embassy to De Soto, 158;
+    presents him with deer, 160.
+
+  Uzela, De Soto at, 161.
+
+
+  Vaca, Cabeza de, _see_ Cabeza de Vaca.
+
+  Vacapan, province crossed by Coronado, 305.
+
+  Vacas, Rio de las, 103 n.
+
+  Valdevieso, killed by Indians, 58, 64;
+    mentioned by Oviedo, 69.
+
+  Valençuela, captain, ordered by Narvaez to follow river to
+        the sea, 26.
+
+  Valladolid, Spanish name of Braba, 340, 359.
+
+  Valley of Knaves, rebellion of Indians in, 326.
+
+  Vargas, Juan de, killed by Indians, 257.
+
+  Vargas, Luis Ramierez de, companion of Coronado, 293.
+
+  Vasconcelos, André de, of Elvas, 137, 138;
+    commands a ship in De Soto's expedition, 139;
+    slave of, espouses cacica of Cutifachiqui, 177;
+    dies at Aminoya, 249.
+
+  Vasconyados Indians, 115 n.
+
+  Vazquez, Juan, killed at Mauilla, 193.
+
+  Vazquez de Ayllon, Lucas, 21 n.
+
+  Vega, Garcilaso de la, "the Inca," author of _Florida del
+        Yunca_, 131;
+    gives distance of Moscoso's journey down the Mississippi, 259 n.
+
+  Vegetation of the great plains, 362.
+
+  Velasco, island, possibly to be identified with Malhado, 57 n.
+
+  Velazquez, Juan, first man of Narvaez' exploring party to be
+        lost, 27;
+    his horse affords supper to many, 27.
+
+  Venison, a thing little known, 74.
+
+  Vera, Francisco de, father of Nuñez Cabeza de Vaca, 3, 125.
+
+  Vera, Pedro de, conqueror of the Canaries, grandfather of Nuñez
+        Cabeza de Vaca, 3, 13 n., 125.
+
+  Vera Cruz, Cabeza de Vaca at, 121;
+    mentioned, 265 n., 268.
+
+  Vessels, built by men under Narvaez, 34-36;
+    by Spaniards at Aminoya, 250.
+
+  Vicksburg Bluffs, 255 n.
+
+  Villafarta, named by De Soto, 157.
+
+  Villalobos, R. L. de, voyage of, 360, 360 n., 378.
+
+  Virgins, treatment of, 355, 356.
+
+  Voth, H. R., studies on Oraibi marriage customs, 353 n.
+
+
+  Waco, Moscoso at, 244 n., 245;
+    turquoises and shawls of cotton found at, 246.
+
+  Walnut Bend suggested as the place of De Soto's crossing the
+        Mississippi, 204 n.
+
+  Walnuts, found by Coronado, 334.
+
+  Walpi, Hopi pueblo, 358 n.
+
+  Watercress, native American, 349.
+
+  Whiskers, captain of Cicuye Indians, 310, 312;
+    taken prisoner by Alvarado, 315;
+    release of, 329.
+
+  White Oak shoals, Red River, 242 n.
+
+  White River, 216 n., 217 n., 253 n.
+
+  Wichita Indians, identified with Indians of Quivira, 337 n.
+
+  Wildcat, native American, 349, 350.
+
+  Wine, of pitahaya, 348.
+
+  Winship, George Parker, memoirs on the Coronado expedition, 276-277,
+        337 n., 341 n., 360 n., 366 n., 374 n., 386 n.
+
+  Witchcraft practised by Pacaxes, 345.
+
+  Withlacoochee River crossed by Narvaez, 25 n.
+
+  Wolves on great plains, 363.
+
+  Women, work of, in pueblo building, 352;
+    functions of, 353.
+
+  Woodruff County, Arkansas, 216 n.
+
+
+  Xabe, Indian from Quivira, with Coronado, 329, 342.
+
+  Xagua, _see_ Jagua.
+
+  Xalisco, establishment of, 287;
+    Alarcon's destination at, 294.
+
+  Xeréz de Badajóz, 135.
+
+  Xeréz de la Frontera, 126.
+
+  Ximena, _see_ Galisteo.
+
+  Xuala, direction of, 271.
+
+  Xualla, mentioned, 176 n., 177;
+    distance to Tastaluça, 188;
+    distance to Coça, 189.
+
+  Xuarez, Juan, commissary of Narvaez' fleet, 14;
+    burns cases containing dead men, 21;
+    approves the plan for Spanish to continue inland exploration, 23;
+    joins inland march, 25;
+    one of party that goes to look for the sea, 33.
+
+
+  Yaqui Indians, 118 n., 346 n.
+
+  Yaqui River, 376 n.
+
+  Yaquimi, settlement of, 347.
+
+  Yeguaces Indians, 87 n.
+
+  Yguases Indians, _see_ Yguazes Indians.
+
+  Yguazes Indians, 61, 87;
+    manners and customs of, 65-66;
+    marriage among, 65.
+
+  Young County, Texas, 244 n.
+
+  Ysabel de Bobadilla, wife of Hernando de Soto, 136;
+    receives a waiting-maid from the governor of Gomera, 140;
+    and a mule from a gentleman of Santiago de Cuba, 140;
+    sails for Havana, 142;
+    is in much danger, 143;
+    remains in Havana, 145;
+    receives twenty women, sent by Añasco, 162;
+    has not heard from De Soto in three years, 221.
+
+  Ysopete, Indian of Quivira, with Coronado, 331;
+    supplants Turk in confidence of Coronado, 334, 337.
+
+  Ytara, town, 156, 162.
+
+  Ytaua, De Soto at, 185.
+
+  Yukiwingge, visited by Barrionuevo, 340;
+    location of, 340 n.;
+    pueblos of, 359 n.
+
+  Yuma Indians, description of, 303.
+
+  Yupaha, governed by a woman, 164;
+    reported to have much gold, 164.
+
+  Yuqueyunque, _see_ Yukiwingge.
+
+
+  Zacatecas, Mexican province, 385.
+
+  Zamora, printing press at, 126.
+
+  Zebreros, an alcalde, acts as guide to Cabeza de Vaca, 115;
+    goes to Culiacan, 116.
+
+  Zuñi Indians, pueblos of, 300, 358 n.;
+    pottery of, 340 n.;
+    tame eagles of, 348 n.;
+    dress of women of, 350 n.;
+    population of pueblos of, 351 n.
+    _See also_ Cibola.
+
+  Zuñi River, crossed by Coronado, 299.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Transcriber's note:
+
+Text enclosed by underscores is in italics (_italics_).
+
+Small capital text has been replaced with all capitals.
+
+Variations in spelling, punctuation and hyphenation have been
+retained except in obvious cases of typographical error, and in the
+following cases: Castaneda has been changed to Castañeda and Relacion
+to Relación.
+
+The cover for the eBook version of this book was created by the
+transcriber and is placed in the public domain.
+
+Page 71: N[)a]dáko indicates breve over "a".
+
+In the index for Mesa, "Spanish soldier", the transcriber has
+changed the page number 538 to 376.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Original Narratives of Early American
+History, by Vaca and Others
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 42841 ***